HUAWEI

GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software User Manual - Volume I V200R001

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software User Manual

Volume Manual Version Product Version BOM Volume I T2-030191-20060511-C-2.01 V200R001 31015891

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd., Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China Postal Code: 518129 Website: http://www.huawei.com Email: [email protected]

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Copyright 2006 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET,

, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800, TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN, HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye, Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, and TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Summary of Updates
This section provides the update history of this manual and introduces the contents of subsequent updates.

Update History
Manual Version T2-030183-20050205-C-1.10 T2-030192-20051020-C-2.00 T2-030192-20060511-C-2.02 Notes Initial commercial release

Updates of Contents
None.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

About This Manual

Release Notes
The product version of this manual is GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software V200R001.

Organization
The manual introduces the functions and features of the U-Net. It also introduces how to manage the radio data and the geographical data, and how to use the U-Net to plan the network between different technologies, including the early network dimension. The manual comprises two volumes (totally 16 chapters and one appendix). The contents of this part are approximately as follows: Chapter 1 Getting Started introduces the main functions and features of the U-Net, including the install and running environment. Chapter 2 Working Environment introduces the operations of the U-Net interface, including: menu, window, map and browser. At the time, it also introduces the management of the data list, such as, filter, group and sort. Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data introduces the U-Net supported map types and the operations on the map, such as, create, import, export, delete and so on. Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data introduces the management of the network data, including the data of site, TRX, antenna and other equipment. Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net introduces the calculation of regular analysis and guides the reader how to implement regular analysis, such as coverage analysis and point analysis. It also introduces the seven propagation models and their usage. Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management introduces the use of the U-Net in the GSM and GPRS project, including managing and distributing the radio network resource, managing the traffic data, network dimension and prediction analysis. Chapter 7 GSM/TDMA AFP Module introduces the frequency planning function of the U-Net. It introduces the user interface of frequency planning, including automatic frequency planning and manual frequency planning.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Intended Audience
The manual is intended for the following readers: Technical marketing specialists Operation & maintenance personnel Telecommunication administration staff

Conventions
The manual uses the following conventions:

I. General conventions
Convention Arial Arial Narrow Description Normal paragraphs are in Arial. Warnings, cautions, notes, table text and tips are in Arial Narrow.

II. Command conventions

Convention Boldface [] # Description The keywords of a command line are in Boldface. Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional. A line starting with the # sign is comments.

III. GUI conventions

Convention <> Description Button names are inside angle brackets. For example, click the <OK> button. Window names, menu items, data table and field names are inside square brackets. For example, pop up the [New User] window. Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes. For example, [File/Create/Folder].

[]

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

IV. Mouse operation

Action Click Double-Click Description Press the left button or right button quickly (left button by default). Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer.

V. Symbols
Eye-catching symbols are also used in the manual to highlight the points worthy of special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:

Caution, Warning, Danger: Means reader be extremely careful during the operation. Note, Comment, Tip, Knowhow, Thought: Means a complementary description.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Getting Started............................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1 Introduction to the U-Net.................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Installing and Uninstalling the U-Net.................................................................................. 1-3 1.2.1 System Requirements............................................................................................. 1-3 1.2.2 What's Installed on the U-Net ................................................................................. 1-4 1.2.3 Installing the U-Net.................................................................................................. 1-4 1.2.4 Uninstalling the U-Net ............................................................................................. 1-6 1.2.5 Installing the Distributed Computing Server............................................................ 1-6 1.2.6 Uninstalling the Distributed Computing Server ....................................................... 1-7 1.2.7 Troubleshooting after Installation ............................................................................ 1-8 1.3 Getting Help ....................................................................................................................... 1-9 1.3.1 Getting Help from Menu .......................................................................................... 1-9 1.3.2 Technical Support ................................................................................................. 1-10 1.4 Running Project Templates.............................................................................................. 1-11 1.4.1 Starting a New Project .......................................................................................... 1-11 1.4.2 Templates Provided .............................................................................................. 1-11 1.4.3 Creating Your Own Template................................................................................ 1-13 1.4.4 Building a Project Step by Step............................................................................. 1-15 Chapter 2 Working Environment ................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 2-1 2.2 Working with Menus and Windows.................................................................................... 2-2 2.2.1 Working with Document Windows........................................................................... 2-2 2.2.2 Working with Docking or Floating Windows............................................................ 2-3 2.2.3 Printing the Active Window ..................................................................................... 2-4 2.3 Working with Maps............................................................................................................. 2-4 2.3.1 Zooming and Panning ............................................................................................. 2-4 2.3.2 Using the Panoramic Window ................................................................................. 2-6 2.3.3 Centering Displayed Objects in the Map Window................................................... 2-7 2.3.4 Choosing a Scale .................................................................................................... 2-7 2.3.5 Defining Visibility Ranges on Objects ..................................................................... 2-8 2.3.6 Displaying Rulers Around the Map.......................................................................... 2-8 2.3.7 Point-to-Point Analysis ............................................................................................ 2-9 2.3.8 Getting Distances on the Map............................................................................... 2-10 2.3.9 Displayed Cursors ................................................................................................. 2-10 2.3.10 Printing a Map ..................................................................................................... 2-13 2.3.11 Exporting Maps to External Files ........................................................................ 2-15 2.3.12 Exporting Maps to Other Applications................................................................. 2-16
Huawei Technologies Proprietary i

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Table of Contents

2.4 Working with the Explorer................................................................................................ 2-18 2.4.1 Renaming an Object ............................................................................................. 2-19 2.4.2 Displaying the Object Properties........................................................................... 2-20 2.4.3 Deleting an Object................................................................................................. 2-20 2.4.4 Managing Object Visibility ..................................................................................... 2-21 2.5 Working with Data Tables................................................................................................ 2-22 2.5.1 Accessing Data Tables ......................................................................................... 2-22 2.5.2 Managing Content in Tables ................................................................................. 2-23 2.5.3 Editing Contents in Tables .................................................................................... 2-24 2.5.4 Opening Dialogs from Tables................................................................................ 2-25 2.5.5 Managing Table Display........................................................................................ 2-25 2.5.6 Copying and Pasting Cells in Tables .................................................................... 2-29 2.5.7 Exporting Tables in External Files......................................................................... 2-31 2.5.8 Importing Tables from External Files .................................................................... 2-33 2.5.9 Printing Data Tables.............................................................................................. 2-35 2.6 Filtering/Grouping/Sorting Data ....................................................................................... 2-35 2.6.1 Sorting and Filtering in Tables .............................................................................. 2-35 2.6.2 Examples of Filtering in Tables ............................................................................. 2-37 2.6.3 Filtering Radio Data .............................................................................................. 2-39 2.6.4 Advanced Filtering: Example ................................................................................ 2-40 2.6.5 Advanced Filtering: Counter Example 1 ............................................................... 2-41 2.6.6 Advanced Filtering: Counter Example 2 ............................................................... 2-42 2.6.7 Sorting a Folder..................................................................................................... 2-42 2.6.8 Arranging Items in Groups .................................................................................... 2-43 2.6.9 Examples of Grouping........................................................................................... 2-44 2.6.10 Using a Group by/Sort/Filter Configuration ......................................................... 2-46 2.6.11 Creating Subfolders ............................................................................................ 2-47 2.6.12 Reorganizing Data after Modifications ................................................................ 2-47 2.6.13 Filtering Data in a Polygon .................................................................................. 2-48 2.6.14 Removing the Polygon Filter ............................................................................... 2-50 2.7 Managing Display in the U-Net ........................................................................................ 2-50 2.7.1 Defining the Display Properties of Any Item Folder .............................................. 2-51 2.7.2 Managing and Displaying Legends ....................................................................... 2-52 2.7.3 Thresholds, Colors and Legends .......................................................................... 2-53 2.7.4 Displaying Object Labels on the Map.................................................................... 2-54 2.7.5 Using Tool Tips to Get Information ....................................................................... 2-55 2.8 Using Handy Tools........................................................................................................... 2-55 2.8.1 Using the Undo/Redo Command .......................................................................... 2-56 2.8.2 Refreshing Maps and Folders ............................................................................... 2-56 2.8.3 Setting up a Document to Be Printed.................................................................... 2-57 2.8.4 Locating Any Point on the Map ............................................................................. 2-57 2.8.5 Locating Any Site on the Map ............................................................................... 2-58
Huawei Technologies Proprietary ii

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Table of Contents

2.8.6 Locating any Vector on the Map ........................................................................... 2-61 2.8.7 Synchronizing Vector Selection and Data Table................................................... 2-62 2.8.8 Using the Status Bar to Get Information ............................................................... 2-62 2.8.9 Using Icons from the Tool Bar............................................................................... 2-63 2.8.10 Using Shortcuts in the U-Net............................................................................... 2-66 2.8.11 Scrolling Between Property Dialogs.................................................................... 2-68 Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data ........................................................................................ 3-1 3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 3-1 3.2 Geo Data Type Supported................................................................................................. 3-2 3.3 Length/Height/Offset Units and Coordinate Systems ........................................................ 3-5 3.3.1 Setting Default Length/Height/Offset Units ............................................................. 3-6 3.3.2 Basic Concepts in Coordinate System.................................................................... 3-6 3.3.3 Defining the Projection Coordinate System ............................................................ 3-8 3.3.4 Defining the Display Coordinate System ................................................................ 3-9 3.3.5 Selecting Degrees Display Format........................................................................ 3-10 3.3.6 Creating Your Own Coordinate System................................................................ 3-10 3.4 Supported Geo Data Formats.......................................................................................... 3-12 3.4.1 BIL Data Format .................................................................................................... 3-16 3.4.2 TIFF Data Format.................................................................................................. 3-17 3.4.3 DXF Data Format .................................................................................................. 3-18 3.4.4 SHP Data Format.................................................................................................. 3-19 3.4.5 MIF Data Format ................................................................................................... 3-19 3.4.6 Erdas Imagine Data Format .................................................................................. 3-19 3.4.7 ECW Data Format ................................................................................................. 3-20 3.4.8 Other Supported Formats ..................................................................................... 3-21 3.5 Managing Clutter Classes................................................................................................ 3-21 3.5.1 Importing a Clutter Class File................................................................................ 3-22 3.5.2 Optimizing the Loading of Clutter Class Files ....................................................... 3-22 3.5.3 Description of MNU Files ...................................................................................... 3-23 3.5.4 Managing the Clutter Classes ............................................................................... 3-23 3.5.5 Adding a Clutter Class .......................................................................................... 3-28 3.5.6 Displaying Statistics on Clutter Classes................................................................ 3-28 3.6 Managing Clutter Heights ................................................................................................ 3-29 3.6.1 Importing a Clutter Height File .............................................................................. 3-29 3.6.2 Managing Clutter Height Maps.............................................................................. 3-30 3.7 Managing DTM Maps ...................................................................................................... 3-32 3.7.1 Importing a DTM Map ........................................................................................... 3-32 3.7.2 Managing DTM Maps............................................................................................ 3-33 3.8 Managing Vector Maps.................................................................................................... 3-34 3.8.1 Importing a Vector File .......................................................................................... 3-34 3.8.2 Managing Vector Objects...................................................................................... 3-35 3.8.3 Displaying Vector Layers Over Predictions........................................................... 3-37
Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Table of Contents

3.9 Managing Scanned Images ............................................................................................. 3-37 3.9.1 Importing Scanned Images ................................................................................... 3-37 3.9.2 Managing Scanned Images .................................................................................. 3-38 3.10 Managing Population Maps ........................................................................................... 3-39 3.10.1 Importing a Population Map ................................................................................ 3-40 3.10.2 Managing Population Maps................................................................................. 3-41 3.10.3 Displaying Statistics on Population ..................................................................... 3-42 3.10.4 Using Population Data in Prediction Reports...................................................... 3-43 3.11 Managing Generic Maps................................................................................................ 3-43 3.11.1 Creating an Advanced Geo Data Folder............................................................. 3-44 3.11.2 Managing Generic Maps ..................................................................................... 3-46 3.11.3 Displaying Statistics on Generic Data................................................................. 3-47 3.11.4 Using Generic Map Data in Prediction Reports .................................................. 3-47 3.12 Managing Geo Data Files and Folders.......................................................................... 3-48 3.12.1 Embedding - Linking Comparison ....................................................................... 3-48 3.12.2 Embedding Geographic Data.............................................................................. 3-49 3.12.3 Repairing a Broken Link...................................................................................... 3-51 3.12.4 Grouping Geo Data Files in Display Folder ........................................................ 3-53 3.12.5 Checking the Map Geocoding............................................................................. 3-54 3.12.6 Setting Geo Data Priority .................................................................................... 3-56 3.13 Editing Geographic Data................................................................................................ 3-58 3.13.1 Raster Objects..................................................................................................... 3-58 3.13.2 Vector Objects..................................................................................................... 3-62 3.14 Managing Geographic Data Export ............................................................................... 3-69 3.14.1 Exporting a Clutter Class Map ............................................................................ 3-69 3.14.2 Saving the Edited Raster Polygons..................................................................... 3-70 3.14.3 Exporting a Clutter Height map ........................................................................... 3-73 3.14.4 Exporting a DTM map ......................................................................................... 3-74 3.14.5 Exporting a Vector Object ................................................................................... 3-76 Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data................................................................................... 4-1 4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 4-1 4.2 Setting Default Radio Units................................................................................................ 4-1 4.3 Sites ................................................................................................................................... 4-2 4.3.1 Site Properties......................................................................................................... 4-2 4.3.2 Site Lists................................................................................................................ 4-12 4.4 Antennas.......................................................................................................................... 4-16 4.4.1 Importing 3D Antenna Patterns............................................................................. 4-17 4.4.2 Creating an Antenna ............................................................................................. 4-17 4.4.3 Importing 3D Antenna Patterns............................................................................. 4-20 4.4.4 Managing the Antenna Properties......................................................................... 4-20 4.4.5 Copying Antenna Patterns to the Clipboard.......................................................... 4-23 4.4.6 Printing Antenna Patterns ..................................................................................... 4-24
Huawei Technologies Proprietary iv

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Table of Contents

4.5 Transmitters ..................................................................................................................... 4-24 4.5.1 Transmitters Properties......................................................................................... 4-25 4.5.2 Station Templates ................................................................................................. 4-36 4.6 Repeaters ........................................................................................................................ 4-43 4.6.1 Managing Repeater Equipment ............................................................................ 4-44 4.6.2 Creating a Repeater.............................................................................................. 4-45 4.6.3 Managing Repeater Properties ............................................................................. 4-46 4.6.4 Updating Repeater Parameters ............................................................................ 4-50 4.6.5 Using Repeaters in Calculations ........................................................................... 4-50 4.6.6 Installing a Remote Antenna ................................................................................. 4-52 4.7 Radio Equipment ............................................................................................................. 4-52 4.7.1 Managing TMA Equipment.................................................................................... 4-53 4.7.2 Managing Feeder Equipment................................................................................ 4-54 4.7.3 Managing BTS Equipment .................................................................................... 4-54 4.7.4 Assigning Radio Equipment to Transmitter........................................................... 4-55 4.7.5 Using Equipment to Compute Transmitter Losses ............................................... 4-57 Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net ....................................................................... 5-1 5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 5-1 5.2 Computing in Polygonal Areas .......................................................................................... 5-2 5.2.1 Effects ..................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2.2 Drawing a Computation or Focus Zone .................................................................. 5-5 5.2.3 Creating a Computation/Focus Zone from Polygons .............................................. 5-7 5.2.4 Importing the Computation or Focus Zone from a File ........................................... 5-7 5.2.5 Exporting the Computation/Focus Zone to a File.................................................... 5-8 5.2.6 Deleting the Computation or Focus Zone ............................................................... 5-9 5.2.7 Resizing the Computation or Focus Zone............................................................... 5-9 5.2.8 Moving a Point of the Computation or Focus Zone................................................. 5-9 5.2.9 Adding a Point in the Computation/Focus Zone ................................................... 5-10 5.2.10 Removing a Point in the Computation/Focus Zone ............................................ 5-10 5.2.11 Displaying the Computation or Focus Zone Size................................................ 5-10 5.2.12 Displaying the Computation or Focus Zone Coordinates ................................... 5-11 5.3 Propagation Models......................................................................................................... 5-11 5.3.1 Propagation Model General Information ............................................................... 5-13 5.3.2 Working with Longley-Rice Model......................................................................... 5-18 5.3.3 Working with ITU 526-5 Model.............................................................................. 5-19 5.3.4 Working with ITU 370-7 Model (Vienna 93) .......................................................... 5-20 5.3.5 Working with WLL (Wireless Local Loop) Model .................................................. 5-21 5.3.6 Working with Okumura-Hata Model ...................................................................... 5-23 5.3.7 Working with Cost-Hata Model.............................................................................. 5-27 5.3.8 Working with ITU 529-3 Model.............................................................................. 5-31 5.3.9 Working with Standard Propagation Model........................................................... 5-35 5.3.10 Working with Standard Propagation Model: Recommendations ........................ 5-38
Huawei Technologies Proprietary v

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Table of Contents

5.3.11 Working with the Microwave Propagation Model ................................................ 5-50 5.4 Tuning Reception Parameters ......................................................................................... 5-56 5.4.1 Setting the Receiver Properties ............................................................................ 5-57 5.4.2 Computing Shadowing Margins ............................................................................ 5-59 5.4.3 Using Cell Edge Coverage Probability in Predictions ........................................... 5-61 5.5 Coverage Studies ............................................................................................................ 5-62 5.5.1 Coverage Prediction General Settings.................................................................. 5-63 5.5.2 Prediction Study Templates .................................................................................. 5-78 5.5.3 Path Loss Management ........................................................................................ 5-82 5.6 Prediction Studies Comparisons...................................................................................... 5-91 5.7 Point Analysis Predictions ............................................................................................... 5-94 5.7.1 Displaying Point Analysis Results ......................................................................... 5-95 5.7.2 Managing Point Analysis..................................................................................... 5-100 5.8 Calculation Tools in the U-Net ....................................................................................... 5-104 5.8.1 U-Net Features for Computing ............................................................................ 5-104 5.8.2 Distributing Calculations on Several PCs ........................................................... 5-105 5.8.3 Improving Calculation Performances .................................................................. 5-106 5.8.4 Displaying Calculation Events in a Log Window ................................................. 5-107 5.8.5 Exporting Calculation Events in a Log File ......................................................... 5-108 Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management ........................................................ 6-1 6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 6-1 6.2 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects Protocol ................................................................................ 6-2 6.3 Defining GSM/GPRS/EDGE Resources............................................................................ 6-4 6.3.1 Frequencies............................................................................................................. 6-5 6.3.2 HSNs ....................................................................................................................... 6-8 6.3.3 BSICs ...................................................................................................................... 6-9 6.4 Managing GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio Data ...................................................................... 6-12 6.4.1 HCS Layers ........................................................................................................... 6-13 6.4.2 Timeslot Configurations ........................................................................................ 6-15 6.4.3 Cell Types ............................................................................................................. 6-16 6.4.4 Subcells................................................................................................................. 6-26 6.4.5 TRX Equipment ..................................................................................................... 6-32 6.4.6 Codec Equipment.................................................................................................. 6-35 6.4.7 GPRS/EDGE Equipment....................................................................................... 6-41 6.5 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Management ......................................................................... 6-47 6.5.1 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Multi-service Traffic Data....................................................... 6-48 6.5.2 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Multi-service Traffic Cartography .......................................... 6-65 6.5.3 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Analysis ...................................................................... 6-86 6.6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network Dimensioning ..................................................................... 6-89 6.6.1 Setting GSM/GPRS/EDGE Dimensioning Models................................................ 6-90 6.6.2 Key Performance Indicators: Definitions............................................................... 6-91 6.6.3 Dimensioning GSM/GPRS/EDGE Transmitters.................................................... 6-93
Huawei Technologies Proprietary vi

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Table of Contents

6.6.4 Dimensioning Outputs in GSM/GPRS/EDGE ....................................................... 6-94 6.6.5 Steps of the Dimensioning Process in GSM/GPRS/EDGE .................................. 6-97 6.7 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Resources Allocation ....................................................................... 6-98 6.7.1 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Neighbors .............................................................................. 6-99 6.7.2 Allocating GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Resources Manually in the U-Net .................... 6-118 6.7.3 Interference Matrices .......................................................................................... 6-125 6.7.4 Managing Exceptional Separations for Frequency Allocation ............................ 6-129 6.7.5 Using an AFP to Allocate Resources in the U-Net.............................................. 6-133 6.7.6 Frequency Plan Analysis..................................................................................... 6-147 6.8 Specific GSM/GPRS/EDGE Prediction Studies ............................................................ 6-154 6.8.1 Setting Specific Coverage Conditions in GSM/GPRS/EDGE Studies ................ 6-154 6.8.2 Studying Interfered Zone Predictions.................................................................. 6-158 6.8.3 Computing a Coverage Study by C/I Level......................................................... 6-160 6.8.4 Studying Interferences with the Point Analysis ................................................... 6-162 6.8.5 Studying Interferences within a Transmitter Pair ................................................ 6-166 6.8.6 Creating a Coverage by GPRS/EDGE Coding Schemes ................................... 6-167 6.8.7 Computing a Coverage by GPRS/EDGE Rate per Timeslot .............................. 6-169 6.8.8 Calculating GSM Circuit Quality Indicators ......................................................... 6-171 Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module ....................................................................................................... 7-1 7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 7-1 7.2 Managing the U-Net AFP Module...................................................................................... 7-1 7.2.1 Accessing the U-Net AFP Properties ...................................................................... 7-2 7.2.2 Defining the AFP Parameters ................................................................................. 7-3 7.2.3 Defining the AFP Allocation Strategies ................................................................... 7-9 7.3 U-Net AFP Module GUI ................................................................................................... 7-14 7.3.1 U-Net AFP Cost Tab ............................................................................................. 7-15 7.3.2 U-Net AFP Separation Weights Tab ..................................................................... 7-17 7.3.3 U-Net AFP Spectrum Tab ..................................................................................... 7-18 7.3.4 U-Net AFP HSN Tab ............................................................................................. 7-19 7.3.5 U-Net AFP MAL Tab ............................................................................................. 7-20 7.3.6 U-Net AFP MAIO Tab ........................................................................................... 7-21 7.3.7 U-Net AFP BSIC Tab ............................................................................................ 7-22 7.3.8 U-Net AFP Advanced Tab..................................................................................... 7-23 Index ................................................................................................................................................ i-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary vii

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Chapter 1 Getting Started

1.1 Introduction to the U-Net
The U-Net is a comprehensive windows-based multi-technology and user-friendly radio-planning environment that supports wireless telecom operators during the whole network lifetime, from initial design to densification and optimization. More than an engineering tool, the U-Net is an open, scalable and flexible technical information system that integrates easily with other IT systems, increases productivity and shortens lead times. The U-Net supports a full range of implementation scenarios, from stand-alone to enterprise-wide server-based configurations that uses distributed and parallel computing. Table 1-1 lists the highlights of the U-Net. Table 1-1 Highlights of the U-Net Highlight Description Refers to the following: High-performance propagation calculation engine Multi-layered and hierarchical networks supported Traffic modeling Automatic frequency Code planning Network optimization Advanced network design features Supports the following technologies: GSM/GPRS/EDGE CDMA IS-95 WCDMA/UMTS/HSDPA CDMA2000 technologies Performs the planning of integrated multi-technology network (GSM/UMTS, GSM/GPRS, and CDMA/CDMA2000).
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-1

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Highlight

Description Multi-user environments through an innovative database architecture that provides data sharing Data integrity management

Open and flexible architecture

Easy integration with other IT systems Integration of 3rd party or proprietary modules (propagation models and automatic frequency planning) through a set of programming interfaces (Application Programming Interface) Add-ins and macros Support the following to dramatically reduce prediction and simulation times and get the most out of your hardware: Distribution workstations Parallel computing on multi-processor servers Both multi-format and multi-resolution geographic data Integration with Geographic Interface System (GIS) of calculations over multiple

Distributed and parallel computing

State-of-the-art GIS features

tools Large, dense urban, and country-wide databases interactively with multiple layers including engineering and prediction studies. Integrated raster and vector editor

The U-Net consists of a main module to which you can add optional modules such as the following: UMTS module (allowing CDMA/CDMA2000 projects) dedicated to

WCDMA/UMTS HSDPA network analysis and planning, Measurements module which allows the importation and management of concrete CW measurement or test mobile data paths Automatic Frequency Planning module for the optimization of GSM/GPRS/EDGE frequency plans Microwave planning module. This module allows the user to plan and analyze microwave links.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-2

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 1 Getting Started

1.2 Installing and Uninstalling the U-Net

This section describes the following: System Requirements What's Installed on the U-Net Installing the U-Net Uninstalling the U-Net Installing the Distributed Computing Server Uninstalling the Distributed Computing Server Troubleshooting after Installation

1.2.1 System Requirements

The U-Net runs on Windows XP. Table 1-2 lists the minimum and recommended configurations for the workstation. Table 1-2 Minimum and recommended configurations Hardware/Software CPU RAM Minimum Intel Pentium III 256 MB Recommended Intel Pentium IV or XEON 512 MB

2 GB free hard disk space Hard disk space (or more according to the used geographic database) Graphics 1280 x 1024 with 64000 colors Microsoft Windows NT 4.0. SP5, 2000 SP4 or XP SP1 (SP2 supported) Microsoft Office 2000 or XP 1 Parallel port (25 pins) or 1 USB port (Windows 2000/XP) required to plug in the Superpro hardware key

Operating system

Additional software

Port

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-3

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Note: The CPU usage is optimized when the U-Net is started using an application server with Citrix metaframe. Nevertheless, the RAM required per user remains the same. So, in case of an application server dedicated to n users, each user will require at least 256 MB of RAM, meaning a total of n 256 MB.

1.2.2 What's Installed on the U-Net

During the U-Net installation, other components may also have been added from the executable files com32upd and dcom95 (both designed for Windows 95 - not recommended). Furthermore, the U-Net must be installed with an appropriate version of Microsoft Data Access Components (MDAC - to work with databases). The recommended version is 2.7. This can be downloaded from the support site. If you choose to install the calculation server, it is installed as a service on your local machine. To make it unavailable, you will need to stop it in the Services (Administrative tools) dialog of your operating system. Moreover, from the installation CD, you may find several versions of Adobe Acrobat Reader (German, English, French, Italian and Spanish versions) as well as the updates (from the last the U-Net version) and user manual pdf files.

1.2.3 Installing the U-Net

To install the U-Net, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Quit all programs. Insert the CD-ROM in the appropriate drive and follow the instructions on the screen. Or double-click the Setup application. By default, the U-Net installation path is C:\Program Files\Huawei GENEX\ U-Net (or the last directory in which you install the U-Net application). To define another directory path, edit directly the appropriate box during the installation, as shown in Figure 1-1.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-4

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Figure 1-1 Selecting destination directory 3) Select the type of installation, as shown in Figure 1-2.

Figure 1-2 Selecting components

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-5

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Different options means different components are installed on the U-Net. Full: The U-Net application, the U-Net calculation server application, dongle driver for fixed licence, development kit. Compact: The U-Net application only. Custom: Select the options you want to install. 4) 5) Select the destination of the application in the Start folder. Click to run the installation process.

Note: Help files are automatically installed during the setup. The user manual (in pdf format) is on the CD-ROM, and can be downloaded from www.support.huawei.com. Install the dongle driver only if necessary (not available for old version). If the option Dongle Driver for Fixed License is checked, it will be necessary to restart after installation.

1.2.4 Uninstalling the U-Net

To Uninstalling the U-Net, proceed as follows: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Quit all programs. Choose Start > Settings > Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs. In the Install/Uninstall tab, select the U-Net in the list, and then click Add/Remove. Follow the instructions on the screen.

1.2.5 Installing the Distributed Computing Server

The U-Net provides a feature on distributed computations of propagation calculations and CDMA/WCDMA simulations. The U-Net package provides a computing server application (the U-Net Svr) that can be installed either on workstations or servers and which can be used by the U-Net sessions installed on other stations. This computing server application (used only for path loss computations) supports dual-processor configuration (2 processors are used on multi-processor stations). To install the distributed computing server, check the U-Net calculation server option in the Select components box during the setup process. The application is installed
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-6

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 1 Getting Started

as a service on the local machine and run as far as the local PC is on, even with no user connected. Service management like the distributed computing server application can be accessed from the Administrative tools icon in the Control Panel. Then choose the Services application.

Note: Like in the U-Net installation, you must have administrative rights when installing the application. To be able to access some potential centralized geo data for computation, check that the account on which the service is installed has enough rights (that is not always the case by default). If not, access the properties of the Service and assign the service property to an appropriate account (for example, in the Log on window for Windows 2000 OS).

1.2.6 Uninstalling the Distributed Computing Server

The distributed computing server application is installed as a service on stations, and runs so long as the local PC is on, even with no user connected. The first step of uninstalling is to stop the corresponding service. To remove the distributed computing server, perform the following steps: 1) Check that you are connected on an account with rights allowing you to stop services. Under Windows NT4: 2) 3) 4) 5) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Access the Control Panel. Click Services. Select the U-Net server item. Click STOP. Under Windows 2000 or XP: Access the Control Panel. Open the Administrative Tools. Click Services. Select the U-Net server item. Right-click the item and choose STOP. Alternatively, open the property dialog box and click STOP in the Service status part. Once the service is stopped, perform the following steps to uninstall:
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-7

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 1 Getting Started

1) 2) 3)

Click

in your operating system.

in the shortcut menu. Choose Enter the following directory "<U-Net installation path>\U-NetSvr.exe" /UnregServer in the Run dialog box.

The computing server application is, then, removed from the station.

1.2.7 Troubleshooting after Installation

After having installed the U-Net, you may encounter some running problems that are easy to fix. Firstly, ensure that you install the U-Net using an administrator account, to reboot your computer, and log in again on an account with administrator rights to complete installation with the libraries that are in use during the first installation step (including MDAC - optionally - and the sentinel driver). Check the validity of the folder in which you install the U-Net. Because the U-Net is installed by default in the U-Net folder, ensure that you do not put yours in that way, for example: C:\Program Files\Huawei GENEX\XXX\U-Net\..., where XXX is the name of the main folder in which you want to install the U-Net. If the MDAC version of your PC is too old, you might install a newer version of mdac (downloadable from the support site) to allow communications with databases. The recommended MDAC version is 2.7. In case of the message "Protection key error", check your connection and the key validity. If you use a hardware Superpro dongle, try first to reboot your computer after installation on an administrator account. Then install again the sentinel driver by using the setupx86.exe file in the setup folder from your current the U-Net main folder. If any problem persists, contact our technical support at

http://support.huawei.com/support.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-8

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Caution: It is advised to switch off your computer before unplugging or plugging the hardware key from/into it. Do not change the PC date. When the Superpro dongle is temporary: Do not reprogram it even if you plug it into another computer. Do not put the time bomb off without the Huawei support help. Nethasp key (Multi-user licence) is supported under Windows 2000 Server only using License manager 8.09.

1.3 Getting Help

This section describes the following: Getting Help from Menu Technical Support

1.3.1 Getting Help from Menu

To get help from the Help menu, you can select the Help Topic command in the Help menu or press F1. The Help window is displayed. Table 1-3 lists the approaches for information search Table 1-3 Approaches for information search Approach Description Click the Content tab to scroll through a table of content. When you find in the list the topic you are interested in, simply Approach 1 double-click it. A window containing the information about the subject is displayed. The words or sentences in green indicate links to other topics relating to the word or sentence. Click the Index tab to refer to the index inputs. Choose in the list Approach 2 the input you are interested in, and then double-click it. A window containing the information about the subject is displayed.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-9

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Approach

Description Click the Find tab to search for specific words or sentences that

Approach 3

are in a help topic. Type the word or the sentence you search, choose in the list a subject, and then press Display to open the window containing information.

Note: For any external modules like propagation models, automatic planning tool or any other one developed with the API, you can access the online help can be reached by clicking in each tab. Then, a related topic is displayed.

Table 1-4 lists how to get information under the specified situations. Table 1-4 Getting information To You can Click the What's This To get an explanation about dialog options button located at the top

right corner of teach dialog window. Then click the field you want to be informed of. A Help window is displayed.

To see the name of a toolbar button To get a short explanation about a menu command or a toolbar button To get information about the U-Net application such as version number, and copyrights

Rest the pointer on the button until the name appears. Position the pointer on the command or the button. A short explanation is displayed in the status bar located at the bottom left of the U-Net window. Click the about tool menu. on the toolbar.

Alternatively, Select About U-Net... in the Help

1.3.2 Technical Support

From http://support.huawei.com., you can download the following: Latest version patches U-Net documentation
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-10

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Geo data samples Problem report template

1.4 Running Project Templates

This section describes the following: Starting a New Project Templates Provided Creating Your Own Template Building a Project Step by Step

1.4.1 Starting a New Project

Several project types based on different technologies are available in: GSM 900, GSM dualband 900-1800, GPRS, UMTS, CDMA-IS95, CDMA2000 (1xRTT). Each project has its own data and folder structure. For example, the tabs in the transmitter properties dialog and radio parameters change according to the project. In the same way, the availability of some specific objects depends on the chosen project, such as UMTS cells (UMTS projects) or TRX (GSM-TDMA projects). In addition, the U-Net modular and scalable architecture enables the user to match the configuration to customer needs. Table 1-5 lists the methods for choosing a project type. Table 1-5 Methods for choosing a project type Method Method 1 Choose File > New. 1) Method 2 2) 3) Click on the toolbar. Step

In the Project Type dialog, choose a project. Click OK.

Note: The U-Net allows you to define a personal template from any existing project.

1.4.2 Templates Provided

Table 1-6 lists the project types supported by the U-Net in the standard version.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-11

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Table 1-6 Project types supported by the U-Net in the standard version Project type Description Refers to the 2nd generation of numeric telephony norm working around the 900 (850) MHz band, Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM900 (850)) This technology is supported using the GSM GPRS EGPRS project template. Refers to the 2nd generation of numeric telephony norm working around the 1800/1900 MHz band, Digital Communications System 1800/1900 (DSC1800/1900) This technology is supported using the GSM GPRS EGPRS project template. Refers to the 2nd generation of numeric telephony norm working both around the 900 MHz and 1800 GSM dual-band 900-1800 (GSM900 and DCS1800) This technology is supported using the GSM GPRS EGPRS project template. Refers to the 2.5th generation of numeric Global Packet Radio Service (GPRS) and EDGE Enhanced Data-rates for GSM - or Global Evolution (EDGE) This technology is supported using the GSM GPRS EGPRS project template. telephony norms working around the 900-1800 MHz bands, using the Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) technology. MHz bands, using the TDMA technology. using the Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) technology. using the Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) technology.

Table 1-7 lists the optional UMTS modules.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-12

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Table 1-7 Optional UMTS modules UMTS module Refers Universal Mobile to the Description 3rd generation of numeric

telephony norm working around the 2 GHz band, using the WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access) technology. This technology is supported using the UMTS WCDMA project template. Refers to the 2.5th generation of numeric telephony norm working around the 900 MHz

Telecommunication System High Speed Downlink Packet Access (UMTS-HSDPA)

1st (1xRTT)

Expansion

Radio Technology

band, using the CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) technology. This technology is supported using the

Telephone

CDMA2000 1xRTT 1xEV-DO project template. Refers to the 2nd generation of numeric telephony norm working around the 800 MHz band, using the CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) IS95-CDMA (Interim Standard 95) technology, also known as CDMA. R95 refers to an accepted industry protocol. This technology is supported using the IS-95 CDMA project template.

Note: The microwave link technology is available in any project type.

1.4.3 Creating Your Own Template

By using the database structure provided by the U-Net by default, it is possible to create your personal template with a view to start each new project with your own tables, parameters, user-defined flags. Table 1-8 lists two methods to create your customized template.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-13

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Table 1-8 Two methods to create your customized template Method 1) Description In an open U-Net project, select File > Database: Export.... Method 1 2) Export the project as a template in the U-Net templates directory (by default C:\Program Files\Huawei GENEX\ U-Net\Templates, as shown in Figure 1-3. 1) Open a U-Net project template (located in

C:\Program Files\Huawei GENEX\U-Net\Templates by default) in MS Access as a model. 2) Method 2 3) You can modify the databases as you want to obtain your customized template. For example, you can import your own table of antennas. Select File > Save as... to save this template in the U-Net template subfolder. Your personal template is available in the Project type dialog.

Figure 1-3 Customized template

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-14

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Your personal template is now available in the Project type dialog box, as shown in Figure 1-4.

Figure 1-4 Project type

1.4.4 Building a Project Step by Step

To build a U-Net basic project, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Choose a project template. Define the projection and display coordinate systems, the length, and reception and transmission units. Import geographic data files (clutter classes and heights, DTM, vector data, population data, and generic data). Create the network by using station templates or by retrieving the data of an existing template. Adjust the parameters of sites, transmitters, repeaters, and specific GSM/GPRS or UMTS/CDMA/CDMA2000 radio data. 5) 6) 7) Calibrate propagation models by the use of CW measurements. Define the computation zone and the calculation settings (resolutions, calculation radius, propagation models, and reception properties). Create and calculate standard coverage studies (per transmitter, by signal level, overlapping zones). For the GSM/GPRS projects 8) 9) Define multi-service traffic parameters (services, mobility types, terminals, user profiles, and environments). Define the traffic through the import or the creation of the following maps. - Traffic maps per environment - Traffic maps per user profile - Live traffic maps - User density traffic maps 10) Capture the traffic to analyze the demand. 11) Set the dimensioning models.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-15

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 1 Getting Started

12) Dimension the network (required number of shared, circuit and packet timeslots, and traffic loads). 13) Define the neighbors manually or automatically. 14) Allocate frequencies, BSIC and frequency hopping parameters, to match the demand (user-defined and coming from dimensioning part). 15) Check the allocations through interference studies, the audit tool, and KPI calculation. 16) Compute specific GPRS/EDGE studies. 17) Check and validate the network by the import of test mobile data. For the UMTS projects 18) Define multi-service traffic parameters (services, mobility types, terminals, user profiles, and environments). 19) Define the traffic through the import or the creation of the following maps. - Traffic maps per environment - Traffic maps per user profile - Live traffic maps 20) Define neighbors manually or automatically 21) Make instant pictures of the network by the use of Monte-Carlo simulations. This also provides dimensioning results. 22) Calculate specific UMTS studies based on network load (user-defined and coming from simulations). 23) Allocate primary scrambling codes to cells and check the allocation with the audit tool. 24) Check and validate the network by the import of test mobile data. For the CDMA/CDMA2000 projects 25) Define multi-service traffic parameters (services, mobility types, radio configurations, and environments). 26) Define the traffic through the import or the creation of the following maps. - Traffic maps per environment - Traffic maps per user profile - Live traffic maps 27) Define neighbors manually or automatically. 28) Make instant pictures of the network by the use of Monte-Carlo simulations. This provides also dimensioning results. 29) Calculate specific CDMA/CDMA2000 studies based on network load (user-defined of coming from simulations). 30) Allocate PN offsets to cells and check the allocation with the audit tool. 31) Check and validate the network by the import of test mobile data.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-16

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Chapter 2 Working Environment

2.1 Overview
The chapter describes the following: Working with Menus and Windows Working with the Explorer Working with Data Tables Filtering/Grouping/Sorting Data Managing Display in the U-Net Using Handy Tools The U-Net user interface consists of an integrated set of cursors, windows, tools, menus, toolbars and other elements that allow you to create, and define your project in one place. The user interface uses standard Windows interface functionalities along with a few additional features to facilitate your operations. In addition, the drag and drop feature can be commonly used between any folder explorer and the U-Net to import or open any objects with a compatible format. The two common window types are document windows and docking windows. The position and size of document windows can be changed within the U-Net window. They can be maximized and minimized. Docking windows, however, can be attached to the borders of the application window, or float anywhere on your screen. Table 2-1 lists the details of the document windows and docking windows. Table 2-1 Details of the document windows and docking windows Window Description Document windows are attached to a single document. You can attach many document windows to a single document. Document window Examples of document windows are maps, datasheets or studies reports. When you close the last document window attached to a document, this document is closed.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-1

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Window

Description Docking windows are shared among open documents. They reflect the content of the active document. The active document is the one attached to the active window. Examples of docking windows are the Explorer window, the Panoramic window, the Legend window, or the Event viewer window.

Docking window

The U-Net provides many features dealing with the use of the map. Hence, you can easily move, zoom in and out, change scales, and choose visibility range for objects displayable on the map. You can also export the current environment. In the U-Net, most of the items are organized in folders in the Explorer window. These folders can be displayed in tables in order to make easy the management of large data at the same time. Hence, filters, groups and sorts are easily made in folders, tables or on the map (filtering only), or can be saved in configurations. This generic organization method is also applied to the display of objects in the U-Net. A generic display dialog box is available when you work on the properties of radio data (sites, transmitters, and microwave links), prediction studies, measurements, simulations and some geo data objects (DTM map or vector objects). The U-Net provides several handy tools, such as undo/redo function, windows classical and specific shortcuts, the use of icons and several types of cursors related to working processes. Furthermore, the U-Net provides different search tools in order to easily locate a site, a point, or a vector (even from its attributes only). It is also possible to synchronize a selected vector and the related data (or any CW measurement or test mobile data) in the corresponding data table.

2.2 Working with Menus and Windows

This section describes the following: Working with Document Windows Working with Docking or Floating Windows Printing the Active Window

2.2.1 Working with Document Windows

Table 2-2 lists the details of working with document windows.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-2

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Table 2-2 Working with document windows To Tile the document windows Cascade the document windows You can Choose Window > Tile. Choose Window > Cascade.

2.2.2 Working with Docking or Floating Windows

Table 2-3 lists the details of working with docking or floating windows Table 2-3 Working with docking or floating windows To Show a docking window You can Click the name of the window on the View menu. Click the Hide Hide the window Note: This button is at the top-left or top-right corner, depending on the position of the window. Click the Expand of the window. Expand or collapse a docking window in its docking area Note: This button may be near the top-left or top-right corner, depending on the position of the window. This is a dual purpose button. When the window is fully expanded, the function of this button is Contract; otherwise, the function is Expand. Change a docked window to a floating window Double-click in the window border. Double-click the window title bar to return the window Dock a floating window to its previous docked location, or point to the title bar and drag the window to a different dock area. Position a floating window over a dock (without docking it) 1) 2) Point to the title bar of the window. Hold the CTRL and drag the window over any dock area of the application window. or Contract near the corner in the corner of the window.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-3

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Note: The window positions for docking windows are not associated with the current project. They remain the same no matter which project you open.

2.2.3 Printing the Active Window

The U-Net provides powerful features in order to import/export any data. On this consideration, the U-Net provides the possibility to print any type of active window (table, legend, map, antenna pattern, point analysis window). In order to print the active window, once the print is set, select File > Print (or press Ctrl+P shortcuts) in the case of maps or tables. For other objects like antenna patterns, legend or point analysis windows (for example), just select Print... from the related shortcut menu (Right-click the window).

2.3 Working with Maps

This section describes the following: Zooming and Panning Using the Panoramic Window Centering Displayed Objects in the Map Window Choosing a Scale Defining Visibility Ranges on Objects Displaying Rulers Around the Map Displaying Rulers Around the Map Point-to-Point Analysis Getting Distances on the Map Displayed Cursors Printing a Map Exporting Maps to External Files Exporting Maps to Other Applications

2.3.1 Zooming and Panning

The U-Net provides powerful tools in order to zoom and to move the currently displayed map. Table 2-4 lists the details of zooming in a map.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-4

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Table 2-4 Zooming in a map Method Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4 Method 5 Click 1) 2) on the toolbar. Step

Press Ctrl+Q. Then click the map.

Press Ctrl+A Select View > Zoom in. Press Ctrl and use the mouse to roll forward.

Table 2-5 lists the details of zooming out a map. Table 2-5 Zooming out a map Method Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4 Method 5 Click 1) 2) on the toolbar. Step

Press Ctrl+Q. Then right-click the map.

Press Ctrl+R Select View > Zoom out. Press Ctrl and use the mouse roll backward.

Note: Zooming in and out actions are made depending on the cursor map location. The cursor stays in the workspace. When you use the mouse roll, x turns corresponds to x times the zoom in/out action.

Table 2-6 lists the details of zooming on a specific area of the map.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-5

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Table 2-6 Zooming on a specific area of the map Method Method 1 Click 1) 2) Method 2 3) 4) on the toolbar. Step

Select View > Zoom Area. Press and hold the left mouse at the north-west corner of the area. Drag the pointer to the south-east corner. Release the mouse button.

To switch between the last five (4 previous + 1 current) zoom levels in history, you can use the Previous zoom and Next zoom buttons ( To move the map area, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Click on the toolbar. Hold down the left mouse button on the map area and drag the pointer. Release the mouse button. and ) on the toolbar.

Note: In case of refresh problems on the map, click shortcut) In order to disable these tools, click on the zoom toolbar (or F5

on the toolbar.

2.3.2 Using the Panoramic Window

The Panoramic window offers a whole view of the imported geographic data and allows locating the map area you want to display in the workspace. A darker rectangle characterizes the map area selected in the panoramic window and displayed in the workspace. Several operations may be performed in the panoramic window. To zoom on a specific area of the map, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Position the pointer on the map. The pointer becomes a dotted rectangle. Press and hold the left mouse button at the north-west corner of the area. Drag the pointer to the south-east corner.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-6

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

4)

Release the mouse button.

To move the map area, perform the following steps: 5) 6) 7) 8) Position the pointer on the zoom area (darker rectangle). The pointer becomes a cross. Press the left mouse button. Slide the pointer. Release the mouse button.

To resize the map area, perform the following steps: 1) Position the pointer at the corner (or any border) of the zoom area (darker rectangle). The pointer becomes a double arrow. 2) 3) 4) Press the left mouse button. Slide the pointer. Release the mouse button.

2.3.3 Centering Displayed Objects in the Map Window

This function enables you to display the selected objects like transmitters, sites, and hexagonal design at the center of the workspace and the central area of imported geographical data such as clutter, DTM, vector data or scanned images. In both cases, the displayed area is moved conserving the current scale. To center any map or object in the displayed workspace, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Right-click the object. Select Center in the Map Window in the shortcut menu.

2.3.4 Choosing a Scale

To choose a scale, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Click the arrow next to the scale box on the toolbar. In the list, choose the scale value you want.

If the scale value you want is not in the list, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Click in the scale box. Type the scale value you want. Press Enter. The value you entered is added to the scale list. Note: If you drag the icon band containing the scale scrolling box from the toolbar to a side of your environment, you may find it again by clicking .

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-7

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

2.3.5 Defining Visibility Ranges on Objects

For any object with settable a configurable display (sites, transmitters, coverage studies, CW measurement, maps), it is possible to specify a visibility range. The object is visible only if the zoom level defined in the workspace (in the scale box) is within the object visibility range. This feature enables you to display in the workspace an object depending on the zoom level. To define an object visibility range, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Right-click the folder related to the considered object to open the associated shortcut menu. Choose the Properties command from the shortcut menu. In the Display tab, enter minimum and maximum zoom levels.

Note: In case of sites and transmitters, the visibility range is globally specified in the Properties window. This feature is an add-on, like visibility boxes or layer order, to manage object visibility in the workspace. The defined visibility ranges have no influence on the objects taken into account in calculations. The visibility scales defined for objects are taken into account during printing or print preview. The objects appear only if the printing scale is within their respective visibility range.

2.3.6 Displaying Rulers Around the Map

It is possible to make visible rulers along the displayed map. A distance measurement tool is also available. To display rulers in the current environment, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Select Options... > Tools. Click the Coordinates tab in the Options dialog box. Check the rulers you want to display in the workspace in the Display rulers part. Use What's this help to get further description about the fields available in the window. Click OK.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-8

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

2.3.7 Point-to-Point Analysis

Using the button, the U-Net allows the user to study the geographic profile between two points on the map. To display the profile between two points, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Make displayed the map of your current project. Click the Height profile button ( ) on the toolbar. Click the map to place the first point. Move the pointer, and click the map to place the second point.

The U-Net automatically opens the Point analysis window and displays the height and clutter profile between both points in the Terrain sections tab, which replaces the Profile tab. In addition, it creates a folder called Terrain sections in the Geo tab and lists all the created terrain sections in a related table. You can click anywhere on the map or on an object in the explorer in order to replace the Terrain section tab by the Profile tab. Note: All the created terrain sections are displayed on the map. All the terrain sections are listed in a manageable table. Standard features for managing table contents (Fields, Delete, Filter, Sort, Locate on the map, Display columns, Copy/Paste, Fill up/down) are available in a context menu (when you right-click the column(s) or record(s)) and in the Format, Edit and Records menus. You can also access the table content management from the Table tab of the terrain section property dialog. When selecting a terrain section in the table (on the map), this one is simultaneously selected on the map (in the table) and displayed in the Terrain section tab. The generic U-Net display dialog is available in order to manage the display of each terrain section. Open the terrain section property dialog and select the Display tab. A terrain section can be modified. On the map, right-click it to check that the Edit command is selected. On the map, click a point and drag it (the left button pressed) where you want. The terrain section cannot be changed if the Edit command is not selected. A shortcut menu including the Copy and Print commands is available when you right-click anywhere in the Terrain section tab. Standard features (Delete, Rename) are available in the shortcut menu of the Terrain section folder.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-9

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

2.3.8 Getting Distances on the Map

The U-Net allows the user to get distances on the map easily by using , the Distance measurement button. This tool allows you to determine the azimuth of the current measurement segment. To display distances on the map, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Make displayed the map of your current project. Click the Distance measurement button ( Click the map to put the start point. point. The distance from the first point, the distance from the previous point, and the azimuth angle of the current measurement segment are displayed in the extreme lower left corner of your current environment, 5) Double-click the map to finish the current distance measurement session. ) on the toolbar.

Click the map at each point you want to know the distance from the previous

Note: The selected points are linked to each other by straight lines. The U-Net reads azimuth in a clockwise direction.

2.3.9 Displayed Cursors

In the U-Net, the cursors appear in different forms according to the current position or command. Table 2-7 lists the meaning of each possible shapes. Table 2-7 Meaning of each possible shapes Appearance Meaning Details The hourglass tells you to wait. When it disappears, you can enter another command. Use the arrow mainly to select objects or commands. It remains as long as a new command is not activated

Wait

Arrow

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-10

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Appearance

Meaning

Details Use the zone selection arrow to define a selection region. You can use it inside a map to define a zone to print or copy

Selection arrow

and in the panoramic view to define the zone to be displayed on the map. You must define a window on the active map or panoramic view by clicking (1st corner of the window top left) and sliding. Use the polygonal zone selection arrow to define a non-rectangular selection region. You can use it inside a map to define a zone to filter either

Polygonal selection arrow

sites or transmitters, to define computation and focus zones, to draw vector or raster polygons. You must define a closed polygonal zone on the active map by clicking several times. Close the polygon by clicking twice. Only active on maps, use the hand to move the visible part of the displayed map. Right-click the map window to respectively zoom out and zoom in on the map at the location of the mouse pointer The magnifying glass tells you that the U-Net is waiting for a

Hand

Zoom tool

Zoom area

zoom window to be defined on the active map by clicking (1st corner of the window top left) and sliding. The transmitter symbol tells you that the U-Net is waiting for you to place a transmitter on the active map by clicking.

New transmitter You can place as many transmitters as you want by holding down the button while you move the mouse and pressing down Ctrl at the same time. The sight symbol appears as soon as you have activated the point analysis tool. Sights This informs you that the U-Net is waiting for you to click a point of the active map.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-11

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Appearance

Meaning

Details The sight placed symbolizes the receiver and indicate the point on the map used for calculations displayed in the Measurements or Point analysis window (Profile/Reception/Interference/Results/AS analysis). You can access menu by right-clicking the Point analysis window. The pencil indicates that you can define polygonal zones without the clutter.

Sights placed (Receiver)

Pencil The U-Net is waiting for you to click various points on the active map. The polygon is closed by double-clicking it. The U-Net is waiting for you to select by clicking a newly created polygonal zone. The U-Net is waiting for you to select an edge of the newly created polygon by clicking. When you click, the cursor Position indicator changes into the select/create points on polygons cursor (below). By right-clicking, it opens a context-sensitive dialog allowing you to add a point, delete the polygon and center the map on the polygon. Clicking followed by dragging one of the polygon edges, add a Select/create points on polygons new point to the polygon and modify its contour. Clicking a point that already exists on the polygon, followed by dragging allows you to move the point. By right-clicking, it opens a context-sensitive dialog box allowing you to delete a point, delete the polygon and center the map on the polygon. Placing a CW measurement point

Deletion

The U-Net is waiting for you to click a point on the active map. In this way, it can place a CW measurement point there.

Placing points in a CW measurement path

The U-Net is waiting for you to click a point on the active map. In this way, it can start a CW measurement path. Once you have made your first click, the cursor changes shape and the U-Net waits for you to click various points on the active map. Double-clicking ends the path.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-12

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Appearance

Meaning

Details The U-Net is waiting for you to click a point on the active map

Microwave link start End

(1 point in the microwave link). Once you have made your first click, the cursor changes shape and the U-Net waist for you to click a second point on the active map to end the link (2 point in the microwave link) Each click with this cursor on the active map creates a vertex
nd

st

Multi-hop microwave link

of a multi-hop link. This vertex can be an existing site (if you click an existing site) or a new site (if you click elsewhere on the map).

Measurements on the map

Use the measurement tool to display projected distances and azimuths in the status bar. Drop two points with the mouse in order to analyze the within terrain section (Point analysis window)

Terrain section

2.3.10 Printing a Map

To print a map area, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Click the Select the area tool ( Define the area to be printed: ) on the toolbar.

a) Position the pointer on the map. b) Press and hold the left mouse button at any of the four corners of the area. c) Drag the pointer to the diametrically opposite corner. d) Release the mouse button. 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Select File > Print area: Set. The selected area is lighter. Select File > Page setup to configure your print layout. The Page setup dialog is displayed. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the displayed window. Select the appropriate options on the available fields you want for your print. When your configuration is complete, click OK.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-13

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Note: In the Page setup dialog, you can insert the following elements: A logo in the top left corner A title at the top center Comments centered at the bottom

To visualize your print sheet, you can select File > Print preview to visualize your print sheet. To remove the selected area, you can select File > Print area: Remove command.

Note: The visibility scales defined for objects are taken into account during printing or print previews. The objects appear only if the printing scale is within their respective visibility range.

Caution: When using the Fit to page option, it is not possible to know the printing scale in advance.

Table 2-8 lists the printing recommendations.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-14

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Table 2-8 Printing recommendations For Huawei recommends that You organize the layers in order to make most of them visible. From the bottom to the top, the order should be: Non transparent maps (images, When a project contains surfacic layers (raster maps or polygonal vector maps), lines (road, airport, vectors) and points (measurements, critical places vector) DTM, or clutter height map) Transparent raster maps (clutter class maps) Multi-format maps vector and/or raster (population, rain, generic maps, traffic) Surfacic polygons (vectors) Roads and Lines (vectors) Points (vectors) For performance reasons Put vector layers on the top of predictions. They must be all the above other layers.

For sites and transmitters

Note: All the visible objects of the Data tab are displayed above the ones of the Geo tab. Nevertheless, it is possible to manage the order of the vectors by transferring them in the Data tab (Right-click the vector and select Transfer to Data, and potentially put some of them on the top of predictions.

2.3.11 Exporting Maps to External Files

To export a map as an external file, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Click the select the area tool ( Define the area to be printed: ) on the toolbar.

a) Position the pointer on the map. b) Press and hold the left mouse button at any of the four corners of the area.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-15

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

c) Drag the pointer to the diametrically opposite corner. d) Release the mouse button. 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Select File > Export image.... In the Save as dialog box, define the directory where you want to locate your file, the file name and the file format. Click OK. Use What's this help to get further description about the fields available in the dialog box. In the Size of created file dialog box, specify the scale and the resolution (dot/inch) to display the image with this resolution or the pixel size (m) to use image as a geo-referenced raster file. Any resolution may be used in the U-Net. 8) Click OK.

Note: Four file formats, namely, *.tif, *.bil, *.bmp and ArcView Grid (*.txt) are supported. When you export maps in these formats, you specify the pixel size. A geo-reference file is then created.

2.3.12 Exporting Maps to Other Applications

To copy an image to another application as a linked object, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Click the Select the area tool ( Define the area to be printed: ) on the toolbar.

a) Position the pointer on the map. b) Press and hold the left mouse button at any of the four corners of the area. c) Drag the pointer to the diametrically opposite corner. d) Release the mouse button. 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Select Edit > Copy. Open another application. Select Edit > Paste special.... In the Paste special dialog box, choose Paste link option and select U-Net document object in the scrolling list box. Click OK. A shortcut to the source file is created. Then the image may be updated when you click it and select the U-Net linked object: Convert... command.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-16

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Note: If the U-Net file is modified and saved, the linked image is automatically updated.

To copy an image to another application as a screen shot, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Click the Select the area tool ( Define the area to be printed: ) on the zoom toolbar.

a) Position the pointer on the map. b) Press and hold the left mouse button at any of the four corners of the area. c) Drag the pointer to the diametrically opposite corner. d) Release the mouse button. 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) Select Edit > Copy Image... command. In the Copy image dialog box, choose the Screen Resolution option or define the Pixel Size (m). Click OK. Open another application. Select Edit > Paste special.... In the Paste special dialog box, choose the Paste option and select Bitmap in the scrolling list box. Press OK.

To copy the north-west and south-east point coordinates of the image to another application, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Click the Select the area tool ( Define the area to be printed: ) in the zoom toolbar,

a) Position the pointer on the map. b) Press and hold the left mouse button at any of the four corners of the area. c) Drag the pointer to the diametrically opposite corner. d) Release the mouse button. 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Select Edit > Copy Image.... In the Copy image dialog box, choose Screen Resolution option or define the pixel size (m). Press OK. Open another application. Select Edit > Paste (or choosing Unformatted text option in the Paste Special... command).

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-17

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Note: The point coordinates vary according to the chosen option (screen resolution or pixel size).

2.4 Working with the Explorer

This section describes the following: Renaming an Object Displaying the Object Properties Deleting an Object Managing Object Visibility Table 2-9 lists the three tabs in the Explorer window. Table 2-9 Three tabs in the explorer window Tab Description The data tab allows the radio data and calculation management. It consists of diverse folders depending on the modules included in the U-Net application: Sites Antennas Transmitters Predictions Data tab UMTS Parameters, CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters, or GSM/GPRS Parameters UMTS Simulations or CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations Traffic analysis (GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects only) Hexagonal design Microwave links CW Measurements and test mobile data

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-18

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Tab

Description The Geo tab allows handling geographical data. It initially contains three folders or more when you import other geographical data types (vector data, scanned images) such as: Clutter classes Clutter heights

Geo tab

Digital Terrain Model Population data Any generic geo data map Traffic (GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA,

WCDMA/UMTSUMTS HSDPA, CDMA/CDMA2000) Terrain sections The Modules tab offers the propagation model management. It contains: A propagation models folder where the following propagation models are listed: Longley-Rice Okumura-Hata Modules tab Costa-Hata Standard Propagation Model ITU 526-5 ITU 370-7 (Vienna 93) WLL The list of the different AFP models available in your current U-Net version. Any additional module created using the ApiAPI.

In each tab, the created or imported objects are listed in corresponding folders using a tree-structure presentation. Each object and folder offers a context menu that is available through a click.

2.4.1 Renaming an Object

Table 2-10 lists two methods to rename an object.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-19

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Table 2-10 Renaming an object Method 1) Method 1 2) 1) Method 2 2) Select Rename in the shortcut menu. Press F2. Right-click the object. Click the object. Step

2.4.2 Displaying the Object Properties

To open the property dialog box of any object, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Right-click the object to open the associated shortcut menu. Select Properties in the shortcut menu.

Note: Depending on the object type, the properties can be accessed if you double-click it. Double-clicking has the same function as the one in bold in the associated shortcut menu (click the object).

2.4.3 Deleting an Object

Table 2-11 lists two methods to delete an object. Table 2-11 Deleting an object Method 1) Method 1 2) Method 2 1) 2) Step Right-click the object in the Explorer window or on the map (radio data). Select Delete in the shortcut menu. Click the object in the Explorer window. Press Del.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-20

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

2.4.4 Managing Object Visibility

The and buttons are located in front of folders containing at least one object. or buttons respectively.

To open or close a folder, you can click

In Figure 2-1, the Antennas folder is open, and the Sites folder is closed. A check box is displayed next to each object visible in the workspace.

Figure 2-1 Global window

To show or hide an object in the workspace, you can select a check box. Then the corresponding object is visible in the workspace. If you want to make the object invisible, simply clear the check box. The folders with a grey check box contain both visible and invisible objects.

In the example, the sites are not displayed in the workspace unlike the transmitters. Moreover, some prediction studies listed in the Prediction folder are not visible. The different folders containing any environment can be ordered in layers with a view to manage their display priority on the map. For example, in the example above, the layer associated with the predictions is displayed over the layer associated with the UMTS simulations. Indeed, in the tree above, the Predictions folder is located higher than the UMTS simulations folder. This feature is particularly useful for the display managing of geo data objects. To manage several objects display priority, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Select the object you want to change the display priority on the map. Drag it through the Explorer window. Put it at the location that gives it the display priority you want to assign to it.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-21

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Note: Putting over layers may get invisible under layers. To avoid that, adjust the transparency level of objects located over the others.

2.5 Working with Data Tables

This section describes the following: Accessing Data Tables Managing Content in Tables Editing Contents in Tables Opening Dialogs from Tables Managing Table Display Copying and Pasting Cells in Tables Exporting Tables in External Files Importing Tables from External Files Printing Data Tables

2.5.1 Accessing Data Tables

In the U-Net, many radio data objects (sites, transmitters, repeaters, antennas, UMTS, or CDMA/CDMA2000 cells, UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 parameters, microwave links) can be stored in a table, summarizing all their characteristics, and allowing you to use filters, groups and sorts on contained data. Table can also be used to display prediction reports and be exported (resp. or imported) to (from) external files. Table 2-12 lists two methods to access a data table. Table 2-12 Accessing a data table Method 3) Method 1 4) Step Click an appropriate tab in the Explorer window. Double-click the data folder (not available for

prediction reports). 1) Method 2 2) Click an appropriate tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the data folder to open the associated shortcut menu. 3) Choose Open Table in the menu.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-22

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

2.5.2 Managing Content in Tables

Table 2-13 lists three methods to manage content in tables. Table 2-13 Managing content in tables Method 1) 2) Method 1 3) 4) 1) Method 2 2) 3) 1) Method 3 2) 3) Step Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Data folder. The shortcut menu is displayed. Select the data folder properties. Choose the Table tab in the window. Open the table you want to manage the contents. Right-click any cell of the table. Choose Table Fields in the shortcut menu. Open the table you want to manage the contents. Choose Table Fields in the Records menu. Use What's this to get further description about the fields available in the window.

It is possible to check and to manage (addition and deletion of new types) the data stored in the table. In this window are displayed the names, types, allocated lengths, and default value (if existing) of the data available. Some objects are custom objects of the U-Net and cannot be removed and others are user-definable. Note: When creating a new column (Add... button from any table tab window), you can fill a choice list associated with the new variable (only with text format). Hence, when assigning a value to this variable in the associated cell, you are able to choose one of the items from the scrolling choice list. Moreover, the cell can be also edited, and any value can be assigned to it. It is possible to define a default value to any user-defined field. This default value is automatically reported to the choice list box (only in text format). Even if tables summarize the characteristics of each item, it is possible to edit, individually, most of them by two ways. Even if the U-Net is case-sensitive, be aware that this could lead to some troubles when connected to some database formats (for example, Access)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-23

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

2.5.3 Editing Contents in Tables

Two ways are available in order to edit data table cells: You can choose in a scrolling box (if a choice list has been defined in the field definition), as shown in Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-2 Choosing data in the transmitters data tables Alternatively, you can edit and change the value or the text directly in the box, as shown in Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3 Editing data in the transmitters data tables

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-24

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

2.5.4 Opening Dialogs from Tables

Since most of the tunable objects can be listed in tables, it is also possible to open the properties dialog of any site, antenna, transmitter, or cell from the corresponding table. Table 2-14 lists two methods to open dialogs from tables: Table 2-14 Opening dialogs from tables Method 1) Method 1 2) Step Open the considered table. Select the record you want to open the property dialog box. 3) 1) 2) Method 2 Double-click it. Open the considered table. Select the record you want to open the property dialog box. 3) Right-click the record you want to open the property dialog. 4) Select Record properties... command in the shortcut menu (or in the Records menu).

Note: Sometimes, click the narrow cells drives to just edit it. To avoid such behavior, and to open the property dialog for sure, double-click the extreme left part of the table in the appropriate row.

2.5.5 Managing Table Display

The table formats can be personalized to retain pertinent data, or to get a clearer visualization. In that way, it is possible to manage the titles, styles or fonts, to adjust the dimensions of the cells, and to hide or freeze columns. To manage table titles, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Activate the Table window, Select Format > Header Format command. A 4 tabs (Font, Color, Borders, and Alignment) font dialog box is displayed.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-25

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

3) 4)

Select the title format parameters from the available tabs in the open window. Click OK or Apply.

To manage table columns, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Activate the Table window. Select Format > Column Format. A 4 tabs (Font, Color, Borders, and Alignment) font dialog is displayed. Select the table content format parameters from the available tabs in the open window. Click OK or Apply.

To change width or height, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Activate the Table window. Set your cursor on the separation between lines or columns to be modified (in the title bar for widths and in the 1st shaded column for heights) Click and slide the cursor, as shown in Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5.

Figure 2-4 Changing column width

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-26

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Figure 2-5 Changing column width

Note: You can define a different width for each column. The height of the cells will be defined for the entire table.

To display the columns, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Activate the Table window. Select Format > Display columns.

The dialog allows selecting the various columns which are displayed in the corresponding table. Or you can perform the following steps: 1) 2) Right-click the table. The shortcut menu is displayed. Choose the Display columns command from the shortcut menu.

In large tables where the use of scroll bars is necessary, it may be useful to keep some columns visible, by freezing them on the screen. This feature is always possible except for tables containing reports. To freeze a column on the screen, perform the following steps: 1) Activate the Table window.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-27

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

2)

Select the column to be frozen by clicking the corresponding title (to freeze several columns, slide on the associated titles after the 1st click - you can only select several columns if they are adjacent to each other).

Or you can perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Select Format > Freeze columns. Right-click the table in order to get the shortcut menu. Choose Freeze columns command in the opened menu.

To unfreeze the frozen columns, you can select Format > Unfreeze columns. Table 2-15 lists three methods to hide columns. Table 2-15 Hiding columns Method 1) 2) Method 1 3) 4) 1) 2) Step Activate the Table window. Click the title of the column to hide (to hide several columns. Hold Ctrl when you select other columns to hide. Select Format > Hide columns. Activate the Table window. Click the title of the column to hide (to hide several columns. Method 2 3) 4) 5) Hold Ctrl when you select other columns to hide. Right-click the table to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Hide columns command from the opened menu. 1) 2) Method 3 3) Activate the Table window. Do as the same way as in the Resize columns method seen above. Slide the pointer on the title bar to obtain a zero width column. 1) Method 4 2) Select Format > Display columns to display again the hidden columns. Select Format > Display columns to clear the concerned column.

In large tables it can be practical to group columns of interest, or to read data in a special order. In the U-Net, the column order can be managed easily.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-28

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

To manage the column order, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Activate the Table window. Select the column to be moved by clicking the corresponding title (to move several columns, slide on the associated titles after the 1st click - you can only move several columns if they are adjacent to each other - other). 3) Click the selected columns zone and drag it until the required target. When this zone is dragged, the place where the columns are displayed is referenced by a red line.

Note: When several representations of the same table are displayed in the workspace, it may be necessary to refresh the display (F5 or icon on the toolbar) to apply the same configuration (column order, displayed/hidden fields) to all of them. If not, some refresh problems on their display may occur.

2.5.6 Copying and Pasting Cells in Tables

The U-Net provides some powerful tools in order to use the copy and paste functions in tables. You may either copy any cell with the copy (Ctrl+C or Copy command from the Edit menu) or cut (Ctrl+X or Cut command from the Edit menu) functions and paste it in any available cell from any table (Ctrl+V or Paste command from the Edit menu). Moreover, it is possible to paste several times the same cell in a table. To copy and paste in tables, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Activate the Table window. Select the cell zone where you want to copy the data.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-29

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Figure 2-6 Selecting the cell zone

If you want to copy the top cell in the selected cells, you can use the Ctrl+D shortcuts or the Fill down command from the Edit menu.

Figure 2-7 Copying the contents of the top cell down

If you want to copy the bottom cell in the selected cells, you can use the Ctrl+U shortcuts or the Fill up command from the Edit menu.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-30

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Figure 2-8 Copying the contents of the bottom cell up

2.5.7 Exporting Tables in External Files

Tables, table columns or fields can be imported from and exported to the U-Net. The U-Net is capable of importing from and exporting to tabulated ASCII text files (in .txt and .csv formats) and provides different possible configurations for the import and export. Table 2-16 lists the two methods of exporting a table in an external file.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-31

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Table 2-16 Exporting a table in an external file Method 1) 2) Step Activate the Table window. Right-click the table window to open the shortcut menu. 3) 4) Select Export in the menu. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. 5) 6) Method 1 7) Select the separator and the decimal symbol, Specify if you want to save the table header in the file, Use and fields to be exported. Use the buttons fields to be exported. 9) Click OK to export. and to define the list of

8)

to change the order of

10) In the open dialog, select the directory where you want to save the exported file. 11) Enter the file name and format (.txt or .csv) and click Open. 1) 2) Activate the Table window. Right-click the table window to open the shortcut menu. 3) 4) Select Export in the menu. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. 5) Method 2 6) Click the Load button. Specify the directory where the configuration file is located. 7) 8) 9) Click Open to close the dialog box. Click OK to export. In the open dialog, select the directory where you want to save the exported file. 10) Enter the file name and format (.txt or .csv) and click Open.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-32

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Note: Export settings may be saved in a configuration file. Click Save. In the open dialog, specify the directory where you want to save the configuration file, type the file name and click Open to close the dialog.

2.5.8 Importing Tables from External Files

Tables, table columns or fields can be imported and exported to and from the U-Net. The U-Net is capable of importing from and exporting to tabulated ASCII text files (in .txt and .csv formats) and provides different possible configurations for import and export. Table 2-17 lists the two methods of importing a table from an external file. Table 2-17 Importing a table from an external file Method 1) 2) Step Activate the Table window. Right-click the table window to open the shortcut menu. 3) 4) Method 1 5) 6) Select the file and click Open. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. 7) 8) Select the separator and the decimal symbol. Specify the number of the first row containing data to be imported. Select Import from the menu. In the open dialog, define the directory where the file to be imported is located.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-33

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Method 1) 2)

Step Activate the Table window. Right-click the table window to open the shortcut menu. 3) 4) Select Import from the menu. In the open dialog, define the directory where the file to be imported is located.

Method 2

5) 6)

Select the file and click Open. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window.

7) 8)

Click the Load button. Specify the directory where the configuration file is located.

9)

Click Open to close the dialog.

10) Click OK.

In the preview table, define the relation between the fields to be imported (available in your file) and the U-Net internal fields. All the columns found in the file to be imported are listed in the first row (Source). The second row (destination) enables you to specify name of the corresponding field in the U-Net table. In the destination row, click each cell and choose the corresponding field (in which you want to recover the source column content) in the menu. An additional option Ignore is available in the menu. Select it if you do not want to import the source column content in the U-Net table.

Note: Import settings may be saved in a configuration file. Click Save. In the open dialog, specify the directory where you want to save the configuration file, type the file name, and click Open to close the dialog. An option Update records is available in the dialog. It enables you to refresh properties of records already existing in the table.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-34

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

2.5.9 Printing Data Tables

In the U-Net, it is as easy to print data table as maps. To print the data table, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Make your table active. Choose File > Print....

As with maps and reports, it is also possible to preview the print to be made on tables.

2.6 Filtering/Grouping/Sorting Data

This section describes the following: Sorting and Filtering in Tables Examples of Filtering in Tables Filtering Radio Data Advanced Filtering: Example Advanced Filtering: Counter Example 1 Advanced Filtering: Counter Example 2 Sorting a Folder Arranging Items in Groups Examples of Grouping Using a Group by/Sort/Filter Configuration Creating Subfolders Reorganizing Data after Modifications Filtering Data in a Polygon Removing the Polygon Filter

2.6.1 Sorting and Filtering in Tables

In the U-Net, data may be sorted or filtered in particular in tables (this is also possible in data folder or on the map). After filtering, excluded data is not taken into account in calculations. Use this feature in the following ways: Sorting in tables Sorting in several columns Filtering in tables Advanced data filtering in tables Adding or modifying data in any filtered or sorted table Restoring data in tables The data may be sorted in an ascending (A to Z, 1 to 10) or descending (Z to A, 10 to 1) order. Any field except the antenna patterns field may be sorted.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-35

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

I. Sorting data in Tables

To sort data in a table, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Activate the Table window. Select a title of a column. This column is the sort reference. When selected, right-click or select the Records menu. Then select the Sort Ascending or Sort Descending option from the menu.

II. Sorting in Several Columns

The U-Net offers to sort several table columns at the same time. To sort in several columns, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Activate the Table window. Select the columns to be sorted by selecting them on the title bar. When selected, right-click or select the Records menu. Then select the Sort Ascending or Sort Descending option from the menu. Sorts are successively applied to each selected column, if only these are adjacent to each other.

III. Filtering in Tables

To filter a type of data in a table, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Activate the Table window. Select an item, a type of antenna in the transmitters table. When selected, right-click or select the Records menu. Then select Filter by selection (Filter excluding selection) from the menu to keep only data which have the antenna (for example) as the selected item. Filtering data in several columns is possible in the same way not only if selected items are adjacent to each other. To select different cells, hold the Ctrl key when clicking.

IV. Advanced Data Filtering in Tables

The U-Net enables to make complex filters, by combining several criteria on fields. This can be managed by using criteria either in the Advanced filter option from the Records menu, or by choosing the General tab from the item properties which is in consideration. Table 2-18 lists authorized filtering criteria.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-36

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Table 2-18 Authorized filtering criteria Formula =X <> X <5 >7 <=10 >=20 Data is kept in the table only if Value equal to X (X may be a number or characters) Value not equal to X (X may be a number or characters) Numerical value is less than 5 Numerical value is greater than 7 Numerical value is less than or equal to 10 Numerical value is greater than or equal to 20

Combinations of filters are made firstly horizontally, then vertically.

V. Adding or Modifying Data in Any Filtered or Sorted Table

When a new item is added to the project (base station, site, and transmitter) or when a data is modified, it is possible to reapply a previous filter/sort configuration. To add or modify data in any filtered or sorted table, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Activate the Table window. Right-click the item in the Data window or select the Records menu. Select Apply filter/sort from the menu.

VI. Restoring Data in Tables

To restore filtered data in tables, select Show all records from the Records menu. Filtering, by any way, applies automatically to maps and data folders. As in tables, The U-Net allows you to easily manage data from folders.

2.6.2 Examples of Filtering in Tables

Figure 2-9 and Figure 2-10 shows the examples of filtering in tables.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-37

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Figure 2-9 Filtering by selection (Antenna AO9209)

Figure 2-10 Filtering excluding selection (Antenna AO9209)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-38

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

2.6.3 Filtering Radio Data

In the U-Net, filters may be applied to items with results displayed simultaneously in tables, in the map and in the data folders. All data not checking the filters are not taken into account in calculations. The filter tools are selected from the following: The Advanced Filter from the Records menu (when the Data table window is on) or from the General tab window of the item properties. The Filter by selection or Filter excluding selection options from either the Records menu or by right-clicking directly on the object in the table to be used as reference for the filtering. From the Properties dialog associated with the current folder. To filter any folder from its associated Properties dialog box, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the folder you want to sort to open the associated shortcut menu. Click Properties in the menu. Select the General tab from the open window. . Click Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open filtering dialog. Click the Filter tab and choose the filtering reference variable(s) and the associated filtering way(s). Select a field you want to use for filtering among the discrete fields. The U-Net lists the choice list if the selected field is a text field with a choice list, or all the values of the selected field in table. 9) Select/clear boxes to keep/exclude values from tables, map and explorer. The U-Net displays the defined filter at the bottom of the dialog. 10) Click OK. Note: The way the data contained in the current folder are filtered can be saved in a configuration template in order to be used later. It is possible to select several values at once. To do this, click or several values using Shift and/or Ctrl button at the same time and then, check/uncheck one of boxes. Advanced site filters are available using the site list feature.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-39

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

It is also possible to use wildcard characters when defining advanced filter criteria on fields with the text format. Table 2-19 Wildcard characters used in advanced filter criteria Filter criteria *string* Function Filters objects which the chosen field contains the string of characters Filters objects which the chosen field begins with the string of characters

string*

Application: Sites may belong to several groups. In this case, let us assume that each site has an associated field such as a list of groups (for example "gr1 gr3 gr5"). Therefore, by entering *gr5* as criterion, you can filter all the sites included in gr5.

2.6.4 Advanced Filtering: Example

Let's consider a U-Net project which contains only two types of antennas: GSMA090-12-6 and AO9209. All transmitters using A09209 antenna have only 0 azimuth instead of 0, 120 and 240 azimuth for transmitters using GSMA090-12-6 antennas. Figure 2-11 shows an initial table of NiceGSM900.ATL.

Figure 2-11 Initial table

A goal is, for example, to extract GSMA090-12-6 antennas whose azimuths are 0 and 240. Figure 2-12 shows the syntax used to extract the specified antennas.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-40

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Figure 2-12 An example of filtering and sorting

An example of filtering/sorting The type of columns to be filtered is chosen from a menu. The second row point out that will be kept GSMA090-12-6 antennas whose azimuth is lower than 120. Any type of antenna whose azimuth is greater than 120 (4th line). For this constraint, no AO9209 antenna is concerned.

2.6.5 Advanced Filtering: Counter Example 1

Here is a typical example which could cause a U-Net user to make mistakes in filter and sort syntax. The goal stays the same as in the previous example. The examples are shown through an advanced filter window and the corresponding filtered and sorted data table.

Figure 2-13 Errors in filtering and sorting The type of columns to be filtered is chosen from a menu. The second line point out that will be kept GSMA090-12-6 antennas whose azimuth is greater than 120. Any type of antenna whose azimuth is less than 120 (4th line), for example, both GSMA090-12-6 and AO9209 antennas.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-41

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

2.6.6 Advanced Filtering: Counter Example 2

Here is a typical example which could cause a U-Net user to make mistakes in filter and sort syntax. The goal stays the same than in the previous example. The examples are shown through an advanced filter window and the corresponding filtered and sorted data table.

Figure 2-14 Errors in filtering and sorting The type of columns to be filtered is chosen from a menu. The second row point out that will be kept any type of antenna whose azimuth is greater than 120. Any type of antenna whose azimuth is less than 120 (4th line). GSMA090-12-6 antennas are kept without any constraint. The result indicates there is no filtering. The final table is identical with the initial table.

2.6.7 Sorting a Folder

In the data window, items (transmitters, sites, simulations) are classified in folders. You can open them by clicking the them by clicking the button. button associated with an item. You can close

In the U-Net, every item folder can be sorted in the same way as in tables. Whenever a Data table is sorted, the display of the corresponding item is automatically modified in the associated folder. You can also sort any folder from its associated properties dialog. To sort a folder, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the folder you want to sort to open the associated shortcut menu. Click Properties in the menu. Select the General tab from the open window. Click the button.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-42

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

6) 7) 8)

Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open sorting dialog box. Choose the sorting reference variable(s) and the associated sorting way(s), Click OK.

Note: The way the current folder is sorted can be saved in a configuration template in order to be used later.

2.6.8 Arranging Items in Groups

In the U-Net, it may be very practical to group data by attributes. This can be done in the data folder or subfolder of any item. Arranging items in groups is similar to sorting and filtering table contents. Several levels (limited by the memory of your computer) of grouping are available. Table 2-20 lists the two methods of arranging any folder or subfolder in group(s) of variables. Table 2-20 Arranging any folder or subfolder in group(s) of variables Method 1) 2) Step Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the folder or subfolder you want to arrange in groups to open the associated shortcut menu. 3) 4) Method 1 5) 6) Click Properties in the menu. Select the General tab from the open window. Click the button.

Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open grouping dialog.

7)

Choose the grouping reference variable(s) and the associated grouping order.

8)

Click OK.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-43

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Method 1) 2) Method 2 3) 4)

Step Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the folder or subfolder you want to arrange in groups to open the associated shortcut menu. Click Group by in the menu. Choose the property you want to use as a group reference on the appeared menu on the right.

To come back to a standard display, either choose Group by none in the menu or use the grouping dialog, and put back the grouping reference variables in the Available fields box.

Note: The way the data contained in the current folder are grouped can be saved in a configuration template for future use.

2.6.9 Examples of Grouping

Figure 2-15 shows a transmitters folder with sites in red being active and sites in white being inactive.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-44

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

[ Figure 2-15 Group by active

Figure 2-16 shows the two groups of the obtained transmitters folder. One is for the active sites, and the other is for the inactive sites.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-45

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Figure 2-16 Transmitters grouped by activity

Note: In the U-Net, activity is a Boolean. Active has the true value, and inactive has the false value.

2.6.10 Using a Group by/Sort/Filter Configuration

In the U-Net, the way data contained in any folder are grouped, filtered and sorted can be saved in a configuration template for future use. Configuration templates are directly embedded to save .atl projects. Any configuration is erasable. To create a configuration template (from an existing data organization), perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the folder you want to sort to open the associated shortcut menu. Click Properties in the menu. Select the General tab from the open window. button. Click the Type the configuration name in the open saving configuration dialog. The configuration created is listed in the configuration scrolling list in the General tab and is available for any data organization in the current folder only. 7) Click OK.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-46

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Note: For transmitters, a default configuration called As Sites folder is available. Using this configuration enables you to arrange transmitters in the Transmitters folder according to the site organization criteria.

You can define several configurations and use them when needed. The configurations youve created are available from the context menu associated with any folder by using the Configuration command and one of the listed objects in the menu. To apply the configuration used to newly created objects, select the Apply current configuration command in context menus. Existing configurations are not saved in database. Nevertheless, in order to keep these, and potentially share them between users, the U-Net allows you to save user configurations (including also geo data set and computation zone) in an external file.

2.6.11 Creating Subfolders

In the U-Net, you can manage your data folders in subfolders in order to display them in different ways. You can, for example, create a subfolder for each sorting or filtering and compare them with each other. To manage your data folders using subfolders, perform the following steps: 1) 2) In the Data Folder window, right-click the item on which you want to create a subfolder. Choose the Create a folder option from the menu. A subfolder containing a copy of the original folder content is created. You can manage your data in subfolders as in the original folder. Every subfolder is associated with a data table window. You can display each subfolder on the map, by checking ( ) or not ( ) the check box associated with each subfolder. You can manage the visibility of the data. If you delete a subfolder, data is not deleted. If you delete the last remaining subfolder, its data go directly to the initial folder. Due to refresh considerations, it may happen that data disappear. To come back to the display of all objects of the folder, use the folders "group by none" function.

2.6.12 Reorganizing Data after Modifications

When some data is either added or modified, their properties may not be consistent with the current folder configuration. To make this configuration respected, you can

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-47

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

choose Apply Current Configuration from either the Records menu (for the in case of displayed table) or from its associated shortcut menu.

Note: The configuration is automatically applied to radio data dropped on the map. For example, the current configuration filters transmitters which azimuth is 240. We build a tri-sector station whose azimuth are 0, 120, and 240. Once dropped, 0 and 120 azimuth transmitters are automatically filtered. Only the 240 azimuth transmitter is kept.

2.6.13 Filtering Data in a Polygon

In large projects, it may be useful to work only on a certain number of sites and transmitters, in order to reduce the computation cost or to get clear visibility either on the map, table or in the data folder. To do this, you may either draw filtering polygon(s), or use polygon(s) of a vector layer as filtering zone. Table 2-21 lists the two methods of filtering data in a polygon. Table 2-21 Filtering data in a polygon Method 1) 2) Step Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Right-click the Sites folder to open the associated shortcut menu. 3) Method 1 4) 5) Select the Draw option. Draw the filtering polygon on the map with the mouse. Each click corresponds to an angle. 6) Close the zone by double-clicking (not displayed when closed). Choose the Filter inside a polygon command from the menu.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-48

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Method 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4)

Step Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Right-click the Sites folder to open the shortcut menu. Choose the Filter inside a polygon command from the menu. Select the Computation Zone (or focus zone) option. Only data (Sites and transmitters) contained in the considered polygon filter are kept.

The remaining objects in the polygon are displayed both in the data folders, in the data tables and on the map. The filtering polygon is distinguished from others by its characteristic thick blue border. This facilitates recognizing the filtering polygon on the map. In this zone, you may use current sorts, filters, or groups or create new ones.

Note: Filtering zone may be also created and managed from the Zones folder in the Geo tab. The U-Net offers you the same features as the one available for computation and focus zones (draw, import, export, resize, delete, and so on). It is possible to resize the filtering zone to fit the current visible area in the workspace. This provides a simple way of drawing a filtering zone. You can just adjust the zoom level as you like and select Automatically fit to Display command from the Filtering Zone shortcut menu.

During the operation, be careful with the following: A filtering zone may consist of several polygons. Draw a first polygon or select the existing zone on the map, then select the Combine tool on the Vector and draw another polygon. Edition bar In the same way, a filtering zone may be holed. Draw a polygon or select the existing zone on the map, then select the Delete tool on the Vector Edition bar and draw the part you want to remove from the polygon. Finally, if you have multi-polygons (set of linked polygons) in a vector layer, you may use them to create multi-filtering zones (Right-click the polygons and select the Use as filtering polygon command).

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-49

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

You may filter sites inside a polygon even if they are grouped. The filter is applied to subfolders. The filtering polygon(s) can be saved in a site folder configuration. This filter is automatically applied to transmitters. The filter is saved in the .atl document. The filter is taken into account when defining a configuration.

2.6.14 Removing the Polygon Filter

In the U-Net, radio data can be filtered in a polygon. As with other filters, this can be saved in folder configuration. Table 2-22 lists three ways of removing the polygon filter. Table 2-22 Removing the polygon filter Method 1) 2) Method 1 3) Step Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Right-click the Sites folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Choose the Remove polygon filter command from the menu. 1) Click the blue line (limit of the filter). The pointer becomes the position indicator ( ). Method 2 2) Right-click this limit to open the associated shortcut menu. 3) 1) Select the Delete zone command from the menu. In the Geo tab, right-click the filtering zone object to get the associated shortcut menu. Method 3 2) Select the Delete zone command from the open scrolling list. All existing data from the current project are then displayed.

2.7 Managing Display in the U-Net

This section describes the following: Defining the Display Properties of Any Item Folder Managing and Displaying Legends
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-50

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Thresholds, Colors and Legends Displaying Object Labels on the Map Using Tool Tips to Get Information

2.7.1 Defining the Display Properties of Any Item Folder

In the U-Net, most of the item groups (sites, transmitters, microwave links, predictions, simulations, measurements, DTM maps) are managed in the same way concerning their display. For each of them, a homogenized dialog box is available allowing you to define the type of field(s) to display, and how. Moreover, from this standard window, it is possible to display labels related to the displayed object, and to manage the information available using the tool tips when pointing the object on the workspace. Finally, you are able to choose or not to display the related legend in the Legend window. To access the display property window of any object, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the appropriate tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the folder related to the objects from which you want to manage the display properties. Click the Properties command from the shortcut menu. Click the Display tab from the open window. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Set the display parameters of the current object. Click OK.

When working on the display of an item folder (Site or Transmitter folder), it is possible to choose among several display types: Single: Refers to the same representation for any object of the folder. Discrete values: Refers to representation according to the value of a discrete field available in the table related to the current object(s). Values interval: Refers to representation according to the value of a numerical field available in the table related to the current object(s).

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-51

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Note: Whatever is the display type chosen, it is possible to change the displayed colors. To do that, select the threshold to modify and use the commands contained in the menu when clicking the button. You can modify globally thresholds and associated parameters using the values interval display type and the Shading... command (Actions button). Each individual display property is reachable by selecting the Display tab from the item Properties dialog.

2.7.2 Managing and Displaying Legends

Any displayed U-Net object may have its associated legend in the Legend window. To make the displayable legend associated with any object, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the appropriate tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the folder related to the objects from which you want to manage the legend properties. Click the Properties command from the shortcut menu. Click the Display tab from the open window. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Select the Add to legend box. Click OK. The associated legend is now displayed in the Legend window. To open the Legend window, just check the Legend command from the View menu in the menu bar. A new window is then displayed in the current environment.

Note: Only displayed objects can have their legends in the Legend window. The contents of the legend are given in the threshold window definition and are editable. The Legend window can be printed as any other active window. To do this, right-click it and select the Print... command in the shortcut menu.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-52

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

2.7.3 Thresholds, Colors and Legends

The thresholds associated with colors make up a range of criteria (below threshold from -45dBm to -70dBm). You can use this association to provide a colorimetric representation of received signal levels, path losses, or any other field displayed in values interval in the U-Net. The definition of thresholds can be performed by using the button of the U-Net generic display windows. The several commands are available are listed below: Select all: The U-Net automatically selects all the representations available in the table. Delete: The U-Net removes representations selected in the table. Insert before: This command is available only if a representation is selected in the table. The U-Net adds a new threshold in the table and places it before the selected one. Insert after: This command is available only if a representation is selected in the table. The U-Net adds a new threshold in the table and places it after the selected one. Properties: This command is available only after selecting one or several representations of the table. The U-Net opens the Display window where you may change color and style. Shading: The U-Net opens the Shading window. You can define the number of value intervals and configure their displays. Enter the highest (First break) and lowest (Last break) thresholds and an interval between thresholds. Define the color shading by choosing beginning and colors. Finally, you can select a coverage interior and a style of line for coverage contour. You can set coverage transparency by moving the cursor on the transparency scale and specify a visibility scale. If available, the legend associated with each threshold allows you to display a text instead of the threshold in the legend. If no text has been entered, thresholds are displayed with associated colors.

Figure 2-17 Defining thresholds

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-53

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

In the example above, in the case of the signal level option, the defined thresholds mean: Signal level >= 65 Signal level < -105 red (1st color from top) shading from red to blue (9 thresholds) not drawn on coverage.

65 > Signal level >= 105

Note: The Shading, Insert before and Insert after features are only available in case of a value intervals display type.

When double-clicking any representation in the table, the U-Net opens the associated Display window.

2.7.4 Displaying Object Labels on the Map

Two solutions are generally available in order to display information related to displayed objects on the map within the U-Net. This information can be either permanently displayed or temporarily reachable in a help popup related to any pointed object on the map. To make displayed permanently labels related to any object on the map, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the appropriate tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the folder related to the objects you want to display related labels on the map. Click the Properties command from the shortcut menu. Click the Display tab from the open window. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Check the items to be displayed in the Label menu. Click OK. The associated labels are now displayed on the map close to the specified objects. Note: You can display as many labels as parameters related to the considered object. For example, even if you add a new field in the transmitter table, this field is available to be displayed as a label for all the transmitters.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-54

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

2.7.5 Using Tool Tips to Get Information

Two solutions are generally available in order to display information related to displayed objects on the map within the U-Net. This information can be either permanently displayed or temporarily reachable in a help popup related to any pointed object on the map. To make available information related to any pointed object on the map, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the appropriate tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the folder related to the objects you want to display related tables on the map. Click the Properties command from the shortcut menu. Click the Display tab from the open window. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Check the items to be displayed in the Tips text menu. Click OK. The associated information can be now given in help pop-ups when pointing any item on the map with mouse. To make active the tips information, click click it again. on the toolbar. To inactivate this function,

Note: You can display as much information in pop-ups as parameters related to the considered object. For example, even if you add a new field in the transmitter table, this field is potentially available to be displayed in tip balloons.

2.8 Using Handy Tools

This section describes the following: Using the Undo/Redo Command Refreshing Maps and Folders Setting up a Document to Be Printed Locating Any Point on the Map Locating Any Site on the Map Locating any Vector on the Map Synchronizing Vector Selection and Data Table
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-55

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Using the Status Bar to Get Information Using Icons from the Tool Bar Using Shortcuts in the U-Net Scrolling Between Property Dialogs

2.8.1 Using the Undo/Redo Command

The Undo/Redo commands are available in the U-Net. It is the first step to enable users to undo and redo: Most of modifications performed in workspace as: creating, deleting and moving a site (even moving a site to a high point), a station or a group of stations, modifying antenna azimuth, moving a transmitter or deleting a transmitter. Management tasks performed in Explorer window as creating and deleting any object (site, transmitter, repeater/remote antenna, antenna, link, group of hexagons, measurement path, prediction study, map, propagation model) except simulations in UMTS projects. Management tasks performed in tables (add or delete records, paste in tables, fill down or fill up commands). The Undo/Redo is reachable from the Edit menu when available.

Note: The last 10 actions can be undone, unless you perform an action which is not supported by the undo feature. In that case, the undo memory is cancelled.

2.8.2 Refreshing Maps and Folders

A refresh function is available in the U-Net. This feature allows you to reload currently displayed maps and apply the current configurations to folders (after an addition of inconsistent data not respecting a filter). To do this, use the button on the toolbar or F5.

Note: This feature allows you to cancel some potential refresh problems of the map.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-56

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

2.8.3 Setting up a Document to Be Printed

In the U-Net, many windows can be printed: maps, tables, legend window, CW measurement window, test mobile data window, point analysis window. Concerning maps and tables, a preview feature is available. To open the print preview of any table or map, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Make active the window you want to print. Select the Print Preview command from the File menu. A Preview window (in which you can zoom in or zoom out) is displayed. Use the Print... or the Close command.

The way tables and maps are printed can also be managed easily in order to provide well-organized and customized printed outputs. To set up any table or map print, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Make active the window you want to set the print. Select the Page Setup... command from the File menu in the general menu bar. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. A fit representation of the print document is displayed and some options dealing with customization are available. 4) Click OK.

Note: The selected options (for example, erase outside of focus zone) are taken into account in print preview.

2.8.4 Locating Any Point on the Map

The U-Net provides a tool allowing you to find existing sites and vectors on the map and to locate any point on the map. You can search for a site or a vector according to any of its text type attributes. The first step consists in opening the Map locating dialog box. To open it, you can click the map locating icon on the tool bar.

The Map locating dialog consists of three parts for: Searching for a site Searching for a vector
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-57

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Locating any point The three find options cannot be used at the same time. Therefore, select one of them. To search for any point on the map, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Select the Point option. In the respective boxes, enter x-coordinate and y-coordinate of the point you want to find on the map. Keep the Draw point option selected. Click OK. The U-Net displays a target on the map and centers the map on it.

Note: To hide the target, right-click it and select the Delete command from the shortcut menu.

2.8.5 Locating Any Site on the Map

I. Search Bar
A search bar is available to find the location of sites on the map. The search bar can be open or closed by selecting the Search bar command in the View menu. This bar becomes a floating window by double-clicking it. In this case, it is possible to resize it. Table 2-23 lists the two methods of searching an existing site in a networking using the search site tool. Table 2-23 Searching an existing site in a networking using the search site tool Method Step 1) In the Search bar, type the first characters of the site name in the Find site box. Method 1 The U-Net displays a scrolling list containing all the sites, whose name begins with this string of characters. 2) Select the site in the list.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-58

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Method

Step 1) In the Search bar, type the first characters of the site name in the Find site box. The U-Net displays a scrolling list containing all the sites, whose name begins with this string of characters.

Method 2

2) Go on typing the site name to reduce the number of sites in the list. After choosing the site in the list, the U-Net automatically centers the map on the selected site.

Note: As with advanced filters, it is possible to use the "contains" (*string*) and "begins with" (string*) criteria to search for sites which name contains or begins with the given string. Be careful, *string is unknown. Use the F3 to place the site automatically in the Find site box.

II. Find Site

The U-Net provides a tool that enables you to quickly find existing sites and vectors on the map and to locate any point on the map. It is possible to search for a site or a vector according to any of its text type attributes. The first step is to open the Map locating dialog. To open it, you can click the map locating icon ( for: ) on the toolbar. The Map locating dialog consists of the three parts

Searching for a site Searching for a vector Locating any point The three find options cannot be used at once. Therefore, select one of them. Then this tool works like the "Find site" tool. Table 2-24 lists two ways to search for any site on the map.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-59

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Table 2-24 Searching for any site on the map Method 1) 2) Select the Site option. Open the Field menu and choose in the list one text field (among the text type attributes of sites). 3) Method 1 In the box below, type the first characters for the selected attribute (name or a comment for example). The U-Net displays a scrolling list containing all the values, which begins with this string of characters, and gives into brackets the name of corresponding sites. 4) 1) 2) Select a value in the list. Select the Site option. Open the Field menu and choose in the list one text field (among the text type attributes of sites). 3) In the box below, type the first characters for the selected attribute (name or a comment for example). The U-Net displays a scrolling list containing all the Method 2 values, which begins with this string of characters, and gives into brackets the name of corresponding sites. 4) 5) Go on typing to reduce the number of values. After choosing the value in the list, click OK. The U-Net automatically centers the map on the site with the selected value. Step

Note: As with advanced filters, it is possible to use the "contains" (*string*) and "begins with" (string*) criteria to search for sites, which selected field contains or begins with the given string. Be careful, *string is unknown. By default, if a filter is already applied to sites, the U-Net only searches for sites among the filtered ones. In order for the U-Net to search for all the sites of the document (not only the filtered ones), you can check the option Take into account non-filtered sites.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-60

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

2.8.6 Locating any Vector on the Map

The U-Net provides a tool which enables you to quickly find existing sites and vectors on the map and to locate any point on the map. It is possible to search for a site or a vector according to any of its text type attributes. The first step consists in opening the Map locating dialog. To open it, you can click the map locating icon ( parts dedicated to: Searching for a site Searching for a vector Locating any point The three find options cannot be used at once. Therefore, select one of them. Table 2-25 lists the two methods of searching for any vector on the map. Table 2-25 Searching for any vector on the map Method 1) 2) Step Select the Vector option. Open the Field menu and choose in the list one text field (among the text type attributes of sites). 3) Method 1 In the box below, type the first characters for the selected attribute (name or a comment for example). The U-Net displays a scrolling list containing all the values, which begins with this string of characters, and gives into brackets the name of corresponding sites. 4) 1) 2) Select a value in the list. Select the Vector option. Open the Field menu and choose in the list one text field (among the text type attributes of sites). 3) In the box below, type the first characters for the selected attribute (name or a comment for example). Method 2 The U-Net displays a scrolling list containing all the values, which begins with this string of characters, and gives into brackets the name of corresponding sites. 4) 5) Go on typing to reduce the number of values. After choosing the value in the list, click OK. The U-Net automatically centers the map on the site with the selected value. ) on the tool bar. The Map locating dialog consists in three

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-61

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Note: As in advanced filters, it is possible to use the "contains" (*string*) and "begins with" (string*) criteria to search for sites, which selected field contains or begins with the given string. Be careful, *string is unknown.

2.8.7 Synchronizing Vector Selection and Data Table

The vectors are made of points containing some attributes/properties. They can be geo data vectors, CW measurement paths, or test mobile data paths and related to a table in which is displayed the properties of each point. When selecting a point composing a vector, if the data table is displayed at the same time, the U-Net synchronize automatically both. Indeed, the tool selects in the table the records related to the selected point on the map.

Note: When working on a measurement path, you can use the specific CW measurement window with this feature. When moving with the pointer along the path, the selection in the table is automatically made.

2.8.8 Using the Status Bar to Get Information

The status bar is one of the different objects that can be displayed by using the View menu. When checked, the status bar is located at the measurement tool ( on the toolbar). button

The right part displays the following information about the location where points the mouse on the map: X and Y coordinates (respecting the defined display coordinate system) Altitude (extracted from the imported DTM file) Clutter class (as defined in the clutter classes property dialog) Clutter height (extracted from clutter height file(s) if available in your .atl document, or otherwise read in the clutter classes folder description)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-62

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Note: It is possible not to display altitude, clutter class and clutter height information on the status bar. To do this, add the syntax described below in a U-Net.ini file.
[StatusBar] DisplayZ=0 DisplayClutterClass=0 DisplayClutterHeight=0

You must create this file and place it in the U-Net installation directory. It is read only when the U-Net is started. Therefore, it is necessary to close the U-Net session and to restart it in order to take into account any modification performed in the U-Net.ini.

2.8.9 Using Icons from the Tool Bar

The U-Net provides a large number of commands that can be accessible using icons located in the tool bar. Some of them are also linked to shortcut keys. Table 2-26 lists the different icons located on the standard toolbar. Table 2-26 Different icons located on the standard toolbar Icon Meaning Opens the new project dialog (like the Ctrl+N shortcuts) Accesses the Open file dialog (like the Ctrl+O shortcuts) Saves the current active project (like the Ctrl+S shortcuts) Cuts the selected data (like the Ctrl+X shortcuts) Copies the selected data (like the Ctrl+C shortcuts) Pastes the content of the clipboard (like the Ctrl+V shortcuts) Prints the current active window (table or map) (like the Ctrl+P shortcuts) Opens the About U-Net dialog

Table 2-27 lists the different icons located on the radio toolbar.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-63

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Table 2-27 Different icons located on the radio toolbar Icon Meaning Creates a new station based on the currently selected model Creates a new group of hexagons based on the currently selected station template ( no hexagon radius defined)

Station model currently selected Creates a new repeater/remote antenna related to the currently selected transmitter Neighbor graphic management for the selected transmitter Activates the point analysis window Calculates only invalid matrices, calculate all unlocked coverage and pending simulations (like the F7 shortcut) Forces the calculation of all the matrices from scratch, calculate all unlocked coverage and pending simulations (like the Ctrl+F7 shortcuts)

Table 2-28 lists the different icons located on the map toolbar. Table 2-28 Different icons located on the map toolbar Icon Meaning Activates the area selection tool Reloads map and folders (like the F5 shortcut) Disables the zooming and panning tools Move the map window (like the Ctrl+D shortcuts) Map scale currently used Previous/Next view (zoom and location) Zooms in on the map and center on the cursor location (like the Ctrl+A shortcuts) and zoom out on the map and center on the cursor location (like the Ctrl+R shortcuts)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-64

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Icon

Meaning Defines a zoom area on the map (like the Ctrl+W shortcuts) Activates the tip tool feature Gets distances on the map Activates the map locating tool in order to locate any point, site or vector Displays point-to-point profile analysis

Table 2-29 lists the different icons located on the microwave link toolbar. Table 2-29 Different icons located on the microwave link toolbar Icon Meaning Creates a new microwave link Creates a new multi-hop microwave link Creates a new multipoint-to-hop multipoint microwave link Currently selected microwave link model Activates the microwave link profile analysis window Shows and hides victim and interferer links Shows and hides site parities

Table 2-30 lists the icon located on the search toolbar. Table 2-30 Icon located on the search toolbar Icon Meaning Centers In The Map window around the selected site

Table 2-31 lists the icons located on the vector edition toolbar.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-65

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Table 2-31 Icons located on the vector edition toolbar Icon Meaning Creates a new vector layer (either in the Geo or in the Data tab) Selects the vector layer being currently edited Draws a new vector polygon Draws a new vector line Draws points Allows the user to merge several vector polygons Allows the user to make holes in polygons Permits to keep only overlapping areas in order to create the resulting polygon Allows the user to cut a polygon in several parts

Note: The description of each icon is given in a tip balloon when you point the mouse on it.

2.8.10 Using Shortcuts in the U-Net

Like many other applications working in Windows environment, the U-Net provides a complete set of shortcuts in order to make easier and quicker the way to use it. The different available shortcuts are listed below (some of them are linked with icons of the toolbar). Table 2-32 lists the shortcuts containing Ctrl. Table 2-32 Using Ctrl Shortcut Ctrl+A Ctrl+C Usage Selects all records in tables (table active) or zoom in the map (like click the map when the Copies the selected data (like
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-66

tool is active) icon on the toolbar)

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Shortcut

Usage Fills down selected data in tables (table active) or Move

Ctrl+D

the map window (map active - like toolbar) Opens the find in tables dialog Opens the new project dialog (like toolbar) Accesses the Open file dialog (like toolbar)

icon on the

Ctrl+F Ctrl+N

icon on the

Ctrl+O

icon on the

Ctrl+P Ctrl+Q Ctrl+R

Prints the current active window (table or map) (like icon on the toolbar) Activates the zoom in/out tool Zooms out on the map (like right-click the map when the tool is active) Saves the current active project (like toolbar) icon on the

Ctrl+S Ctrl+U Ctrl+V

Fills down selected data in tables (table active) Pastes the content of the clipboard (like toolbar) icon on the

Ctrl+W Ctrl+X Ctrl+Y Ctrl+Z

Defines a zoom area on the map (map active) (like icon on the toolbar) Cuts the selected data (like icon on the toolbar)

Redoes the previous undone function Undoes the last function

Table 2-33 lists the shortcuts containing F. Table 2-33 Using F Shortcut F3 F5 Usage Locates the cursor directly within the search site tool Reloads map and folders (like
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-67

icon on the toolbar)

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

Shortcut

Usage Calculates only invalid matrices, calculate all unlocked

F7

coverage and pending simulations (like toolbar)

icon on the

Forces the calculation of all matrices from scratch, Ctrl+F7 calculate all unlocked coverage and pending simulations (like icon on the toolbar)

Note: When a letter is underlined in a command (Use the Alt button to make underlines active in Windows 2000), press Alt+letter to run it.

2.8.11 Scrolling Between Property Dialogs

It is possible to switch between the properties of items (transmitters, antennas, sites, services, user profiles) listed under a folder (or subfolder) in the Explorer window using the ( dialogs. The functions of the buttons are listed below: : First item in the list : Previous item in the list : Next item in the list : Last item in the list The buttons and (or and ) are disabled when viewing the first (or ) buttons available in the bottom left corner of the properties

last) item. If modifications have been made in the properties of any item before switching to the next properties, the U-Net prompts the user to confirm whether these modifications should be applied or cancelled. This tool is quite handy, for example, for accessing the properties of co-site transmitters with a single click without closing and reopening the properties dialog. Scrolling is performed within the deepest subfolder. For example:

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-68

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 2 Working Environment

If transmitters are grouped by site, it is possible to scroll within one site (co-site transmitters). If transmitters are grouped by a flag, it is possible to scroll within this group. If transmitters are grouped by activity and by a flag, it is possible to scroll within transmitters having the same activity and the same flag. These buttons are not available when creating a new item or opening the properties dialog of an item by double-clicking the relative record in a table. Moreover, these buttons are not available for repeater properties and propagation model properties dialogs.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-69

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

3.1 Overview
The U-Net manages several geographic data types and supports several file formats in relation to data type. DTM (Digital Terrain Model) Clutter classes (land use) Clutter heights (over the DTM) Scanned images Vector data Population data Generic data To manage geographic data type, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Define geographic coordinate systems. Import geographic data (DTM, clutter classes and heights, scanned images, vector data, population data). Create your own clutter class (and traffic raster - in GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS, or CDMA/CDMA2000) maps using the cartography editor. The U-Net lists the imported DTM, clutter class and height or traffic objects in their respective folder and creates a separate folder for each imported vector data and scanned image. Once theses folder are created (Traffic description is linked with radio data depending on the project type - even if present in the Geo tab of the U-Net environment), you may manage them (display, data location managing, clutter class description) easily. It is also possible to display vector objects over coverage by importing/transferring these objects directly in the Data tab. The U-Net also provides some features dealing with data priority like multi-layer management and multi-resolution management. Some editing tools for raster or vector objects are also available. Moreover, most of the geographic data objects can be exported in external files (DTM, clutter classes, clutter heights, raster polygons, and vector layers). Finally, maps can be exported as an image in external files, or in other applications.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-1

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

3.2 Geo Data Type Supported

Several geographic data types are listed below: DTM Clutter classes (land use) Clutter heights (over the DTM) Scanned images Vector data Population data Generic data They are supported within the U-Net. For all of these, different file formats are supported.

I. DTM (Digital Terrain Model)

The DTM (Digital Terrain Model) files describe the ground elevation. The DTM geographic data is an 8 or 16 bits/pixel relief map. The U-Net is able to display this raster map in different ways: single value, discrete values, values interval. The DTM and DEM are systematically taken into account in computation by propagation model.

Note: In most documents, digital elevation model (DEM) and digital terrain model (DTM) are differentiated and do not have the same meaning. By definition, DEM refers to altitude above sea level including both ground and clutter while DTM just corresponds to the ground height above sea level.

II. Clutter Class (For Land Use)

The clutter class files describe the land cover (dense urban, buildings, residential, forest, open, villages). The ground is represented by a grid map where each bin corresponds to a code allocated to a main type of cover (a clutter class). According to the classification, the clutter is either statistical if the number of clutter classes depends on the housing density or determinist if the number of clutter classes depends on the cover altitude. The altitude per class can be defined in the clutter class property dialog. In that case, only one altitude refers to each clutter class. It is also possible to use a clutter height map.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-2

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

The clutter class maps are 8 bits/pixel (256 classes-raster maps). They define an image with a color assigned to each clutter class (by default, grey shading).

Note: Clutter heights are taken into account only using the standard propagation model and WLL model.

III. Clutter Heights

The clutter height maps are complementary to clutter classes, in a way such that they can deliver more precise information about the clutter altitudes, since it is possible to have different heights for the same class of clutter within one clutter class. As in clutter classes, clutter heights indicates, on each bin, the clutter altitude over the DTM. When clutter altitude is defined both in the clutter class and the clutter height folders, the information is taken in from the latter. Clutter heights are taken first if they exist (in measurements, computations, display). The clutter height maps are 16 bits per pixel. They give one altitude per pixel and can be managed like DTM/DEM maps. The U-Net can display the clutter height map in the following different ways: Single value Discrete values Values interval

Note: Clutter heights are taken into account only using the standard propagation model and WLL model.

IV. Vector Layers

This type of data represents either polygons (such as areas), lines (such as roads, coastlines), or points (such as important locations). The vector layers are used for the display only and have no effect on computations.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-3

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Polygons can be used for filtering purpose or for the creation of computation and focus zones. Whatever their shape is, it is possible to create a vector layer by using the vector editor. Any formation/attribute contained in the vector can be used as a display parameter (name, zip code, user profile). Vectors can be used to generate CDMA/CDMA2000 or WCDMA/UMTS/HSDPA traffic maps.

Note: Since vector maps (like scanned images) have no effect on computation, it is possible to group all maps working like this within a unique display folder, and to make their management easier.

V. Scanned Images
This type of data (1-24 bits/pixel) regroups the road maps and the satellite images. The scanned images are only used for display and help the user locate precisely objects in the real field.

Note: Since scanned images (like vector maps) have no effect on computation, it is possible to group all maps working like this within a unique display folder, and to make their management easier.

VI. Population Maps

Population maps are built using created from 8-32 bits/pixel files in which information on population density or the number of inhabitants is given. It is possible to combine several types of files (such as 8 or 16-bit raster files, vector files) to extract the needed information from them. The population maps can be used in prediction reports to display, for example, the absolute and relative numbers of the population covered. The population maps have no effect on prediction and simulation results.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-4

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

VII. Generic Maps

The generic map feature is developed to import any type of geo data in term of any advanced map. For example, it is now possible to import any raster/vector file and to use it as a revenue, rainfall or socio-demographic map. As in the population map, it is possible to mix several types of files (such as 8 or 16 bits raster, vectors) to extract from them the needed information. It is also potentially possible to use this information in prediction reports. For example, in a revenue map, it is possible to display the revenue value for coverage. The generic maps have no effect on prediction and simulation results.

VIII. Traffic Data

According to the project type you start, the U-Net proposes different kinds of traffic data. In any project, you can import or create traffic of 8 bits/pixel (256 classes-raster maps). For each bin of the map, a code linked with a particular environment class is assigned (density of user profiles with associated mobility) for UMTS, CDMA and CDMA2000 projects or a traffic density (Erlang/km) in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects. The raster maps are macroscopic traffic estimation. In the UMTS, CDMA/CDMA2000 projects, you can additionally use traffic vector maps and traffic maps per transmitter and per service. Vector maps detail traffic estimations (lines or polygons may have a specific traffic). Each polygon or line is related to a specific user profile with associated mobility and density. They can be built from population density vector maps. When traffic is actual information on connections (and no longer subscriber estimation), coming from the network and dealing with rates per transmitter and service, it is possible to create and use traffic maps based on this network feedback. They are built from coverage by transmitter prediction.

3.3 Length/Height/Offset Units and Coordinate Systems

This section describes the following: Setting Default Length/Height/Offset Units Basic Concepts Defining the Projection Coordinate System Defining the Display Coordinate System Selecting Degrees Display Format Creating Your Own Coordinate System

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-5

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

3.3.1 Setting Default Length/Height/Offset Units

In the U-Net, it is possible to define a default length/height/offset units that is used in the following dialog fields (not in tables). Lengths are used for calculation radius in transmitter and station template properties or hexagon radius in station template properties, and when using the Distance measurement button. Heights are used when reading the altitudes of sites, transmitters, DTM. Offset units are used to define transmitter Dx and Dy from the related site location. To define a default length/height/offset units in an already open project, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Tools menu on the toolbar. Choose the Options... command from the open menu. Click the Units tab. Choose in the drop-down list the default units for the current .atl U-Net project.

Note: We can distinguish the display unit as described above from the internal unit. The internal unit cannot be changed by the user. In any case (.atl project connected to a database or not), the internal length unit is the meter. When environments are connected to a database, display and internal unit systems are stored in the database: The internal unit is used as the length (height or offset) unit in the database, The display unit is memorized and taken into account when opening a project from the database.

3.3.2 Basic Concepts in Coordinate System

A map or a geospatial database is a flat representation of data located on a curved surface. A projection is a device for producing all or part of a round body on a flat sheet. This projection cannot be done without distortion, thus the cartographer must choose the characteristic (distance, direction, scale, area or shape) which is to be shown appropriately at the expense of the other characteristics, or compromise on several characteristics. The projected zones are referenced using cartographic coordinates (meter, yard). Table 3-1 lists the widely-used two projection systems.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-6

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Table 3-1 Projection system Projection system Description A portion of the earth is mathematically projected on a cone conceptually secant at one or two Lambert projection conformal-conic standard parallels. This projection type is useful for representing countries or regions that have a predominant east-west expanse. A portion of the earth is mathematically projected Universal transverse on a cylinder tangent to a meridian (which is transverse or crosswise to the equator). This projection type is useful for mapping large areas that are oriented north-south.

mercator projection (UTM)

The geographic system is not a projection, but a representation of a location on the earth's surface from geographic coordinates (degree-minute-second or grade) giving the latitude and longitude in relation to the origin meridian (Paris for NTF system and Greenwich for ED50 system). The locations in the geographic system can be converted into other projections. The U-Net integrates two databases including more than 980 international coordinate system references, a database based on the European Petroleum Survey Group and another one regrouping only France's coordinate systems. The U-Net distinguishes the cartographic coordinate systems for projection and either cartographic or geographic coordinate systems for display. The maps displayed in the workspace are referenced in a particular projection system intrinsic to the imported geographic data files. Thus, the projection system depends on the imported geographic file. By choosing a specific display system, you may see (using the rulers or status bars) the location of sites on the map in a coordinate system different from the projection coordinate system. You may also position on the map sites referenced in the display system: The coordinates are automatically converted in the projection system and The site is displayed on the map. In Figure 3-1, the French Riviera geographic data file has been imported. The map shows the French Riviera projected using the cartographic NTF (Paris)/France II

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-7

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

tendue system (coordinates in metres). On the other hand, site coordinates are stated in the geographic WGS 72 system (coordinates in degrees-minutes-seconds).

Figure 3-1 NTF (Paris)/France II tendue system used with WGS 72 system

Note: All the imported raster geographic files must be referenced in the same cartographic system. If not, you need to convert them in a unique one. By default, the projection and display systems are the same.

3.3.3 Defining the Projection Coordinate System

To define the projection coordinate system, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Select Tools > Options.... Click the Coordinates tab from the open window. to the right of the Projection field. Click the browse button Use What's this help to get further description about the fields available in the window. Select a catalogue and choose a coordinate system in the related table. Characteristics of the selected system are described when you click the Properties button. 6) Click OK.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-8

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Note: You can add the selected coordinate system to a catalogue of favourite systems by using the button.

When exporting a U-Net project in a database, the currently chosen display coordinate system becomes the internal one. Default systems cannot be modified.

3.3.4 Defining the Display Coordinate System

To define the display coordinate system, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Select Tools > Options.... Click the Coordinates tab from the open window. to the right of the Display field. Click the browse button Use What's this help to get further description about the fields available in the window. Select a catalogue and choose a coordinate system in the related table. Characteristics of the selected system are described when you click the Properties button. 6) Click OK.

Note: If the display coordinate system is cartographic, X and Y respectively correspond to abscissa and ordinate. If the display coordinate system is geographic, X and Y respectively refer to longitude and latitude. Cartographic systems are identified by the whereas geographic ones are symbolized by symbol to the left of the systems, .

You can add the selected coordinate system to a catalogue of favourite systems by using the button.

Default systems cannot be modified.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-9

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

3.3.5 Selecting Degrees Display Format

To facilitate the comprehension, use and functioning with other software tools, the U-Net is capable of displaying the longitudes and latitudes in four different formats. This is helpful when exchanging data with other tools and enables the U-Net to adapt it to different working environments. The followings are examples of the different longitude/latitude display methods available: 265629.9N 26d56m29.9sN 26.93914N +26.93914 To select the desired degrees display format, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Tools menu. Open the Options... window. Select the degrees format from the menu on the Coordinates tab. Click OK.

Note: The different degrees display formats are available only for the geographic coordinate systems, since there is no concept of longitudes and latitudes in the cartographic coordinate systems.

3.3.6 Creating Your Own Coordinate System

Caution: For easier management and to avoid any confusion, give a unique name to the created coordinate systems.

The U-Net provides a large catalogue of default coordinate systems. Nevertheless, it is possible to add the description of geographic and cartographic coordinate systems. The new coordinate system can be created from scratch or initialised on the basis of an existing one. Table 3-2 lists two methods of creating a new coordinate system.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-10

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Table 3-2 Creating a new coordinate system Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Step Select Tools > Options.... Click the Coordinates tab from the open window. Click the browse button Projection or Display field. Click New. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the window, 6) Choose the catalogue where you want to store the new coordinate system. 7) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6) Click New. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the window. 7) Choose the catalogue where you want to store the new coordinate system. 8) Click OK. Click OK. Select Tools > Options.... Click the Coordinates tab from the open window, Click the browse button Projection or Display field. to the right of the to the right of the

Method 1

Select a catalogue and choose a coordinate system in the related table.

Geographic coordinate system (represented by

) is a latitude and longitude

coordinate system. The latitude and longitude are related to an ellipsoid, a geodetic datum and a prime meridian. The geodetic datum provides the position and orientation of the ellipsoid relative to the earth. A cartographic coordinate system (represented by ) is obtained using a

transformation method which converts a (latitude, longitude) into an (easting, northing). Therefore, to define a projection system, you must specify the geographic coordinate system supplying longitude and latitude and the transformation method characterized by a set of parameters. Different methods may require different sets of parameters. For example, the parameters required to define the projected transverse mercator coordinate system are:
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-11

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Longitude of the natural origin (Central meridian) Latitude of the natural origin False Easting value False Northing value A scale factor at the natural origin (on the central meridian) In the General part, type a name, choose a unit in the menu (to open it, select the cell and click the arrow), and define the usage. In the Category part, choose in the Type menu (to open it, select the cell and click the arrow) either Long/Lat to create a geographic coordinate system, or a type of projection and its set of associated parameters for cartographic coordinate systems. In the Geo part, specify the meridian and choose an existing datum in the Datum menu (to open it, select the cell and click the arrow). The associated ellipsoid is automatically selected. You can also describe a geodetic datum by selecting "..." in the Datum menu. In this case, you must provide parameters (Dx, Dy, Dz, Rx, Ry, Rz and s) needed for the transformation of datum into WGS84 and an ellipsoid.

Note: An identification code enables the U-Net to differentiate the existing coordinate systems. In case of new created coordinate systems, assigned codes are integer values strictly higher than 32767. Management in the coordinate system folder is possible. For details about the process description, refer to the Technical Guide.

3.4 Supported Geo Data Formats

Caution: All raster maps to be imported must be represented in the same projection coordinate system (cartographic only).

This section describes the following: BIL Data Format TIFF Data Format DXF Data Format
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-12

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

SHP Data Format MIF Data Format Erdas Imagine Data Format ECW Data Format Other Supported Formats The U-Net offers import filters for the most commonly used geographic data formats. The following can be imported by using these filters: DTM Clutter class Traffic Vector files Scanned images Table 3-3 lists the details of filters. Table 3-3 Filters File Format It contains: DTM (8 or 16 bits) Clutter heights (16 bits) BIL Clutter classes (8 bits) Traffic (8 bits) Image (1-24 bits) Population (8-32 bits) Generic (8-32 bits) It contains: DTM Clutter height TIFF Classes Traffic Image Population Generic With associated .tfw files if they exist Yes. Yes. With .hdr files Contents Georeferenced

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-13

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

File Format It contains: DTM

Contents

Georeferenced

Clutter height PlaNET Clutter classes Traffic Image Text Vector data It contains: DTM Clutter height BMP Clutter classes Traffic Image Population Generic It contains: Vector data DXF Vector traffic Population Generic It contains: Vector data SHP Vector traffic Population Generic Yes Yes Yes. With .bmw files Yes. With index files

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-14

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

File Format It contains:

Contents

Georeferenced

Vector data MIF/MID Vector traffic Population Generic It contains: DTM Clutter height IST Clutter classes Traffic Image Population Generic It contains: DTM Clutter height Erdas Imagine Clutter classes Traffic Image population Generic Yes. ECW Image Automatically embedded in the data file Automatically embedded in the data file Yes. Yes With .hdr files Yes

Note: The .wld files may be used as geo-referencement file for any type of raster file.

Thus, you can import:

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-15

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

DTM files with TIFF (8 or 16 bit), BIL (8 or 16 bit), IST (8 or 16 bit), PlaNET, BMP (8 bit) and Erdas Imagine (8 or 16 bit) formats. Clutter heights files with TIFF (8 or 16 bit), BIL (8 or 16 bit), IST (8 or 16 bit), PlaNET, BMP (8 bit) and Erdas Imagine (8 or 16 bit) formats. Clutter classes and traffic files with TIFF (8 bit), BIL (8 bit), IST (8 bit), BMP (8 bit), PlaNET, and Erdas Imagine (8 bit) formats. Vector data files with DXF, PlaNET, SHP and MIF formats. Vector traffic files with DXF, PlaNET, SHP and MIF formats. Scanned image files with TIFF (1-24 bit), BIL (1-24 bit), IST (1-24 bit), BMP (1-24 bit), PlaNET and Erdas Imagine (1-24 bit), ECW (8 or 24 bit) formats. Population with TIFF (16 bit), BIL (16 bit), IST (16 bit), PlaNET, BMP (16 bit), Erdas Imagine (16 bit), DXF, SHP and MIF formats. Generic data with TIFF (16 bit), BIL (16 bit), IST (16 bit), PlaNET, BMP (16 bit), Erdas Imagine (16 bit), DXF, SHP and MIF formats.

Note: The use of compressed formats (tiff compressed or Erdas Imagine) on geo data (such as DTM or Clutter) can lead to slow processes because of the decompression in real time. To avoid this effect, it is strongly recommended to perform either of the followings: Deactivate the status bar which provides geo data information in real time. To do this, untick the Status Bar option in the View menu. Not display some information such as altitude, clutter class and clutter height in the status bar. To do this, add the syntax described below in a U-Net.ini file.
[StatusBar] DisplayZ=0 DisplayClutterClass=0 DisplayClutterHeight=0

You must create this file and place it in the U-Net installation directory. It is read only when the U-Net is started. Therefore, it is necessary to close the U-Net session and to restart it to take into account any modification performed in the U-Net.ini. It is also possible to save the produced map in a non-compressed format.

3.4.1 BIL Data Format

Band Interleaved by Line is a method of organizing image data for multiband images. it is a schema for storing the actual pixel values of an image in a file. The pixel data is typically preceded by a file header that contains ancillary data about image, such as
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-16

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

the number of rows and columns in the image, a color map BIL data stores pixel information band by band for each line, or row, of the image. Although BIL is a data organization schema, it is treated as an image format. An image description (number of rows and columns, number of bands, number of bits per pixel, byte order, and so on) has to be provided to be able to display the BIL file. This information is included in the header HDR file associated with the BIL file. A HDR file has the same name as the BIL file it references, and should be located in the same directory as the source file. The HDR structure is simple, and it is an ASCII text file that contains eleven lines. You can open a HDR file using any ASCII text editor. The parameters defined in .hdr files are detailed in the technical reference guide.

3.4.2 TIFF Data Format

The tagged image file format graphics filter supports all image types (monochrome, grey scale, palette color, and RGB full color images) and pack bit or fax group 3-4 compressions. The TIFF files are not systematically geo-referenced. In this case, you will have to enter spatial references of the image manually during the import procedure (x and y-axis map coordinates of the center of the upper-left pixel, pixel size); an associated file with TFW extension will be simultaneously created with the same name and in the same directory as the TIFF file it references. The U-Net then uses the .tfw file during the import procedure for an automatic Geo-reference. The TFW file contains the spatial reference data of an associated TIFF file. The TFW file structure is simple, and it is an ASCII text file that contains six lines. You can open a TFW file using any ASCII text editor. The parameters defined in .tfw files are detailed in the technical reference guide.

Note: The U-Net also supports TIFF files using the Packbit, FAX-CCITT3 and LZW compression modes.

For customers working out the TIFF coverage prediction files exported by the U-Net with GIS tools, an option is available to modify the color palette convention used by the U-Net. In the default palette, the first color indexes represent the useful information and the remaining color indexes represent the background.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-17

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

It is possible to export a TIFF file with a palette containing at the color index 0, the background color, and following, the color indexes necessary to represent useful information. To set up the new palette convention, add these lines in the U-Net.ini file:
[TiffExport] PaletteConvention=Gis

To be taken into account, the file must be located in the U-Net installation directory. This file is read only when the U-Net is started. Therefore, it is necessary to close the U-Net session and to restart it to take into account any modification performed in the U-Net.ini.

Note: The use of compressed formats (tiff compressed or Erdas Imagine) on geo data (such as DTM or Clutter) can lead to slow processes because of the decompression in real time. To avoid this effect, it is strongly recommended to perform either of the following: Deactivate the status bar which provides geo data information in real time. To do this, untick the Status Bar option in the View menu. Not display some information such as altitude, clutter class and clutter height in the status bar. To do this, add the syntax described below in a U-Net.ini file.
[StatusBar] DisplayZ=0 DisplayClutterClass=0 DisplayClutterHeight=0

You must create this file and place it in the U-Net installation directory. It is read only when the U-Net is started. Therefore, it is necessary to close the U-Net session and to restart it to take into account any modification performed in the U-Net.ini. It is also possible to save the produced map in a non-compressed format.

3.4.3 DXF Data Format

The drawing interchange format (DXF) enables the interchange of drawings between AutoCAD and the U-Net. DXF files can be either ASCII or binary formats, but only the first type is used in the U-Net. Essentially a DXF file is composed of pairs of codes and associated values. The codes, known as group codes, indicate the type of value that follows. Using these
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-18

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

group code and value pairs, a DXF file is organized into sections, which are composed of records, which in turn are composed of a group code and a data item. Each group code and value are on their own line in the DXF file. Each section starts with a group code 0 followed by the string, SECTION. This is followed by a group code 2 and a string indicating the name of the section (for example, HEADER). Each section is composed of group codes and values that define its elements. A section ends with a 0 followed by the string ENDSEC.

3.4.4 SHP Data Format

ESRI (Environmental Systems Research Institute, Inc.) ArcView GIS (Geographic Information System) Shapefiles are a simple, non-topological format for storing the geometric location and attribute information of geographic features. A shapefile is one of the spatial data formats that you can work with in ArcExplorer. The shp data files are commonly associated with two other files with .shx and .dbf extensions. A quick description of the 3 files is given below: .shp: Refer to the file that stores the feature geometry. .shx: Refer to the file that stores the index of the feature geometry. .dbf: Refer to the dBASE file that stores the attribute information of features. When a shapefile is added as a theme to a view, this file is displayed as a feature table.

3.4.5 MIF Data Format

MIF (MapInfo Interchange Format) is a format allowing generic data to be attached to a variety of graphical items. These ASCII files are editable, relatively easy to generate, and work on all platforms supported by MapInfo. Vector objects may be imported in the U-Net with a MIF extension. MapInfo data are contained in two files with .MIF and MID. extensions. Graphics reside in a .MIF file and textual data is contained in a .MID file. The textual data is delimited data, with one row per record and Carriage Return, Carriage Return plus Line Feed, or Line Feed between lines. The MIF file has two areas -- the file header area and the data section. The MID file is an optional file. When there is no MID file, all fields are blank.

3.4.6 Erdas Imagine Data Format

The U-Net is able to support Erdas Imagine data files to import DTM (8 or 16 bit/pixel), clutter (8 bit/pixel), traffic (8 bit/pixel) and image (1-24 bit/pixel) files with the .img format. These files use the Erdas Imagine Hierarchical File Format (HFA) structure.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-19

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

For any type of file, if there are pyramids (storage of different resolution layers), they are used to enhance performance when decreasing the resolution of the display. The U-Net supports uncompressed as well as compressed (or partially compressed) DTM .img files. You can create a .mnu file to improve the clutter class map loading. The association color-code (raster maps) may be automatically imported from the .img file. These files are auto geo-referenced. For example, they do not need any extra file for geo-reference. For image files, the number of supported bands is either 1 (color palette is defined separately) or 3 (no color palette but direct RGB information for each pixel). In case of 3 bands, only 8 bit per pixel format is supported. Therefore, 8-bit images, containing RGB information (three bands are provided: the first band is for Blue, the second one is for Green and the third for Red), can be considered as 24 bit per pixel files. 32 bit per pixel files are not supported.

Note: The use of compressed formats (tiff compressed or Erdas Imagine) on geo data (DTM or Clutter) can lead to slow processes because of the decompression in real time. To avoid this effect, it is strongly recommended to perform the following: Deactivate the status bar which provides geo data information in real time. To do this, untick the Status Bar option in the View menu. Not display some information such as altitude, clutter class and clutter height in the status bar. To do this, add the syntax described below in a U-Net.ini file.
[StatusBar] DisplayZ=0 DisplayClutterClass=0 DisplayClutterHeight=0

You must create this file and place it in the U-Net installation directory. It is read only when the U-Net is started. Therefore, it is necessary to close the U-Net session and to restart it to take into account any modification performed in the U-Net.ini. It is also possible to save the produced map in a non-compressed format.

3.4.7 ECW Data Format

The U-Net is capable of supporting the Enhanced Compressed Wavelet file format to import geo-referenced image files. This is an open standard wavelet compression technology developed by Earth Resource Mapping that can compress images with up
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-20

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

to 100:1 compression ratio. Each compressed image file contains a header that has the following information about the image: The image size expressed as the number of cells across and down The number of bands (RGB images will have three bands) The image compression rate The cell measurement units (meters, degrees or feet) The size of each cell in the measurement units Coordinate space information, Projection, Datum

3.4.8 Other Supported Formats

The U-Net supports 4 other formats apart from the BIL, TIFF, PlaNET, DXF, SHP, MIF, IMG, and ECW formats. The .ist and .dis formats are ASCII files used for Digital Terrain Model only. Ist images come from Istar, whereas dis images come from IGN (Institut Gographique National). The ist format works exactly like the bil format, except for DTM images, for which the ist format uses a decimetric coding for altitudes, whereas bil images use only a metric coding. The .bmp format is the standard Windows image format on DOS and Windows-compatible computers. The bmp format supports RGB, color-indexed, grey scale, and bitmap color modes, and does not support alpha channels. The data defining geo-reference information are given in .bmw files. The ArcView Grid format (.txt) is an ASCII format dedicated to define raster maps. It may be used to export any raster map such as DTM, images, Clutter Classes and/or Heights, Population, Generic data maps and even coverage predictions. The contents of an ArcView Grid file are in ASCII and consist of a header, describing the content, followed by the content in the form of cell values.

3.5 Managing Clutter Classes

This section describes the following: Importing a Clutter Class File Optimizing the Loading of Clutter Class Files Description of MNU Files Managing the Clutter Classes Adding a Clutter Class Displaying Statistics on Clutter Classes

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-21

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

3.5.1 Importing a Clutter Class File

To import clutter class type files, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Select File > Import on the menu bar. Specify the path, the name and the format (optional) of the related file in the open dialog. Press OK. Select the Clutter classes option in the Data type scrolling box, Click Import.

The imported clutter class files are listed in their appropriate folder in the Geo tab and can be managed easily (description, modification, visibility, layer order management, and so on). Geographic data are displayed in the workspace.

Note: The drag-and-drop feature is available from any file explorer application to the U-Net. The .geo or .cfg (user configuration files) can be used (import-export) to share paths of the imported clutter class file paths between users. The imported files can be embedded during the import or afterwards. All raster maps to be imported must be represented in the same projection coordinate system (cartographic only). Vectors can be converted from any cartographic or geographic system within the U-Net.

3.5.2 Optimizing the Loading of Clutter Class Files

The loading performance of clutter classes (and raster traffic) with bil, .tif and .img formats is highly improved when the U-Net does not have to find by itself the list of the classes contained in the file. To benefit from this optimization, the user must create a text file named as the clutter classes (or GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 raster traffic maps) file with .mnu extension, at the same location. This MNU file gives the correspondence between the code and the class name. This optimisation is already included in the PlaNET format using the menu file. To do so, check the validity of an associated .mnu file in the map folder before achieving the import geo data procedure. Practical advice:

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-22

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

The U-Net can be used to easily create the MNU file. Just import the clutter classes (or traffic) file (slow loading) in the U-Net and paste the class description (Description tab in the Properties window) in a text file.

3.5.3 Description of MNU Files

The MNU file is useful when importing clutter class or raster traffic files with .tif, .bil and .img formats. It gives the correspondence between the clutter (or traffic) code and the class name. It is a text file named as the clutter class (or traffic) file with .mnu extension, which must be stored at the same location. Table 3-4 Description of the MNU file Type Class code Class name Integer > 0 String (up to 32 characters in length) Description Identification code for the clutter (or traffic) class Name of the clutter (or traffic) class

The separator is either a space or a tab. For example, the Mnu file is associated to a clutter file as follows: 0 none 1 open 2 sea 3 inland_water 4 residential 5 meanurban

3.5.4 Managing the Clutter Classes

Clutter classes represent the land cover of a network. They can be used by propagation models in three ways: Some of them use their "nature" to associate adapted formulas (Okumura-Hata, Cost-Hata). Others use these clutter classes to associate some specific parameters such as specific losses or clearances (Standard Propagation model, WLL). The definition of clutter heights (either in clutter classes or clutter heights) to compute diffraction both over the DTM and the clutter (Standard Propagation model, WLL).

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-23

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Table 3-5 lists what can be defined per clutter class. Table 3-5 Defining per clutter class Project Contents to define A model standard deusingtion (in dB) to compute shadowing losses (related to a user-defined cell edge coverage probability) on the path loss. For any project An Indoor loss that can be applied to the path loss (coverage predictions, point analysis or Indoor users in UMTS HSDPA or CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations). For GSM/GPRS/EGPRS projects A C/I standard deusingtion (in dB) to compute shadowing losses (related to a user-defined cell edge coverage probability) on the C/I values. An Ec/Io standard deviation (in dB) to compute shadowing losses (related to a user-defined cell edge coverage probability) on the Ec/Io values. UL and DL Eb/Nt standard deviations (in dB) to compute shadowing losses (related to a user-defined cell edge coverage probability) on the Eb/Nt values. A percentage of pilot finger used in the Ec/Io calculations. This factor represents the percentage of energy received by the mobile pilot finger. Mobile For UMTS HSDPA or CDMA/CDMA2000 projects user equipment hasone searcher finger for pilot. The searcher finger selects one path and only energy from this path is "signal". Energies from other multipaths are all interference (for example, if 70% of total energy is in one path, and 30% of energy is in other mutipaths, then signal energy is reduced to 70% of total energy). An orthogonality factor used to evaluate DL Eb/Nt. This parameter indicates the remaining orthogonality at the receiver; it can be modeled by a value between 0 and (0 indicates no remaining orthogonality because of multi-path - at all, whereas 1 means a perfect orthogonality).

These losses are applied according to the location of the studied receiver and its related clutter class.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-24

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Table 3-6 lists two methods of managing the clutter classer properties. Table 3-6 Managing the clutter classer properties Method 1) 2) Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the clutter classes folder to open the associated shortcut menu. 3) 4) Click Properties in the menu. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different tabs. 5) 6) 7) Click the Description tab from the open window. Assign name and average height (m) to each code. Optionally enter, for each clutter class the specific values (standard deviations, indoor loss, pilot finger percentage Method 1 8) 9) seen above. Click the Default Values tab. Set (or not) the default standard deviation(s), pilot finger percentage and the Indoor loss. These values are used if no clutter map is available in the .atl document or if the Use default values only box below is checked. In that case, the U-Net must use the default values specified in this tab instead of the values defined per clutter class. 10) Click the Display tab to manage the appearance of the map. 11) Press OK. and orthogonality factor for CDMA/CDMA2000 and UMTS HSDPA projects only)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-25

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Method 1) 2) 3)

Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Double click the Clutter Classes folder. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different tabs. 4) 5) 6) Click the Description tab from the open window. Assign name and average height (m) to each code. Optionally enter, for each clutter class the specific values (standard deviations, indoor loss, pilot finger percentage seen above. 7) 8) Click the Default Values tab. Set (or not) the default standard deviation(s), pilot finger percentage and the Indoor loss. These values are used if no clutter map is available in the .atl document or if the Use default values only box below is checked. In that case, the U-Net must use the default values specified in this tab instead of the values defined per clutter class. 9) Click the Display tab to manage the appearance of the map. 10) Press OK. and orthogonality factor for CDMA/CDMA2000 and UMTS HSDPA projects only)

Method 2

The clutter class map uses the generic U-Net display dialog and its standard tools as follows: Display types: Discrete or Value intervals Shading command on value intervals Legend management Visibility scale Transparency level management In addition, visibility boxes are available for each class; they enable you to choose to display or not some of them. Other common features related to either a geo data folder (Save as, Center the map on the object) or an imported geo data file (Embedding the file in the project afterwards) can be accessed from their related shortcut menu.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-26

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Like in other geo data folders, you can also work on the layer order. This has an effect on the computations taking into account that What is seen is what is used. Layers to be considered have to be located on the top of the other layers.

Note: The description table can be fully copied and pasted (using Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V) in a new U-Net project after importing the clutter file. To select globally the clutter class table, just click the top left angle of the clutter table. If the height column is not filled in, the models using this information (WLL model for example) consider a zero clutter height. The heights defined in the clutter classes are taken into account if there is no specific clutter height file defined on the same location. The white color is associated with the transparent color. Thus, the geographic layer below the clutter class map will be visible in the area where the transparent color is assigned. Before importing the clutter file, it is important to define a reference class corresponding to zero code, white color and no data. Thus, the code "0" is allocated to areas without clutter. The class names cannot exceed a length of 50 characters. Clutter classes description (and clutter file path) is part of the contents of exported .geo or .cfg files. In CDMA/CDMA2000 and WCDMA/UMTS projects, the default orthogonality factor (transmitter global parameters) is taken into account only if the related values in the clutter class properties are not filled. New clutter classes can be created manually.

The classes. Advice:

button updates the resulting clutter class map by deleting all unused

Use this function to keep consistency between the clutter classes described in the table and in the imported file. Example: The U-Net automatically memorizes the different clutter classes of imported file. Even after deleting the file, the clutter classes are stored in the description table. Press the button removes them.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-27

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

3.5.5 Adding a Clutter Class

Table 3-7 lists the two ways of adding a clutter class. Table 3-7 Adding a clutter class Method 1) 2) Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Clutter classes folder to open the associated shortcut menu. 3) Method 1 4) 5) Click Properties in the menu. Click the Description tab. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. 6) Describe each new clutter class in the appropriate cells of the bottom row. 7) 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) Press OK or Apply. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Double click the Clutter Classes folder. Click the Description tab. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. 5) Describe each new clutter class in the appropriate cells of the bottom row. 6) Press OK or Apply.

The added clutter class is then available to be used to create new clutter class polygons using the clutter editor.

3.5.6 Displaying Statistics on Clutter Classes

To display the relative occupancy of each clutter type in the current project computation zone (or focus zone if existing), perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Clutter classes folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Choose the Statistics option from the menu. The surface (Si in km) of each clutter class (i) included in the computation zone (or focus zone if existing) and its percentage (% of i) are specified:
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-28

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Note: Since the statistic study is limited to the computation zone (or focus zone if existing), only the clutter area inside the computation zone is taken into account. Current statistical results are printable by clicking the button. Data contained in the statistics window can be copied by selecting them (Ctrl+A) then copying them to the clipboard (Ctrl+C). It is possible to display prediction reports according to the absolute (surface in sqkm) or relative (%) proportion of covered clutter classes.

3.6 Managing Clutter Heights

This section describes the following: Importing a Clutter Height File Managing Clutter Height Maps

3.6.1 Importing a Clutter Height File

To import the clutter height type files, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Select File > Import from the menu bar. Specify the path, the name and the format (optional) of the related file in the open dialog box. Press OK. Select the Clutter heights option in the Data type scrolling box. Click the Import button to complete the file import.

The imported clutter class files are listed in their appropriate folder in the Geo tab and can be managed easily (properties, visibility, and layer order management). The geographic data are displayed in the workspace.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-29

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Note: The drag-and-drop feature is available from any file explorer application to the U-Net. The .geo or .cfg (user configuration files) can be used (import-export) to share paths of the imported clutter height file paths between users. The imported files can be embedded during the import or afterwards. All raster maps to be imported must be represented in the same projection coordinate system (cartographic only). Vectors can be converted from any cartographic or geographic system within the U-Net.

3.6.2 Managing Clutter Height Maps

In the U-Net, there are two places to define clutter heights. This can be done either using the clutter classes maps properties (in this case, clutter height is an average value associated to a clutter class) or using clutter height files (this type of file provides a clutter height value on each point of the map). Therefore, clutter height file(s) are supposed to be more accurate since it is possible to have several heights per clutter class. For display, calculations using propagation models and determination of clutter height along CW measurement and test mobile data paths, the U-Net takes clutter height information in clutter heights file if available in the .atl document. Else, it considers average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes file description. Clutter height maps can be managed in the same way as the DTM map. Table 3-8 lists the two methods of accessing the properties of the resulting clutter height map.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-30

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Table 3-8 Accessing the properties of the resulting clutter height map Method 1) 2) Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Clutter Heights folder to open the associated shortcut menu. 3) Method 1 4) Click Properties in the menu. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different tabs. 5) Click the Display tab to manage the appearance of the map. 6) 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) Press OK. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Double-click the Clutter Heights folder. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different tabs. Click the Display tab to manage the appearance of the map. 5) Press OK.

The Clutter height map uses the Generic U-Net display dialog and its standard tools: Display types: Discrete or Value intervals Shading command on value intervals Legend management Visibility scale Other common features related to either a geo data folder (Save as, Center the map on the object) or an imported geo data file (Embedding the file in the project afterwards) can be accessed from their related shortcut menu. Like in other geo data folders, you can also work on the layer order. This has an effect on the computations taking into account that What is seen is what is used. Layers to be considered have to be located on the top of the other layers.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-31

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Note: If available in the Clutter heights folder, this information is displayed in the status bar relatively to the location of the pointer. Clutter height properties (and clutter height path) is part of the contents of exported .geo or .cfg files.

3.7 Managing DTM Maps

This section describes the following: Importing a DTM Map Managing DTM Maps

3.7.1 Importing a DTM Map

To import the digital terrain model or DEM files, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Select File > Import. Specify the path, the name and the format (optional) of the related file in the open dialog box. Press OK. Select the Altitude (DTM) option in the Data type scrolling box. Click the Import.

The imported DTM files are listed in their appropriate folder in the Geo tab and can be managed easily (properties, visibility, and layer order management). The geographic data are displayed in the workspace.

Note: The drag-and-drop feature is available from any file explorer application to the U-Net. The .geo or .cfg (user configuration files) can be used (import-export) to share paths of the imported DTM file paths between users. The imported files can be embedded during the import or afterwards. All raster maps to be imported must be represented in the same projection coordinate system (cartographic only). Vectors can be converted from any cartographic or geographic system within the U-Net.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-32

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

3.7.2 Managing DTM Maps

The digital terrain model (DTM) is a geographic data file representing ground surface elevation. The DTM maps can be managed in the same way as the clutter height map. Table 3-9 lists two ways of managing the DTM display Table 3-9 Managing the DTM display Method 1) 2) Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the DTM folder to open the associated shortcut menu. 3) Method 1 4) 5) Click Properties in the menu. Click the Display tab from the open window. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. 6) 7) 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) Set the display parameters of the current DTM. Click OK. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Double-click the DTM folder. Click the Display tab from the open window. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. 5) 6) Set the display parameters of the current DTM. Click OK.

The DTM display uses the Generic U-Net display dialog box and lets you choose, in the display type menu: Single: Same representation for any bin. Discrete values: Bin representation according to the value of a discrete field (sea level) describing the DTM object. Values interval: Bin representation according to the value of a numerical field (altitude) describing the DTM object. Whatever the display type you have chosen, you can customize the graphical representation of bins. In the table, for each row, you can click each row. You can manage the contour line visualization by using the relief slider.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-33

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Other common features related to either a geo data folder (Save as, Center the map on the object) or an imported geo data file (Embedding the file in the project afterwards) can be accessed from their related shortcut menu. Like in other geo data folders, you can also work on the layer order. This has an effect on the computations taking into account that What is seen is what is used. Layers to be considered have to be located on the top of the other layers.

Note: Path and description are stored in the external user configuration file.

3.8 Managing Vector Maps

This section describes the following: Importing a Vector File Managing Vector Objects Displaying Vector Layers Over Predictions

3.8.1 Importing a Vector File

In the U-Net, it is possible to create (using the vector editor) or to import vectors as geo data. In that case, vectors are only used for display purposes, and polygons can be taken as filters, computation or focus zones. Vector files can also be used for CDMA/CDMA2000 or UMTS HSDPA traffic maps, population or any generic map. In addition, it is possible to group any geo data type under a single folder that is used for display purposes only. The vector import process does not use the same dialog as the other geo data (clutter classes and heights, DTM, images). To import the vector files, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Select File > Import. Specify the path, the name and the format (optional) of the related file in the open dialog box. Press OK. In the Vector Import dialog, select the Geo or Data option in the Import to drop-down list. Select the appropriate coordinate system (if needed). Click Import.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-34

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

The imported vector files are automatically listed at the explorer root level in the Geo (or Data) tab and can be managed easily (properties, visibility, layer order management). Geographic data are displayed in the workspace.

Note: The drag-and-drop feature is available from any file explorer application to the U-Net. Under the U-Net, shp filenames are not limited in the number of characters when exporting or importing, even if the file name is made up of more than 8 characters. .geo or .cfg (user configuration files) can be used (import-export) to share paths of imported file paths between users. Contrary to other data types, it is possible to choose a geographic coordinate system at the import. Imported files can be embedded during the import or afterwards. Vectors can be shifted from one tab to another afterwards for display considerations. All raster maps to be imported must be represented in the same projection coordinate system (cartographic only). Vectors can be converted from any cartographic or geographic system within the U-Net.

3.8.2 Managing Vector Objects

Vector geographic objects contain additional characteristics. Their number and their type depend on the file format. Indeed, when dealing with .dxf or PlaNET files, a single attribute, the height, is available unlike .mif or .shp files which can include several attributes (name, length, heigt). Thus, third dimension vector data can be read and additional information relating to vectors can be used as a display parameter. Table 3-10 lists two ways of managing the vector objects display

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-35

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Table 3-10 Managing the vector objects display Method 1) Step Click the tab (Data or Geo) in which the vector layer is currently located in the Explorer window. 2) Right-click the Vector folder to open the associated shortcut menu. 3) Method 1 4) Click Properties in the menu. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different tabs. 5) 6) 7) 1) Click the Display tab. Set the vector display parameters. Press OK. Click the tab (Data or Geo) in which the vector layer is currently located in the Explorer window. 2) Method 2 3) Double-click the Vector folder. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different tabs. 4) 5) 6) Click the Display tab. Set the vector display parameters. Press OK.

Note: You may manage the display of each vector individually. To do so, after having expanded the vector folder, choose the properties option from the considered vector shortcut menu (click), then set the display parameters. Use What's this help to get description of the fields available in the open window. Path and description are stored in the external user configuration file. Attributes used in the vector display can be modified using the vector edition features. Vectors can be shifted from one tab to another afterwards for display considerations.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-36

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

3.8.3 Displaying Vector Layers Over Predictions

It is possible to put vector layers either in the Data tab to display them on the top of coverage studies, or in the Geo tab to keep them in the background, using layer order. To do so, when importing a vector file, you may select Data tab as the import destination in the Vector import dialog. In addition, a Transfer command (either in Geo, or in Data) is available in each vector layer shortcut menu (Right-click vector layer to open the shortcut menu). It enables you to switch vector layers from Geo to Data tabs or vice versa.

3.9 Managing Scanned Images

This section describes the following: Importing Scanned Images Managing Scanned Images

3.9.1 Importing Scanned Images

To import the scanned image files, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Select File > Import. Choose the path, the name and the format (optional) of the to-be-imported file in the open dialog. Press OK. Select the Image or scan option in the Data type scrolling box. Click Import.

The imported scanned image files are automatically listed at the explorer root level in the Geo tab and can be managed easily (properties, visibility, and layer order management). Geographic data are displayed in the workspace.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-37

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Note: The drag-and-drop feature is available from any file explorer application to the U-Net. The .geo or .cfg (such as user configuration files) can be used to share the imported scanned image file paths between users. Imported files can be embedded during the import or afterwards. All raster maps to be imported must be represented in the same projection coordinate system (cartographic only). Vectors can be converted from any cartographic or geographic system within the U-Net.

It is possible to import scanned image files by groups with an index file. Once the procedure is performed, the U-Net creates a folder per imported index file. The import procedure is the same as that for the other geo data images (Import command from the File menu). When the classic Open dialog opens up, select the All supported file or PlaNET geo data (index) format and locate the appropriate file. Click the Open button to view a dialog in which you must indicate the image data type.

Note: The drag-and-drop tool is available to import such a group of Tiff/Bmp files.

The format of image data type is one row per Tiff/Bmp file: Relative name of tiff/bmp file with regard to the index file path XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX 0 (the separator is a space), where: XMAX = XMIN + (number of horizontal bins x bin width) YMAX = YMIN + (number of vertical bins x bin height) Here is an example of a two-image-index file located in the folder C:\TEMP. These following two files are located in the same directory: nice1.tif 984660 995380 1860900 1872280 0 nice2.tif 996240 1004900 1860980 1870700 0

3.9.2 Managing Scanned Images

Scanned images are geographic data files which represent the real field (for example, road maps, satellite images) and which are used precisely locate surrounding items, or other less precise maps (for example, statistical raster maps).
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-38

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Table 3-11 lists the two ways of managing the display of scanned image. Table 3-11 Managing the display of scanned image Method 1) 2) Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Scanned image folder to open the shortcut menu. 3) Method 1 4) Click Properties in the menu. Use What's this help to get descriptions about the fields available in the different tabs. 5) 6) 7) 1) 2) Click the Display tab. Set the scanned image display parameters. Press OK. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Scanned image folder to open the shortcut menu. 3) Method 2 4) Click Properties in the menu. Use What's this help to get descriptions about the fields available in the different tabs. 5) 6) 7) Click the Display tab. Set the scanned image display parameters. Press OK.

Note: The path and description are stored in the external user configuration file.

3.10 Managing Population Maps

This section describes the following: Importing a Population Map Managing Population Maps Displaying Statistics on Population Using Population Data in Prediction Reports

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-39

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

3.10.1 Importing a Population Map

It is possible to use population maps, in terms of density or value information. Several forms of files can be mixed to compose a final population map. This type of map, like other geo data folders (clutter, DTM) works on the principle What is seen is what is used. Data retained in the folder is used in clutter statistics and prediction reports. Several file formats (raster or vector) are supported to make the file content available for population data. Depending on the file type (vector or raster), the way to import a file as a population map component can be different. To import a population map in vector format, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Select File > Import. In the Vector Import dialog, select Population in the Import to drop-down list. Select the appropriate coordinate system (if needed). Associate a numeric field/attribute of the vector to the U-Net internal field that is used, as shown in Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-2 Population density (number of inhabitants/km)

Figure 3-3 Population values (number of inhabitants per item polygon/road, and so on) 5) Click OK.

To import a population map in Raster/Morpho format, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Select File > Import In the File Import dialog, select the Population density data type. Click Import.

The U-Net saves the imported files in the Population folder of the Geo tab. The following tabs are added to the Population property dialog:

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-40

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Correspondence tab to manage vector items Description and Table tabs to manage raster items In addition, the Display tab, in the Generic U-Net display dialog, is available for any data type item.

Note: Population values can only be imported in vector files. The drag-and-drop feature is used to import such a type of map. The .geo or .cfg (user configuration files) can be used (import-export) to share the imported population file paths between users. It is possible to create a population vector map using the vector edition tool. To do this, right-click the Population folder and select the Add vector layer command. Imported files can be embedded during the import or afterwards. All raster maps to be imported must be represented in the same projection coordinate system (cartographic only). Vectors can be converted from any cartographic or geographic system within the U-Net.

3.10.2 Managing Population Maps

To access the properties of the resulting population map, perform the following steps: 1) 2) In the Geo tab, right-click the Population folder. Choose Properties in the shortcut menu.

Table 3-12 lists the different tabs available depending on the imported file type. Table 3-12 Different tabs available Tab Description Description All identified classes of the raster files are listed here. You can use here a different population density for each class. This tab is used to manage the contents of the class table contained in the Description tab.

Table

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-41

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Tab

Description An imported vector file is listed in each line. In the Field column, the vector field that serves as population data is selected together with the density check box (when the relevant data is of type density). The current selection is the one made during the import. The association can be modified afterwards. With the U-Net generic display dialog, you may tune the

Correspondence

Display

threshold shading. The displayed information is the number of inhabitants per square kilometer.

Note: The resulting population map is not the addition of all the maps, but the result of what is seen. Maps of interest have to be put on the top layer. For raster maps, the no data class makes the population information operational which is below the zones of this type. The display by value is not permitted in the following cases: Different raster maps with different resolutions Vectors mixing lines and polygons Mix of raster and vector maps The display by density is not permitted on vectors made of points.

3.10.3 Displaying Statistics on Population

Note: Statistics are provided on the focus zone if it exists. Otherwise, the statistics are displayed on the computation zone. With neither of them, statistics are given for the total geographic zone.

You can display the relative and absolute distributions of population, according to the thresholds defined in the Display tab of the Population folder property dialog, as well as the total population. The statistics provided are valid for the defined focus zone. If no focus zone is defined, the statistics provided are valid for the computation zone. When neither a focus zone nor a computation zone is defined, the statistics provided are valid for the total geographic zone, except for the displayed total population.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-42

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

To display population statistics, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Right-click the Population folder. Select Statistics from the shortcut menu. The Statistics dialog appears. Like other statistics windows, the displayed results are calculated on the visible geo data.

3.10.4 Using Population Data in Prediction Reports

In prediction reports, you can display columns with the following information: Information related to the covered population (as defined in the Display tab of the Population folder property dialog) Information such as the total population and the number and percentage of covered population To display information about the population covered by a prediction, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Right-click the Prediction report in the Data tab. Select Generate Report from the shortcut menu. Select Format: Display columns from the menu bar. Select the check boxes next to the information you want to display in the prediction report. Click OK.

You can display columns about related to covered population densities (as defined in the Display tab of the Population folder property dialog), the number of covered people, and the percentage of covered population.

Note: Reports can be generated only on displayed studies or sub-items of the studies (transmitters, thresholds).

3.11 Managing Generic Maps

This feature has been developed to import any type of geo data in term of any advanced map. For example, it is possible to import any raster/vector file and to use it as a revenue, rainfall or socio-demographics map.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-43

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Several forms of files can be mixed to compose a resulting generic map. This type of map, like other geo data folders (clutter, DTM) works on the principle What is seen is what is used. Data retained in the folder will be potentially used in prediction reports. Several file formats (raster or vector) are supported to make their contents available for generic maps. All types of coding may be mixed in any generic geo data folder: vector files and raster files (8, 16, 32 bits per pixel). Vector layers can be created by the vector edition tool. The imported data can then be interpreted to produce maps of the following type: Morpho file: map of value classes (like clutter) (8 bits integer [0...255]) Raster file: map of value densities (16 bits with scaling factor integer [0....65535] or float simple precision, 32 bits [0....16777216] or float double precision). The creation of a new map type is made during the import of a geo data file that will be part of the resulting map. Then, once created, it will be possible to import/add other data files to complete the new map based on the supported formats. Depending on the file type (vector or raster) that will be used for the initialisation of the new map, the way to import it can be slightly different. This section describes the following: Creating an Advanced Geo Data Folder Managing Generic Maps Displaying Statistics on Generic Data Using Generic Map Data in Prediction Reports

3.11.1 Creating an Advanced Geo Data Folder

You can import a geo data file to create a generic map. To create an advanced geo data folder in the vector format, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Select File > Import. In the Vector Import dialog, select Advanced.....

To create an advanced geo data folder in the Raster/Morpho format, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Select File > Import. In the File Import dialog, select Advanced.... The definition of the new map type is displayed in the current window (New type). 3) Enter the name of the new map (such as Revenue).
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-44

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

4) 5)

Check the boxes of the formats that you want this map to be able to support (Vector, Raster 8, 16 and 32 bits). Indicate the type of map you want to produce by interpreting the file data. Morpho file: map of value classes (like clutter) (8 bits integer [0...255]). Raster file: map of value densities (16 bits with scaling factor integer [0....65535] or float simple precision, 32 bits [0....16777216] or float double precision).

6)

Check the Integrable box if you want the relevant data (contained in the files composing the resulting map) to be potentially used in prediction reports. This data (of type surfacic density only) is integrated on each item (threshold, transmitter) in predictions to provide statistics.

7)

Click OK.

To create an advanced geo data folder in the vector format (Mif, shp) format, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Select File > Import. Select the appropriate coordinate system (if needed). In the Vector Import dialog, associate a numeric field/attribute of the vector to the U-Net internal field that is used as a: Value density (number of items/km) Absolute values (number of items per polygon/road) To create an advanced geo data folder in the Raster/Morpho format, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Select to use the content as a value or as a density. Density is not consistent with the data that is not integrable. Click Import.

A new geo data folder is created, containing the imported file(s). The following tabs are added to the property dialog: Correspondence tab to manage vector items Description and Table tabs to manage raster items In addition, the Display tab is available for any data type item. Once the folder is created, it is possible to easily import any other supported file as a part of the generic map. This is done as a standard geo data import by selecting the appropriate target map in the import dialog. 8-bit maps are only class maps. So, when importing any geo data type file as an 8-bit map, ensure that the values that you are importing are codes rather than values, like densities, for example. The values related to each pixel will be defined for each code, with each pixel corresponding to a code.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-45

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Note: Value maps can be imported by vector files. The drag-and-drop feature is possible to import such kinds of maps. .geo or .cfg (user configuration files) can be used (import-export) to share paths of the imported population file paths between users. It is possible to add a vector map to an existing generic map using the vector edition tool. To do this, right-click the related folder and select the Add vector layer command. Imported files can be embedded during the import or afterwards. All raster maps to be imported must be represented in the same projection coordinate system (cartographic only). Vectors can be converted from any cartographic or geographic system within the U-Net.

3.11.2 Managing Generic Maps

To access the properties of the resulting generic map, perform the following steps: 1) 2) In the Geo tab, right-click the folder of the considered generic map. Choose Properties in the shortcut menu.

Table 3-13 lists the different tabs available depending on the imported file type. Table 3-13 Different tabs available Tab Description All identified classes of the raster files are listed here. You Description must associate here a different value density for each class. Table This tab is dedicated to manage the contents of the class table contained in the Description tab. An imported vector file is listed in each line. In the Field column, the vector field which serves as relevant data has Correspondence to be selected, together with the density check box (when the relevant data is of density). The current selection is the one made during the import. The association can be modified afterwards. With the U-Net generic display dialog, you can tune the Display threshold shading. Both discrete values and value interval display types are available.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-46

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Note: The resulting population map is not the addition of all the maps, but the result of what is seen. Maps of interest have to be put on the top layer. For raster maps, the no data class makes the population information operational which is below the zones of this type. The Integrable/not Integrable aspect is chosen at the creation and cannot be changed afterwards. The display by value is not permitted in the following cases: Different raster maps with different resolutions Vectors mixing lines and polygons Mix of raster and vector maps The display based on density is unavailable on vectors made of points.

3.11.3 Displaying Statistics on Generic Data

It is possible to display the relative and absolute distributions of each item class (class defined by thresholds in the Display tab of the Generic geo data folder property dialog). To do this, select Statistics from the appropriate folder shortcut menu. Like other statistics windows, what is used for the results is provided by what is seen.

Note: Statistics are provided on the focus zone if it exists. Otherwise, the computation zone is considered. With neither of them, statistics are given for the total geographic zone.

3.11.4 Using Generic Map Data in Prediction Reports

In prediction reports, you can display columns about data contained in any generic map. This can be made for any data, and is more advanced when the relevant data is of type Integrable. To display information about the covered classes of any generic data by a prediction, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Right-click the Prediction of interest. Select the Generate Report command from the shortcut menu. In the Format: Display columns menu, check the boxes related to the information you want to display with the prediction report.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-47

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Note: Reports can be generated on displayed studies or sub-items of the studies (transmitters, thresholds).

I. Integrable/Not Integrable, Density/Value: Examples

The integrable data is used in prediction reports so they can be summed over the cells characterized by the item of interest (transmitter, threshold). They can be of type value (Revenue, number of customers) or density (Revenue/km, number of customer/km). For example, in the case of the revenue map, a prediction report indicates: The percentage on how each revenue class is covered globally, and for each single coverage cell (transmitter, threshold) The revenue of the global coverage and of each single coverage cell The percentage of the covered revenue map globally, and for each single coverage cell Non-integrable data means that they are information for each pixel which cannot be integrated over a coverage cell, like socio-demographic classes, and rain zones. In that case, you can take a rain zone map as an example. A prediction report would indicate the relative coverage of each rain zone class, by the global study, and for each single coverage cell (transmitter, threshold). Being non-integrable, no other information is given.

3.12 Managing Geo Data Files and Folders

This section describes the following: Embedding - Linking Comparison Embedding Geographic Data Repairing a Broken Link Grouping Geo Data Files in Display Folder Checking the Map Geocoding Setting Geo Data Priority

3.12.1 Embedding - Linking Comparison

The U-Net offers the user the possibility to link or embed any imported geo data file. The main differences between linked and embedded objects are: Location where data are stored.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-48

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

How the imported data are updated after they are placed in the U-Net document. When you import geographic data without selecting Embedded in document, the U-Net just memorizes the location where the source files are stored (directory path) and creates a link to source files. In this way, the objects are linked. If you modify the source file, information will be automatically taken into account in the document .atl. On the other hand, some applications as deleting or moving the source file in another directory lead to the link break. In this case, the U-Net offers you solutions to repair it. The embedded geographic files are totally included in the document .atl. They become a part of the document. That is, there is no longer a link between the document .atl and the source files. Therefore, the U-Net document is not updated if you modify the source file. Practical advice: The linked objects may limit the U-Net document size.

Note: The distributed calculations do not work in case of embedded geographic data.

3.12.2 Embedding Geographic Data

You may embed the following files in your U-Net document: DTM Clutter class Height Traffic Vector Population Generic Scanned image objects This can be done either when importing the geo data, or by accessing the properties of an available object. To embed geographic data in the current .atl project during the import procedure, just check the Embed in document box in the object import dialog. For a raster, clutter height, or DTM file, two ways are available to embed from an existing data item the geographic data into the current .atl project, as listed in Table 3-14.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-49

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Table 3-14 Embedding the geographic data in the current .atl project from an existing data item for a raster, clutter height or DTM file Method 1) 2) Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the file you want to embed in the current project. Method 1 3) 4) 5) 6) 1) 2) Method 2 Click Properties in the menu. Click the General tab in the open window. Click the Click OK or Apply. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Double-click the file you want to embed in the current project. 3) 4) 5) Click the General tab in the open window. Click the Click OK or Apply. button from the open window. button from the open window.

For a scanned map or a vector file, two ways are available to embed the geographic data in the current .atl project from an existing data item, as listed in Table 3-15. Table 3-15 Embedding the geographic data in the current .atl project from an existing data item Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the related folder by clicking on the button.

Right-click the scanned map/vector file you want to embed in the current project.

4) 5) 6) 7)

Click Properties in the menu. Click the General tab from the open window. Click the Click OK or Apply. button from the open window.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-50

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Method 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) 5) 6)

Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the related folder by clicking on the button.

Double-click the scanned map/vector file you want to embed in the current project. Click the General tab from the open window. Click the Click OK or Apply. button from the open window.

3.12.3 Repairing a Broken Link

Some source files (.atl or geo data files) may have moved since the last time when the current project was open. In this case, the U-Net cannot find them automatically and displays the error message, as shown in Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4 Missing shortcut

Click the button if you want to locate the geo data file by yourself. At the same time, the U-Net automatically searches for the file with the nearest match based on size, date and type. When the U-Net finds the file, it displays the error message, as shown in Figure 3-5.

Figure 3-5 Problem with shortcut

If the file corresponds to the source file, press OK.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-51

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

If the localization fails, you have to link again the geo data file to the project by yourself from the geo item properties. For a clutter class, two ways are available to link the geo data file to the project, as listed in Table 3-16. Table 3-16 Linking the geo data file to the project for a clutter class Method 1) 2) Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Clutter classes, traffic raster or DTM folder by clicking 3) Method 1 4) 5) 6) 7) 1) 2) .

Right-click the Clutter classes, traffic raster or DTM file you want to fix the link problem. Click Properties in the menu. Click the button from the open window.

Locate the appropriate data file. Click OK or Apply. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Clutter classes, traffic raster or DTM folder by clicking .

3) Method 2 4) 5) 6)

Double-click the Clutter classes, traffic raster or DTM file you want to fix the link problem. Click the button from the open window.

Locate the appropriate data file. Click OK or Apply.

For a scanned map or a vector file, two ways are available to link the geo data file to the project, as listed in Table 3-17.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-52

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Table 3-17 Linking the geo data file to the project for a scanned map or a vector file Method 1) 2) Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the scanned map/vector file you want to fix the link problem. Method 1 3) 4) 5) 6) 1) 2) Click Properties in the menu. Click the button from the open window.

Locate the appropriate data file. Click OK or Apply. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Double-click the scanned map/vector file you want to fix the link problem.

Method 2

3) 4) 5) 6)

Click the General tab from the open window. Click the button from the open window.

Locate the appropriate data file. Click OK or Apply.

3.12.4 Grouping Geo Data Files in Display Folder

In the standard case, when the imported geo data files are only for display (1bit 24-bits images, vectors), they are listed at the root of the Geo tab only (or possibly in the Data tab for vectors). Contrary to other data files, the clutter files, are listed all together and within a single Clutter class folder. Listed all together, files can be displayed or hidden or moved. In the U-Net, you can also, within a single additional folder, import different types of geo data files and use them for display only. This folder does not produce a map, like it is the case for the generic import of geo data files to produce, for example, revenue or socio demographic maps. This folder (which can be called geo display folder) just groups geo data files and cannot be managed globally. The management (display only) of each single item is made at the item level. It is possible to import several file formats (raster or vector) in a single folder to make them available for display only. All types of files may be mixed in a geo display folder: vector or raster files (8, 16, 32 bits per pixel). Their information is used only for display, that is, any raster file is interpreted as an image (and also set as an image).

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-53

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

The creation of a geo display folder is made during the import of a first geo data file that will be located in it. Then, once created, it is possible to import other files into this folder. For the vector format (Mif, shp), to group the geo data files in the display folder, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Select Import > File. In the Vector Import dialog, select New folder in Geo or Data in the Import to drop-down list. Select the appropriate coordinate system (if needed).

For the Raster/Morpho format, to group the geo data files in the display folder, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Select Import > File. In the File Import dialog, select the New folder in Geo or Data item in the Data type drop-down list. Specify a name for the newly created folder. Click Import.

A new geo data folder is created, filled with the imported file(s). Once the folder is created, you can easily import any other geo data file into the created folder. This is made as a standard geo data import by selecting the appropriate target item in the import dialog.

Note: The drag-and-drop feature is possible to import such a type of map. Since it is possible to create the geo display folder either in the Geo or in the Data tab, you can easily transfer it from one to another. To do this, right-click the folder and select the Transfer to Data/Geo. It is possible to import Packbit, FAX-CCITT3 and LZW compressed TIFF files. Imported files can be embedded during the import or afterwards.

3.12.5 Checking the Map Geocoding

You can check the file map geocoding (coordinates of the center point of the north-west, pixel size and additional coordinates of south east point for .bmp files). For a clutter class, population, generic, traffic or DTM file, two ways are available to check the geocoding of any data object, as listed in Table 3-18.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-54

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Table 3-18 Checking the map geocoding for a clutter class, population, generic, traffic or DTM file Method 1) 2) 3) Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the folder by clicking on the button.

Right-click the file whose geocoding you want to check.

Method 1

4) 5) 6)

Click Properties in the menu. Click the Geocoding tab from the open window. Check or modify the extreme northwest and southeast points.

7) 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) 5)

Click OK or Apply. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the folder by clicking on the button.

Double-click the file you want to check its geocoding. Click the Geocoding tab from the open window. Check or modify the extreme northwest and southeast points.

6)

Click OK or Apply.

For a scanned map, two ways are available to check the geocoding of any data object, as listed in Table 3-19. Table 3-19 Checking the geocoding for a scanned map Method 1) 2) Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the file whose geocoding you want to check. Method 1 3) 4) 5) Click Properties in the menu. Click the Geocoding tab from the open window. Check or modify the extreme northwest and southeast points. 6) Click OK or Apply.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-55

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Method 1) 2) Method 2 3) 4)

Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Double-click the file you want to check its geocoding. Click the Geocoding tab from the open window. Check or modify the extreme northwest and southeast points. 5) Click OK or Apply.

3.12.6 Setting Geo Data Priority

The U-Net lists the imported DTM, clutter class or traffic objects in their respective folder and creates a separate folder for each imported vector data and each imported scanned image. Each object corresponds to a layer with a specific size. Thus, there are as many layers as imported objects. The layers are on top of each other in the order of listed objects. At the display level, only the layer on top and the layers beneath area where there is no data are visible in the workspace. In Figure 3-6, vector data (including highways, coastline, riverlake, majorroads, major streets, railways and airport), clutter classes, DTM and scanned image have been imported and a UMTS environment traffic map has been edited inside the computation zone. In the workspace, we can see the linear objects (roads, riverlake, and so on) inside and beyond the computation zone and the traffic layer (green color) inside the computation zone. The clutter class layer is visible in the area where no traffic data has been edited (outside the computation zone). On the other hand, the DTM layer which is underneath the clutter class layer and the scanned map which is underneath the DTM layer are not visible.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-56

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Figure 3-6 Displaying Geo data layers

To make a layer visible in the workspace, either uncheck the check box of the other layers, move the layer on the top of the list, or adjust the transparency level of objects (clutter class, traffic and scanned image) when it is available. To move an object in the Geo tab, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Click and hold on the layer you want to move. Drag the layer in the list. Release the layer.

At the calculation level, the DTM, Clutter classes, clutter heights, and Traffic density folders may contain several objects representing different areas of the map or common parts of the map with identical or different resolutions. The U-Net takes only the data it sees into account in calculations for each folder. What is used is what is seen. Thus, for each folder, you must fill on top the objects with the smallest size and the best resolution.

Note: The population and generic data maps work in the same way. Their data can be used in prediction reports.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-57

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

3.13 Editing Geographic Data

This section describes the following: Raster Objects Vector Objects

3.13.1 Raster Objects

I. Creating a Clutter or Traffic Raster Polygon
A cartography editor is available either to modify imported clutter class (or traffic raster) map or to produce your own clutter (or traffic) raster maps without initial clutter (or traffic) object. In the same way, it is easy to delete clutter or raster traffic polygons. All created polygons can be easily saved in external files. These modifications are taken into account in calculations by propagation models. To display the editor tool bar, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Clutter classes folder (or environment traffic object) to open the associated shortcut menu. Select Edit from the available menu. The clutter (or traffic) editor window is displayed. The editor tool bar consists of a selection box to choose the clutter (or traffic) class you want to edit, a polygon drawing tool button, as shown in Figure 3-7. , a polygon deletion tool and a Close

Figure 3-7 Clutter edition toolbar

Note: The clutter (or traffic) class you want to edit must be previously defined in the Description tab of Clutter classes properties dialog (or in the Environment folder in GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000). Like the computation and focus zones, you can copy and paste exact coordinates (consistent with the defined display coordinate system) of a closed polygon. To do this, select Properties from the shortcut menu (right-click) related to the selected polygon.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-58

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

II. Editing Clutter or Traffic Raster Polygons

To edit clutter or traffic (raster map) polygons, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Use either the clutter editor to add clutter data or traffic editor to produce traffic data. Select the clutter (or traffic - raster map) class you want to edit from the selection box.

Note: To make clutter (or traffic) classes available in the selection box, these have to be previously defined: In the Description tab of the Clutter classes properties for the clutter editor In the Environment subfolder of the GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 parameters folder

4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)

Select the polygonal drawing tool. Position the pointer on the map area where you want to edit your own data. Press the left button to create the first point. Slide the pointer on the map and press the mouse left button to create another point. Repeat step 6 and step 7 until you draw the polygonal area you want. Double-click to close off the polygonal area.

10) Click Close. The created polygon is displayed with the same color as the edited clutter class (or traffic class). As long as the cartography editor is open, the polygonal area is delimited by a thin black line rewiring the created points.

Note: The clutter or traffic layer must be visible if you want the modifications to appear on the map.

III. Modifying Clutter or Traffic Raster Polygons

To resize clutter or traffic polygons (raster map), perform the following steps: 1) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-59

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)

Leave the cartography editor open. Click the black line (limits of the polygonal area). The pointer becomes the position indicator ( ). Press and hold the mouse left button. Drag the pointer in the area where you want to locate the point. Release the mouse button. Click Close.

To add a point, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Leave the cartography editor open. Click the black line (limits of the polygonal area). The pointer becomes the position indicator ( ). Right-click to open the associated shortcut menu. Select the Insert point command from the open menu. Click Close.

To delete a point, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Leave the cartography editor open. Click the point you want to delete. The pointer becomes the position indicator ( ). Right-click to open the associated shortcut menu. Select the Delete point command from the open menu. Click Close.

IV. Deleting Clutter or Traffic Raster Polygons

Table 3-20 lists two ways of deleting clutter or traffic (raster map) polygons. Table 3-20 Deleting clutter or traffic (raster map) polygons Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) Select the Delete polygon command from the open menu. 5) 6) Right-click to open the associated shortcut menu. Click Close. Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Leave the cartography editor open. Click the black line (limits of the polygonal area). The pointer becomes the position indicator ( ).

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-60

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Method 1) 2) Method 2 3) 4) 5)

Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Leave the cartography editor open. Select the polygon deletion tool.

Click the polygonal area you want to delete. Click Close.

V. Displaying Information about Raster Polygons

By using the tips button ( polygonal area. ), the U-Net allows the user to read information about any

To know the surface and the type of edited data, you can hold the pointer on the polygonal area until the associated information (such as code, name) appears. The surface is given only in the case of closed polygonal areas.

Note: The information appears only if the tips button ( ) is on.

To display the coordinates or points composing a polygonal area, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Click the black line (limits of the polygonal area). The pointer becomes the position indicator ( ). Right-click to open the associated shortcut menu. Select the Properties command from the open menu.

The coordinates (in the display system) of the point composing the polygon are then displayed in a table window.

Note: Like for the focus or computation zone, the copy-paste feature is available in the polygon coordinates table.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-61

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

3.13.2 Vector Objects

I. Creating a Vector Layer
A toolbar enables you to edit new vector layers and modify the imported ones. This bar can be open or closed by selecting Vector edition in the View menu. It is possible to create new vector layers containing polygons, lines and points. To create a new vector layer, you can click the New vector layer icon ( ).

The U-Net creates a folder called Vectors in explorer, either in the Geo tab, or in the Data tab. In fact, the folder location depends on the open tab of explorer. So, the folder is placed in the Geo tab if this one is displayed when creating the new layer. The new vector layer is listed in the Vector layer menu .

Any vector object can be easily edited and modified. It is also very easy to define and modify its fields.

Note: Since vectors can be used to produce GSM/GPRS/EDGE, CDMA/CDMA2000 or WCDMA/UMTS traffic maps, it is possible to create a vector layer during the creation of the traffic map itself following the same procedure.

II. Editing a Vector Object

Once the vector layer is created, it can be easily edited and managed. Table 3-21 lists two ways of editing a vector object for polygons and lines.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-62

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Table 3-21 Editing a vector object for polygons and lines Method 1) Step On the Vector edition bar, click the arrow to open the Vector layer menu. 2) 3) 4) Method 1 5) Select the layer to be edited in the list. Position the pointer on the map. Press the mouse left button to create the first point of polygon or line. Slide the pointer on the map and press the mouse left button to create another point. 6) Carry out the two last steps until you draw the polygonal area or the line you want. 7) Double-click to close the polygonal area or to stop the line drawing. 1) In the Explorer, right-click the vector layer to be edited to get the shortcut menu. 2) Select the Edit command from the open drop-down list. 3) Click the new polygon icon the new line icon icon 4) Method 2 5) Press the mouse left button to create the first point of polygon or line. 6) Move the pointer on the map and press the mouse left button to create another point. 7) Carry out the two last steps until you draw the polygonal area or the line you want. 8) Double-click to close off polygonal area or to stop the line drawing. to create points. to create polygons, or

to create lines, or the new point

Position the pointer on the map.

Table 3-22 lists two ways of editing vector objects of the layer for points.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-63

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Table 3-22 Editing vector objects of the layer for points Method 1) Step On the Vector edition bar, click the arrow to open the Vector layer menu. Method 1 2) 3) 4) 1) Select the layer to be edited in the list. Position the pointer on the map. Press the mouse left button to create a point. In the Explorer, right-click the vector layer to be edited to get the shortcut menu. 2) Select the Edit command from the open drop-down list. Method 2 3) Click the New polygon icon or on the New line icon New point icon 4) 5) to create polygons, to create lines, or on the

to create points.

Position the pointer on the map. Press the mouse left button to create a point.

To clear the current icon selection, press Esc on your keyboard or click the selected icon.

Note: The vector edition can be made on any vector, even in a CDMA/CDMA2000, WCDMA/UMTS traffic, population or generic map. The procedure is identical to the one above.

III. Managing Vector Object Shapes

Some tools available in the Vector edition bar enable you to modify the polygon shape of a vector layer. For example: To merge several polygons, use the Combine icon ( ).

To make a hole in a polygon, use the Erase icon ( ). To keep only the overlapping area of two polygons, use the Intersection icon ( ). ). To cut a polygon in two or more, use the Split icon (
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-64

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Only in the edition mode can the vector layer modify the shape of its polygons. Table 3-23 lists two ways of putting a vector layer in edition mode. Table 3-23 Putting a vector layer in edition mode Method 1) Method 1 2) 1) Method 2 2) Step On the Vector edition bar, click the arrow to open the Vector layer menu. Select the layer to be edited in the list. In the Explorer, right-click the vector layer to be edited to get the shortcut menu. Select Edit from the open drop-down list.

To combine several polygons, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Choose the vector layer to be edited. On the map, select a polygon. On the Vector edition bar, click the Combine icon ( Draw one or several polygons on the map. ).

Note: The U-Net considers all the polygons as a group. If there is overlapping areas between some polygons, the U-Net merges them to make a single one. To clear the current icon selection, click the Esc button on your keyboard or click the selected icon.

To erase areas within polygons, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Choose the vector layer to be edited. On the map, select a polygon or a group of polygons. On the Vector edition bar, click the Erase icon ( Draw one or several polygons on the map. Note: The U-Net removes all the overlapping areas between polygons. To clear the current icon selection, click the Esc button on your keyboard or click the selected icon. ).

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-65

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

To keep intersection areas between polygons, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Choose the vector layer to be edited. On the map, select a polygon or a group of polygons. On the Vector edition bar, click the Intersection icon ( Draw one or several polygons on the map. ).

Note: The U-Net only keeps the intersection areas between polygons and erases all the areas outside. To clear the current icon selection, press Esc button on your keyboard or click the selected icon.

To split polygons, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Choose the vector layer to be edited. On the map, select a polygon or a group of polygons. On the Vector edition bar, click the Split icon ( Draw one or several polygons on the map. ).

Note: The U-Net uses each polygon side intersecting the existing polygon(s) to cut them. To clear the current icon selection, press Esc button on your keyboard or click the selected icon.

Additional management features are available when you right-click any vector object on the map (polygons, lines or points). When a vector layer is in Edition mode, you may select the following options in the Vector Object shortcut menu, as listed in Table 3-24. Table 3-24 Options in the vector object shortcut menu Option Delete Convert to line Convert to polygon Meaning To remove vector objects on the map To convert a polygon into a closed line To convert a closed line into a polygon

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-66

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Option To open a closed line Open line Note:

Meaning

The U-Net removes segment between the last and the first point. To close line Close line Note: The U-Net adds a segment between the last and the first point of the line. To add a point into the polygon contour or line Insert point Note: The point is created at the pointer location. Move Quit edition To shift vector objects on the map (place the pointer where you want to locate vector object and click to release it) In order for a vector layer to no longer be editable To access the vector object property dialog. Note: The General tab sums up the vector layer name, the Properties vector object identification number and vector object attributes. The Geometry tab lists coordinates of points composing the selected vector object. Coordinates are stated in the coordinate system specified in the vector layer property dialog (General tab).

IV. Managing Vector Object Properties

Vectors properties can be managed in two ways, either from a table containing all vectors and their attributes or from the related standard property dialog. Vector table All the vectors (polygons, lines, points and groups of polygons) of a vector layer and their attributes are listed in the corresponding table. To open this table, perform the following steps:

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-67

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

1) 2) 3)

Click the tab (Data or Geo) where the vector layer is currently located in the Explorer window. Right-click the Vector folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click Open in the menu.

Standard features for managing table contents (copy/paste, fill up/down, delete, display columns, filter, sort, fields) are available in a shortcut menu (when you right-click column(s) or record(s)) and in the Format, Edit and Records menus. Property dialog As a classical property dialog in the U-Net, the vector layer property dialog consists of a General tab, a Table tab and a Display tab. To open the property dialog related to a vector object, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the tab (Data or Geo) where the vector layer is currently located in the Explorer window. Right-click the Vector folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click Properties in the menu. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the different tabs. In the General tab, the U-Net indicates: Vector layer name. Whether the vector layer is embedded in the .atl document or just linked. In this case, the U-Net displays the directory path used to access the file. The Embed button can be used to embed the vector layer in the .atl document when this one is just linked. The Find button enables you to redefine a new path when the file's location has changed. Coordinate system of the vector layer When the vector layer is linked, the coordinate system used is the one of the file (system specified when importing the file). It corresponds to the projection coordinate system when the vector layer is embedded. The coordinate system can be changed (click Convert to change it). In this case, coordinates of points composing vector objects of the layer will be converted in the selected coordinate system. In addition, in this tab, you can define the sort and filter criteria that will be applied to vector objects of the layer contained in the table. The Table tab enables you to manage the vector layer table content. Therefore, you may add custom fields in the table to describe vector attributes.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-68

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

The Display tab enables you to manage the vector layer display. It is possible to display vectors in different colors based on the attributes.

3.14 Managing Geographic Data Export

This section describes the following: Exporting a Clutter Class Map Saving the Edited Raster Polygons Exporting a Clutter Height map Exporting a DTM map Exporting a Vector Object

3.14.1 Exporting a Clutter Class Map

Like for DTM, clutter height and traffic raster maps, it is possible to export the current clutter class description in a tiff, a bil or a bmp format. You may choose to keep the squared part of the current clutter class map that contains the defined computation zone. To export a part or the complete clutter class map, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Clutter classes folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click Save as... from the open menu. Define the format, the directory path and the name for the file to be exported. Click Save. In the Export dialog, select one of the options and define the resolution (in meters) of the file, as listed in Table 3-25. Click OK.

Table 3-25 Implications of the options in the export dialog box Option Implication Allows you to save the whole clutter class map in another Entire Project Area file. As soon as the file is saved, the properties (such as name) of the clutters listed in the Clutter classes folder are updated. Allows you to save the clutter region inside the computation zone in another file. As soon as the file is Computation Zone saved, an additional clutter object is created and listed in the Clutter classes folder. To enable this option, you must have drawn a computation zone beforehand.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-69

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Option

Implication Defined for clutter from the following criteria: If one clutter object is clipped, the displayed resolution will be the object resolution.

Resolution

If

several objects

are extracted,

the

suggested

resolution is the smallest resolution of the objects. The resolution value must be an integer. The minimum resolution is set to 1 meter.

Note: When you save files using BIL, TIF, and BMP formats, .hdr, .tfw and .bmw files are automatically created in the same folder. The .hdr, .tfw and .bmw files are respectively associated with .bil, .tif and .bmp files; they contain geocoding information and resolution. The export of a clutter class map in ArcView Grid format does not replace the current map as it is for the other raster file formats. It is an export dedicated only to an external application. Clutter classes file path (and clutter description) is part of the contents of exported .geo or .cfg files.

3.14.2 Saving the Edited Raster Polygons

Saving the edited polygons includes the following: Creating a new clutter class (or traffic - raster map) file including your modifications Storing your modifications in the existing clutter class (or traffic) files To store modifications in a new file, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Clutter classes folder (or Traffic raster object) to open the associated shortcut menu. Select Save as from the open menu. Indicate the path, the name and the format ( *.tif, *.bil and *.bmp) for the file to be exported. Press OK.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-70

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Note: When you save files using BIL, TIF, and BMP formats, .hdr, .tfw and .bmw files are automatically created in the same folder. The .hdr, .tfw and .bmw files are respectively associated with .bil, .tif and .bmp files; they contain geocoding information and resolution. Saving a file with the BMP format doesn't involve the automatic creation of geo-reference file. Thus, it is advised to associate with .bmp files a text document including the same information as the .hdr or .tfw files.

6)

Select one of the options and define the resolution (in meters) of file in the open Export dialog (use What's this to get description about the fields available), as shown in Figure 3-8.

7)

Click OK.

Figure 3-8 Export dialog

Table 3-26 Implications of the options in the export dialog box Option Implication Allows you to save in the file the whole clutter class map (or traffic map) including the clutter class (or traffic) Entire Project Area modifications made by the user. As soon as the modifications are saved, the properties of the clutter (or traffic) object listed in the Clutter classes (or Traffic) folder are updated. Allows you just to save in the file the created clutter class Only Pending Changes (or traffic) polygonal area. As soon as the modifications are saved, an additional clutter class (or traffic) object is created and listed in the Clutter classes (or Traffic) folder.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-71

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Option

Implication Allows you to save in the file the rectangular clutter region (or traffic region) containing the computation zone encompassing the clutter class (or traffic) modifications made by the user. As soon as the modifications are saved, an additional clutter class (or traffic) object is created and listed in the Clutter classes (or Traffic) folder. Defined for clutter from the following criteria: If one clutter object is modified, the displayed resolution will be the object resolution. If several objects are modified, the suggested resolution will be the smallest resolution of the altered clutter class objects. If there is no initial clutter class object, the resolution will equal the resolution of DTM object which the

Computation Zone

Resolution

modifications are made on or the smallest resolution of the merged DTM objects if the modifications are performed on several DTM objects. If you draw your own clutter data without initial DTM, clutter class or traffic object, a 100 m default resolution will be suggested. For any raster object, the resolution value must be an integer. The minimum resolution is set to 1 meter.

Note: The same criteria are used to define the resolution of traffic objects: Firstly, the U-Net looks for resolution in the modified traffic objects. Secondly, the U-Net looks for resolution in the clutter class objects if there is no imported traffic objects. Then, the U-Net looks for resolution in DTM objects in case neither traffic nor clutter class data is available and finally give the 100 m default resolution if there is no traffic, no clutter class and no DTM data.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-72

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Caution: Once the modifications are saved, the polygon dimensions are fixed and cannot be modified.

To store modifications in an existing file, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Clutter classes folder (or Traffic folder - raster map) to open the associated shortcut menu. Select Save from the open menu. A message is displayed warning the user that some current clutter class (or traffic) files are updated. 4) Click OK.

Note: The existing file is made of a fixed size matrix. Hence, changes made outside this matrix will not be taken into account.

3.14.3 Exporting a Clutter Height map

Like for DTM, clutter class and traffic raster maps, it is possible to export the current clutter height map in either a tif or a bil format. You may choose to keep the squared part of the current clutter height map that contains the defined computation zone. To export a part or the complete clutter height map, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Clutter height folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click Save as... from the open menu. Define the format, the directory path and the name for the file to be exported. Click Save. In the Export dialog, select one of the options and define the resolution (in meters) of the file, as listed in Table 3-27. Click OK.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-73

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Table 3-27 Implications of options in the export dialog box Option Implication Allows you to save the whole clutter height map in another Entire Project Area file. As soon as the file is saved, the properties (such as name) of clutter height object listed in the Clutter height folder are updated. Allows you to save the clutter height region inside the computation zone in another file. As soon as the file is Computation Zone saved, an additional clutter height object is created and listed in the Clutter height folder. To enable this option, you must have drawn a computation zone beforehand. Defined for clutter height from the following criteria: If one clutter height object is clipped, the displayed resolution will be the object resolution. Resolution If several objects are extracted, the suggested

resolution will be the smallest resolution of the objects. The resolution value must be an integer. The minimum resolution is set to 1 meter.

Note: When you save files using BIL, TIF, and BMP formats, .hdr, .tfw and .bmw files are automatically created in the same folder. The .hdr, .tfw and .bmw files are respectively associated with .bil, .tif and .bmp files; they contain geocoding information and resolution. The export of a clutter height map in ArcView Grid format does not replace the current map as it is for the other raster file formats. It is an export dedicated only to an external application. Clutter height file path is part of the contents of exported .geo or .cfg files.

3.14.4 Exporting a DTM map

Like for clutter class, clutter height and traffic raster maps, it is possible to export the current DTM map in either a tif or a bil format. You may choose to keep the squared part of the current DTM that contains the defined computation zone.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-74

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

To export a part or the complete DTM map, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the DTM folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click Save as... from the open menu. Define the format, the directory path and the name for the file to be exported. Click Save. In the Export dialog, select one of the options and define the resolution (in meters) of the file, as listed in Table 3-28. Click OK.

Table 3-28 Implications of the options in the export dialog box Option Implication Allows you to save the whole DTM map in another file. As Entire Project Area soon as the file is saved, the properties (name, and so on) of DTM object listed in the DTM folder are updated. Allows you to save the DTM region inside the computation zone in another file. As soon as the file is saved, an Computation Zone additional DTM object is created and listed in the DTM folder. To enable this option, you must have drawn a computation zone beforehand. Defined for DTM from the following criteria: If one DTM object is clipped, the displayed resolution will be the object resolution. Resolution If several objects are extracted, the suggested

resolution will be the smallest resolution of the objects. The resolution value must be an integer. The minimum resolution is set to 1 meter.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-75

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

Note: When you save files using BIL, TIF, and BMP formats, .hdr, .tfw and .bmw files are automatically created in the same folder. The .hdr, .tfw and .bmw files are respectively associated with .bil, .tif and .bmp files; they contain geocoding information and resolution. The export of a DTM map in ArcView Grid format does not replace the current map as it is for the other raster file formats. It is an export dedicated only to an external application. DTM file path is part of the contents of exported .geo or .cfg files.

3.14.5 Exporting a Vector Object

You can save any edited vector layer in a vector format file. In this case, the vector layer is no longer embedded in the .atl document; it is a linked file. It can be embedded afterwards. To export a vector layer, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Click the tab (Data or Geo) where the vector layer is currently located in the Explorer window. Right-click the Vector layer to be exported to open the associated shortcut menu. Select Save as from the open menu. Indicate the path, the name and the format for the file to be exported. Possible formats are Arcview (.shp), MapInfo (.mif) and a U-Net internal format (.agd). Press OK.

Note: Only polygons can be saved in the Arcview (.shp) format. Therefore, a vector layer mixing polygons and lines, polygons and points, or containing just points or lines can only be saved in MapInfo (.mif) or U-Net internal format (.agd). The U-Net internal format (.agd) is a new format only supported by the U-Net. Reading .agd files is faster than other vector files with classical supported formats (MapInfo, Arcview, Autocad).

In addition, in case of a linked file, it is possible to save modifications performed on the vector layer.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-76

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data

To save modifications on a vector layer, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the tab (Data or Geo) where the vector layer is currently located in the Explorer window. Right-click the Vector layer to be saved to open the associated shortcut menu. Select Save from the open menu. The U-Net displays a warning to inform you that the source file is modified. Click OK.

Note: The Save command is available only if there are some pending changes on the vector layer.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-77

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

4.1 Overview
As a reference radio planning tool, the U-Net is able to work on several technologies. This feature indicates that there may be a large amount of data in any project. The U-Net, however, is developed to maximize the number of common features for any type of project, either dealing with geo data management or radio data management. Of course, several specific items dealing with the management of radio data are introduced depending on the considered technology, for example, the TRXs and subcells in GSM/GPRS/EDGE, and cell level in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 projects. All the organization tools (such as filters, sorts, groups) described in the user interface basics can be applied to the radio data, working in the explorer, tables or on the map. That way, working on sites, antennas, transmitters (including multi-sectored stations and multi-antenna transmitters) and repeaters always remains easy. Moreover, it is also possible to easily define radio equipment that will be assigned to each transmitter of any network. Specific parts dealing with radio data on GSM/GPRS/EDGE, WCDMA/UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000 will be seen next. Optimizations on networks will also be described on specific parts dealing with each of these project templates.

4.2 Setting Default Radio Units

To build your network, like the projection or display coordinate systems or default length unit used in any U-Net project, you must define reception and transmission units as they have to be taken into account in the working environment. The U-Net allows you to define the units of measurement for transmission and reception of signal levels, in your working environment. The options for units are as follows: Signal transmission unit: dBmilliwatt (dBm), Watts or kiloWatts Signal reception unit: dBmilliwatt (dBm), dBmicroVolt (dBV) or dBmicroVolt/meter (dBV/m) To define reception and transmission units in the current project, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Select Tools > Options from the menu bar. Click the Units tab from the open window. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available and the way to use them.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-1

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

4) 5)

Choose in the scrolling lists the default reception/transmission units for the current .atl U-Net project. Click OK.

The default unit length can be defined in the same dialog box.

4.3 Sites
This section describes the following: Site Properties Site Lists

4.3.1 Site Properties

I. Creating a Site
In the U-Net, a site is a geographical point where one or several transmitters (multi-sector site or station) equipped with antennas with particular characteristics are located. To create a site, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Sites folder to open the shortcut menu. Click New from the open menu. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the new site dialog window.

Note: If the new site does not appear on the map, expand the Site folder by clicking Right-click the site you want to see to open a menu from which you select the Center Map option. Site is automatically created when a base station is dropped on the map. .

In the Display tab window, you can display sites with colors depending on their attributes. The attributes of the sites can be displayed as labels in the workspace or in pop-up help when the tip tool is used. In UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000 projects, in addition to the geographic information, the definition of site equipment and their use has to be tuned.

II. Naming Automatically Sites

The U-Net integrates, by default, a prefix to site names "Site". In addition to this prefix, a number is added and is incremented automatically. Nevertheless, you can force the
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-2

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

U-Net not to use this default prefix and to prefer user-defined prefixes. You can customise it by adding the syntax described below in a U-Net.ini file. You must create this file and place it in the U-Net installation directory. The syntax to define a new prefix to site names in the U-Net.ini file is the following: [Site] Prefix=newprefix Each new site will be named newprefixN instead of SiteN.

Note: This file is read only when U-Net is started. Therefore, it is necessary to close the U-Net session and to restart it to take into account any modification performed in the U-Net.ini. Naming automatically transmitters is also possible, either from a fixed prefix or based on the site name. When a site name is changed, the U-Net automatically renames site-related transmitters and cells whose names contain the site name. In the same way, if you rename a transmitter, the corresponding cells are automatically renamed. The automatic renaming according to site name is by default available. However, it may be blocked if you add the following lines in the U-Net.ini file: [AutoRename] Transmitters = 0 3GCells = 0 Transmitters refer to transmitter renaming when the site name is changed. 3GCells refers to cell renaming when the transmitter name is changed.

III. Managing Site Properties

Like all objects organized in folders (sites, transmitters, antennas, predictions, simulations, measurements) within the U-Net, sites can be managed either individually or globally. Global setting is applied to all the filtered sites.

IV. Managing Global Properties

In the U-Net, you may manage globally the properties associated with existing sites in your network: To manage the global properties, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Sites folder.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-3

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

3) 4)

Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog.

Table 4-1 Tabs in the displayed window Tab General Table Display Other Properties Description Allows you to use the advanced filter/sort/group by features Manages the contents of the site table Assigns colors, labels and tips to sites Exists if some user defined fields are added to the site table

V. Individual Property Management

Table 4-2 lists two ways of editing properties of each existing site in the current network. Table 4-2 Editing properties of each existing site in the current network Method 1) 2) Method 1 3) 4) 5) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Sites folder by clicking the front of it. Right-click the site you want to manage. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window. 1) Select on the map the site you want to manage by right-clicking it ( Method 2 2) 3) ). button in

Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.

The displayed window contains at least 2 tabs (General and Display). An additional Other Properties tab is possible if some user-defined fields are added to the site table. In UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 projects, an additional tab dealing with Site equipment is available.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-4

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

When the properties dialog is open from the explorer or from the map window, it is possible to scroll through the properties dialogs of different sites within the same subfolder without closing them. To do this, use the buttons.

The

buttons enable you to switch back to the first/previous site

properties dialog within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the properties of the first item of a subfolder. The buttons enable you to move forward to the next/last site properties dialog within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the properties of the last item of a subfolder. Subfolders are organized following the grouping/sorting/filtering configuration. Managing site properties is also possible from the site table.

VI. Changing a Site Position

The U-Net permits easy management of the site positions. You can proceed in three ways, either by using geographic coordinates, by integrating the field topology, or by moving sites manually (using the mouse). A shortcut menu is associated with each created site. This can be obtained identically by right-clicking the site on the map or in the Sites folder from the Explorer window. To use the geographic coordinates, perform the following steps: 1) Double-click the site (on the map or in the Sites folder from the Explorer window) you want to move, to view the Site Properties window. You can do the same by selecting the Properties option from the shortcut menu associated with this site. 2) 3) 4) Choose the General tab. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window. Give the site coordinates (X, Y) in the display system you have chosen. The position of the site by default (just at the creation) corresponds to the center of your active map.

Note: In the General tab of the Site Properties window, you can also change the name of the site, add comments for each site, and lock its position on the map. Locking the site position allows "safety" for manual movements (using the mouse) for sites on the map. When you move the site, a message will ask you to confirm your action.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-5

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

When a network is built up, it may be very useful to get sites high enough to propagate signals easily. The U-Net enables you to put sites on the highest point (based on the DTM) around a site on a certain range. To move sites to a high point, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Activate the site shortcut menu. Select Move to a high point.... The radius of highest point test around the current site is displayed.

Note: The U-Net can use either the DTM or a user-defined height for sites in computations.

To move the sites manually on the map, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Select a site. Drag it on the map. Press the button wherever you want. A dialog box is displayed to confirm the moving action if the site has a locked position.

VII. Managing Site Altitudes

The U-Net computes automatically the altitude from the imported DTM map. Nevertheless, it is possible to define "real" altitudes that are the ones taken into account for computations. It is possible to have both altitudes for each site, one altitude read from the DTM map (non-editable value) and the other one that the user may define in the Real box. Only the real altitude defined by the user is stored in database (sites table). Table 4-3 lists two ways of defining a site altitude manually.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-6

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Table 4-3 Defining a site altitude manually Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Sites folder by clicking the front of it. Right-click the site you want to manage the altitude. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Click the General tab of the open dialog. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window. Enter the real altitude in the appropriate field. Click OK or Apply. Select on the map the site whose altitude you want to manage by clicking it ( 2) Method 2 3) 4) 5) 6) ). button in

Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Click the General tab of the open dialog. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window. Enter the real altitude in the appropriate field. Click OK or Apply.

Note: In the sites table, the U-Net displays the real altitude of the site if defined or the DTM altitude in brackets in case the site has no real altitude. In calculations, the U-Net takes into account the site's real altitudes and the DTM value in case it does not find any real altitude. You may force the U-Net to consider only site altitudes determined from the DTM map by selecting the Compute with the DTM altitudes option in the Properties window (General tab) of the site folder. In this case, the U-Net ignores the entered real altitudes. Altitude is global height compared with sea level (Sea is 0 altitude) and depends on the data of the imported DTM file (which could be DEM, for example, including clutter height).

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-7

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

VIII. Getting Distances Around Sites

The radial grid is a graduated grid on the map around the site, with site text color. This grid enables the user to have better distances around site visualization. You can set its parameters by using the button.

Table 4-4 lists two ways of getting distance around sites. Table 4-4 Getting distances around sites Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Method 1 6) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Sites folder by clicking the front of it. Right-click the site you want to get distances around. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the Display tab of the open dialog. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window. 7) Click the button to open the site grid button in

parameter setting dialog box. 8) Set the maximum radius, the distance between each graduation graduations. 1) Select on the map the site you want to get distances around by clicking it ( 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) ). and the deviation between angular

Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the Display tab of the open dialog. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window. Click the button to open the site grid

parameter setting dialog box. 6) Set the maximum radius, the distance between graduations and the deviation between angular graduations.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-8

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Note: You can access directly to the grid parameters by choosing the Grid option from the Site shortcut menu. Clicking OK is equal to checking the Show radial grid box.

An example is shown in Table 4-5 and Figure 4-1. Table 4-5 Distance example Radius Maximum radius of grid Concentric distance between graduations Distance between angular graduations 5,000 m 500 m 30 Distance

Figure 4-1 Grid display with above parameters

IX. Displaying Terrain Section Around Sites

Using the button , you may study the terrain section around a site.

To display the terrain section around a site, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Make displayed the map of your current project. Click the Height profile button from the toolbar.

On the map, click the site you want to study. The U-Net creates a point. Move the pointer anywhere around the site.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-9

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

The U-Net automatically opens the Point analysis window and dynamically displays the height and clutter profile between the site and the pointer in the Terrain sections tab, which replaces the Profile tab. The U-Net displays on the map the path between both points when you click the map to put a second point. The U-Net creates a folder called Terrain sections in the Data tab and lists all the created terrain sections in a related table. Click anywhere on the map or on an object in the explorer to replace the Terrain section tab by the Profile tab.

Note: All the created terrain sections are displayed on the map. All the terrain sections are listed in a manageable table. Standard features for managing table contents (Fields, Delete, Filter, Sort, Locate on the map, Display columns, Copy/Paste, Fill up/down, ...) are available in a shortcut menu (when you right-click a column or record) and in the Format, Edit and Records menus. You can also access the table content management from the Table tab of the Terrain Section property dialog. When selecting a terrain section in the table (on the map), this one is simultaneously selected on the map (in the table) and displayed in the Terrain section tab. The generic U-Net display dialog is available to manage the display of each terrain section. Open the terrain section property dialog and select the Display tab. A terrain section can be modified. On the map, right-click it and check that Edit is selected. On the map, click a point and drag it (the left button pressed) where you want. The terrain section cannot be changed if the Edit command is not selected. A shortcut menu including the Copy and Print commands is available when right-clicking anywhere in the Terrain section tab. Standard features (delete, rename...) are available in the shortcut menu of the Terrain Section folder.

X. Displaying the Line of Sight Area

The line of sight represents an area within which visible contact can be made, for example, the visible zone from a site, choosing either to work on a simple radius or on a more constraining Fresno ellipsoid. To display the line of sight area associated with a site, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Click the desired site in the Sites folder (Explorer window) or on the map. Select the Line of sight area option from the shortcut menu. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-10

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

4) 5)

Enter the desired parameters. Click OK. The U-Net then displays the line of sight area.

XI. Setting the Display Properties of a Site

The U-Net always permits the user to manage object displays easily. For the sites, this can be done by selecting the Display tab of the Site Properties window. The properties window is reached from the site shortcut menu (Right-click the site on the map or in the Sites folder from the Explorer window). On the site display window, you may: Define the site display colors (text and symbol). You can display sites with colors depending on their attributes. The attributes of the sites can be displayed as labels in the workspace.

By clicking the

symbol button, you may change the symbol font, color,

type, style (bold, italic, underline) and background (color and type). You may choose a background from the types, as listed in Table 4-6. You can do the following: Display the site name Define the related font style Display a radial grid around the site Table 4-6 Choosing a background

none

halo

opaque

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-11

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Note: If you use the Display tab in the Site folder properties dialog box in the Explorer window, you may define globally the symbol and text sites display, depending potentially on their attributes.

XII. Deleting Built Sites

In the U-Net, sites (like transmitters) are organized in folders. Even if these two tables are linked, it is possible to delete easily, in one shot, sites and transmitters referred to. To delete built sites, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Open the sites table. Select the Sites you want to delete. Press the Del button of your keyboard, or choose Delete record from the Edit menu.

Note: When deleting a site where transmitters are positioned, the U-Net automatically removes the site and the transmitters without displaying a warning. Hence, to cancel a deletion, use the undo feature available in the Edit menu. Sites can be deleted directly on the map, using their shortcut menu.

4.3.2 Site Lists

I. Creating a Site List
In addition to the dynamic filtering features, the U-Net also enables users to define static lists of sites. Unlike filter/sort/group criteria that may be only saved in user configuration files, site lists are stored in the database. Therefore, when creating an .atl document from the database, it is possible to recover only the sites on a list you can choose. These site lists may be also used as filter to study in predictions only sites of the list(s). In addition, site lists can be imported and exported as ASCII files. Table 4-7 lists two ways of creating lists of sites.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-12

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Table 4-7 Creating lists of sites Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) 5) Step Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Sites folder to open the shortcut menu. Choose Site list > Open Table from the open menu. In the Site lists dialog, you may define one list per row. To validate a list creation, select another row. In the List properties dialog, enter the sites belonging to the list (copy/paste is supported). 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) 5) 6) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Sites folder to open the shortcut menu. Choose Site list > Open Table from the open menu. In the Site lists dialog, you may define one list per row. To validate a list creation, select another row. Select a row and double-click it. In the List properties dialog, enter the sites belonging to the list (copy/paste is supported).

II. Managing a Site List

It is possible to add a site, a group of sites or all the sites in an existing list subsequently. To add a site on a list, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Right-click a site in the explorer or on the map. Choose Add a site to a list... in the shortcut menu. In the Addition of sites in a list dialog, open the menu and select a list.

To add a group of sites in a list, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Right-click a group of sites in the explorer. Choose Add sites to a list... in the shortcut menu. In the Addition of sites in a list dialog, enter the name of a new list. Or open the menu and select an existing list. To add all the sites in a list, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Right-click the Sites folder in the explorer. In the shortcut menu, choose Site lists and then Add sites to a list... command. In the Addition of sites in a list dialog, enter the name of a new list. Or open the menu and select an existing list.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-13

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Note: It is also possible to add all the sites contained in a (computation, focus or filtering zone) zone to a site list. You may do this either from the Zones folder in the Geo tab (Right-click a zone and select the Add sites to a list command in the shortcut menu) or directly on the map (Right-click the zone and select Add sites to a list in the shortcut menu).

III. Exporting a Site List

Site lists can be exported in ASCII text files. Table 4-8 lists two ways of exporting a site list. Table 4-8 Exporting a site list Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) 5) 6) 7) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6) 7) 8) Step Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Sites folder to open the shortcut menu. Choose Site list > Open Table from the open menu. In the Site lists dialog, select an existing list in the table. Click Export. In the Save as dialog, choose a directory to save the file, and give a name to the file. Click OK. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Sites folder to open the shortcut menu. Choose Site list > Open Table from the open menu. In the Site lists dialog, type the name of a new list. Click the Properties... button (or double-click it). Click Export. In the Save as dialog, choose a directory to save the file, and give a name to the file. Click OK.

The ASCII text file has the following syntax: Site name 1 Site name 2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-14

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

It contains only a list of site names. The coordinates and other attributes of sites are not saved. This file, thus, can be imported only if the sites have been previously created in the .atl document.

IV. Importing a Site List

Site lists can be created within the U-Net. They can also be imported from an external ASCII file. Table 4-9 lists two ways of importing a site list. Table 4-9 Importing a site list Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) 5) 6) 7) 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) Step Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Sites folder to open the shortcut menu. Choose Site list > Open Table from the open menu. In the Site lists dialog, select an existing list in the table. Click Import. In the Open dialog, specify the path to access the file. Click Open. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Sites folder to open the shortcut menu. Choose Site list > Open Table from the open menu. In the Site lists dialog, type the name of a new list. Click the Properties... button (or double-click it). Click Import. In the Open dialog, specify the path to access the file. Click Open.

The U-Net fills in the selected list with sites from the imported file. The sites listed before importing the file are kept. The U-Net displays a warning if a site in the list does not exist in the .atl document.

V. Displaying Site Lists

Site lists created in the .atl document can be stored in the database. Therefore, when a user opens an .atl document from a database that contains site lists, he has the possibility to choose the list(s) of sites he wants to recover in his .atl document. To choose the site list to be displayed from a database, perform the following steps: 1) Select the database to be opened. The U-Net displays the Options dialog.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-15

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

2) 3)

In this window, select the value ALL to load all the sites in the .atl document. Or check only the box(es) of site lists you want to recover. Click OK.

Only the sites from the selected list(s) will be available in the .atl document.

Note: It is possible to select several lists at once. To do this, clicke or several lists using Shift and/or Ctrl button at the same time and then, check/uncheck one of the boxes.

VI. Filtering Site Lists

To use site lists as filters, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Right-click the Sites folder and select Properties. In the General tab, click Filter. In the filter dialog, open the Site lists tab and check/uncheck box (es) of site lists you want to keep/exclude in the .atl document. Click OK.

The U-Net only keeps sites belonging to the site lists you have selected. In this case, sites are not definitively removed from the .atl document. This is only a filter that you can cancel (by opening the sites table and selecting Show all records in the Records menu).

Note: It is possible to select several lists at once. To do this, clicke or several lists using Shift and/or Ctrl button at the same time and then, check/uncheck one of the boxes. All the boxes can be unchecked at once by clicking the Clear all button. By default, the value ALL is selected. It means there is no filter. When a filter is active, it is possible to archive only the remaining sites in the connected database by choosing Archive from the Sites folder context menu.

4.4 Antennas
This section describes the following: Importing 3D Antenna Patterns Creating an Antenna
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-16

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Importing 3D Antenna Patterns Managing the Antenna Properties Copying Antenna Patterns to the Clipboard Printing Antenna Patterns

4.4.1 Importing 3D Antenna Patterns

It is possible to import text files describing three-dimensional antenna patterns. Table 4-10 lists the formats supported by the U-Net. Table 4-10 Format supported by the U-Net Line in the file 1st line 2nd line From the 3rd line to the end 1st column: azimuth angle 2nd column: tilt angle 3rd column: attenuation (dB) Antenna pattern Name Gain Description

To import three-dimensional antenna pattern files, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Select the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Antennas folder to open the shortcut menu. Choose Import from the shortcut menu. In the Open window, browse to the file to be imported. Select the file and click Open.

Imported three-dimensional antenna patterns are saved in the Antenna table. For calculations, the U-Net directly reads antenna attenuation in the three-dimensional pattern. It does not use the pattern 3D interpolation method that is applied to antennas described in two cross-sections only.

4.4.2 Creating an Antenna

An antenna is a device used for radiating or receiving electromagnetic energy. Depending on the type of the project (such as GSM, UMTS), the U-Net provides antennas well-suited to the studied projects. Furthermore, the U-Net allows you to create antennas and set the parameters for the characteristics of the following: Name Manufacturer
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-17

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Gain Horizontal pattern Vertical pattern Comments

Note: Creating and setting parameters for different antennas on the basis of manufacturers' data are long and meticulous operations. To make it easier for you, the U-Net allows the use of copy and paste functions as easy as in all office automation tools. You may thus create an antenna from a blank sheet or from an existing one. The U-Net display is compatible with most spreadsheets or word processors.

To create an antenna, perform the following steps, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Antennas folder to open the shortcut menu. Click New in the menu to create a new antenna. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open windows. Fill out the appropriate fields. In the General tab, you can define the antenna name, manufacturer, the gain and the pattern electrical tilt. The Horizontal Pattern and Vertical Pattern tabs describe the antenna response in the horizontal and vertical directions respectively. 6) Click OK or Apply.

Copy and paste are available in the Horizontal Pattern and Vertical Pattern tabs and make it easy to import pattern diagram data from other tools. Therefore, if you already have table formatted values for microwave antenna patterns in a file (spreadsheet or word processor), you can copy and paste them in the related tabs (a spreadsheet in the following example). To copy and paste microwave patterns into the U-Net: 1) 2) Select from your spreadsheet the columns containing angles and values you want to import. Copy your selection, as shown in Figure 4-2.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-18

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Figure 4-2 Copying horizontal pattern values 3) 4) 5) 6) Switch to the U-Net. Click the first top left cell of the corresponding pattern table in the antenna properties window. Paste the data using the Ctrl+V shortcut. Click Apply. Note: If there are some missing values (blank rows) in your data sheet, the U-Net is able to interpolate the values to obtain a complete and realistic pattern all around the antenna. To do so, just follow exactly the steps as above. When pasted, blank rows are compacted in the pattern table when the Apply button is pressed. When performing a calculation along an angle on which no data is available, the U-Net computes a linear interpolation from existing pattern values. In the Other Properties tab, there are three U-Net custom properties like the antenna beamwidth, minimum and maximum frequencies corresponding to the antenna utilization range. The beamwidth is, in a plane containing the direction of the maximum lobe of the antenna pattern, the angle between the two directions in which the radiated power is one-half the maximum value of the lobe. Translated in terms of dB, half power corresponds to 3 dB. In this window, you may enter this angle in degrees. A Pattern Electrical Tilt field is available in the General tab. This value of electrical tilt is not taken into account for computations. This field only represents the electrical tilt already integrated in the antenna patterns. Additional Electrical Downtilts (used to model remote electrical downtilts) can be managed or modified at the transmitter level for the main as well as the secondary antennas installed. It is also possible to import any antenna/list of antennas with PlaNET format (use of an index file containing one antenna file per line) and three-dimensional antenna pattern diagrams described in text files with a specific format.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-19

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

4.4.3 Importing 3D Antenna Patterns

It is possible to import text files describing three-dimensional antenna patterns. The U-Net supports the following format: Table 4-11 lists the formats supported by the U-Net. Table 4-11 Format supported by the U-Net Line in the file 1st line 2nd line From the 3rd line to the end 1st column: azimuth angle 2nd column: tilt angle 3rd column: attenuation (dB) Antenna pattern Name Gain Description

To import three-dimensional antenna pattern files, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Select the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Antennas folder to open the shortcut menu. Choose Import from the shortcut menu. In the Open window, browse to the file to be imported. Select the file and click Open.

Imported three-dimensional antenna patterns are saved in the antennas table. For calculations, the U-Net directly reads antenna attenuation in the three-dimensional pattern. It does not use the pattern 3D interpolation method which is applied to antennas described by two cross-sections only.

4.4.4 Managing the Antenna Properties

In the U-Net, you may edit and even modify the current parameters of an antenna. You may take this action either individually for each antenna, or globally.

I. Editing Single Radiation Pattern

You may edit horizontal or vertical patterns of each antenna by doing nearly the same as creating an antenna. To edit single radiation pattern, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Antennas folder by clicking the sign left to the directory. Select the antenna from which you want to edit the radiation pattern by clicking it.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-20

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

4) 5)

Activate the Antenna properties window by double-clicking or by choosing the Properties option from the menu. Choose the Pattern tab associated with the pattern you want to edit.

You may change the values by filling new ones directly on the tables. Patterns can be copied to clipboard or printed.

Note: It is possible to display antenna patterns with either linear or logarithmic axes. To choose your display system, you can right-click in the pattern window and choose the appropriate option from the open menu. The new shape is automatically displayed in the pattern window.

When the properties dialog is open from the explorer or from the map window, it is possible to use the buttons to scroll through the properties dialogs of different antennas within the same subfolder without closing. The buttons enable you to switch back to the first/previous Antenna Properties dialog within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the properties of the first item of a subfolder. The buttons enable you to move forward to the next/last Antenna properties dialog within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the properties of the last item of a subfolder. Subfolders are organized following the grouping/sorting/filtering configuration.

II. Editing Multiple Radiation Pattern

Like for the other parameters (such as sites, transmitters), the U-Net enables you to manage antennas in table form. To activate the antenna table, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Double-click the Antenna folder. Choose Open Table option from the Antenna shortcut menu (Right-click the antenna folder). By resizing cell heights and widths, you may obtain all the antenna patterns on a view to make a comparative choice, as shown in Figure 4-3.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-21

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Figure 4-3 Data tab/antenna/open table - antenna data table In addition, you may change data directly in the table (Click the cell you want to modify), or use copy and paste (Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V). This last feature allows you to assign patterns from one antenna to others. Example: In the following table, a new antenna called Antenna1, from Martin SA, has been built, with a 12 dBi Gain, and some patterns. The goal is to copy the patterns of a certain antenna to Antenna1. To copy the patterns of a certain antenna to Antenna1, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Open the antenna table. Select the pattern cell of the antenna whose pattern you want to export. Press Ctrl+C to copy the cell, as shown in Figure 4-4.

Figure 4-4 Data tab/antenna/open/pattern copying - antenna data table 4) 5) Select the pattern cell of the antenna you want to copy this pattern to. Press Ctrl+V to paste the antenna pattern.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-22

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Figure 4-5 Data tab/antenna/open/pattern pasting - antenna data table The U-Net replaces the old pattern with the new one both in the antenna table and properties window. You can check that data have also been adapted in the patterns table of the modified antenna properties window.

Note: By using the copy (Ctrl+C) and paste (Ctrl+V) functions, you may even attribute patterns from one antenna to another one by working directly on the pattern cells of the antenna table. The way patterns are displayed (linear or logarithmic) is reported in the antenna table as chosen in any single antenna properties dialog box.

4.4.5 Copying Antenna Patterns to the Clipboard

To copy the horizontal/vertical pattern of an existing antenna to the clipboard, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Antennas folder by clicking the it. Activate the antenna properties window either by double-clicking or by choosing the Properties option from the menu. Choose the Pattern tab associated with the pattern you want to edit (horizontal/vertical). Right-click the pattern window to open the associated shortcut menu. Choose the Copy command from the open menu.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-23

sign left to the directory.

Select the antenna from which you want to copy the radiation pattern by clicking

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

This can be made either on a linear or a logarithmic display. If there are some missing values (blank rows) in your data sheet, the U-Net is able to interpolate the values to obtain a complete and realistic pattern all around the antenna. To do so, just follow exactly the steps, as said previously. When pasted and the Apply button is pressed, the blank rows are compacted in the pattern table.

4.4.6 Printing Antenna Patterns

To print the horizontal/vertical pattern of an existing antenna, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Antennas folder by clicking the sign left to the directory. Select the antenna from which you want to print the radiation pattern by clicking it. Activate the Antenna Properties window either by double-clicking or by choosing the Properties option from the menu. Choose the Pattern tab associated with the pattern you want to edit (horizontal/vertical). Right-click the pattern window to open the associated shortcut menu. Choose the Print... command from the open menu.

This can be made either on a linear or a logarithmic display.

4.5 Transmitters
A transmitter is the source or generator of any signal on a transmission medium. A transmitter is a piece of equipment composed of some antennas located on a site. Depending on the type of the project, the U-Net manages differently the transmitters parameters. Whatever the project, you may manage globally or individually the transmitter parameters and their single activity/inactivity. A base station is a group of transmitters on the same site. With the U-Net, you may work on several types, from single to multi-sectored stations, by creating new ones from nothing or templates. Then depending on the project type, transmitters are managed differently. Hence, additional levels are introduced like subcells and TRXs in TDMA/GSM projects, cells (one carrier on a transmitter) for UMTS/HSDPA and CDMA/CDMA2000 projects. Therefore, the items referenced in this part deal with common management of transmitters and station templates. All specific parts depending on the technology are described in their respective parts. The following sections describe the creation, deletion, moving, and setting of the global properties of the transmitters and station templates. This section describes the following: Transmitters Properties
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-24

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Station Templates

4.5.1 Transmitters Properties

I. Creating a Transmitter
In the U-Net, several antennas can be installed on the same transmitter. The creative steps for one antenna and more antennas transmitters are identical. The second antenna used is automatically placed at the same height as the first one. To create a transmitter, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder. Choose the New option from the shortcut menu. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open windows. Fill out the appropriate fields in the several tab windows. Click OK or Apply.

The U-Net opens the Transmitter new element properties window containing the main characteristics describing the transmitter you are building. This window contains at least 2 tabs, additional tabs being linked with the type of project template you are working on. The standard tabs are General and Transmitter and deal with the definition of the transmitter, its location, the assignment to some specific radio equipment (leading to loss computation), and the antenna(s) used on this transmitter. The power definition is located in the Transmitter part in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, whereas its definition is made at the cell level in WCDMA/UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 projects.

Note: The Other Properties tab window is available for any project if a user-defined field has been added to the transmitter table.

II. Naming Transmitters Automatically

By the use of a U-Net.ini file located in the U-Net directory, it is possible to force some conventions on the transmitter naming. Prefix The U-Net integrates, by default, a prefix to transmitter names which is the name of the related site. In addition to this prefix, the sector number corresponding to the considered transmitter is added.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-25

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Nevertheless, you can force the U-Net not to use this default prefix and to prefer user-defined prefixes. You can customize it by adding the syntax described below in a U-Net.ini file. You must create this file and place it in the U-Net installation directory. The syntax to define a new prefix to transmitter names in the U-Net.ini file is the following: [Transmitter] Prefix=newprefix Each new transmitter will be named newprefixN instead of TxN. Another solution is to use an automatic prefix by writing these lines: [Transmitter] Prefix=<AUTO> In this case, each new transmitter is called Site name_n. Site name is the name of the site where the transmitter is located and n is the transmitter number on this site. Sector suffix The default sector suffix can be set. It is possible to impose a numeric (0,1,2,) or an alphabetic suffix (A, B, C). To do this, add these lines in the U-Net.ini file:
[Transmitter] SuffixIsNum = 1 (default value: numeric suffix) = 0 (alphabetic suffix)

In case of a numeric suffix, by default, when creating a tri-sector station, the numbering of the first sector starts from 1. Therefore, we will have 3 transmitters named Site1_1, Site1_2 and Site1_3. To differently initialize the numbering of the first sector, add these lines in the U-Net.ini file:
[Transmitter] First=x (x must be an integer)

In case of an alphabetic suffix, by default, when creating a tri-sectors station, the character of the first sector starts from A. Therefore, we will have 3 transmitters named Site1_A, Site1_B and Site1_C. To differently initialize the designation of the first sector, add these lines in the U-Net.ini file:
[Transmitter] FirstCharSuffix=x (x must be a letter. The U-Net respect case-sensitivity)

Separation between prefix and numbering By default, the U-Net puts an underscore character ( _ ) between the prefix and the sector numbering such as Site1_1, Site1_2, .). It is possible to avoid this character. To do this, add the following lines in the U-Net.ini file:
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-26

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software [Transmitter]

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Underscore=0 (Default value = 1 with underscore)

Note: This U-Net .ini is read only when U-Net is started. Therefore, it is necessary to close the U-Net session and to restart it to take into account any modification performed in U-Net.ini. When changing the name of a site, U-Net automatically renames transmitters and cells related to the site which names contain the site name. In the same way, if you rename a transmitter, the corresponding cells are automatically renamed. The automatic renaming according to site name is by default available. However, it may be blocked if you add the following lines in the U-Net.ini file: [AutoRename] Transmitters = 0 3GCells = 0

Transmitters refers to transmitter renaming when the site name is changed. 3GCells refers to cell renaming when the transmitter name is changed. Automatically naming sites is also possible. For UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 projects, cell automatic naming can also be set.

III. Managing Transmitter Properties

Like for all objects organized in folders (Sites, Transmitters, Antennas, Predictions, Simulations, measurements) within the U-Net, transmitters can be managed either individually or globally. A global setting is applied to all the filtered transmitters. Global Properties Management In the U-Net, you may manage globally the properties associated with transmitters of your network. To manage the global properties, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.

Table 4-12 lists the descriptions of the four standard tab windows.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-27

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Table 4-12 Four standard tab windows Tab General Table Description Deals with folder organization and associated configurations helps you to manage contents in the transmitter table Makes it possible to assign the same propagation model(s), Propagation calculation radius (or radii), path loss resolution(s) to all filtered transmitters of the folder, and to manage the path loss result storage Station Allows you to manage (creation, modification, deletion) models of stations Allows you to manage the display of transmitters depending Display on their attributes, and to manage the legend, labels on the map, and the contents of pop-up help using the tip tool

Note: To attribute different colors to the transmitters (used in coverage prediction for example) in the network easily, use the Automatic command from the Display type scrolling box in the Display tab window (and validate by pressing the Apply button).

Individual Property Management Table 4-13 lists two ways of editing the properties of each transmitter in the current network. Table 4-13 Editing the properties of each transmitter in the current network Method 1) 2) Method 1 3) 4) 5) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking the button in front of it. Right-click the transmitter you want to manage. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-28

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Method 1) Method 2 2) 3)

Step Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by clicking the appropriate Tx symbol (arrow). Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.

Table 4-14 lists the five tabs contained in the displayed window. Table 4-14 Five tabs contained in the displayed window Tab General Description Deals with the referred site and the location of the current transmitter linked with the definition of power (in GSM/GPRS/EDGE Transmitter projects), assigned losses and antennas built on this transmitter Makes it possible to assign propagation model(s), calculation Propagation radius (or radii), path loss resolution(s) to the current transmitter, and to manage the path loss result storage Display Allows you to manage the symbol (size, color and type) assigned to the current transmitter Is available if some user defined fields are added to the transmitter table

Other Properties

Note: It is possible to install a remote antenna on a transmitter. You can open the property dialog of the site on which the transmitter is built by clicking the General tab. You can open the property dialog of the antenna used as main antenna on the transmitter by clicking the button on the right of the scrolling antenna button on the right of the scrolling site selection box in the

selection box in the Transmitter tab.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-29

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

When the properties dialog is open from the explorer or from the map window, it is possible to scroll through the property dialogs of different transmitters within the same subfolder without closing. To do this, use the buttons.

The buttons enable you to switch back to the first/previous transmitter properties dialog within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the properties of the first item of a subfolder. The buttons enable you to move forward to the next/last transmitter properties dialog within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the properties of the last item of a subfolder. Subfolders are organized following the grouping/sorting/filtering configuration.

IV. Managing Transmitter Symbol Display

The U-Net provides advanced features for the transmitter display. For any symbol, it is possible to display the transmitter colors according to any attributes contained into the site, transmitter or cell table. In addition an automatic coloring of the transmitter symbols is also available (16 colors with an epitomized distribution). Several symbols are available to display transmitters on the map. You can select among fixed shapes like arrows or lines. In addition, a beamwidth-related symbol is available. The size of the symbol can be also set at the transmitter level independently from the site symbol size. To set the transmitter symbol display, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Access the property dialog of the related item (single transmitter or Transmitters folder/subfolder). Click the Display tab. Click the symbol displayed to open the symbol display parameters dialog. Set the color (if needed, see below), the size and the symbol type. , the U-Net displays the transmitter according to the beamwidth If you select as defined in the properties of the main antenna. All the other symbols are fixed except that they all support rotations. 5) Click OK.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-30

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Note: All these settings can be set individually (property dialog of each single transmitter) or for all the transmitters globally (property dialog of the Transmitters folder). Setting the symbol color at this level make it independent from any transmitter attribute. When the is selected, the U-Net reads the Beamwidth field of the antennas table. Ensure that this field exists, and is correctly written and its values are correctly defined. Without any value or if the field does not exist, transmitters cannot be displayed if this symbol has been displayed. To differentiate on the map two transmitters located on the same site with the same azimuth, use these symbols: and . There is no overlap between both

symbols on the map; therefore, it is possible to easily select each transmitter and to read attributes of each transmitter in tips.

V. Moving a Transmitter on the Map

Even if transmitters are linked with sites, it is possible to shift them from their reference site by adjusting Dx and Dy contained in each Transmitter property dialog box. Dx (resp. Dy) is the distance (in metres) between the considered transmitter and the basis site X-positive (Y-positive) directed. Nevertheless, it is possible to move a transmitter by mouse. To move a transmitter by mouse, perform the following steps: 1) Select the transmitter you want to move on the map by clicking it and maintaining it. Another pointer appears close to the mouse pointer.

2)

Drag the transmitter to the desired location.

3)

Release the mouse button when the transmitter reaches to the specified location.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-31

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

The Dx and Dy values are automatically modified in the transmitter properties.

VI. Adjusting Transmitter Azimuths

In the U-Net, it is possible to modify the azimuth of the antenna(s) of any transmitter by accessing its property dialog box. Azimuth values are defined in degrees, 0 indicating north, and are ordered in a clockwise direction. It is also possible to modify the azimuth of the first antenna of any transmitter by using your mouse. To modify the azimuth of the first antenna of any transmitter by using your mouse, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Select the antenna you want to move on the map by clicking it and release the mouse button. Move the pointer to the arrow extremity of the selected transmitter. A specific rotation pointer appears close to the mouse pointer.

3) 4)

Click the green dot and keep the mouse button pressed. Drag the pointer to execute a rotation around the original location.

The current value of the azimuth is displayed in real time in the left-most part of the status bar 5) .

Release the mouse button when the desired angle is reached.

The azimuth value for the first antenna of the considered transmitter is automatically modified in the transmitter properties. It is also possible to modify the azimuth of the first antenna of all the transmitters situated on a site by using your mouse. To modify the azimuth of the first antenna of all the transmitters situated on a site by using your mouse, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Select any transmitter of the site you want to rotate on the map by clicking it and release the mouse button. Move the pointer to the arrow extremity of the selected transmitter. Another rotation pointer appears close to the mouse pointer.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-32

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

3) 4) 5)

Click the green dot and keep the mouse button pressed. Hold down CTRL on your keyboard. Drag the pointer to execute a rotation around the original location.

The current value of the azimuth is displayed in real time in the left-most part of the status bar 6) .

Release the mouse button and the CTRL button when the desired angle is reached.

Azimuth values for the first antenna of all the transmitters concerned are automatically modified in the transmitter properties.

Note: The precision of the azimuth angle depends on the distance of the cursor from the transmitter symbol. Azimuth angles change by: 1 degree when the cursor is moved within a distance of 10 times the size of the transmitter symbol. 0.1 degree when the cursor is moved outside this region.

VII. Installing Several Antennas on a Transmitter

In the U-Net, it is possible to assign several antennas on the same transmitter to compose the several associated patterns of each of them. Table 4-15 lists two ways of building several antennas on the same transmitter.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-33

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Table 4-15 Building several antennas on the same transmitter Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking the button in front of it. Right-click the transmitter you want to manage. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the Transmitter tab of the open window. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog. Method 1 In the Other antennas part, define additional antennas: a) Click the first cell in the Antenna column. b) Open the menu (by clicking the arrow) and choose an antenna in the menu. c) Enter its characteristics: azimuth, mechanical downtilt, remote electrical downtilt, and the percentage of power dedicated to this antenna (% Power column). d) Select another row to validate the new antenna installation. 8) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Method 2 Click OK or Apply. Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by clicking the appropriate Tx symbol (arrow). Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the Transmitter tab of the open window. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog. In the Other antennas part, define additional antennas: a) Click the first cell in the Antenna column. b) Open the menu (by clicking the arrow) and choose an antenna in the menu. c) Enter its characteristics: azimuth, mechanical downtilt, remote electrical downtilt, and the percentage of power dedicated to this antenna (% Power column). d) Select another row to validate the new antenna installation. 6) Click OK or Apply.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-34

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Note: Entering 0% in the Percent_power column means that only the first antenna is considered. The other antennas used are automatically placed at the same height as the first one. The characteristics of additional antennas are described in the secondary antennas table. This one can be opened from the Transmitters folder context menu by selecting Secondary antennas and Open table commands. Standard management features (such as copy, paste) available in tables can be used.

VIII. Setting Transmitter Activity

When transmitters are built in a network, you may decide to activate them or not. Predictions, simulations and associated reports/statistics take into account only active transmitters (and not filtered transmitters). In the Explorer window, active transmitters are displayed in red ( are displayed in white ( symbol) in the Transmitter folder, unlike inactive ones which symbol).

To set the activity of a transmitter, you can select the Transmitter tab from the transmitter properties. Or you can activate the transmitter table window, (un)check the active box to make the transmitter (un)active in the network. You may also manage the transmitters activity from the shortcut menu associated with each transmitter individually (Right-click the Transmitter subfolder in the Geo tab from the Explorer window) or globally (Right-click the Transmitters folder in the Geo tab from the Explorer window).

IX. Deleting a Transmitter

Table 4-16 lists two ways of deleting an existing transmitter. Table 4-16 Deleting an existing transmitter Method 1) 2) Method 1 3) 4) 1) Method 2 2) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking the button in front of it. Right-click the transmitter you want to delete. Choose the Delete option from the shortcut menu. Select on the map the transmitter ( ) you want to

delete by clicking the appropriate Tx symbol (arrow). Choose the Delete option from the shortcut menu.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-35

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Another alternative is to delete the line associated with the transmitter you want to delete from the transmitters table.

Note: When selecting a transmitter, be careful to reach the selection. is

different. In that case, that is the site which is selected. Since the deletion action is possible on sites on which transmitters are built, be sure of your selection.

4.5.2 Station Templates

I. Creating a Station Template
A station is one transmitter or a group of transmitters on a same site sharing the same properties. With the U-Net, you may create, modify or delete station templates and build your network from stations instead of single transmitters. Method 1) Step From the toolbar, click the template scrolling box.

2)

Select the Manage Templates... tool.

Method 1 3) 4) 5) 6) Click the template. button to create a new station

Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Enter the parameters of the station being currently built. Click OK.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-36

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Method 2 template. 6) 7) 8)

Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the Station templates tab. Click the button to create a new station

Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Enter the parameters of the station being currently built. Click OK.

The new station template is then available in the station menu.

Note: In UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000, the station template must integrate the site equipment properties related to the site on which it is dropped.

II. Defining Station Template Properties

A station is one transmitter or a group of transmitters on a same site sharing the same properties. With the U-Net, you may create, modify or delete station templates and build your network from stations instead of single transmitters. Table 4-17 lists two ways of managing a station template.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-37

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Table 4-17 Managing a station template Method 1) Step From the toolbar, click the template scrolling box.

2)

Select the Manage Template... tool.

Method 1

3)

Select the template you want to manage in the Available templates box.

4)

Click the

button to open the station

template properties dialog box. 5) 6) 7) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Method 2 6) Click the button to open the station template properties dialog box. 7) 8) 9) Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Set the parameters of the current station. Click OK. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Set the parameters of the current station. Click OK. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the Station templates tab. Select the template you want to manage in the Available templates box.

You can also add user-defined fields to station templates through the station templates management window. These additional fields appear in a new tab in the station template properties window, named Other properties, if there are corresponding user-defined fields available in the sites table. This feature has been designed to allow
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-38

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

users to introduce user-defined fields in the sites table to the station templates. Therefore, the sites then created with this template contain these user-defined fields by default. Table 4-18 lists two ways of adding, modifying or deleting a field in the station templates. Table 4-18 Adding, modifying or deleting a field in the station templates Method 1) Step From the toolbar, click the template scrolling box.

2)

Select the Manage Template... tool.

Method 1 3) Click the button on the Station Template Management window to open the Station Template Fields dialog box. 4) Click properties of, or field. 5) Click OK. to add, to modify to delete a user-defined

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-39

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Method 2

Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the Station templates tab. Click the button on the Station

Template Management window to open the Station Template Fields dialog box. 6) Click properties of, or field. 7) Click OK. to add, to modify to delete a user-defined

Note: The properties you can adjust are similar to the transmitter properties ones. The user-defined fields added in the station templates must be the same as the user-defined fields in the sites table to be taken into account.

III. Deleting a Station Template

A station is one transmitter or a group of transmitters on a same site sharing the same properties. With the U-Net, you may create, modify or delete station templates and build your network from stations instead of single transmitters. Table 4-19 lists two ways of deleting a station template

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-40

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Table 4-19 Deleting a station template Method 1) Step From the toolbar, click the template scrolling box.

2)

Select the Manage Template... tool

Method 1

3)

Select the template you want to delete in the Available templates box.

4) 5) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5)

Click the Click OK or Cancel.

button.

Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the Station templates tab. Select the template you want to delete in the Available templates box.

6) 7)

Click the Click OK or Cancel.

button.

IV. Dropping a Station from a Template

In the U-Net, as for (site, transmitter) pairs, you can easily build station from available templates. To create a station from a template, perform the following steps: 1) Select in the Station Template scrolling box (located in the toolbar) the template to use. 2) 3) Click the New station button, left to the scrolling box.

Put the station on the appropriate location on your map.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-41

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

You may also build several identical stations from a template in the U-Net. To do so, you must have previously defined a hexagonal cell radius for the corresponding template in its properties dialog window. To create groups of stations, perform the following steps: 1) Select in the Station Template scrolling box (located in the toolbar) the template to use. 2) 3) Click the hexagonal design button, left of the scrolling box.

Draw the zone in which you want to build the stations on the map as a computation or focus zone. Stations with associated hexagonal shapes around are built as best possible in the drawn zone.

Once built, stations objects (sites and transmitters) are put in the corresponding folders, and you may work on them as if they were sites and transmitters. Hence, you may add additional antennas on each created transmitter.

Note: When you select a specific template, if the Hexagonal design button is not available ( ), define a hexagonal cell radius for this template in its properties

dialog window, used as the hexagonal shape radius. In UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000, the site on which is dropped the station has UMTS equipment properties which are defined in the Station Template dialog. It is also possible to drop a station on an existing site.

V. Dropping a Station on an Existing Site

In the U-Net, the standard way in dropping stations is at the same time the creation of related site and corresponding properties (such as site equipment in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000). Nevertheless, it is easily possible to drop a station from a template on existing site. Once the reference site is available, to drop a station from a template on it, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Select in the Station Template scrolling box (located in the toolbar) the template to use. Uncheck the visibility flag in front of the Hexagonal Design folder. Click the New station button, left of the scrolling box.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-42

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

4) 5)

Move your pointer to the reference site on your map. Click the site. The station is put on the site.

VI. Managing a Multi-Sectored Station

Even if you can select only one transmitter at a time, it is possible to group together all the transmitters composing a same base station (defined in the station templates properties). To manage a multi-sectored station, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitter folder to open the shortcut menu. Choose the group by sites option. Transmitters are then displayed under Sites subfolders in the Transmitters folder.

VII. Merging Hexagonal Groups of Base Stations

When you build several hexagonal groups of different station templates, some hexagons may overlap. These overlapping zones can overestimate the number of needed sites regarding the number of transmitters. To avoid that, the U-Net provides a tool that helps you to merge sites of different hexagon groups. To merge sites of different hexagonal groups located within a certain distance, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Display the several hexagon groups by checking the box ( ) in front of the Hexagonal design folder. Right-click the Hexagonal design folder to open the shortcut menu. Choose the Merge sites... command from the open menu. Enter the distance within which you want to merge sites. Click OK.

Example: Let's imagine that two base bi-sectored stations of different hexagon groups are located within a radius of 200 m, and their respective hexagon cell radius is 500 m and 1000 m. With this feature, you can merge sites located within a distance of, for example, 300 m. At the end of the process, there is only one site on which 4 transmitters are built.

4.6 Repeaters
Repeaters and remote antennas provide a solution to extend the radio coverage without adding a new base station.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-43

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

A repeater is a device that receives, amplifies, and transmits the radiated or conducted RF carrier both in downlink and uplink. It comprises a donor side and a server side. The donor side receives the signal from a donor transmitter. This signal may be carried by different types of links such as radio link, microwave link, or optical fiber. The server side transmits the repeated signal. The use of remote antennas allows antenna positioning at locations that would normally require prohibitively long runs of feeder cable. A remote antenna is connected to the base station through an optical fiber. The most important difference between the two is that a remote antenna generates its own cell whereas a repeater extends the coverage of an existing cell. The U-Net models RF repeaters, optical fiber repeaters and microwave repeaters as well as remote antennas. The modeling focuses on: The additional coverage these systems provide to transmitters in downlink. Repeaters and remote antennas are similarly modeled for 2G and 3G networks, except that on the 2G side, the U-Net deals with EIRP and on the 3G side with a global amplification gain (DL total gain). Uplink modeling for UMTS/CDMA/CDMA2000 networks. The UL total gain value is considered in service areas studies (effective service area and UL Eb/Nt service area) and the noise rise generated at the donor transmitter by repeater(s) is taken into account.

Note: Broad-band repeaters are not modeled. We assume that all the TRXs from the 2G donor transmitter, as well as all the carriers from the 3G donor transmitter are amplified.

4.6.1 Managing Repeater Equipment

Repeater or remote antenna equipment is used in the equipment specifications linked with repeaters. When defined, repeater or remote antenna equipment is available to be assigned individually to each repeater or remote antenna in the network. To create or manage repeater or remote antenna equipment, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Choose the Repeater/Remote Antenna > Equipment... option from the open menu. The repeater or remote antenna definition tables are displayed
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-44

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

4) 5)

Create repeater or remote antenna equipment (give an equipment name to each newly created one), and, specify items for each of them, as listed in Table 4-20. Close the definition table.

Table 4-20 Items specified in the table Item Description The noise figure is only used in UMTS/CDMA/CDMA2000 networks to evaluate the corresponding UL loss to be added to the donor transmitter UL losses. This models the fact that Noise figure (Repeater noise figure, dB) Note: The noise rise generated at the donor transmitter by the repeater is taken into account in the modeling only for repeaters with equipment. Minimum and maximum repeater amplification gains with increment step value (dB) These parameters enable the U-Net to check that the user-defined amplifier gain is consistent with the limits of the equipment if there is one. The U-Net uses the increment step value when you increase or decrease the repeater amplifier gain with the buttons. the repeater creates a noise rise at the donor transmitter.

These values correspond to the limits of power that can be Maximum uplink and downlink powers (dBm) reached after amplification by the repeater. The U-Net compares the calculated powers to these values and reduce the calculated powers to limits when they exceed the limit values. Internal delay (s) This is an informative field in this version.

Note: Double-clicking a record opens the Property dialog for the corresponding equipment. Noise figures must be positive values. The Table tab window allows you to manage user-defined variables in the Records tab window. To access it, right-click the table, and select Fields....

4.6.2 Creating a Repeater

It is possible to model a repeater for which there is a donor transmitter.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-45

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

To create a repeater, perform the following steps: 1) Select a transmitter on the map or in the Transmitters folder of the Explorer. It is the donor transmitter. 2) In the toolbar, click the icon selected). 3) Place the repeater on the map. (active only if a transmitter has been previously

A repeater can be added to an existing site or can itself generate a new site. The U-Net creates a repeater linked to the selected donor transmitter. In the explorer, the new site is listed in the Sites folder and the repeater under its donor transmitter. The repeater is represented on the map by the icon . The repeater has the color of

the donor transmitter and by default, the same azimuth. When you click the icon, the U-Net displays a link to the donor transmitter.

Note: It is possible to create a remote antenna in the same way. The remote antenna may be linked to a transmitter with or without a main antenna.

4.6.3 Managing Repeater Properties

The repeater property dialog can be opened either by double-clicking the repeater on the map or in the explorer, or by selecting Properties... in the repeater shortcut menu. It consists of the following four parts: General Donor Coverage Propagation. Standard properties are available in the General tab. This tab contains general information on the repeater: The name of the repeater. By default, repeaters are called RepeaterN. The donor transmitter name that cannot be changed after the repeater creation. The site which it is located on. The distance offset on x (Dx) and y (Dy) axises. The amplifier gain (amplification gain). It will be used in the link budget to evaluate the repeater total gain.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-46

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

The delay offset (internal delay) of the repeater. Delay offset is an informative field in this version. Comments. All the created repeaters and donor side properties are listed in the repeaters table. To open this table, right-click the Transmitters folder, and then select Repeaters and Open Table.

Note: It is possible to copy/paste or to import a list of repeaters in the table. In addition, standard features for managing table content (Fill down/up, Delete, Display columns, Filter, Sort, Table Fields) are available in a shortcut menu (when right-clicking column(s) or record(s)) and in the Format, Edit and Records menu.

The Donor side tab enables you to model the repeater side facing the donor transmitter. In this tab, you may specify the different settings listed below: The link type must be defined for the repeater-donor connection. The donor transmitter and repeater can be linked off air, over a microwave link or through an optical cable. Respective losses for the chosen link type can be defined. In case of an off-air repeater, the Calculate button can be used to determine the actual propagation losses between donor and repeater. In case of off-air repeaters, the repeater donor side antenna must be selected in the Model menu. Enter the repeater antenna height. The U-Net evaluates the repeater azimuth and downtilt considering that the donor side antenna of the repeater is pointed to the antenna of the donor transmitter. Azimuth and downtilt can also be user-defined.

Note: The Calculate button enables you to update azimuth and downtilt values after the repeater donor side antenna height or the repeater location is changed. If you choose another site or change site coordinates in the General tab, click Apply before using the Calculate button.

Finally, you may model the type and lengths of feeders used on transmission and reception sides. Choose a type of feeder in the Type menu and enter its respective lengths.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-47

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

The Coverage side tab enables you to model the repeater side that provides the additional coverage. In this tab, you may specify the different settings listed below: The repeater/remote antenna activity status must be chosen. Only active repeaters (displayed in red in the explorer) are calculated. Choose the Repeater/remote antenna coverage side in the Model menu. By default, if no antenna is installed on the repeater/remote antenna, the U-Net takes into account an omni-directional antenna with 0 dBi gain. Enter the height, azimuth and downtilt of the repeater/remote antenna coverage side antenna. Additional antennas can be specified.

Note: By default, characteristics (antenna, azimuth, and height) of the repeater/remote antenna coverage side correspond to the donor transmitter characteristics.

Finally, you may model the type and lengths of feeders used on transmission and reception sides. Choose a type of feeder in the Type menu and enter its respective lengths. You may define EIRP in case of GSM/GPRS/EDGE networks or UL and DL total gains in UMTS/CDMA/CDMA2000 networks. The U-Net uses the EIRP and the DL total gain values to calculate the signal level received from the repeater; the UL total gain value is considered in service area studies (effective service area or UL Eb/Nt service area for UMTS/CDMA/CDMA2000 networks). Either directly enter a value, or click the Calculate button in order for the U-Net to deduce the values from the link budget. If you modify any characteristic in the General, Donor side and Coverage side tabs, click Apply before using the Calculate button.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-48

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Note: In the current U-Net version, only the downlink of GSM/GPRS/EDGE networks is modeled. Therefore, even if you may specify reception and transmission feeder lengths on the donor and coverage sides, the U-Net considers only the reception feeder length on the donor side and the transmission feeder length on the coverage side in the link budget. Default EIRP takes into account donor transmitter EIRP, either propagation losses between the donor transmitter and the off-air repeater, or the link losses between the donor transmitter and the microwave link repeater, or the fiber losses between the donor transmitter and the optical fiber repeater, donor part characteristics (donor antenna gain, reception feeder losses), amplification gain and coverage part characteristics (coverage antenna gain and transmission feeder losses).

The DL total gain is applied to each power (pilot power, SCH power, and so on). It takes into account: Propagation losses between the donor transmitter and the off-air repeater Link losses between the donor transmitter and the microwave link repeater Fiber losses optical between the donor transmitter and the optical fiber repeater Donor part characteristics (donor antenna gain and reception feeder losses) Amplification gain Coverage part characteristics (coverage antenna gain and transmission feeder losses) The UL total gain is applied to each terminal power. It takes into account: Propagation losses between the donor transmitter and the off-air repeater Link losses between the donor transmitter and the microwave link repeater Fiber losses optical between the donor transmitter and the optical fiber repeater Donor part characteristics (donor antenna gain, transmission feeder losses) Amplification gain Coverage part characteristics (coverage antenna gain and reception feeder losses) Assumptions in case of an off-air repeater are as follows: The link between the donor transmitter and the repeater has the same frequency as the network. Propagation losses between donor transmitter and repeater are calculated in the ITU 526-5 propagation model. Since repeaters will be involved in computations, propagation parameters have to be set as that in transmitters. They can be accessed from the Propagation side tab of any repeater/remote antenna property dialog.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-49

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

As for the transmitter, you may specify: A propagation model, a calculation radius and a resolution used to compute the main path loss matrix. A propagation model, a calculation radius and a resolution taken into account to calculate the extended path loss matrix.

Note: By default, the U-Net assigns to the repeater/remote antenna calculation settings (propagation model, calculation radius, and grid resolution) defined for the donor transmitter. The definition of the calculation radius in the repeater/remote antenna property dialog has an effect on the related transmitters because of a computation zone.

4.6.4 Updating Repeater Parameters

As for transmitters, it is possible to select a repeater on the map, to change its azimuth and its position relating to its site. In addition, it is possible to globally update calculated azimuths and downtilts of repeater donor side antennas by selecting Repeaters and Calculate Angles on the Transmitters shortcut menu. Finally, it is possible to globally update calculated total gains (or calculated EIRP) of all the repeaters by selecting Repeaters and Calculate Gain (or Calculate EIRP) on the Transmitters shortcut menu.

4.6.5 Using Repeaters in Calculations

Repeaters have an impact on the donor transmitter coverage.

I. Path Loss Matrices

The U-Net calculates a main path loss matrix and potentially an extended one for each active repeater: Which satisfies the filter criteria defined Which has a calculation area (intersection between the calculation radius and rectangle including the computation zone) Computations are performed with the standard validity management carried out for any transmitter. The following features are available in the Result storage dialog and in the Propagation tab of the Transmitters property dialog.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-50

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Export of repeater path loss matrices Possibility to evaluate the number of transmitters/repeaters to recalculate List of transmitters/repeaters calculated Invalidity reasons

II. Coverage Predictions

The calculation area is the union between calculation areas of the donor transmitter and the repeater. The U-Net displays a composite coverage. On each pixel, it takes the sum of two kinds of signals: Signal level received from the donor transmitter Signal level from the repeater The de-synchronization, which may lead to constructive or destructive operation on signals, is not modeled.

III. Point Analysis

In the Profile tab, it is possible to study the profile between a repeater and a target receiver. In this case, the U-Net gives the signal level from the repeater. In the Reception and Results tabs, the U-Net provides the composite signal, the signal level received from the donor transmitter plus the signal level from the repeater.

IV. GSM/GPRS/EDGE Specific Calculations

Repeaters have no direct impact on: TRX dimensioning: The donor transmitter (which has an extended coverage) is supposed to deal with more traffic and so naturally needs more TRXs. Neighbor allocation: The donor transmitter would naturally have more neighbors as its coverage is extended. Frequency allocation: The donor transmitter (which has an extended coverage) is supposed to create more interference, so allocation will naturally be more constrained.

V. UMTS, CDMA2000 and CDMA/IS95 Specific Calculations

Repeaters have no direct impact on: Power control simulation Neighbor allocation The donor transmitter would naturally have more neighbors when its coverage expands. Scrambling code or PN offset allocation

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-51

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

4.6.6 Installing a Remote Antenna

It is possible to model remote antennas in the U-Net using the repeater features. To create a remote antenna, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Select a transmitter on the map or in the Transmitters folder of the Explorer. It is the donor transmitter. In the toolbar, click the selected). icon (active only if a transmitter has been previously

Place the remote antenna on the map. It is linked to the selected transmitter. Open the Remote Antenna property dialog. In the Donor side tab, choose Optical fiber as link type between the transmitter and the remote antenna, and specify the related fiber losses. Specify other parameters in the other tabs. Click OK or Apply.

symbol. The remote The remote antenna is represented on the map by the antenna has the same color as the transmitter and, by default, the same azimuth. When you click the remote antenna, the U-Net displays a link to the transmitter.

4.7 Radio Equipment

This section describes the following: Managing TMA Equipment Managing Feeder Equipment Managing BTS Equipment Assigning Radio Equipment to Transmitter Using Equipment to Compute Transmitter Losses Typical base station receiver subsystems consist of such components as: Tower Mounted Amplifier (also called Mast Head Amplifier) Feeder Jumper BTS Most of these components may be modeled in the U-Net: Tower Mounted Amplifier: it is used to reduce the composite noise figure of the base station. TMAs are connected between the antenna and the feeder cable Feeder cables BTS In any projects, they are described in three associated tables. In addition, some characteristics, which may be different for transmitters using the same equipment, are specified in each transmitter properties.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-52

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

The U-Net is capable of calculating losses generated by these components and the total noise figure at the transmitter. In GSM/GPRS/EDGE networks, only downlink losses may be evaluated whereas downlink and uplink losses and the total noise figure may be computed in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 projects. These parameters can be either automatically calculated by the U-Net from the components properties, or directly user-defined.

Note: Equipment can also be managed in a database structure.

4.7.1 Managing TMA Equipment

Tower Mounted Amplifier (TMA) is used in the equipment specifications linked with each transmitter. When defined, TMA are available and can be assigned individually to each transmitter of the network. To create/manage tower mounted amplifiers equipment, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Choose the Equipment: TMA equipment... option from the open menu. The TMA definition table is displayed. Create TMA equipment (give an equipment name to each newly created one), and, for each of them, specify noise figure (noise figure TMA, dB), uplink gain (reception gain TMA, dB) and downlink loss (transmission losses TMA, dB). 5) Close the definition table.

Note: Double-clicking a record opens the properties dialog for the corresponding equipment. Losses and gains must be positive values. The Table tab window allows you to manage user-defined variables in the Records tab window. To access it, right-click the table, and select the Fields... command. Only transmission values are used in TDMA/GSM projects. For further details about the calculation of UL and DL total losses and total noise figure, refer to the Technical Reference Guide.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-53

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

4.7.2 Managing Feeder Equipment

Feeders are used in the equipment specifications linked with each transmitter. When defined, feeder types are available and can be assigned individually to each transmitter of the network. To create/manage feeder equipment, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Choose the Equipment: Feeder equipment... option from the open menu. Click the Records tab to open the feeder definition table. The feeder definition table is displayed. Create Feeder equipment (give an equipment name to each newly created one), and, for each of them, specify losses per metre (feeder losses per metre, dB/m) and the connector transmission and reception losses (dB). 6) Close the definition table.

Note: Double-clicking a record opens the properties dialog for the corresponding equipment. Losses must be positive values. The Table tab window allows you to manage user-defined variables in the Records tab window. To access it, right-click the table, and select the Fields... command. Only transmission values are used in TDMA/GSM projects. For further details about the calculation of UL and DL total losses and total noise figure, refer to the Technical Reference Guide.

4.7.3 Managing BTS Equipment

BTS equipment is used in the equipment specifications linked with each transmitter. When defined, BTS types are available and can be assigned individually to each transmitter of the network. To create/manage BTS equipment, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Choose the Equipment: BTS equipment... option from the shortcut menu. Click the Records tab to open the BTS definition table. The BTS definition table is displayed.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-54

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

5)

Create BTS equipment (give an equipment name to each newly created one), and, for each of them, specify: Noise figure (BTS noise figure, dB) Rho factor (%): This parameter enables the U-Net to take into account the self-interference produced from BTS. As hardware equipment is not perfect, a "clean" signal as input will experience some distortions and consequently the output signal will be no longer a "clean" signal. This factor defines how much distortion the system generates. Entering 100% means the system is perfect (there is no distortion) and the output signal will be 100% equal to the input signal. On the other hand, if you specify a value different from 100%, the U-Net will consider that the transmitted energies are not 100% signal and they contain a small percentage of interference generated from the equipment ("self-interference"). The U-Net takes into account this parameter to evaluate the signal to noise ratio on downlink.

6)

Close the definition table.

Note: Double-clicking a record opens the properties dialog for the corresponding equipment. Noise figures must be positive values. The Table tab window allows you to manage user-defined variables in the Records tab window. To access it, right-click the table, and select the Fields... command. Only transmission values are used in TDMA/GSM projects. For further details about the calculation of UL and DL total losses and total noise figure, refer to the Technical Reference Guide.

4.7.4 Assigning Radio Equipment to Transmitter

Once defined, TMA, feeder and BTS equipment can be assigned to transmitters taking part of a network to determine corresponding total losses. In GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, losses due to equipment will be available only when the Power and Losses option is chosen to define the efficient power of transmitters instead of EIRP. Table 4-21 lists two ways of defining transmitter radio equipment.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-55

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Table 4-21 Defining transmitter radio equipment Method 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 1 5) 6) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking the button. Right-click the transmitter you want to parameter radio equipment to open the associated shortcut menu. Choose the Properties command from the open menu. Click the Transmitter tab from the open window. Click the dialog box. 7) 8) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click OK. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking the button in front of it. Double-click the transmitter you want to parameter radio equipment Method 2 Click the Transmitter tab from the open window. Click the dialog box. 6) 7) Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click OK. button to open the associated button to open the associated

Calculated total losses and total noise figure are indicated in Computed boxes and automatically applied to transmitter in the Real boxes after closing the Equipment Specifications dialog.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-56

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Note: Losses and gains must be positive values. The losses related to the noise rise at the transmitter due to its repeater(s) are displayed for information in this dialog. This loss is included in the calculated losses Only transmission values are used in TDMA/GSM projects. The U-Net always considers the real values (values in Real boxes) in prediction studies even if they are different from the computed ones (values in the Computed boxes).

4.7.5 Using Equipment to Compute Transmitter Losses

The U-Net takes into account properties of TMA, feeder cable and BTS equipment to calculate losses on transmitters. Once their characteristics are defined for each transmitter, the U-Net evaluates: Downlink total losses for GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects Downlink and uplink total losses and total noise figure for UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 projects Calculated values are displayed in the properties dialog of the considered transmitter (Transmitter tab). They are indicated in Computed boxes and automatically applied to transmitter in the Real boxes after closing the Equipment Specifications dialog. You may also directly define total losses and total noise figure in the Real boxes. Note that the U-Net always considers the real values (values in Real boxes) in prediction studies even if they are different from the computed ones (values in the Computed boxes).

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-57

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Note: When loss information is missing, the following default values are considered: Gain=0dB and Noise figure=0dB. Only transmission values are used in TDMA/GSM projects. The U-Net considers the entry of BTS as reference point to evaluate total losses and total noise figure. Therefore: The total noise figure computed by the U-Net is specified in the BTS properties. Transmitter reception losses take into account feeder reception losses, connector reception losses, miscellaneous reception losses, antenna diversity gain, TMA benefit gain (this one is evaluated using the Friis equation) and an additional loss modelling the noise rise generated from repeaters (if there are). Click the Details button to display each component value. Transmitter transmission losses take into account feeder transmission losses, connector transmission losses, miscellaneous transmission losses and TMA transmission losses.

The U-Net recalculates total losses and total noise figure when modifying equipment characteristics in their respective tables, or in the transmitters table. Computed values are automatically updated but not real values. Table 4-22 lists two ways of applying computed values to real values automatically Table 4-22 Applying computed values to real values automatically Method 1) Method 1 2) 3) Right-click the Step Transmitters folder, choose

Equipment: Apply to transmitters. Select the whole column(s) you want to calculate. Empty it (them) using the Delete key on your keyboard. 1) Method 2 2) 3) Open the transmitters table. Select the whole column(s) you want to calculate. Empty it (them) using the Delete key on your keyboard.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-58

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 4 Managing Radio Network Data

Note: The first way enables you to update total losses and total noise figure of all the transmitters while the second one can be used on a group of transmitters. In 2G projects, to recalculate automatically all total DL losses according to the equipment characteristics in the transmitters, right-click the Transmitters folder, choose Equipment: Recalculate losses and noise figure.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-59

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

5.1 Overview
Once the network has been built, the U-Net allows you to create some general studies. To make this easier, the U-Net provides calculation tools like multithread and distributed computing features. Moreover, the several processes can be displayed either in an event viewer window or inside a log file. The U-Net provides also the possibility to limit the calculation loading and time by introducing polygonal zones. These help you to restrict the computation to a certain set of transmitters, and to clip related computations, coverage and other outputs. This is made by using two types of polygonal zones: the computation zone and the focus zone. The first one is make the computations, and the second one to make the statistical outputs. Depending on the project type on which you are working, you may choose between the different propagation models available in the U-Net. Selecting the most appropriate one, you may even decide to attribute different ones to the different transmitters composing the network. Predictions may be featured in two ways: By using the point analysis tool in order to predict, at any point of the current map, the reception profile between a reference transmitter (in real time) and the value of the several signal levels of the surrounding transmitters at a given point (using existing path loss matrices). By computing different types of standard coverage predictions: coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and overlapping zones. Many customization features on coverage studies are available in order to make their analysis easier. All of these are easily manageable. Furthermore, the U-Net allows you to export coverage and path loss results with a view to use them elsewhere in another application. Note: For CDMA technology projects (UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000), the U-Net provides also an active set analysis based on a particular scenario (given terminal, mobility and terminal) for an existing simulation at a given point. Other specific studies like interference studies (GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects) or handover, service availability; (UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000) are also possible.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-1

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

5.2 Computing in Polygonal Areas

The computation and focus zones are user-definable polygonal areas based on the map cutting. Drawing such polygonal zones allows the user to shorten calculation area and zones of interest to improve calculation times, and to permit a more precise analysis on computation results. The computation zone has the following functions: Geographically determining the transmitters involved in computations. The transmitters with at least one calculation radius (main and/or secondary, at the transmitter or repeater/remote antenna level) intersecting the rectangle containing the computation zone will be taken into account in computations. Determining the validity of path loss matrices (that is, increasing the computation zone size makes the path loss results invalid). Clipping traffic maps (for instance, during Monte-Carlo simulations, mobiles are dropped within the computation zone). Clipping all the coverage areas. In other words, path loss matrices are computed within the rectangle around the computation zone and coverage are displayed within the computation zone itself. The focus zone has the following functions: Clipping all reports and statistics. Clipping the graphic display with lighter colors around the polygon (and optionally when printing). In other words, computation zone is the area where the U-Net computes path loss matrices, coverage studies, and Monte-Carlo and power control simulations, while the focus zone is the area to generate reports and results. These features provide a practical way of analyzing smaller areas once a global zone has been fully calculated. Furthermore, they enable you to analyze simulation results and coverage without border effect. Like other polygonal objects (and so on. clutter or traffic), computation and focus zone are easy to manage in the U-Net. Hence, these zones can be created either by drawing, or importing from an external file. Several drawing tools are available for resizing, adding points to the zones, and removing points. Moreover, these can be saved in external files. Information on these zones is also very easy to reach (size and coordinates).

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-2

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Note: You may perform propagation calculations without geographic data (free space propagation). Nevertheless, it is necessary to define a computation zone. If there is no computation zone defined, the U-Net computes for the entire extent of the geographical data available.

5.2.1 Effects
Computation and focus zones help you to reduce calculation area and calculation times. They are applied on several items listed below.

I. Clutter Classes or Traffic Statistics

Clutter classes, traffic, UMTS, and CDMA/CDMA2000 environment statistics refer to the focus zone if there is one. Only the areas inside the focus zone are taken into account.

Note: If not defined, the focus zone is the computation zone.

Clutter classes The U-Net calculates the surface of each clutter class contained in the focus zone and its percentage. Traffic Statistics are available only in case of traffic raster maps (traffic maps based on environments). The U-Net works out surface of each traffic class (environment) contained in the focus zone. For each of them, it provides surface of each clutter class covered by the traffic class and its percentage. UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000 environments statistics For each user profile described in the environment, the U-Net calculates the density of users and the number of users on a clutter class. The density of users remains the same. On the other hand, the number of users is related to the focus zone.

II. Path Loss Matrices

The U-Net works out a path loss matrix for each active and filtered transmitter (or related repeater) which at least a calculation radius intersects a rectangle containing

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-3

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

the computation zone. The matrix corresponds to the intersection area between the calculation radius and the rectangle containing the computation zone.

III. Coverage Studies

Calculation and display Coverage calculations are achieved by taking into account the computation zone. The U-Net checks coverage conditions on the areas inside the computation zone. Therefore only bins contained in the computation zone will be covered. Tip information on coverage is related to the computation zone. The focus zone has no effect on tip contents. Statistics on UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000 studies To be taken into account, the focus zone must be defined before accessing study statistics. It is not necessary to define it before computing coverage. When accessing the Statistics tab (in the study Properties window), the U-Net considers only covered areas inside the focus zone. For each threshold value defined in the Display tab, it works out the covered surface and its percentage. These data are evaluated for each environment class, when using maps based environments as traffic cartography.

Note: If not defined, the focus zone is the computation zone.

Study reports To be taken into account, the focus zone must be defined before accessing reports. Reports are dynamically updated to take into account the focus zone without requiring a coverage re-calculation. The U-Net considers only covered surfaces inside the focus zone. Therefore, in case of coverage by transmitter, only transmitters which coverage intersects the focus zone can be considered in the report.

Note: If not defined, the focus zone is the computation zone.

IV. UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations

Calculation The U-Net drops mobiles on the traffic area contained in the computation zone.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-4

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

During power control, the U-Net considers all the active and filtered transmitters which the calculation radius intersects rectangle containing the computation zone. Simulation reports To be taken into account, the focus zone must be defined before checking simulation results (UMTS, CDMA/CDMA2000). It is not necessary to define it before calculating simulation. When accessing the results of the simulation, only sites, transmitters and mobiles located inside the focus zone are considered. The global output statistics are based on these mobiles.

Note: If not defined, the focus zone is the computation zone. The computation zone is not used as filter. Therefore, all the transmitters with a calculation area, even those located outside the computation zone, and all the created mobiles are analyzed in the simulation results. If the focus and computation zones are the same, only sites and transmitters located inside the focus zone are dealt with in the simulation results.

Display All the mobiles even those outside the focus zone are represented on the map. The U-Net provides information for any of them, in tips and by clicking them.

V. Printing
You may print either the whole selected area or only the area inside the focus zone when selecting the print only the focus zone area option File: Page setup command.

Note: If the focus zone is not defined, the U-Net will consider the computation zone instead of focus zone.

5.2.2 Drawing a Computation or Focus Zone

Table 5-1 lists two ways of drawing a computation or a focus zone.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-5

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Table 5-1 Drawing a computation or a focus zone Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Zones folder by clicking . Right-click the zone you want to draw in order to get the shortcut menu. Select the Draw command from the open scrolling list. Position the pointer (polygonal selection arrow) on the map. Press the mouse left button (a first point is created). Slide the pointer on the map and press the mouse left button to create another point. Carry out the two last steps until you draw the polygonal area you want. Double-click to close off the polygonal area. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Zones folder by clicking . Click the zone you want to draw. In the Vector edition bar, click the New polygon icon to create polygons. Position the pointer (polygonal selection arrow) on the map. Press the mouse left button (a first point is created). Slide the pointer on the map and press the mouse left button to create another point. Carry out the two last steps until you draw the polygonal area you want. Double-click to close off the polygonal area.

Method 1

The selected computation zone is delimited by a red line. The focus zone is delimited by a green line and the background is lighter.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-6

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Note: If not defined, the focus zone is the computation zone. The computation/focus zone may consist of several polygons. Draw a first polygon or select the existing zone on the map, then select the Combine tool Vector Edition bar and draw another polygon. On the same way, the computation/focus zone may be holed. Draw a polygon or select the existing zone on the map, and then select the Delete tool of the of the

Vector Edition bar and draw the part you want to remove from the polygon. It is possible to resize the computation/focus zone to fit the current visible area in the workspace. This provides a simple way of drawing a computation/focus zone; you can just adjust the zoom level as you like and select Automatically fit to Display command from the Computation zone/Focus zone shortcut menu.

5.2.3 Creating a Computation/Focus Zone from Polygons

You can create a computation (or focus) zone from any polygon contained in a vector object (created or imported). To do so, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Right-click the polygon you want to become the computation (or focus) zone to open the associated shortcut menu. Select the Use as computation (or focus) zone command from the available menu.

Note: The computation/focus zone may consist of several polygons. Therefore, if you have multi-polygons (set of linked polygons) in your vector layer, you may use them as described above to create multi-focus or computation zones.

5.2.4 Importing the Computation or Focus Zone from a File

As many other geo data objects, the U-Net allows you to import the computation (or focus) zone from a file with either an Autocad (.dxf), Arcview (.shp), MapInfo (.Mif), Agd or PlaNET format. The imported computation (or focus) zone takes the place of an already existing one.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-7

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Table 5-2 lists two ways of importing a computation (or focus) zone file. Table 5-2 Importing a computation (or focus) zone file Method 1) 2) 3) Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Zones folder by clicking . Right-click the zone you want to import in order to get the shortcut menu. 4) Select the Import... command from the open scrolling list. 5) Specify the directory where the file to be imported is located, the file name and the file type in the open dialog box. 6) Press OPEN. 7) Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. 8) Select the computation (or. focus) zone option from the Import to menu. 9) If necessary, precise the coordinate system associated with the file being currently imported. 10) Click Import. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Select the Import... command from the File menu in the menu bar. Specify the directory where the file to be imported is located, the file name and the file type in the open dialog box. Press OPEN. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Select the computation (or focus) zone option from the Import to menu. If necessary, precise the coordinate system associated with the file being currently imported. Click Import.

Method 1

Method 2

Note: The drag and drop feature is available from any file explorer application to the U-Net to import the computation (or focus) zone.

5.2.5 Exporting the Computation/Focus Zone to a File

In the U-Net, it is possible to export the computation (or focus) zone in order to make it available in other applications/projects. This can be made in the Arcview (.shp), MapInfo (.Mif) or Agd formats. To export the current computation (or focus) zone to a file, perform the following steps: 1) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-8

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)

Expand the Zones folder by clicking . Right-click the zone you want to export in order to get the shortcut menu. Select the Save as... command from the Tools: computation (or focus) zone menu in the menu bar. Specify the path, the name and the format of the file to be exported. Press .

Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. If necessary, precise the coordinate system associated with the file being currently exported. Click Export.

5.2.6 Deleting the Computation or Focus Zone

Table 5-3 lists two ways of deleting the computation (or focus) zone. Table 5-3 Deleting the computation (or focus) zone Method 1) Method 1 2) 3) 1) Method 2 2) Step Click the red (or green) line (limit of the computation/focus zone). The pointer becomes position indicator ( ). Right-click this limit to open the associated shortcut menu. Select the Delete zone command from the open menu. In the Geo tab, right-click the zone you want to delete in order to get the shortcut menu. Select the Delete zone command from the open scrolling list.

5.2.7 Resizing the Computation or Focus Zone

To resize the computation (or focus) zone, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the red (or green) line (limit of the computation/focus zone). The pointer becomes position indicator ( Press and hold the mouse left button. Drag the pointer until its target location. Release the mouse button. ).

5.2.8 Moving a Point of the Computation or Focus Zone

To move an existing point of the computation (or focus) zone, perform the following steps:

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-9

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

1) 2) 3) 4)

Click the point of the computation zone limit (red line) you want to move. The pointer becomes position indicator ( ). Press and hold the mouse left button. Drag the pointer until the target location. Release the mouse button.

5.2.9 Adding a Point in the Computation/Focus Zone

To add a point to the computation (or focus) zone, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Click the location on the computation zone limit (red line) you want to add a point. The pointer becomes position indicator ( ). Right-click this limit to open the associated shortcut menu. Select the Insert point command from the open menu.

5.2.10 Removing a Point in the Computation/Focus Zone

To remove a point from the computation (or focus) zone, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Click the point from the computation zone limit (red line) you want to delete. The pointer becomes position indicator ( ). Right-click this limit to open the associated shortcut menu. Select the Delete point command from the open menu.

5.2.11 Displaying the Computation or Focus Zone Size

The U-Net allows the user to read various information about any object through the tips. Thus, it is possible to display information (here: area size) on the current computation (or focus) zone. This can be made by the use of the tips button window of the computation (or focus) zone. To do so, perform the following steps: Either: Rest the pointer on the red (or green) line (limit of the computation/focus zone) except on the main points making up the computation zone until the information appears. , or the properties

Note: Information about surface will appear only if the tips button is on.

Or:
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-10

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

1) 2)

Right-click the computation (or focus) zone border. Click the properties... menu.

The properties window displays the size of the computation (or focus) zone.

5.2.12 Displaying the Computation or Focus Zone Coordinates

Table 5-4 lists two ways of displaying the coordinates of points composing the computation (or focus) zone. Table 5-4 Displaying the coordinates of points composing the computation (or focus) zone Method 1) Step Click the red (or green) line (limit of the computation/focus zone). The pointer becomes position indicator ( ). Right-click this limit to open the associated shortcut menu. Select the Properties command from the open menu. The coordinates (in the defined display system) of the point composing the computation (or focus) zone are then displayed in a table window.

Method 1

2) 3)

Method 2

In the Geo tab, right-click the zone and select the Properties command from the open scrolling list.

Note: To draw an appropriate computation/focus zone, you can copy a list of point coordinates from a spreadsheet and paste it in the computation zone properties window. The format of the data contained in the table is the following: X_coordinate TAB Y_coordinate on each line. Inside this interface, TAB and Return commands are available by using simultaneously the Ctrl key and the appropriate key. Coordinates are displayed as defined previously.

5.3 Propagation Models

By computing losses along transmitter-receiver paths, propagation models permit to predict the received signal level at a given point and take into account: The Radio data. The Geo data like DTM and/or clutter classes, according to the model. The mechanisms involved in electromagnetic propagation are: Free space propagation
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-11

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Reflections Diffraction Scattering All these mechanisms can be more or less taken into account by propagation models depending on their complexity. The U-Net provides, by default, some models based on empirical approaches. For any type of project, you must find the best suited one. Nevertheless, the U-Net allows you to manage any project with several propagation models. These can be assigned either globally or at the transmitter level. Each transmitter may have a main propagation model (high resolution and short calculation radius) and a secondary one, with a lower resolution, and an extended calculation radius. Some propagation models (Okumura-Hata and Cost-Hata) are based on a model type principle. On the base of the formulae they offer, you can use these models to develop customized models by duplicating the existing base model (Okumura-Hata and Cost-Hata). The Okumura-Hata, Cost-Hata, Longley-Rice, Standard propagation model and WLL models available in the U-Net are based on formulae whose parameters can be set. Okumura-Hata and Cost-Hata in particular are based on one formula for each clutter class. The Standard Propagation Model can be seen as an advanced Hata-based model. The ITU 526-5 and ITU 370-7 (Vienna 93) models are deterministic and therefore their parameters cannot be set. Like other the U-Net objects, propagation models can be easily managed.

Note: When performing consecutive calculations with different thresholds: If no calculation radius has been defined, the U-Net recalculates the complete coverage for each prediction. If a relatively large calculation radius has been defined, the U-Net "stores in memory" the calculations for the defined area and only calculates the difference between the two predictions. For any Hata-based model, it is optionally possible to limit path loss by the computed free space loss for each single pixel.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-12

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

5.3.1 Propagation Model General Information

I. Selecting Propagation Models
In the U-Net, propagation models can be chosen at different levels. For this reason, you must be very careful with the propagation models priority order given to the different places where these models are defined. The U-Net is able to calculate two path loss matrices per transmitter, a first matrix over a near radius computed with a high resolution and a propagation model, and a second matrix over a far radius computed with a low resolution and another propagation model.

Note: In addition, it is possible to differentiate resolution of path loss matrices from plot resolution.

To define propagation model(s) simultaneously to all transmitters, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Propagation tab from the open window. In the main matrix part, choose from the scrolling list a propagation model (with a calculation radius and a resolution used to compute the main path loss matrix). Optionally, in the extended matrix part, choose from the scrolling list a propagation model (with a calculation radius and a resolution taken into account to calculate the extended path loss matrix). 7) Click OK.

Table 5-5 lists two ways of defining propagation model(s) to one transmitter at a time.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-13

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Table 5-5 Defining propagation model(s) to one transmitter at a time Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Step Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking . Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign a specific propagation model. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the Propagation tab from the open window. In the main matrix part, choose from the scrolling list a propagation model (with a calculation radius and a resolution used to compute the main path loss matrix). Optionally, in the extended matrix part, choose from the scrolling list a propagation model (with a calculation radius and a resolution taken into account to calculate the extended path loss matrix). Click OK. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking . Double-click the transmitter to which you want to assign a specific propagation model. Click the Propagation tab from the open window. In the main matrix part, choose from the scrolling list a propagation model (with a calculation radius and a resolution used to compute the main path loss matrix). Optionally, in the extended matrix part, choose from the scrolling list a propagation model (with a calculation radius and a resolution taken into account to calculate the extended path loss matrix). Click OK.

Method 1

7)

8) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Method 2 6)

7)

You can also define these parameters in the Transmitters table.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-14

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Note: The calculation radius limits the scope of the calculations to the radius that has been defined. The calculation radius prevents the system from calculating over too long distances (and so on. in an urban area). In the case of very large environments, the calculation radius allows you to improve the calculation time. If no main calculation radius has been defined (and no secondary propagation model), The U-Net takes into account automatically the prediction minimum threshold to define the calculation radius for each transmitter. Nevertheless, this could drive to long calculation times. Since it is a matrix (or 2 in case of extended calculation radius) which is computed for each transmitter, the calculation radius represents the half side length of the potential matrix located around the considered transmitter. The U-Net computes an extended matrix only if the three parameters, propagation model, calculation radius and resolution, are specified. Therefore, an extended matrix will not be worked out if its resolution is null. The U-Net computes at the same time the main and extended matrices of a transmitter with a global management. Therefore, it will recalculate both matrices even if only one is invalid.

To select a default propagation model on predictions, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Predictions folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Propagation tab from the open window. Choose from the scrolling list a propagation model. Enter the grid resolution. Use What's this help to get further description about the fields available in the current dialog window. Click OK.

Note: This selected model is taken into account only if the value of the main propagation model (transmitter property) is (default model).

II. Setting Propagation Model Priority

Even if it is possible to choose a propagation model in the Predictions folder, priority is given firstly to model(s) defined at the transmitter level (in any case, for either coverage
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-15

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

studies or point analysis predictions). In that next case, you can choose a propagation model (and potentially a secondary one) for each transmitter. What is then displayed as propagation model in the Transmitters folder properties is the summary of what has been chosen for each independent transmitter. For example, if you chose the same main propagation model X for each single transmitter, X will be displayed as main propagation model in the Transmitters folder properties. If you assign a main propagation model X to some transmitters and Y to others, no main propagation model will be displayed in the Transmitters folder properties. Because of the priority given to the transmitters in term of propagation models, the one displayed in the Predictions folder will be kept as reference for the complete project if the (default model) value has been selected for all the transmitters in the network.

III. Displaying General Information on Propagation Model

Under the U-Net, the user interface is homogeneous for the different available propagation models. Indeed, for all of them, a common General tab window is available. In this tab, you may enter the model name, add some descriptions and check the model signature. The model signature is used for validity purpose. A unique model signature is assigned to each propagation model and its settings. When modifying model parameters, the associated model signature is changed. This enables the U-Net to detect potential path loss matrix invalidity. In the same way, two identical propagation models in different projects do not have the same model signature.

Note: Model signature corresponds to the MODEL_ID field you can find in .par files when externalizing path loss matrices. Nevertheless, the real name of the used propagation model is also explicitly written in .par files (TX_MODEL_NAME field).

IV. Choosing the Appropriate Propagation Model

The different propagation models are more or less suited depending on the type of project, radio and geographic data in use in the .atl current project. A summarized description is given below, as listed in Table 5-6.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-16

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Table 5-6 Propagation model Model Longley-Rice (theoretical) Frequency band 40 MHz Take into account Terrain profile Reflection 100 MHz 400 MHz - Terrain profile Percentage time while real field > calculated field Required settings Calibration Recommended use - Flat areas - Very low frequencies - Long distances (d>10km) - Low frequencies Fixed receivers

ITU 370-7 Vienna 93

ITU 526-5 (theoretical)

30 - 10.000 MHz

- Terrain profile - Diffraction (3 knife-edge Deygout method) - Terrain profile - Deterministic clutter - Diffraction (3 knife-edge Deygout method) - Free space loss - Receiver height and clearance per clutter

WLL

30 - 10.000 MHz

Fixed receivers > Microwave links

Okumura-Hata

150 - 1.000 MHz

- Terrain profile - Statistical clutter (at the receiver) - 1 formula per clutter - Reflection

- With diffraction or not - Urban loss + correction a(Hr)

1 < d < 20 km > GSM 900 > CDMA/CDMA200 0 1 < d < 20 km > GSM 1800 > UMTS

Cost-Hata

1.500 2.000 MHz

- Terrain profile - Statistical clutter (at the receiver) - 1 formula per clutter - Reflection

- With diffraction or not - Urban loss + correction a(Hr)

Standard Propagation Model

150 - 2.000 MHz

- Terrain profile - Statistical clutter - Effective antenna height

- With diffraction weight - K1, ..., K6 (single formula) - LOS or NLOS differentiation - Loss per clutter with clutter weighting - Receiver clearance

1 < d < 20 km > GSM 900 > GSM 1800 > UMTS > CDMA/CDMA200 0 (Automatic calibration available)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-17

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

V. Managing Propagation Model Folders

In the Modules tab, propagation models are organized in folders. That way, these items are easy to manage like other objects. Hence it is easily possible to delete duplicate, copy and rename each of them. To access the different managing properties of any propagation model, right-click the model you want to manage to open the related shortcut menu. Then choose among the several available commands: delete, duplicate, copy, and rename. All newly created propagation models will then be available in the propagation model selection boxes (Prediction or Transmitter properties). The copy function can be useful to copy and paste a specifically tuned model in an atl project to another one (considering the name does not already exist).

5.3.2 Working with Longley-Rice Model

The Longley-Rice is a theoretical model particularly suitable for predictions in the 40 MHz band in flat areas. This model uses the terrain profile to calculate propagation. However, the Longley-Rice model parameters can be set in the form of a calibration involving the distance and an additional loss value. Table 5-7 lists two ways of managing the Longley-Rice model. Table 5-7 Managing the Longley-Rice model Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Method 1 6) 7) Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the propagation models by clicking . Right-click the Longley-Rice subfolder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Parameters tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Define the loss parameters to be added to the model (in constant terrain. 0 values mean a signal linear decreasing as function of distance)."dkm" is the distance (in kilometers) from the transmitter. Click Apply or OK.

8)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-18

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Method 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6)

Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Double-click the Longley-Rice subfolder. Click the Parameters tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Define the loss parameters to be added to the model (in constant terrain. 0 values mean a signal linear decreasing as function of distance). "dkm" is the distance (in kilometers) from the transmitter. Click Apply or OK.

7)

5.3.3 Working with ITU 526-5 Model

The ITU 526-5 model is particularly suitable for predictions in the 30-10000 MHz band at fixed receivers. It uses the terrain profile and the diffraction mechanism (3 knife-edge Deygout method) to calculate path loss. The ITU 526-5 recommendation considers that: If there are no obstacles, propagation will take place in free space. If there is an obstacle, attenuation will be taken into account. If there is an obstacle, attenuation will be caused on contact with the relief with diffraction on the main peak (represented by a red line in the Profile tab of the Point Analysis window). The main peak taken into account is the one that intersects the most with the Fresnel ellipsoid. Any attenuation that occurs is then calculated between the station and the main peak and between the main peak and the receiver. The result may then show up to two new attenuation peaks in addition to the main peak. The various peaks are identified by red lines. The attenuation generated by all the peaks is displayed above the main peak. Table 5-8 lists two ways of accessing the ITU 526-5 model properties box.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-19

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Table 5-8 Accessing the ITU 526-5 model properties box Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Right-click the ITU526 subfolder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Parameters tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. A dialog window opens in which you may choose or not to apply an empirical tunable corrective formula on the Deygout method. Click Apply or OK. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Double-click the ITU526 subfolder. Click the Parameters tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. A dialog window opens in which you may choose or not to apply an empirical tunable corrective formula on the Deygout method. Click Apply or OK.

Method 1

7) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5)

6)

5.3.4 Working with ITU 370-7 Model (Vienna 93)

The ITU 370-7 model follows the recommendations of the Vienna 1993 international conference on telecommunications network coordination. This model is particularly suitable for predictions in the 100-400 MHz band over long distances (d>10 km), such as in Broadcast studies. It uses the terrain profile to calculate propagation. Vienna 93 model parameter setting is limited to defining the percentage of time during which the real field is higher than the signal level calculated by the model (1%, 10% or 50% of the time). The 50% value is usually used for coverage predictions, and 1% is usually used for interference studies. Table 5-9 lists two ways of accessing the ITU 370-7 model properties box.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-20

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Table 5-9 Accessing the ITU 370-7 model Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6) 7) Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Choose the appropriate time percentage for the current study. Click Apply or OK. Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Right-click the ITU370 subfolder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Parameters tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Choose the appropriate time percentage for the current study. Click Apply or OK. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking .. Double-click the ITU370 subfolder. Click the Parameters tab.

Method 1

Note: When using this model, take care not to define cell edge coverage probability different from 50%, or will be considered twice.

5.3.5 Working with WLL (Wireless Local Loop) Model

The WLL model is specially intended for "Radio Local Loop" applications in the 30-10000 MHz band. It is derived from the ITU 526-5 model from which it takes the prediction algorithms while applying specific changes: The possibility of setting loss parameters dealing with free space propagation and loss within the line of sight area only or not. If the option Line of sight only is not selected, the U-Net computes the path loss on each calculation bin, using formula defined in the dialog box. If the option Line of sight only is used, the U-Net checks for each calculation bin if the receiver is in the transmitter line of sight. Receiver is in the transmitter line of sight if 100% of the Fresnel half ellipsoid is cleared (no obstacle along the transmitter-receiver profile).

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-21

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

If the receiver is in the transmitter line of sight, the U-Net computes the path loss on each calculation bin, using formula defined in the dialog. When the receiver is not in the transmitter line of sight, the U-Net considers that the path loss tends towards infinite. The use of an altimeter clutter whose heights for different items (trees, buildings, and so on.) will be added to those for DTM. The possibility of defining a height and a receiver clearance associated with each clutter class (and so on. receiver on a building, and so on.). These heights will be added to the heights of the clutter. Adding notions of transmitter clearance. Along the Tx-Rx profile, both ground altitude and clutter height are considered to calculate diffraction losses. The U-Net takes clutter height information in clutter heights file if available in the .atl document. Otherwise, it considers average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes file description. If the .atl document does not contain any clutter height file and no average height per clutter class is specified, the U-Net will consider ground altitude only. You can define a clearance space around transmitters and receivers (20 meters by default). This feature permits in particular to model streets in clutter areas. Example: the clearance can be used to simulate streets in an area of buildings where the clutter class file used does not show street detail. Table 5-10 lists two ways of accessing the WLL model properties box. Table 5-10 Accessing the WLL model properties box Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Method 1 Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Right-click the WLL subfolder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Parameters tab.

Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. 7) Set the free space path loss prediction parameters. 8) Define an overall clearance for all the transmitters. 9) Define a default clearance for each receiver. 10) Define a height and clearance specific to the receiver for each clutter class. If, for a given class, you have not defined any value, the default height will be used. This land use part will be available only if the document contains a Land use folder. 11) Click Apply or OK.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-22

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Method 2

Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Double-click the WLL subfolder. Click the Parameters tab.

Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. 6) Set the free space path loss prediction parameters. 7) Define an overall clearance for all the transmitters. 8) Define a default clearance for each receiver. 9) Define a height and clearance specific to the receiver for each clutter class. If, for a given class, you have not defined any value, the default height will be used. This land use part will be available only if the document contains a Land use folder. 10) Click Apply or OK.

5.3.6 Working with Okumura-Hata Model

The Okumura-Hata is a model particularly suitable for predictions in the 150 MHz1000 MHz band over long distances (1 km < d < 20 km) and is very adapted to GSM 900, IS95 and 1xRTT technologies. This model uses the terrain profile, diffraction and reflection mechanisms in order to calculate propagation. Hata models are well adapted to urban environment. Nevertheless, in order to make them available in a wide range of environments, it is possible to define several corrective formulas, and to associate each one to each clutter class available in the project. Furthermore, it is also possible to define a default formula used when no land use data is available.

Note: For any Hata-based motel, it is optionally possible to limit the path loss by the computed free space loss for each single pixel.

I. Defining General Settings (Okumura-Hata)

Okumura-Hata is able to take into account or not diffraction mechanisms by using a 1-knife edge Deygout method. Table 5-11 lists two ways of computing losses due to diffraction in the total path loss.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-23

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Table 5-11 Computing losses due to diffraction in the total path loss Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6) 7) Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Right-click the Okumura-Hata subfolder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Configuration tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Choose from the dedicated menu to take into account (1) or not (0) losses due to diffraction. Click Apply or OK. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Double-click the Okumura-Hata subfolder. Click the Configuration tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Choose from the dedicated menu to take into account (1) or not (0) losses due to diffraction. Click Apply or OK.

Method 1

Like for any Hata-Based model, by default, the extracted path loss is limited to the computed free space loss. To not take into account this limitation, choose from the dedicated menu the related option (0).

II. Defining an Environment Default Formula (Okumura-Hata)

The U-Net takes into account that even if you do not have a clutter file or clutter data missing, it is possible to use the Okumura-Hata model. To achieve this, you may define a default type formula to be assigned to the undefined zones. Table 5-12 lists two ways of selecting the environment default formula.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-24

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Table 5-12 Selecting the environment default formula Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Right-click the Okumura-Hata subfolder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Configuration tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Choose from the dedicated menu one of the available formulas (tunable by accessing the Formulas dialog box) to assign to undefined zones. Click Apply or OK. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Double-click the Okumura-Hata subfolder. Click the Configuration tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Choose from the dedicated menu one of the available formulas (tunable by accessing the Formulas dialog box) to assign to undefined zones. Click Apply or OK.

Method 1

8) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6)

7)

III. Assigning Environment Formulas to Clutter Types (Okumura-Hata)

When environment formulae and clutter data are available for the current project, you need to assign to each detected clutter class a type of formula, in order to make this model valid for a wide range of media. Table 5-13 lists two ways of configuring clutter types with available formula.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-25

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Table 5-13 Configuring clutter types with available formula Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6) 7) Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Right-click the Okumura-Hata subfolder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Configuration tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Select in the scrolling lists cells from the Formula column the clutter-formula associations. Click Apply or OK. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Double-click the Okumura-Hata subfolder. Click the Configuration tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Select in the scrolling lists cells from the Formula column the clutter-formula associations. Click Apply or OK.

Method 1

Note: Without this association, the Okumura-Hata model, which uses the clutter classes, will be unable to correctly perform prediction calculations. The default formula will be used on all clutter classes.

IV. Creating/Modifying Environment Formulas (Okumura-Hata)

Table 5-14 lists two ways of creating/modifying an environment formula.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-26

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Table 5-14 Creating/modifying an environment formula Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Method 1 6) 7) 8) 9) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6) 7) 8) Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Right-click the Okumura-Hata subfolder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Configuration tab. Click the button to open the associated dialog box.

button to get a context-sensitive help on the Use the displayed window. Adjust formula types and coefficients depending on the considered environment type. Click OK. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Double-click the Okumura-Hata subfolder. Click the Configuration tab. Click the button to open the associated dialog box.

button to get a context-sensitive help on the Use the displayed window. Adjust formula types and coefficients depending on the considered environment type. Click OK.

5.3.7 Working with Cost-Hata Model

The Cost-Hata is a model particularly suitable for predictions in the 1500 MHz2000 MHz band over long distances (1 km < d < 20 km) and is very adapted to DCS 1800 and UMTS technologies. This model uses the terrain profile, diffraction and reflection mechanisms in order to calculate propagation. The Hata models are well adapted to urban environment. Nevertheless, in order to make them available in a wide range of environments, it is possible to define several corrective formulas, and to associate each one to each clutter class available in the open project. Furthermore, it is also possible to define a default formula used when no land use data will be available. Note: For any Hata-based model, it is optionally possible to limit the path loss by the computed free space loss for each single pixel.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-27

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

I. Defining General Settings (Cost-Hata)

The Cost-Hata is able to take into account or not diffraction mechanisms by using a 1-knife edge Deygout method. Table 5-15 lists two ways of computing losses due to diffraction in the total path loss. Table 5-15 Computing losses due to diffraction in the total path loss Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6) 7) Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Right-click the Cost-Hata subfolder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Configuration tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Choose from the dedicated menu to take into account (1) or not (0) losses due to diffraction. Click Apply or OK. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Double-click the Cost-Hata subfolder. Click the Configuration tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Choose from the dedicated menu to take into account (1) or not (0) losses due to diffraction. Click Apply or OK.

Method 1

Like for any Hata-Based model, by default, the extracted path loss is limited to the computed free space loss. To not take into account this limitation, choose from the dedicated menu the related option (0).

II. Defining an Environment Default Formula (Cost-Hata)

The U-Net takes into account that even if you do not have a clutter file or clutter data missing, it is possible to use the Cost-Hata model. To achieve this, you may define a default type formula to be assigned to the undefined zones. Table 5-16 lists two ways of selecting the environment default formula.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-28

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Table 5-16 Selecting the environment default formula Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Right-click the Cost-Hata subfolder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Configuration tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Choose from the dedicated menu one of the available formulas (tunable by accessing the Formulas dialog box) to assign to undefined zones. Click Apply or OK. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Double-click the Cost-Hata subfolder. Click the Configuration tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Choose from the dedicated menu one of the available formulas (tunable by accessing the Formulas dialog box) to assign to undefined zones. Click Apply or OK.

Method 1

8) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6)

7)

III. Assigning Environment Formulas to Clutter Types (Cost-Hata)

When environment formulae and clutter data are available for the current project, you need to assign to each detected clutter class a type of formula, in order to make this model valid for a wide range of media. Table 5-17 lists two ways of configuring clutter types with available formulae.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-29

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Table 5-17 Configuring clutter types with available formulae Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6) 7) Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Right-click the Cost-Hata subfolder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Configuration tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Select in the scrolling lists cells from the Formula column the clutter-formula associations. Click Apply or OK. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Double-click the Cost-Hata subfolder. Click the Configuration tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Select in the scrolling lists cells from the Formula column the clutter-formula associations. Click Apply or OK.

Method 1

Note: Without this association, the Cost-Hata model, which uses the clutter classes, will be unable to correctly perform prediction calculations. The default formula will be used on all clutter classes.

IV. Creating/Modifying environment formulas (Cost-Hata)

Table 5-18 lists two ways of creating/modifying an environment formula.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-30

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Table 5-18 Creating/modifying an environment formula (Cost-Hata) Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Method 1 6) 7) 8) 9) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6) 7) 8) Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Right-click the Cost-Hata subfolder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Configuration tab. Click the button to open the associated dialog box.

button to get a context-sensitive help on the Use the displayed window. Adjust formula types and coefficients depending on the considered environment type. Click OK. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Double-click the Cost-Hata subfolder. Click the Configuration tab. Click the button to open the associated dialog box.

button to get a context-sensitive help on the Use the displayed window. Adjust formula types and coefficients depending on the considered environment type. Click OK.

5.3.8 Working with ITU 529-3 Model

The ITU 529-3 is a model particularly suitable for predictions in the 300 MHz1500 MHz band over very long distances (1 km < d < 100 km) and is very adapted to GSM900 and IS95/CDMA technologies. This model uses the terrain profile, diffraction and reflection mechanisms in order to calculate propagation. Like all Hata-based models, ITU 529-3 has been firstly defined for urban environment. So, in order to make it available in a wide range of environments, It is possible to define several corrective formulas, and to associate each one to each clutter class available in the open project. Furthermore, it is also possible to define a default formula used when no land use data will be available. In addition, for long distances 20 km < d < 100 km, the model uses automatically a corrective formula as defined in the recommendation. Note: For any Hata-based model, it is optionally possible to limit the path loss by the computed free space loss for each single pixel.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-31

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

I. Defining General Settings(ITU 529-3)

ITU529 is able to take into account or not diffraction mechanisms by using a 1-knife edge Deygout method. Table 5-19 lists two ways of computing losses due to diffraction in the total path loss. Table 5-19 Computing losses due to diffraction in the total path loss Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6) 7) Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Right-click the ITU529 subfolder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Configuration tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Choose from the dedicated menu to take into account (1) or not (0) losses due to diffraction. Click Apply or OK. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by click . Double-click the ITU529 subfolder. Click the Configuration tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Choose from the dedicated menu to take into account (1) or not (0) losses due to diffraction. Click Apply or OK.

Method 1

Like for any Hata-Based model, by default, the extracted path loss is limited to the computed free space loss. To not take into account this limitation, choose from the dedicated menu the related option (0).

II. Defining an Environment Default Formula (ITU 529-3)

The U-Net takes into account that even if you do not have clutters file or clutter data missing. It is possible to use the ITU529 model. To achieve this, you may define a default type formula to be assigned to the undefined zones. Table 5-20 lists two ways of selecting the environment default formula.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-32

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Table 5-20 Selecting the environment default formula Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Right-click the ITU529 subfolder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Configuration tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Choose from the dedicated menu one of the available formulas (tunable by accessing the Formulas dialog box) to assign to undefined zones. Click Apply or OK. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Double-click the ITU529 subfolder. Click the Configuration tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Choose from the dedicated menu one of the available formulas (tunable by accessing the Formulas dialog box) to assign to undefined zones. Click Apply or OK.

Method 1

8) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6)

7)

III. Creating/Modifying Environment Formulas (ITU 529-3)

Table 5-21 lists two ways of creating/modifing an environment formula Table 5-21 Creating/modifying an environment formula Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Method 1 6) 7) 8) 9) Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Right-click the ITU529 subfolder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Configuration tab. Click the button to open the associated dialog box.

button to get a context-sensitive help on the Use the displayed window. Adjust formula types and coefficients depending on the considered environment type. Clicking OK.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-33

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Method 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6) 7) 8)

Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Double-click the ITU529 subfolder. Click the Configuration tab. Click the button to open the associated dialog box.

button to get a context-sensitive help on the Use the displayed window. Adjust formula types and coefficients depending on the considered environment type. Click OK.

IV. Assigning Environment Formulas to Clutter Types (ITU 529-3)

When environment formulae and clutter data are available for the current project, you need to assign to each detected clutter class a type of formula, in order to make this model valid for a wide range of media. Table 5-22 lists two ways of configuring clutter types with available formulae. Table 5-22 Configuring clutter types with available formulae Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6) 7) Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Right-click the ITU529 subfolder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Configuration tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Select in the scrolling lists cells from the Formula column the clutter-formula associations. Click Apply or OK. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Double-click the ITU529 subfolder. Click the Configuration tab. Use the button to get a context-sensitive help on the displayed window. Select in the scrolling lists cells from the Formula column the clutter-formula associations. Click Apply or OK.

Method 1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-34

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Note: Without this association, the ITU529 model, which uses the clutter classes, will be unable to correctly perform prediction calculations. The default formula will be used on all clutter classes.

5.3.9 Working with Standard Propagation Model

The Standard Propagation Model is a model (deduced from the Hata formulae) suitable for predictions in the 150-2000 MHz band over long distances (1 < d < 20km) and is adapted to GSM 900/1800, UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000 technologies. This model uses the terrain profile, diffraction mechanisms (calculated in several ways) and takes into account clutter classes and effective antenna heights in order to calculate path loss. An automatic calibration tool is available. The model may be used for any technology. It is based on the following formula:

K1 + K 2 log(d ) + K 3 log HTxeff + K 4 Diffraction + PR = PTx K 5 log(d ) log H Rx + K clutter f (clutter ) + K hill ,LOS eff

For details, refer to Table 5-23. Table 5-23 Parameters Parameters PR PTx K1 K2 d K3
HTxeff

Description Received power (dBm) Transmitted power (EIRP) (dBm) Constant offset (dB) Multiplying factor for log(d) Distance between the receiver and the transmitter (m) Multiplying factor for log(HTxeff) Effective height of the transmitter antenna (m) Multiplying factor for diffraction calculation. K4 has to be a positive number Losses due to diffraction over an obstructed path (dB) Multiplying factor for log(HTxeff)log(d) Multiplying factor for HRxeff Mobile antenna height (m)

K4 Diffraction K5 K6
H Rxeff

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-35

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Parameters Kclutter f(clutter) K(hill,los)

Description Multiplying factor for f(clutter) Average of weighted losses due to clutter Corrective factor for hilly regions (=0 in case of NLOS)

All of the above parameters are user-definable in the Standard Propagation Model Properties window consisting of three tabs (General, Parameters, and Clutter). The automatic calibration of the model is accessible from the model shortcut menu (Right-click).

Note: For any Hata-based model, it is possible to limit the path loss by the computed free space loss for each single pixel.

I. Accessing Standard Propagation Model Properties

The users cannot access the internal formula of the Standard Propagation Model. Nevertheless, you may set all its parameters in the Parameters and Clutter tab windows from the SPM properties dialog box. Table 5-24 lists two ways of accessing the Standard Propagation Model properties box. Table 5-24 Accessing the standard propagation model properties box Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) 5) 1) 2) 3) 4) Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Right-click the SPM subfolder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click Properties. A dialog window opens. Select the tab according to the way you want to adjust model parameters. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Double-click the SPM subfolder. A dialog window opens. Select the tab according to the way you want to adjust model parameters.

Method 2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-36

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

II. Adjusting Standard Propagation Model Parameters

You may adjust the parameters contained in the SPM base formula by using both the General and the Clutter tab windows from the SPM properties box. All the multiplying factors are user-definable in the Parameters tab window. You may enter the appropriate values in the associated boxes. In addition, the user may select in menus: The effective antenna height determination method. For the method descriptions, refer to the Technical Reference Guide. The diffraction calculation method (Deygout, Epstein-Peterson, Deygout with correction, Millington). For their description, refer to the Technical Reference Guide.

Note: The best diffraction and effective antenna height methods can be chosen by the Automatic Calibration Wizard.

If you wish to take into account a corrective term for hilly regions: The profile extraction method: if you select the radial option, the U-Net establishes a profile between each transmitter and each point located on its calculation perimeter (user-defined by the calculation radius) and then, uses the nearest profile to make a prediction on a point inside the calculation perimeter (radial optimization). When the systematic option is chosen, the U-Net systematically determines a profile between each transmitter and any points in its calculation area. To avoid longer calculation times, it is recommended to choose the radial option. The Grid calculation method. You can perform the calculations either at the center (centered option) or in the bottom left corner (bottom left option) of each grid. In the Clutter tab window, you may define the values of losses per clutter class and choose the weighting function to be considered for calculating the average of weighted losses due to clutter, f(clutter). In addition, you may specify options and parameters used to evaluate the diffraction losses. If you want to take into account the clutter height along the transmitter-receiver profile. If you want to systematically locate the receiver above the clutters (useful in fixed receiver technologies). The clearances per clutter class. The optional specific receiver height per clutter class.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-37

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

5.3.10 Working with Standard Propagation Model: Recommendations

Beware that the clutter influence may be represented in two terms, Diffraction loss and f(clutter) at the same time. To avoid this, we advise: Not to consider clutter heights to evaluate diffraction loss over the transmitter-receiver profile if you specify losses per clutter class. This approach is recommended if the clutter height information is statistical. Or Not to define any loss per clutter class if you take clutter heights into account in the diffraction loss. In this case, f(clutter)=0. Losses due to clutter are only taken into account in the computed Diffraction loss term. This approach is recommended if the clutter height information is either semi-deterministic or deterministic. In case clutter height information is an average height defined for each clutter class, you must specify a receiver clearance (m) per clutter class. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole transmitter-receiver profile except over a specific distance around the receiver (clearance), where the U-Net proceeds as if there was only the DTM map. The clearance information is used to model streets since the receiver is supposed to be in the street. Clearance definition is not necessary in case clutter height information is from a clutter height file. Clutter height information is accurate enough to be used directly without additional information such as clearance. Here, the U-Net calculates the path loss if the receiver is in the street (if the receiver height is higher than the clutter height). If the receiver height is lower than the clutter height, then the receiver is supposed to be inside a building. In this case, the path loss is undefined.

I. SPM General Tab

Figure 5-1 shows the SPM General Tab window.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-38

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Figure 5-1 SPM general tab window

When open, click

to get a context-sensitive help on the available fields.

II. SPM Parameters Tab

Figure 5-2 shows the Parameter tab in the SPM.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-39

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Figure 5-2 SPM parameters tab window

When open, click

to get a context-sensitive help on the available fields.

This tab manages parameters from the standard propagation model base formula. In the Near transmitter and Far from transmitter parts, specify the maximum distance, max distance, and four (K1, K2) sets (two sets per part). Max distance is a maximum distance from transmitter. When d (distance between receiver and transmitter) is inferior to this distance, the receiver is considered near transmitter. On the other hand, if d is greater than the maximum distance, the receiver is considered far from transmitter. Two (K1, K2) sets, (K1, K2)loss and (K1, K2)nlos, are defined in each part. They enable to differentiate the case where the receiver is in the transmitter line of sight path (los index) or is not (nlos index). Therefore, the (K1, K2) sets taken into account in prediction calculations will depend on d and visibility. In the Effective antenna height part, define the HTxeff calculation method, the minimum and maximum distances (distance min and distance max) and K3 factor. HTxeff may be calculated with six different methods.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-40

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Note: The minimum and maximum distances are set to 3000 m and 15000 m according to ITU recommendations and to 0 and 15000 m according to Okumura recommendations. These values are only used in two methods of effective antenna height calculation and have different meanings according to the method. The effective Tx antenna height best method can be chosen by the Automatic Calibration Wizard.

In the diffraction part, specify a method that you want to use for calculating the Diffraction term and K4 factor. Four different methods (Deygout, Epstein-Peterson, Deygout with correction and Millington) are available. For their description, refer to the Technical Reference Guide. These diffraction calculation methods are based on the General method for one or more obstacles described in ITU 526-5 recommendations. Depending on the option selected in the Use clutter heights menu of Clutter tab window, the U-Net may consider along the transmitter-receiver profile: - Either Both the ground altitude and the clutter height. The U-Net takes clutter height information in clutter heights file if available in the .atl document. Else, it considers average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes file description. - Or the ground altitude only. Finally, the calculations take earth curvature into account using the effective earth radius concept. In the Other parameters part, specify the values for K5, K6, Kclutter and hilly terrain corrective factor. The value 1 means to take the parameter into account, while the value 0 means not to take the parameter into account. In the calculation profile, if you select the radial option, the U-Net establishes a profile between each transmitter and each point located on its calculation perimeter (user-defined by the calculation radius) and then, uses the nearest profile to make a prediction on a point inside the calculation perimeter (radial optimization). On the other hand, when the systematic option is chosen, the U-Net systematically determines a profile between each transmitter and any points in its calculation area. Note: To avoid repeated calculation times, choose the Radial option. Finally, you can perform the calculations at the center (centered option) or in the bottom left corner (bottom left option) of each grid.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-41

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

To select a method (in Effective antenna height and Diffraction parts), perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Right-click the method line. Right-click the arrow on the extreme right side. Choose a method in the list.

Note: Default values have been assigned to multiple factors. The default values correspond to the quasi-open Okumura-Hata formula valid for a 935 MHz frequency. Typical values for parameters compose the Standard Propagation Model formula. All the K values can be calculated by the Automatic Calibration Wizard. As any Hata-Based model, the extracted path loss is limited to the computed free space loss by default. To skip this limitation, choose 0 from the dedicated menu.

III. Diffraction Computation in SPM

Options and parameters used to evaluate the diffraction losses may be specified in the Parameters and the Clutter tab windows from the SPM properties box. In the Diffraction part of the Parameters tab, you have to define the calculation method for the Diffraction term and K4 factor. Four different methods (Deygout, Epstein-Peterson, Deygout with correction and Millington) are available. For their description, refer to the Technical Reference Guide. These diffraction calculation methods are based on the general method for one or more obstacles described in ITU 526-5 recommendations and calculations take earth curvature into account using the effective Earth radius concept. Along the transmitter-receiver profile, you may choose to consider either both the ground altitude and the clutter height (The U-Net takes clutter height information in clutter heights file if available in the .atl document. Else, it considers average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes file description.), or the ground altitude only. This can be specified in the Clutter tab window from the SPM properties box by selecting Yes or No in the Use clutter heights menu. In order to define precisely the diffraction profile, a clearance per clutter class must be defined. To do so, enter the appropriate values in the Clutter tab window that is accessible from the SPM properties box in cells just left to the clutter classes ones.

IV. Sample Values for SPM Formula Parameters

Here are some orders of magnitude for the different parameters that constitute the Standard Propagation Model formula, as listed in Table 5-25.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-42

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Table 5-25 Orders of magnitude for the different parameters Parameter K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 Min Variable 20 20 0 10 1 Typical Variable 44.9 5.83 0.5 6.55 0 Max Variable 70 20 0.8 0 0

The value of the parameter K1 depends on the frequency and the project type. Here are some examples, as listed in Table 5-26. Table 5-26 Example Project type GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900 UMTS 1x RTT Frequency (MHz) 935 1805 1930 2110 1900 12.5 22 23 23.8 23 K1

Since K1 is a constant, its value is strongly dependant on the values given to losses per clutter class (if needed).

V. Correction for Hilly Regions

An optional corrective term Khill, LOS is proposed in the SPM Parameters tab to correct path loss for hilly regions when transmitter and receiver are in LOS. Khill, area, R, and regression line are assumed to be available. 1) For every profile point within influence area, the U-Net calculates height deviation between the original terrain profile (with earth curvature correction) and regression line. Then, it sorts points according to the deviation and draws two lines (parallel to the regression line), one is exceeded by 10% of the profile points and the other by 90%. 2) 3) The U-Net evaluates the terrain roughness, h. It is the distance between the two lines. The U-Net calculates Khill, LOS.
LOS

is

determined in three steps. Steps to achieve are related to the previous ones: influence

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-43

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

We have

If

Else If Else ,

iRx is the point index at receiver.

VI. SPM Clutter Tab

Figure 5-3 shows the Clutter tab in the SPM.

Figure 5-3 SPM clutter tab When open, click to get a context-sensitive help on the available fields.

You may choose in this tab how to take into account the clutter. The clutter may be considered in two terms of the SPM formula, the diffraction term (diffraction losses) and f(clutter) (average of weighted losses due to clutter). Some parameters and options
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-44

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

available in this tab are used to calculate the diffraction losses and other ones, f(clutter). Parameters/options used to evaluate the diffraction losses: Diffraction term You may specify if you want to take into account the clutter height along the transmitter-receiver profile. Click the Use clutter heights row. Choose Yes to consider along the profile the clutter height in addition to the ground altitude or No to take into account the ground altitude only. In order to define precisely the diffraction profile, a clearance per clutter class may be defined. To do this, enter the appropriate values in cells just left to the clutter classes ones. Parameters/options used to evaluate the average of weighted losses due to clutter: f(clutter) The average of weighted losses due to clutter, f(clutter), is defined as follows:

Where: L: Loss due to clutter. w: Weight. n: Number of points taken into account over the profile. The losses due to clutter are evaluated over a maximum distance from receiver, Max distance. Each clutter class is assigned specific loss, Loss per clutter class. Enter the appropriate values in cells just left to the clutter classes ones. The weighting function enables to give a weight to each point, as listed in Table 5-27. Table 5-27 Weighting function Function Formula

Uniform weighting function

Logarithmic weighting function

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-45

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Function

Formula

Exponential weighting function

Triangular weighting function where di is the distance between the receiver and the i point.

Note: The losses per clutter class can be calculated by the Automatic Calibration Wizard.

To select the weighting function, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Click the weighting function line. Choose a function type in the list.

For some technologies using fixed receivers, it may be useful to: Locate systematically the receiver above the clutters. In that case, do not include the clutter height in the receiver height. Define a specific receiver height for each single clutter. This can be done by putting receivers above rooftops, for example. If you want the 'default' value, the U-Net will read the receiver height in the Predictions property dialog (receiver tab). If these two choices are selected, the receiver height is the sum of the clutter height on its location and the specific height defined per clutter class. Typical Values for Losses Per Clutter Class (SPM) From experienced users, the typical losses (in dB) per clutter class Table 5-28 Typical losses Clutter class Dense urban Woodland Urban From 4 to 5 from 2 to 3 0 Typical losses

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-46

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Clutter class Suburban Industrial Open in urban Open Water from 5 to 3 from 5 to 3 from 6 to 4 from 12 to 10 from 14 to 12

Typical losses

These values have to be entered only when the statistical clutter class maps are taken into account.

Note: The Standard Propagation Model is deduced from the Hata formulae, valid in the case of a urban environment. The values above are consistent since 0 dB is indicated from an urban clutter class, positive values for more dense clutter classes, and negative values for less dense clutter classes.

VII. SPM Automatic Calibration

SPM Calibration Wizard The Calibration process in SPM is made of three main steps. They help you to find the best solution for Ki values, transmitter effective antenna height and diffraction method, and losses per clutter class respecting user-defined ranges. In the first step, check the boxes of the CW measurement path(s) that you want to be used as reference data for the calibration. It is possible to keep some of them for calibration verification purpose.

Note: It is possible to display the initial statistics between measurement and predictions through the CW measurement folder or a specific path. The available paths can be filtered in order to exclude all the inconsistent points. This can be done by the filtering assistant available in the CW measurement part.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-47

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Figure 5-4 SPM calibration wizard first step For the selected and filtered path, the next step allows the user to select the parameters to be calibrated by checking the related boxes. The button helps you to define the allowed intervals for the selected parameter, as shown in Figure 5-5.

Figure 5-5 SPM calibration wizard second step According to the selected paths and parameters to be calibrated, calculations are running, as shown in Figure 5-6.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-48

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Figure 5-6 SPM calibration wizard third step The results are then displayed automatically, as shown in Figure 5-7.

Figure 5-7 SPM calibration wizard result of third step

Note: Model automatic calibration solution is a mathematical solution. Before committing results, ensure of their relevance towards a physical and realistic solution. Model calibration and its result (standard deviation and root mean square) depend on the CW measurement samples you use. A calibrated model must restore the behavior of CW measurements depending on their configuration on a large scale, not totally check to a few number of CW measurements. The calibrated model has to give correct results for every new CW measurement point performed in the same geographical zone, without having been calibrated on these CW measurements.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-49

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

If you want to calibrate the losses per clutter class (Kclutter <>0), when clicking the Identify (Clutter row selected), a warning message opens, asking you to force the Max distance (Clutter tab) to 0 (if Max distance<>0). Actually, the U-Net uses the following process on these constants: 1) 2) 3) The U-Net groups the measurement points according to the clutter class on which they are located. The U-Net calculates the mean error for each of this group with Max distance = 0 (that is, the clutter loss is applied only on the reception bin). For each group, the mean error is then automatically shifted to 0 by playing on the corresponding loss. If the mean error is 5 dB on a specific clutter class, and the initial loss for this clutter class is 2dB, the calibrated loss becomes 7 dB. 4) Therefore, the global mean error on all the measurement points is null.

To summarize, it is not possible to calibrate the clutter losses if Max distance <>0. This parameter must be forced to 0.

5.3.11 Working with the Microwave Propagation Model

This model uses the terrain profile, diffraction mechanisms (calculated in several ways) and takes into account clutter classes and effective antenna heights in order to calculate path loss. The model is based on the following formula:

For details about the implication of the parameters, refer to Table 5-29. Table 5-29 Parameter implication Parameter PR PTx K1 K2 d K3 Received power (dBm) Transmitted power (EIRP) (dBm) Constant offset (dB) Multiplying factor for log(d) Distance between the receiver and the transmitter (m) Multiplying factor for log(HTxeff) Effective height of the transmitter antenna (m) K4 Diffraction Kclutter Multiplying factor for diffraction calculation. K4 has to be a positive number Losses due to diffraction over an obstructed path (dB) Multiplying factor for f(clutter) Implication

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-50

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Parameter f(clutter)

Implication Average of weighted losses due to clutter

All of the above parameters are user-definable in the Microwave Propagation Model properties window consisting of 3 tabs (General, Parameters, Clutter).

Note: For any Hata-based model, it is possible to limit the path loss by the computed free space loss for each single pixel.

I. Accessing Microwave Propagation Model Properties

Users cannot access the internal formula of the Microwave Propagation Model. Nevertheless, you may set all the parameters in the Parameters and Clutter tabs of the Microwave Propagation Model properties dialogue. Table 5-30 lists two ways of accessing the Microwave Propagation Model properties box. Table 5-30 Accessing the Microwave Propagation Model properties box Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) Step Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Right-click the Microwave Propagation Model to open the associated shortcut menu. Click Properties. A dialogue opens up. Select the tab according to the way you want to adjust model parameters. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Propagation models by clicking . Double-click the Microwave Propagation Model. A dialogue opens up. Select the tab according to the way you want to adjust model parameters.

Method 2

II. Adjusting Microwave Propagation Model Properties

You may adjust the parameters contained in the Microwave Propagation Model base formula by using both the Parameters and the Clutter tab windows from the Microwave Propagation Model properties dialog.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-51

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

All the multiplying factors are user-definable in the Parameters tab. You may directly enter the appropriate values in the relevant boxes. In addition, you may select the diffraction calculation method (Deygout, Epstein-Peterson, Deygout with correction, Millington, ITU-R 452-11) from scrolling lists. For details about these calculation method, refer to the Technical Reference Guide. In the Clutter tab, the user may assign the clutter categories for all the clutter classes for calculating the average of losses due to clutter, f(clutter). In addition, you may specify options and parameters used to evaluate the diffraction losses: If you want to take into account the clutter height along the transmitter-receiver profile. The clearances per clutter class.

III. Working with the Microwave Propagation Model: Recommendations

Beware that the clutter influence may be taken into account in two terms, Diffraction loss and f(clutter) at the same time. To avoid this, we advise: Not to consider clutter heights to evaluate diffraction loss over the transmitter-receiver profile if you specify clutter categories. The above approach is recommended if the clutter height information is statistical. Or Not to define any clutter categories if you take clutter heights into account in the diffraction loss. In this case, f(clutter)=0. Losses due to clutter are only taken into account in the computed Diffraction loss term. The above approach is recommended if the clutter height information is either semi-deterministic or deterministic. In case clutter height information is an average height defined for each clutter class, you must specify a receiver clearance (m) per clutter class. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole transmitter-receiver profile except over a specific distance around the receiver (clearance), where the U-Net proceeds as if there were only the DTM. The clearance information is used to model streets since the receiver is supposed to be in the street. Clearance definition is not necessary in case clutter height information is from a clutter height file. Clutter height information is accurate enough to be used directly without additional information such as clearance. If the receiver height is lower than the clutter height, then the receiver is supposed to be covered by that clutter type.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-52

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

IV. Working with the Microwave Propagation Model General Tab

Figure 5-8 Microwave propagation properties general tab When it is open, click to get a context-sensitive help on the available fields.

V. Working with the Microwave Propagation Model Parameters Tab

Figure 5-9 Microwave propagation properties parameter tab When open, click to get a context-sensitive help on the available fields.

This tab manages parameters from the Microwave Propagation model base formula. In the LOS attenuation part, specify the values for K1, K2 and K3 to be used by the formula.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-53

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

In the Diffraction part, specify which method you want to use for calculating the Diffraction term and K4 factor. Five different methods (Deygout, Epstein-Peterson, Deygout with correction, Millington and ITU 452-11) are available. For details about these methods, refer to the Technical Reference Guide. The above diffraction calculation methods are based on the General method for one or more obstacles described in ITU 526-5 and ITU 452-11 recommendations.Depending on the option selected in the Use clutter heights menu of Clutter tab window, the U-Net may consider along the transmitter-receiver profile: Either both the ground altitude and the clutter height. The U-Net takes clutter height information in clutter heights file if available in the .atl document. Else, it considers average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes file description. Or the ground altitude only. Finally, calculations take earth curvature into account using the effectiveearth radius concept. In the Other parameters part, specify the value for Kclutter.

VI. Diffraction Computation in Microwave Propagation Model

Options and parameters used to evaluate the diffraction losses may be specified in the Parameters and the Clutter tab windows from the Microwave Propagation Model properties box. In the Diffraction part of the Parameters tab, the user has to define the calculation method for the Diffraction term and K4 factor. Five different methods (Deygout, Epstein-Peterson, Deygout with correction, Millington and ITU 452-11) are available. For details about these methods, refer to the Technical Reference Guide. These diffraction calculation methods are based on the General method for one or more obstacles described in ITU 526-5 and ITU 452-11 recommendations and calculations take earth curvature into account using the effective earth radius concept. Along the transmitter-receiver profile, you may choose to consider: Either both the ground altitude and the clutter height. The U-Net takes clutter height information in clutter heights file if available in the .atl document. Otherwise, it considers average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes file description. Or the ground altitude only. This can be specified in the Clutter tab window from the Microwave Propagation Model properties box by selecting Yes or No in the Use clutter heights menu. In order to define precisely the diffraction profile, a clearance per clutter class must be defined. To do so, enter the appropriate values in the Clutter tab of the Microwave Propagation Model properties box in the corresponding cells.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-54

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

VII. Sample Values for Microwave Propagation Model Formula Parameters

Here are some orders of magnitude for the different parameters composing the Microwave Propagation model base formula, as listed in Table 5-31. Table 5-31 Orders of magnitude for the different parameters Parameter K1 K2 K3 K4 32.4 20 20 1 Default values

Since K1 is a constant, its value is strongly dependent on clutter categories.

VIII. Working with the Microwave Propagation Model Clutter Tab

Figure 5-10 Microwave propagation properties clutter tab When open, click to get a context-sensitive help on the available fields.

You may choose in this tab how to take the clutter into account. The clutter may be considered in two terms of the Microwave Propagation Model formula, the diffraction term (diffraction losses) and f(clutter) (average of losses due to clutter). Some parameters and options available in this tab are used to calculate the diffraction losses and other ones, f(clutter). Parameters/options used to evaluate the diffraction losses: Diffraction term You may specify if you want to take into account the clutter height along the transmitter-receiver profile.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-55

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

1) 2)

Click the use clutter heights row. Choose Yes to consider along the profile the clutter height in addition to the ground altitude or No to take the ground altitude into account.

In order to define precisely the diffraction profile, a clearance per clutter class may be defined. To do this, enter the appropriate values in cells just left to the clutter classes ones. Parameters/options used to evaluate the average of weighted losses due to clutter: f(clutter) The average of weighted losses due to clutter, f(clutter), is defined as follows:

where L: Loss relative to clutter category. W: Weight. N: Number of points taken into account over the profile.

IX. Microwave Propagation Model Clutter Categories

These standard categories can be assigned to the clutter classes available in the document. Rural open Pastures, grassland Low crop fields Park land Tree covered Irregularly spaced sparse trees Orchards Deciduous trees (irregularly spaced) Deciduous trees (regularly spaced) Conferous trees (irregular spaced) Conferous trees (regular spaced) Mixed tree forest Tropical rain forest

5.4 Tuning Reception Parameters

This section describes the following: Setting the Receiver Properties Computing Shadowing Margins Using Cell Edge Coverage Probability in Predictions
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-56

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

5.4.1 Setting the Receiver Properties

In the U-Net, the calculation of signal levels at any point, for point analysis or coverage purpose, is linked with the definition of a receiver. Depending on the considered project type, different properties might be set. Table 5-32 lists two ways of setting the receiver properties. Table 5-32 Setting receiver properties Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Step Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Predictions folder to open the shortcut menu. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the Receiver tab from the open window. Use What's this help to get description about receiver fields. Enter its height and, for GSM/GPRS/EDGE studies, associated antenna, losses, and the adjacent channel protection level. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Double-click the Predictions folder. Click the Receiver tab from the open window. Use What's this help to get description about receiver fields. Enter its height and, for GSM/GPRS/EDGE studies, associated antenna, losses, and the adjacent channel protection level.

Method 1

Method 2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-57

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Note: In some cases (fixed receivers), it may be useful to define a specific height per clutter class. This can be made directly from the properties of some propagation models (such as WLL or SPM). In the standard propagation model, you can choose to systematically locate the receiver above the clutters. By default, the antenna is set to an omni one with a 0 dB gain. In GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, it is possible to set the adjacent channel protection level. This parameter is used in interference computations in order to simulate the signal level offset due to an adjacent channel contribution on the considered channel. For example, if the value is set to 18 dB (default value), this means that the signal level coming from an adjacent channel will be decreased by 18 dB on the total noise computation on the considered channel. In GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, it is also possible to define a thermal noise that will be optionally used to calculate interferences at the receiver in interference or specific GPRS/EGPRS studies (coding schemes or throughput coverage). To do this, specify the thermal noise value in the Predictions tab of the Predictions folder property box.

For UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 studies, the point analysis tool is used for a particular scenario. Depending on the type of mobility, service or terminal (or radio configuration in CDMA/CDMA2000) chosen, radio parameters are not the same for the receiver. Consequently, to manage receiver parameters used in the point analysis, you must set the characteristics of each used UMTS parameters (type of service, mobility, and terminal) or CDMA/CDMA2000 (type of service, radio Configurations) in the corresponding properties dialog window. In GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, the U-Net has also an option which limits the representation for coverage around stations, in order to consider synchronization problems. This feature is a graphic representation for coverage and is not taken into account in calculations. Table 5-33 lists two ways of defining the maximum range value limiting the coverage display (GSM/GPRS/EDGE studies only) around stations.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-58

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Table 5-33 Defining the maximum range value Method Step 1) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2) Right-click the Predictions folder to open the shortcut menu. 3) Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. 4) Click the System tab (if available) from the open window. 5) Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the current window. 6) Set maximum value. 7) Click OK or Apply. 1) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2) Double-click the Predictions folder. 3) Click the System tab (if available) from the open window. 4) Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the current window. 5) Set maximum value. 6) Click OK or Apply.

Method 1

Method 2

Note: It is also possible to fix minimum and maximum ranges for any single transmitter. This can be set from the considered transmitter properties. If the max range is defined at this level, the global value is not considered.

5.4.2 Computing Shadowing Margins

Propagation models are mathematical tools used for the prediction of losses along a path with the better accuracy. In reality, if we were to stay on a same location or a same clutter class measuring a signal level, we would observe some variations of results due to slow fading/shadowing. That is, we should take the surrounding environment into consideration. We observe that real results are spread on a Gaussian curve, around an average value, and with a specific standard deviation. If we consider the model correctly calibrated, its result should check to this average value. So, in that case, we assume that the model gives a result which is at least correct in an average case. That is to say, in 50% of the measured cases, 50% means that 50% of the measurements will be higher than the predicted value, while the other values are lower than the predicted value. The above case can be taken into account by considering a model standard deviation at the receiver (where you compute a signal level). Either the model standard deviation is clutter class dependent (one value specified for each clutter class) if a clutter class

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-59

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

map is available, or the U-Net considers a default value (no clutter class map available, no value per clutter class specified or default value forced). The model standard deviation, linked to a required cell edge coverage probability on results (point analysis or coverage) lead to additional losses called shadowing margin. This is a margin from a result given by propagation model (in dB) for which the probability of error is 50%. It indicates that, on the real field, results will have at least the value computed by the U-Net with the defined cell edge coverage probability. For example, let's consider the model (correctly calibrated) gives a loss that should lead to a signal level of -70 dBm. The user wants a reliability level of 85 %. Let's imagine the U-Net provides a shadowing margin of 7 dB for the considered location. All of this leads to the fact that the real signal will be equal or higher than -77 dBm in 85% of cases. If you have defined a model standard deviation per clutter class, the same reliability level provides the same shadowing margin to all the receivers located on the same clutter type. On the other hand, different reliability levels will impose different values of shadowing margins even if considering the same clutter type. Applied to the path loss, the model standard deviation is defined for per clutter class. GSM/GPRS/EGPRS projects A C/I standard deviation (in dB) in order to compute shadowing losses (related to a user-defined cell edge coverage probability) on the C/I values WCDMA/UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 projects A Ec/Io standard deviation (in dB) in order to compute shadowing losses (related to a user-defined cell edge coverage probability) on the Ec/Io values. UL and DL Eb/Nt standard deviations (in dB) are used in order to compute shadowing losses (related to a user-defined cell edge coverage probability) on the Eb/Nt values. To display the computed shadowing margins as a function of reliability level, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Predictions folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Choose the Shadowing margins... option from the menu. Use What's this help to get description about other fields available in the current window. Set the cell edge coverage probability. Click the Click OK. button to start computation.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-60

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Note: The U-Net provides a shadowing margin for each clutter class when a clutter class map is available in the .atl document. Otherwise, it displays one default shadowing margin computed from the default model standard deviation. When the cell edge coverage probability is greater than 50%, shadowing margin values are not zero. In UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 projects, uplink and downlink macro-diversity gains (2 links and 3 links) can be also given in this window by selecting the appropriate standard deviation. - The model (or Eb/Nt DL) standard deviation deals for the path loss (or Eb/Nt). - Ec/Io (or Eb/Nt UL) standard deviations can be selected to display the Ec/Io (or Eb/Nt UL) shadowing loss, Ec/Io DL (or Eb/Nt UL) macro-diversity gain. DL macro-diversity gains are calculated by considering the fixed cell edge coverage probability, the Ec/Io standard deviation at the receiver, the Ec/Io difference between the best server and the second one and the Ec/Io difference between the second best server and the third one (these two values may be specified in the dialog). UL macro-diversity gains are calculated by considering the fixed cell edge coverage probability, the Eb/Nt UL standard deviation at the receiver, the uplink Eb/Nt difference between the best server and the second one and the uplink Eb/Nt difference between the second best server and the third one (these two values may be specified in the dialog). When the cell edge coverage probability is 50%, macro-diversity gains (2 and 3 links) taken into account for coverage studies and point analysis are either the one calculated in this window if the option Shadowing option is selected, or the default global value (defined in the Transmitter global parameters). In UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations, these losses are evaluated by computing random shadowing errors and are added to the model path loss. Formulas used to compute shadowing margin, macro-diversity gains (2 and 3 links) are detailed in the Technical Reference Guide.

5.4.3 Using Cell Edge Coverage Probability in Predictions

The U-Net models the probability of error on the predicted path loss. Errors on calculations depend on the transmitter-receiver path and the receiver position. They are due to some obstacles, which are not taken into account by the propagation model (in case geographic data are not up-to-date or appropriate enough, or when there are point obstacles). This phenomenon is called shadowing or slow fading. Variation occurs over distances comparable to the width of obstacles (buildings, hills ...) along the path.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-61

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

From a user-defined model standard deviation (either depending on the clutter class where the receiver is located, or a default value) and a reliability level, the U-Net evaluates a shadowing margin and adds it to the path loss predicted by the model. All coverage studies integrate the possibility to enter a reliability level (in their property dialog box).

Note: In case of a correctly calibrated propagation model, typical standard deviations should be from 6 dB to 9 dB. Model calibration and its result (standard deviation) depend on the CW measurement samples you use. A calibrated model must restore the behavior of CW measurements depending on their configuration, not totally check to a few number of CW measurements. The calibrated model has to give correct results for every new CW measurement point performed in the same geographical zone, without having been calibrated on these CW measurements. In GSM/GPRS/EDGE interference computation, shadowing margins (depending on the entered probability level and the C/I standard deviation at the receiver) are applied only to signal level values. In UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 interference computation, shadowing margins (depending on the entered probability level and the Ec/Io - or Eb/Nt - standard deviation at the receiver) are applied only to Ec (or Eb) values.

When calculating coverage with an x% reliability level, the U-Net displays the areas where the measured field exceeds the predicted signal during x% of time. When increasing the reliability level, the predicted signal deviates from average and hence, the shadowing margin rises.

Note: When using the ITU 370 model, take care not to define reliability level, the reliability level being already included as a parameter.

5.5 Coverage Studies

Coverage is a set of covered pixels. The coverage is a result of path loss matrix computations depending on the choice of propagation models, calculation areas and computation and coverage resolutions.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-62

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Coverage areas are defined by coverage conditions in order to select the transmitters that must be taken into account for the study. Then, according to this selection, any pixel will be covered depending on the chosen display type, either by transmitter, by signal level, by overlapping zones in the standard case (for all projects). So, coverage is a graphic representation of points for which a coverage condition is satisfied. Depending on the type of project considered, some specific studies (treated in their specific parts) are also available: Interference studies in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects. Specific GPRS/EDGE studies dealing with coding schemes or rates coloring. Specific UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 studies based either on simulations or user-defined traffic loads. Like many other the U-Net objects, the management of coverage studies is both easy and powerful. The Generic U-Net display dialog (including legend, label et tip management) is used and allows you to display your study on several attributes related to transmitters. Furthermore, some organization features (filter, sort and groups) are also available on the displayed result. Many features help in the management of coverage in the U-Net. Indeed, it is possible to lock/unlock either complete studies or individual matrices, to display, print or export exhaustive coverage reports, to export matrices or coverage zones, to check the validity of current results regarding to the current radio configurations, and other tools always with a view to make handy coverage studies in the U-Net. It is also possible to calculate path loss matrices independently from any coverage study.

5.5.1 Coverage Prediction General Settings

I. Setting Calculation Areas
In the U-Net, calculation areas are defined at the transmitter level. The U-Net is able to calculate two path loss matrices per transmitter, a first matrix over a near radius computed with a high resolution and a propagation model, and a second matrix over a far radius computed with a low resolution and another propagation model. In addition, the calculation areas of each transmitter occur only within the computation zone. To define calculation area(s) simultaneously to all transmitters, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Propagation tab from the open window.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-63

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

5) 6)

In the main matrix part, enter a calculation radius (with a propagation model and a resolution used to compute the main path loss matrix). Optionally, in the extended matrix part, enter a calculation radius (with a propagation model and a resolution used to compute the extended path loss matrix).

7)

Click OK.

Table 5-34 lists two ways of defining calculation area(s) to one transmitter at a time. Table 5-34 Defining calculation area(s) to one transmitter at a time Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Step Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking . Right-click the transmitter to which you want to define a specific calculation area. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the Propagation tab from the open window. In the Main matrix part, enter a calculation radius (with a propagation model and a resolution used to compute the main path loss matrix). Optionally, in the Extended matrix part, enter a calculation radius (with a propagation model and a resolution used to compute the extended path loss matrix). Click OK. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking . Double-click the transmitter to which you want to assign a specific calculation area. Click the Propagation tab from the open window. In the Main matrix part, enter a calculation radius (with a propagation model and a resolution used to compute the main path loss matrix). Optionally, in the Extended matrix part, enter a calculation radius (with a propagation model and a resolution used to compute the extended path loss matrix). Click OK.

Method 1

7)

8) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

Method 2

6)

7)

You can also define these parameters in the Transmitters table.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-64

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Note: The calculation radius limits the scope of the calculations to the radius that has been defined. The calculation radius prevents the system from calculating over too long distances (such as in an urban area). In the case of very large environments, the calculation radius allows you to improve the calculation time. If no main calculation radius has been defined (and no secondary propagation model), the U-Net takes into account automatically the prediction minimum threshold to define the calculation radius for each transmitter. Nevertheless, this could drive to long calculation times Since it is a matrix (or 2 in case of extended calculation radius) which is computed for each transmitter, the calculation radius represents the half side length of the potential matrix located around the considered transmitter. The U-Net computes an extended matrix only if the three parameters, propagation model, calculation radius and resolution, are specified. Therefore, an extended matrix will not be worked out if its resolution is null. The U-Net computes at the same time the main and extended matrices of a transmitter with a global management. Therefore, it will recalculate both matrices even if only one is invalid. The main calculation radius (and the related propagation model) can be also set at the station template level. When modifying a computation zone (such as reduction of the area) in which some predictions studies have already been made, perform the prediction study again to ensure validity of results with current computation zone.

II. Setting Calculation Resolutions

In the U-Net, it is possible to calculate two path loss matrices per transmitter, a first matrix over a near radius computed with a high resolution and a propagation model, and a second matrix over a far radius computed with a low resolution and another propagation model. The resolution of matrices is not a global parameter since it can be managed for each transmitter depending on its location. In addition, it is possible to differentiate resolution of path loss matrices from plot resolution. Prediction plot resolution can be actually defined on a per study basis. Thus, you can calculate several coverage studies with different resolutions without invalidating and recalculating path loss matrices. To define calculation resolution(s) simultaneously to all transmitters, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to open the associated shortcut menu.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-65

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

3) 4) 5) 6)

Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Propagation tab from the open window. In the Main matrix part, enter a calculation resolution (with a propagation model and a calculation radius used to compute the main path loss matrix). Optionally, in the Extended matrix part, enter a calculation resolution (with a propagation model and a resolution used to compute the extended path loss matrix).

7)

Click OK.

Table 5-35 lists two ways of defining calculation resolution(s) to one transmitter at a time. Table 5-35 Defining calculation resolution(s) to one transmitter at a time. Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Step Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking . Right-click the transmitter to which you want to define a specific calculation resolution. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the Propagation tab from the open window. In the Main matrix part, enter a calculation resolution (with a propagation model and a calculation radius used to compute the main path loss matrix). Optionally, in the Extended matrix part, enter a calculation resolution (with a propagation model and a calculation radius used to compute the extended path loss matrix). Click OK. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking . Double-click the transmitter to which you want to assign a specific calculation resolution. Click the Propagation tab from the open window. In the Main matrix part, enter a calculation resolution (with a propagation model and a calculation radius used to compute the main path loss matrix). Optionally, in the Extended matrix part, enter a calculation resolution (with a propagation model and a calculation radius used to compute the extended path loss matrix). Click OK.

Method 1

7)

8) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

Method 2

6)

7)

You can also define these parameters in the Transmitters table.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-66

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Note: The calculation radius limits the scope of the calculations to the radius that has been defined. The calculation radius prevents the system from calculating over too long distances (such as in an urban area). In the case of very large environments, the calculation radius allows you to improve the calculation time. If no main calculation radius has been defined (and no secondary propagation model), the U-Net takes into account automatically the prediction minimum threshold to define the calculation radius for each transmitter. Nevertheless, this could drive to long calculation times The U-Net computes an extended matrix only if the three parameters, propagation model, calculation radius and resolution, are specified. Therefore, an extended matrix will not be worked out if its resolution is null. The U-Net computes at the same time the main and extended matrices of a transmitter with a global management. Therefore, it will recalculate both matrices even if only one is invalid.

In addition to the default propagation model, a default grid resolution can be specified in the property dialog of the Predictions folder. The U-Net takes into account the default grid resolution when no value or zero is defined for the main resolution in the transmitter properties. In this case, the main path loss matrix of the transmitter will be worked out with the default grid resolution. To define a default calculation resolution, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Predictions folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Propagation tab from the open window. Enter the default calculation resolution. Use What's this help to get further description about the fields available in the current dialog window. Click OK.

III. Creating Coverage Calculations

Whatever the project type is, all existing predictions are listed in the Predictions folder (Data tab). When starting a new project, no prediction is available. To create any prediction, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Predictions folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on New.... Choose from the list a prediction template in the open window.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-67

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

5) 6) 7)

Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the associated prediction window. Set prediction parameters. Click OK.

At this step, no calculation is made. The prediction with the parameters is just ready to b run.

Note: User interface of each prediction study Properties is standardized. For any common study, the Properties window consists of three tabs: The General tab where you may rename the study, define the coverage resolution, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria, on the coverage display only (not on the results). The Condition tab where you can specify the study parameters. The Display tab to define coverage display settings. Like propagation models, any existing coverage study can be duplicated using the Duplicate command of its related shortcut menu (right-click). The new prediction study keeps the same coverage and display settings than the original ones.

IV. Creating Coverage Studies per Group of Transmitter

In the U-Net, it is possible to automatically create prediction studies restricted to a given transmitter or group of transmitters. Table 5-36 lists two ways of creating a coverage study by transmitter or by group of transmitters. Table 5-36 Creating a coverage study by transmitter or by group of transmitters Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) 5) 6) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking in front of it. Right-click the transmitter/transmitter subfolder you want to manage. Choose the Predictions... option from the shortcut menu. Choose a prediction study in the open window and press OK. Click the Calculate button to run calculations. The created study is listed in the Predictions folder.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-68

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Method 1) Method 2 2) 3) 4)

Step Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by clicking the appropriate Tx symbol (arrow). Choose the Predictions... option from the shortcut menu. Choose a prediction study in the open window and press OK. Click the Calculate button to run calculations. The created study is listed in the Predictions folder.

Note: The general tab of the prediction dialog can be also used to restrict the results display identically. Coverage per transmitter or group of transmitters work like when filtering transmitters in coverage studies, that is, the filter is made on display only, and not on computations.

V. Accessing Coverage Prediction Properties

Coverage predictions are manageable identically as point analysis prediction. Firstly, because propagation models may be specified either in the Predictions folder or in the Transmitters folder, you must be very careful to its priority order. The main propagation model defined with transmitters is taken first before the one defined with Predictions. Then take care about the fact that reception is modeled as if it was made using a specific receiver and its associated parameters. Predictions are organized as the other the U-Net objects that are in a folder form. The Predictions folder is the parent item for all the performed coverage predictions. So, it is possible to access the properties either of the Predictions folder or of any prediction. Table 5-37 lists two ways of creating a coverage study by transmitter or by group of transmitters. Table 5-37 Accessing predictions global properties Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Step Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Predictions folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the Predictions, Receiver or the System tab (if available). Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in each dialog. Set predictions global parameters. Click OK.

Method 1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-69

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)

Step Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Double-click the Predictions folder. Click the Predictions, Receiver or the System tab (if available). Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in each dialog. Set predictions global parameters. Click OK.

Method 2

Table 5-38 lists two ways of accessing the properties of any single existing prediction. Table 5-38 Accessing the properties of any single existing prediction Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) 5) 6) 7) Step Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Predictions folder by clicking . Right-click the prediction study of which you want to access properties. Click in the menu on Properties. Click the available tabs to display the different windows. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in each window. Check or adjust prediction parameters. Click OK. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Predictions folder by clicking . Double-click the prediction study of which you want to access properties. Click the available tabs to display the different windows. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in each window. Check or adjust prediction parameters. Click OK.

VI. Setting Coverage Resolutions

In the property dialog of each prediction study (General tab), it is possible to specify the plot resolution. Prediction plots are generated from multi-resolution path loss matrices. Nevertheless, the plot resolution is independent from matrix resolutions and can be defined on a per study basis. Therefore, in the U-Net, you can: Change the plot resolution without making multi-resolution path loss matrices invalid. This enables you to save calculation and recalculation times. Display prediction plots with a resolution different from path loss matrix resolutions.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-70

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

VII. Organising Result Outputs of a Coverage Study

In the U-Net, it is possible to filter the results of a coverage study by excluding some zones involved in the initial result. These filters only deal with display. Of course, during calculation, the U-Net takes into account all the active and filtered transmitters (at the transmitter folder level) to calculate the prediction and displays only coverage related to this transmitter. Practical example: the network consists of 4 stations (Tx0, Tx1, Tx2 and Tx3). Coverage by transmitter study: with best server, no margin and filter on Tx0. The U-Net displays the areas where the signal level from Tx0 is higher than the specified threshold and Tx0 is the best server. Interfered areas study: any calculation option and filter on Tx0. Tx1, Tx2 and Tx3 are possible interferers; they are taken into account in calculations. The covered areas are the areas where Tx0 is interfered by one of these items. To make a filter on any study, open its associated properties, and use the standard filter tools by clicking .

Note: Filters defined in the Transmitters folder and filters inside a polygon have priority over the prediction filters. Transmitters, which do not check these filter criteria, are considered as inactive in predictions. In the General tab, group and sort features enable you to organize study result in the Explorer. You can group or sort a study according to any transmitter attribute. These commands are always available except when selecting display of best signal level, best server path loss, best server total losses or number of servers. It is also possible to set the plot resolution in the General tab of any coverage study.

VIII. Defining the Coverage Conditions

In the U-Net, all the common coverage studies use the same dialog made of 3 tabs (General, Condition, and Display). The condition tab of any coverage study property dialog allows you to filter the active transmitters (with calculation area) that will be part of the computation. So, in this tab, you must specify (using what's this help to get information about available fields in the condition tab window):

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-71

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

The study criterion you want the U-Net to calculate: you can choose to evaluate the signal level at the receiver (signal level), the path loss (path loss) or the total losses (total losses), as in point analysis. Minimum and maximum thresholds: a bin of the map will be covered only if the calculated criterion for each considered transmitter on the bin is between minimum and maximum thresholds. Servers you want to study from the evaluation of their service area. You may choose to keep, on each pixel all the servers, the one with the highest signal level or the one with the Second highest signal level, as far as they check the other conditions (and so on. minimum reception threshold). A margin in case of a best signal study. - In case of all the servers are considered (All), the coverage area of Txi is the zone where:
Minimum threshold < PTxi or LTxi or Total LossesTxi Maximum threshold rec tot
- In

case of best signal level (Best signal level) and a margin, the service area of

Txi corresponds to the bins where:

Minimum threshold PTxi (ic ) (or LTxi or Total Losses Txi ) < Maximum threshold rec tot
Txj Txi Prec (ic ) Best Prec (ic ) M j i

Where: M: Specified margin (dB). Best function: Considers the highest value.

Note: If the margin equals 0 dB (best signal level and no margin), the U-Net considers bins where the signal level received from Txi is the highest one. If the margin is set to 2 dB, the U-Net considers bins where the signal level received from Txi is either the highest one or 2dB lower than the highest one. If the margin is set to -2 dB, the U-Net considers bins where the signal level received from Txi is 2dB higher than the signal levels from transmitters, which are 2nd best servers.

In case of second best signal level and a margin, the service area of Txi corresponds to the bins where:
Minimum threshold PTxi (ic ) (or LTxi or Total LossesTxi ) < Maximum threshold rec tot

And

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-72

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Txj Txi Prec (ic ) 2 nd Best Prec (ic ) M j i

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Where M is the specified margin (dB). 2nd Best function: considers the second highest value.

Note: If the margin equals 0 dB, the U-Net will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is the second highest one. If the margin is set to 2 dB, the U-Net will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is either the second highest one or 2dB lower than the second highest one. If the margin is set to -2 dB, the U-Net will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is 2dB higher than the signal levels from transmitters, which are 3rd best servers.

In GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, some specific server conditions related with the potential use of HCS layers are available for the service area determination. It is possible to consider or not indoor coverage by checking/unchecking the related box. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. Considering a reception pixel of a specific clutter class, this loss is added to the total path loss regarding to the defined value (in dB). The last parameters to define in the Condition tab, whatever the project type is, are: If you want to take into account shadowing and in this case the study cell edge coverage probability. Entering 60% as cell edge coverage probability means that the measured criterion exceeds the predicted one, 60% of the time. The selection of an item defining power in transmitters (TRX types in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, carrier in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000)

Note: This tab deals with the determination of covering transmitter only. The way they cover the bin is managed in the Display tab.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-73

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

IX. Managing Prediction Display

Like for the other U-Net objects classified under folders, prediction results can be either displayed (by checking the box just left to each prediction) or not (by unchecking the box just left to each prediction) on the map. You may even display all the calculated predictions by checking the box just left to the Predictions folder. Coverage is organized as layers. The layer order can be modified in order to make some of them displayed on the top. Concerning the coverage itself, the U-Net uses the generic display dialog in order to make easy and complete its management. So, when creating a prediction study, once the filter on the transmitters to be taken into account in computations and coverage (and interference) condition are set (condition tab), the display tab allows you to color the defined zones depending on selected attributes (using What's this help to get information about available fields in the display tab window). Attributes can be chosen in order to realize either common studies (coverage by transmitter, by signal level, overlapping zones), or specific studies (such as interference studies in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, handover status, pilot pollution, and so on, in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 projects), or studies depending on any other attribute (attributes of sites, antennas, transmitters and cells in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 projects). These attributes can be, for example: Signal level (in dBm, dBV, dBV/m) On each bin of each transmitter coverage area, the U-Net calculates signal level received from the transmitter. A bin of a coverage area is colored if signal level exceeds (=) entered minimum thresholds (bin color depends on signal level). Coverage consists of several independent layers for which you may manage visibility in the workspace. There are as many layers as transmitter coverage areas. Each layer shows the different signal levels available in the transmitter coverage area. Best signal level (in dBm, dBV, dBV/m) On each bin of each transmitter coverage area, the U-Net calculates signal levels received from transmitters, whose coverage areas overlap the studied one, and chooses the highest value. A bin of a coverage area is colored if the signal level exceeds (=) entered thresholds (the bin color depends on the signal level). Coverage consists of several independent layers for which you may manage visibility in the workspace. There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the signal level from the best server exceeds a defined minimum threshold. Path loss (dB) On each bin of each transmitter coverage area, the U-Net calculates path loss from the transmitter. A bin of a coverage area is colored if path loss exceeds (=) entered minimum thresholds (bin color depends on path loss). Coverage consists
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-74

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

of several independent layers for which you may manage visibility in the workspace. There are as many layers as coverage areas. Each layer shows the different path loss levels in the transmitter coverage area. Total losses (dB) On each bin of each transmitter coverage area, the U-Net calculates total losses from the transmitter. A bin of a coverage area is colored if total losses exceed (=) entered minimum thresholds (bin color depends on total losses). Coverage consists of several independent layers for which you may manage visibility in the workspace. There are as many layers as coverage areas. Each layer shows the different total losses levels in the coverage area. Best server path loss (dB) On each bin of each transmitter coverage area, the U-Net calculates signal levels received from transmitters, which coverage areas overlap the studied one, determines the best transmitter and evaluates path loss from the best transmitter. A bin of a coverage area is colored if the path loss exceeds (=) entered thresholds (bin color depends on path loss). Coverage consists of several independent layers for which you may manage visibility in the workspace. There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the path loss from the best server exceeds a defined minimum threshold. Best server total losses (dB) On each bin of each transmitter coverage area, the U-Net calculates signal levels received from transmitters, which coverage areas overlap the studied one, determines the best transmitter and evaluates total losses from the best transmitter. A bin of a coverage area is colored if the total losses exceed (=) entered thresholds (bin color depends on total losses). Coverage consists of several independent layers for which you may manage visibility in the workspace. There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the total losses from the best server exceed a defined minimum threshold. Number of servers The U-Net evaluates how many coverage areas cover a bin in order to determine the number of servers. The bin color depends on the number of servers. Coverage consists of several independent layers for which you may manage visibility in the workspace. There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the number of servers exceeds (=) a defined minimum threshold. Cell edge coverage probability (%) On each bin of each transmitter service area, the coverage corresponds to the pixels where the signal level from this transmitter fulfils signal conditions (defined in Conditions tab) with different cell edge coverage probabilities. In the explorer, there is one coverage area per transmitter.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-75

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Best cell edge coverage probability (%) On each bin of each transmitter service area, the coverage corresponds to the pixels where the best signal level received fulfils signal conditions (defined in Conditions tab). In the explorer, there is one coverage area per cell edge coverage probability.

Caution: In case of a signal level, path loss or total losses display, the lowest defined threshold must be equal to the minimum threshold entered in the Condition tab.

Note: The U-Net provides default calculation and display parameters when creating common prediction studies (coverage by signal level, coverage by transmitter and overlapping), but it is possible to cover by signal level even if choosing a coverage by transmitter study. The definition of a study (coverage condition and display parameters) can be chosen for a study template. Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, it is necessary to recalculate prediction study in order to update coverage. In UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 projects, transmitter coverage areas may be displayed according to any cell attribute. If you study a given carrier, the U-Net only displays the coverage areas of transmitters using the selected carrier. If the study is based on all the carriers, all the transmitter coverage areas will be displayed. For each transmitter, the U-Net concatenates the value of each carrier for the selected attribute and proposes a color for each string of values.

X. Running Coverage Calculations

In the U-Net, coverage studies can be firstly created and tuned, and then calculated. So, it is possible to prepare a complete set of coverage studies, and let them work all together only when necessary. Table 5-39 lists two ways of running calculations on created predictions.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-76

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Table 5-39 Running calculations on created predictions Method 1) Step Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Calculations will be made only on unlocked predictions (symbolized ). From the menu bar, click either the Calculate button or the

Method 1

2)

Force calculation button The event viewer opens showing the calculations progress in the Tasks tab (you may stop calculations even by clicking the Stop button or pressing the Esc key). When finished, results are then displayed on the current map (if the visibility flag is checked). 1) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Calculations will be made only on unlocked predictions (symbolized ). Right-click the Predictions folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Choose either the Calculate or Force calculation command from the open menu. The event viewer opens showing the calculations progress in the Tasks tab (you may stop calculations even by clicking the Stop button or pressing the Esc key). When finished, results are then displayed on the current map (if the visibility flag is checked).

2) Method 2 3)

Note: The Calculate and Force calculation features can be also accessed either: By using respectively the F7 and Ctrl+F7 keys; From the Tools menu in the menu bar; From the Predictions folder shortcut menu. To run a single unlocked study, you can select the Calculate command from its shortcut menu. Even if the other studies are unlocked, only this prediction will be computed. After having been calculated, coverage predictions are automatically locked.

XI. Locking Coverage Studies

The U-Net allows you to lock some coverage predictions (and to freeze their result display) whereas you desire to commit calculations on other studies. So, this feature enables the user to easily compare prediction results made with different parameters individually. This can be made either globally or for each single prediction. To lock/unlock any single prediction study, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Predictions folder by clicking .
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-77

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

3) 4)

Right-click the prediction study you want to lock/unlock the calculations. Select/Unselect the Study Locked option from the open menu.

To lock/unlock all the existing prediction studies, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Predictions folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Select either the Lock studies or Unlock studies from the open menu. icon, whereas unlocked predictions are

Locked predictions are displayed with the given by the icon.

Note: After having been calculated, coverage predictions are automatically locked. Be careful not to mix up locking predictions with locking path loss results from the Result storage. Even if some predictions are locked and other unlocked, path loss matrices may stay unchanged if either they are locked in the Result storage window or if the user does not use the Force calculation button.

Caution: When calculations have to be completed, ensure that the coordinate system used in the current project is already defined.

5.5.2 Prediction Study Templates

I. Calculating a Coverage by Transmitter
In the U-Net, all studies are classified in a study types box, referencing standard and customized studies. Standard studies are divided into two parts, common studies and studies which are specific to the current project (GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS, and CDMA/CDMA2000). Common studies for any projects are: coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level, and overlapping zones. The coverage by transmitter study enables the user to predict coverage zones by transmitter depending either on their signal level, their path loss or total losses defined within a user-defined range. To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the coverage by transmitter option from the Study types window. The open window consists of three

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-78

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

tab windows: General, Condition, and Display. For all of these, use What's this help to get description of the fields available in the windows. The coverage by transmitter study is a template for which the field Transmitter is selected by default in the display tab. In that case, coverage zones will be displayed with the same colors as the ones defined for each transmitter.

Note: The U-Net offers default calculation and display parameters when creating common prediction studies. It is possible, however, to cover by signal level even if choosing coverage by transmitter study just by setting this in the display tab. Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, recalculate prediction study in order to update coverage.

II. Calculating a Coverage by Signal Level

In the U-Net, all studies are classified in a study types box, referencing standard and customized studies. Standard studies are divided into two parts, common studies and studies which are specific to the current project (GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS, and CDMA/CDMA2000). Common studies for any projects are: coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and overlapping zones. The coverage by signal level study enables the user to predict coverage zones by field strength from transmitter depending either on their signal level, their path loss or total losses defined within a user-defined range. To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the coverage by signal level option from the Study types window. The open window is made of three tab windows: General, Condition, and Display. For all of these, use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows. The coverage by signal level study is a template for which the field Best signal level is selected by default in the Display tab. In that case, each layer corresponds to an area where the signal level from the best server exceeds a defined minimum threshold. Numerous options related to signal level coverage are available in the Display tab.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-79

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Note: The U-Net offers default calculation and display parameters when creating common prediction studies but it is possible to cover by transmitter even if choosing coverage by signal level study just by setting this in the Display tab. Choosing another display type can make coverage study invalid. In this case, it is necessary to recalculate prediction study in order to update coverage. Choosing a display per best signal level creates a study item made of threshold items whereas choosing a display per signal level let the folder be made of transmitter items. On each of these items, it is possible to check/uncheck the visibility flag.

III. Calculating Overlapping Areas

In the U-Net, all studies are classified in a study types box, referencing standard and customized studies. Standard studies are divided into two parts, common studies and studies which are specific to the current project (GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS, and CDMA/CDMA2000). Common studies for any projects are: coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and overlapping zones. Overlapping is a coverage whose points correspond, for a defined condition, to the common points of areas covered by the signal of, at least, two transmitters. Therefore, the U-Net displays the areas where the signal level from at least two transmitters (signal level option), the path loss of the signal received from at least two transmitters (path loss option), or total losses along two paths between the considered point and transmitters (total losses option), is between minimum and maximum user-defined thresholds. To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Overlapping option from the Study types window. The open window is made of three tab windows: General, Condition, and Display. For all of these, use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows. The coverage by overlapping area study is a template for which the Number of servers field is selected by default in the Display tab. In that case, each layer corresponds to an area where the number of servers exceeds a defined minimum threshold.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-80

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Note: The U-Net offers default calculation and display parameters when creating common prediction studies but it is possible to cover by transmitter even if choosing an overlapping study just by adjusting display. Choosing another display type can make coverage study invalid. In this case, it is necessary to recalculate prediction study in order to update coverage.

IV. Creating a Coverage Study Template

The U-Net provides a feature allowing you to save the definition of a coverage study (General, condition and display tab properties) in a study template. To save the settings of any study in a template, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Right-click the coverage study you want to save as a template. Choose the Save as a template command from the open shortcut menu. The U-Net saves the study parameters in a Studies.xml folder stored in the U-Net installation directory. All the study templates saved in this file are available when new prediction studies are created. In the Study types window, the U-Net lists all the classical studies available for a type of project in the standard studies part and the study templates you have created in the customized studies part.

Note: The name given to the reference study is kept as template name.

It is possible to remove a study template from the file. In the Study types window, select a customized study and click the Delete button.

V. Deleting a Coverage Study Template

In the U-Net, coverage study templates are saved in a Studies.xml folder stored in the U-Net installation directory. These templates contain settings of reference studies set in their general, condition and display tab properties. To delete an existing study template, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Predictions folder to view the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on New.... Select from the list the study template (customized studies) you want to delete.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-81

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

5) 6)

Click the Click OK.

button.

Note: You can also delete globally all the customized studies by deleting the Studies.xml file in the U-Net directory.

5.5.3 Path Loss Management

I. Storage of Path Loss Matrices
The first step of coverage predictions is to determine the path loss matrices associated with each active and filtered transmitter in the network. This is automatically made for the first coverage prediction. Results (path loss matrices) may be stored either directly in the current atl project or can be externalized either in the same directory than the .atl project or in any directory you can specify. To set the location of the path loss matrices of an .atl U-Net project, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Predictions folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Choose the Properties option from the menu. In the Predictions tab, click the multi-resolution path loss matrices: Embedded: Matrices are included in the .atl document. \ATL_name.losses: Multi-resolution matrices are stored in an external folder located in the same directory as the .atl document. The U-Net memorizes a relative path to access path loss matrices. By default, this folder is called ATL_name.losses (ATL_name is the name of the .atl document). Nevertheless, it is possible to change the folder name afterwards; all the names are supported. When using the Save as command, the U-Net creates a new folder associated with the new .atl document in the same directory; this folder contains path loss matrices and has the same name as the .atl document. No recalculation occurs if you move the .atl document and its related path loss matrix folder in another directory. Browse: In this case, specify the directory where you want to save path loss matrices and click OK. The U-Net memorizes the whole path to access path loss
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-82

button and choose a location to store

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

matrices. The path can be manually typed or modified. In that case, the U-Net works differently from in the previous option when using the Save as command. It only creates the new .atl document. 5) 6) Use What's this help to get description about other fields available in the current window. Click OK.

When exproting path loss results, the U-Net creates an external folder containing: One .los file per transmitter; it corresponds to its main path loss matrix. A .dbf file giving validity information for all the main matrices. A folder called LowRes dedicates to extended path loss matrices. This folder includes one .los file per transmitter, which has an extended path loss matrix, and a .dbf file giving validity information for all the extended matrices. Using this option, calculations are no longer stored in the .atl file. This feature enables the user to store bigger calculations in external files without storage size limitation (2 Gbytes for a file).

Caution: The external files are updated without saving the U-Net environment as soon as calculations are performed. To keep consistency with the stored calculations, the corresponding U-Net environment must be saved before closing.

Note: Since the dbf file has a standard format, its contents can be checked by opening it in Access. This feature allows you to create matrices that can be shared between several users. In the case of a project in which some matrices were initially embedded, the U-Net provides a feature that compresses .atl files when getting out.

II. Locking Path Loss Results

This feature enables you to let freeze any path loss matrix, even if invalid when using the Calculate button. Nevertheless, all existing (even locked) matrices are Force calculation button during calculations.

recalculated if you use the

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-83

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

There are two ways to lock path loss matrices, either from the Predictions global properties in a table form, or from any transmitter properties. Table 5-40 lists two ways of locking/unlocking propagation results (one transmitter at a time). Table 5-40 Locking/unlocking propagation results Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) 5) 6) 7) Step Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking . Right-click the transmitter you want to lock the associated path loss matrix. Choose the Properties option from the open menu. Click the Propagation tab. Check/Uncheck the Locked box. Use What's this get description about other fields available in the current window. Click OK. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking . Double-click the transmitter you want to lock the associated path loss matrix. Click the Propagation tab. Check/Uncheck the Locked box. Use What's this get description about other fields available in the current window. Click OK.

Table 5-41 lists two ways of locking/unlocking propagation results (possibly on several transmitters). Table 5-41 Locking/unlocking propagation results Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Step Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Predictions folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Choose the Result storage... option from the open menu. Check/Uncheck the Locked box associated with the transmitters you want to lock/unlock the associated path loss matrix. Choose the Lock/Unlock option from the Action button. Use What's this get description about other fields available in the current window. Click OK.

Method 1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-84

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)

Step Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Predictions folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Choose the Result storage... option from the open menu. Check/Uncheck the Locked box associated with the transmitters you want to lock/unlock the associated path loss matrix. Choose the Lock/Unlock option from the Action button. Use What's this get description about other fields available in the current window. Click OK.

Method 2

Note: Be careful not to mix up locking matrices with locking calculations. It is possible to lock/unlock matrices from the shortcut menu of the Propagation tab of the Transmitter global properties.

III. Checking the Validity of Path Loss Results Validity

This feature enables you to check if current path loss results are consistent with the current radio parameters. There are two ways to check path loss matrices validity, either from the Predictions global properties in a table form, or from any transmitter properties. If validity is not ok, you may calculate path loss matrices again in order to keep consistency. Reasons of invalidity are displayed for each transmitter. Table 5-42 lists two ways of checking propagation results validity (one transmitter at a time). Table 5-42 Checking propagation results validity Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) Step Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking . Right-click the transmitter you want to check the associated path loss matrix validity. Choose the Properties option from the open menu. Click the Propagation tab. Check the label displayed in the Validity line. If the label is No, the invalidity reason is given just below. Use What's this help to get description about other fields available in the current window. Click OK.

Method 1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-85

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Method 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) 5) 6) 7)

Step Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking . Double-click the transmitter you want to check the associated path loss matrices validity. Click the Propagation tab. Check the label displayed in the Validity line. If the label is No, the invalidity reason is given just below. Use What's this help to get description about other fields available in the current window. Click OK.

To check propagation results validity (possibly on several transmitters), perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Choose the Properties option from the open menu. Click the Propagation tab. Check the label displayed in the Validity column. If the label is No, the invalidity reason is given on the same line. Use What's this help to get description about other fields available in the current window. Click OK.

From this dialog box, it is possible to know how many transmitter path loss data must be recalculated in order to be consistent with the current radio configuration before starting calculations. Only matrices dealing with active transmitters are taken into account in that case. To do so, click the button. The number is automatically given in

the dialog. The number of transmitters available in the current network is also indicated.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-86

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Note: It is possible to check the validity of existing path loss matrices from the Predictions: Result storage... command or the Propagation tab of the Transmitters folder. Repeaters are also listed along with their donor transmitters in the path loss validity dialog. The U-Net manages path loss matrix validity, transmitter by transmitter, even in case transmitters have main and extended path loss matrices. Therefore, even if only one path loss matrix of the transmitter is invalid, the U-Net will recalculate both of them. In the Results storage dialog and in the Propagation tab of the Transmitters property dialog, the U-Net lists calculated transmitters (transmitters with main and extended matrices) without distinguishing main path loss matrices from extended ones. Whatever the propagation model is, during the path loss computation, the resulted is limited by the value given by the free space loss formula. This means than if a propagation model gives, on a pixel, a path loss value lower than the one given by the free space loss formula. This is this last value which is kept.

IV. Exporting Main Path Loss Matrices

Existing main path loss matrices may be exported in external files in order to be used in external applications. For the export, the user must select the type of value to export (Path loss or Signal levels). If Signal level is selected, units have to be chosen. Furthermore, the U-Net enables the user to select the storage file format (binary, text or table). To export one or several path loss matrices, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Predictions folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Choose the Result storage... option from the open menu. Select the transmitter(s) from which you want to export the existing main matrix. Use What's this help to get description about other fields available in the current window. Choose the Export... option from the Action button. Choose the directory, the format, and the field to export. Click OK.

Two files are created by exported matrix. One is the exported field, the other, the geo-referenced file related to the involved transmitter and its related calculation area. Possible exports are: Attenuations in dB
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-87

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Signal levels in dBm, dBV or dBV/m Possible file formats to export values are: Binary format: .bil Text: .txt with tab as separating character Table: .csv with semicolon as separating character The report on any coverage prediction can be exported to any other Office-like application. To do so, like for any other table in the U-Net, perform a copy and paste action for the entire report, then reformat the text if required (change into a table, modify, and so on). You may also export the displayed map (including currently displayed results) and the results from the Point analysis window to any other application program supporting image data format.

V. Printing Prediction Reports

You can use the U-Net to print characteristics tables and reports as well as maps with their coverage. To print a prediction report, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Make active a report window. Choose the Print... option from the File menu in the menu bar. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Adjust the printing parameters. We assume that your printer is correctly configured for your Windows applications. If this is not the case, first use the Print configuration... option. 5) Click OK.

Print reports can be centered on the sheet and possibly spread over a number of sheets for large-scale tables. Cell sizes are then displayed on the screen.

Note: When printing a report, a footnote is created automatically to indicate the date (in month/day/year format) and the time of printing as well as the page numbering.

VI. Viewing prediction study statistics

The U-Net provides a feature for displaying detailed statistics for coverage prediction studies displayed by value intervals. It includes graphically represented statistical charts based on the already calculated the covered area of any coverage prediction

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-88

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

and the mean and standard deviation values computed during the coverage study computation. To display the statistics of any prediction coverage study, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Predictions folder by clicking . Right-click the Prediction whose statistics want to be displayed to open the associated shortcut menu. Choose the Histogram option from the menu. The associated statistics are displayed in a new window. By default, the window displays a histogram based on the area covered in the prediction study. The histogram is displayed using the coverage study colors, interval steps and shading. You can also choose to display a cumulative distribution function (CDF) or an inverse CDF (1 ?CDF). In these cases the resulting values are integrated and shown along a continuous curve. It is also possible to display the histogram or the CDFs in percentages of the covered area. The Detailed Results section gives the covered area values, or the percentage of the covered area, along the y-axis against the coverage criterion along the x-axis. The copy button enables you to copy the graph to the clipboard in order to import it later to any other application. It is also possible to print the graph by simply clicking the Print button. The Statistics based on Study Conditions section provides the mean and standard deviation of the coverage criterion calculated during the coverage calculations

Note: It is normal to observe differences between the mean and standard deviation values displayed by the U-Net and perceived by the user from the histogram/CDF. This is because the histogram and CDFs are computed based on the surface area covered by the coverage study while the mean and standard deviation values are computed according to the coverage study conditions during its calculations.

VII. Exporting Prediction Coverages

With the U-Net, you can export the coverage areas resulting from any coverage prediction in Bmp, Tiff, or ArcView?grid raster formats or in ArcView, MapInfo or Agd vector formats. Of course, it is possible to only export predictions that have been calculated beforehand. Exporting coverage predictions allows the user to generate data file easy to import as vector or raster objects within the U-Net or within other applications. For each exported
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-89

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

prediction (total or for a transmitter), the exported zone is delimited by the rectangle encompassing the coverage. All coverage type can be exported. To export a prediction coverage zone, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Select the Data tab in the Explorer window. Click to expand the Predictions folder. Right-click the Prediction of which you want to export the coverage zones. Select Export the Coverage... from the shortcut menu. Enter the file name and select the type and the path of the file to be exported. Click Save to export the zone. Prediction coverage zones in raster format or in Agd vector format are exported. For vector files other than Agd vector files: For ArcView?vector files: If necessary, change the export resolution. The default resolution is the resolution of the prediction plot (as set in the prediction study property dialog). For all vector files: If necessary change the reference coordinate system for the file being exported. 7) Click Export.

Note: Be very careful about the accuracy of the coordinate system format to export. Indeed, when selecting a different coordinate system than the one initially defined within the U-Net, the file is converted using this other coordinate system. Raster format export is not possible when the coverage is made per transmitter (coverage studies with display type per transmitter, per any transmitter attribute, per signal level, per path loss, per total losses). In this case, only coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format

VIII. Coverage Prediction Available Exports

Depending on the type of prediction, the following exports are possible, as listed in Table 5-43. Table 5-43 Available exports Prediction Overlapping Coverage by signal level Coverage by C/I level Pilot pollution
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-90

Possible export Total coverage

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Prediction Downlink total noise handover status GPRS/EDGE max rate per timeslot GPRS/EDGE coding scheme Coverage by transmitter Interfered zones Service area (Eb/Nt) uplink Service area (Eb/Nt) downlink Effective service area Pilot reception analysis Ec/Io

Possible export

Total coverage or coverage of each transmitter

For each exported prediction (global or for a single transmitter), the exported zone is delimited by the rectangle encompassing the coverage.

Note: Exporting coverage zones by transmitter is possible only when the coverage study item is made of transmitter sub-items.

5.6 Prediction Studies Comparisons

The U-Net is capable of comparing the coverage plots resulting from two different prediction studies and generating a comparative plot from the two. This type of comparative coverage plot is called a Delta plot in the U-Net. This can be made either within a unique project or between two different projects. As there are two types of coverage prediction studies in the U-Net: Coverage prediction studies displayed by transmitter Global coverage prediction studies (such as coverage by signal level and so on, by thresholds) It is possible to compare two global coverage studies, two coverage studies by transmitter, and a global coverage study with a coverage study by transmitter. The resulting delta plot can be of two types depending on the types of coverage studies being compared.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-91

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Delta plots are always locked studies and cannot be unlocked. Comparative studies have the following properties: Naming conventions have been adopted for delta plots. Depending upon the types of prediction studies being compared, delta plots are named. Comparison (Prediction Study 1 ?Prediction Study 2). Splitting in cells (Prediction Study 1 ?Prediction Study 2). The comments field contains the comments from the two prediction studies compared. The names and bin resolutions for the two studies compared are also stored. The bin resolution used for the delta plot calculation is the finer one of the two. Like all other prediction studies, it is also possible to export delta plots in agd, mif, tif, shp and bmp formats. It is also possible to configure delta plots by the grouping, sorting and filtering features available in the General tab of their properties dialog. Delta plots are automatically calculated and are locked. If you modify the display properties, the delta plot will be automatically recalculated when the properties window is closed by clicking OK.

Note: It is also possible to compare studies from two different projects in co-planning. Coverage prediction studies must be available (using the Make accessible in command) in the complementary project for them to be accessible for comparisons.

I. Comparing Two Similar Prediction Studies

The U-Net enables the user to generate delta plots for two similar coverage prediction studies, that is, two global coverage prediction studies or two coverage prediction studies by transmitter. Delta plots resulting from comparing two global prediction studies are global comparison studies, while those resulting from comparing two coverage prediction studies by transmitter are comparison studies by transmitter. The coverage prediction studies must be locked in order to be compared. To compare two similar coverage prediction studies, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Predictions folder by clicking menu. Choose the coverage prediction study with which you want to compare this study from the Compare with menu. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-92

in front of it.

Right-click the coverage prediction study you want to compare to open its shortcut

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

6) 7)

Set the configuration and display parameters. Click OK or Apply.

A new delta plot (comparison coverage study) is created in the Predictions folder following the naming conventions for comparison coverage studies. Three display formats are possible for delta plots: Intersection: Shows the area where both prediction study plots overlap (that is, pixels covered by both studies with red color). Union: Shows all the pixels covered by both or by only one of the prediction studies with different colors (that is, pixels covered by both studies with red color and pixels covered by one study only with blue color). Difference: Shows all the pixels covered by both or by only one of the prediction studies with different colors (that is, pixels covered by both studies with red color, pixels covered by study 1 only with green color, and pixels covered by study 2 only with blue color). Cell contours are drawn in black color in case of a comparison study by transmitter. Delta plots are locked and it is not possible to unlock them. However, it is possible to rename, delete, generate reports on and access the properties of these delta plots.

II. Comparing a Global Study with a Study by Transmitter

Two different types of coverage prediction studies, that is, a global coverage study and a coverage study by transmitter, can be compared and a delta plot generated. A simple comparison of the two coverage prediction studies is not possible since this is not a symmetrical operation. In order to compare a global coverage study with a coverage study by transmitter, the global coverage study must be split into cells according to the coverage study by transmitter. These results into a coverage study by transmitter are called a Split into cells study. A Split into cells coverage study is computed by filtering (masking) the global coverage study by applying the cell contours of the coverage study by transmitter being compared to this global coverage study. Three categories of coverage pixels are treated: Pixels covered by both studies displayed with global study colors Pixels covered by the study by transmitter only in transparent Pixels covered by the global study only in transparent Cell contours are drawn in black color. The coverage prediction studies must be locked in order to be compared. To compare a global coverage prediction study with a coverage prediction study by transmitter, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Predictions folder by clicking in front of it.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-93

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

3) 4) 5) 6) 7)

Right-click the global coverage prediction study you want to compare to open its shortcut menu. Choose the coverage prediction study by transmitter with which you want to compare this study from the Split in Cells menu. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog. Set the configuration and display parameters. Click OK or Apply.

A new delta plot (comparison coverage study) is created in the Predictions folder following the naming conventions for comparison coverage studies. Delta plots are locked and it is not possible to unlock them. However, it is possible to rename, delete, generate reports on and access the properties of these delta plots.

5.7 Point Analysis Predictions

The U-Net contains several propagation models for specific needs. Once the choice has been made, the associated parameters have been set and the receiver has been tuned, you are able to make radio wave propagation predictions. Moreover, the U-Net provides a point analysis tool allowing you, in the standard case (for all types of projects). To study reception along a profile between from a reference transmitter in real time (no matrix needed). To evaluate the signal levels coming from the surrounding transmitters at a given point (using existing path loss matrices). Furthermore, this tool is very helpful in the analysis of cases related to specific technologies. With this, you can: Evaluate interferences on a selected transmitter at a given point, and determine the interferers and associated noise levels in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects. Make a complete active set analysis at a given point for a probe UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 user moving in the network with a particular behavior. This tool will help you to study also, at a point, the pilot reception and the connection status. These specific studies are available in their specific parts. The point analysis window provides the possibility to select either the TRX type or the carrier of the study due to the fact that several powers can be defined on an identical transmitter, (at the subcell level in GSM/GPRS/EDGE or at the cell level in UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000). Using the standard propagation model, it is possible to obtain further data along a terrain profile with the point analysis. Other tools like export ease, link budget, the possibility to adjust in real time cell edge coverage probability, and so on are also available.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-94

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Note: Like for coverage predictions, and because propagation models may be defined either in the Predictions folder or in the Transmitters folder, you must be very careful to its priority order. The propagation model defined with transmitters is taken first compared to the one defined with Predictions

5.7.1 Displaying Point Analysis Results

I. Using the Receiver
To make the point analysis active, just click the icon (or check the Point analysis

in the View menu). When this is made, you can move on the active map, and have displayed in Point analysis window the profile analysis between a given transmitter and the current location, the predictions from all the surrounding transmitters, and specific GSM/GPRS/EDGE or CDMA/UMTS studies. If you click the map, the receiver is fixed on a particular point. To move it again, just click the icon, and drag it over the map.

Note: The Receiver options are reachable from its shortcut menu (right-click the receiver)

II. Studying the Profile from a Transmitter

With the point analysis tool, the U-Net is able to display a view of the terrain profile between a given station and the point defined by the receiver on the map using the propagation model as defined before (with priority order respect). Results are given in real time (no need for path loss matrices). Table 5-44 lists two ways of making active the Reception profile window.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-95

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Table 5-44 Making active the reception profile window Method 1) Step From the menu bar, check the Point analysis command in the View menu. The point analysis window opens in the lower right corner of your current environment. Click the Profile tab. Select the transmitter on which you want to base the prediction from the associated scrolling list. Click the analysis window. button in the Point

2) 3) Method 1 4) 5)

button from the toolbar. Click the The data appearing on the profiles (ellipses, clutter, and so on) will be function of the considered model. From the menu bar, check the Point analysis command in the View menu. The point analysis window opens in the lower right corner of your current environment. Click the Profile tab. Select the transmitter on which you want to base the prediction from the associated scrolling list. The data appearing on the profiles (ellipses, clutter, and so on) will be function of the considered model.

1)

Method 2

2) 3)

In this profile tab window, the U-Net indicates the propagation model associated with the selected transmitter; this model is used for analysis. You may choose to display either the signal or several losses at any point. You can also choose the item level at which the power(s) of each transmitter are defined (TRX type or carrier). The altitude (expressed in meters) is reported on the vertical scale. A green line shows the line of sight (LOS) from the studied transmitter and the U-Net displays the angle of the LOS read in the antenna vertical pattern. Along the profile, if the signal meets an obstacle, this causes attenuation with diffraction symbolized by a red vertical line (if the model used takes into account diffraction mechanisms). The main peak taken into account is the one that intersects the most the Fresnel ellipsoid. Any attenuation that occurs is then calculated in one hand, between the station and the main peak, in the other hand, between the main peak and the receiver. With some propagation models using a 3 knife-edge Deygout diffraction method, the result may then show up two new attenuations peaks in addition to the main peak. The various peaks are identified by red lines. The attenuation generated by all the peaks is displayed above the main peak. Profile With ITU 526-5, Okumura-Hata or Cost-Hata Model

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-96

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

When you use the ITU 526-5, Okumura-Hata or Cost-Hata models, Fresnel ellipsoids (blue) will appear on the profile and possible diffraction peaks will be represented by a red line. The attenuation generated by these peaks will be displayed above the main peak. Profile With WLL Model When you use the WLL model, clutters will also appear on the profile in addition to DTM. As for the previous models, the Fresnel ellipsoids (in blue) and possible diffraction peaks due to the DTM and/or clutters symbolized by red lines with attenuation calculated for all these peaks are displayed above the main peak. Profile With the Longley-Rice and Vienna 93 Models Only the first Fresnel ellipsoid and the terrain profile appear for these two models. Profile With the Standard Propagation Model Peaks of diffraction are displayed regarding to the selected method (Deygout, Epstein-Peterson, Deygout with correction and Millington). Both the terrain profile and the clutter (and its height, if defined) appear using this model. A report containing information on transmitter-receiver profile can be displayed.

Note: By right-clicking in the window, it is possible to consider or not indoor coverage by checking/unchecking the related box. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. Considering a reception pixel of a specific clutter class, this loss is added to the total path loss regarding to the defined value (in dB). Shadowing can be taken into account and a cell edge coverage probability can be set for any point analysis. The shadowing margin applied to the path loss (if shadowing is considered) is evaluated from the model standard deviation and the cell edge coverage probability. From the window shortcut menu, it is also possible to either print it or to copy it in order to paste it in an external application.

III. Displaying Predicted Signal Levels at a Point

With the point analysis tool, the U-Net is able to display the signal from active transmitters in a network at the point defined by the receiver on the map by using the propagation model as defined before (with priority order respect). To make active the reception window, perform the following steps:

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-97

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

1)

From the menu bar, check the Point analysis command in the View menu. The Point analysis window opens in the lower right corner of your current environment.

2) 3) 4)

Click the Reception tab. Click the button from the toolbar.

Move over the current map to the places where you want to make your analysis.

The value of the different signal levels coming from different transmitters is reported in the Reception window in bar form, from top to bottom from the highest predicted signal level to the lowest one. Displayed bars have the same colors as defined for each transmitter.

Note: Displaying the predicted signal level at a point is possible only if path loss matrices have been already determined. To do this, you must have previously executed any coverage prediction or simulations (CDMA/CDMA2000, UMTS) before using the point analysis tool. You can choose the item level at which the power(s) of each transmitter are defined (TRX type or Carrier). IN GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, it is possible to select the HCS layer on which you want to study signal levels. For UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 studies, that is the pilot power which is displayed in this window whereas it is the Ec/Io which is given in the AS analysis window. By right-clicking in the window and choosing Properties, you open the property dialog of this window. In this dialog, it is possible to consider or not indoor coverage by checking/unchecking the related box. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. Considering a reception pixel of a specific clutter class, this loss is added to the total path loss regarding to the defined value (in dB). Shadowing can be taken into account and a cell edge coverage probability can be set for any point analysis. The shadowing margin applied to the path loss (if shadowing is considered) is evaluated from the model standard deviation and the cell edge coverage probability. From the window shortcut menu, it is also possible to either print it or to copy it in order to paste it in an external application.

IV. Listing all Signal and C/I Levels at a Point

In addition to the studies with the point analysis of the profile from a transmitter, predicted signals from surrounding transmitters, and, potentially interferences in case

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-98

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

of GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, the U-Net provides an additional tab in the point analysis window allowing you to display, in the same window, general information at the receiver. So, the U-Net provides in the Results tab of the Point analysis window: General information on the receiver: its coordinates (stated in the Display coordinate system) and the clutter class which it is located on. The signal level received from each transmitter containing the receiver in its calculation area, (Transmitters are sorted in a descending signal level order). C/I levels due to surrounding transmitters, first both in co-channel and adjacent cases, then in adjacent channel case only (studying always the most interfered TRX) in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects.

Note: Displaying interference levels at a point is possible only if path loss matrices have been already determined. To do this, you must have previously executed any coverage prediction or simulations (CDMA/CDMA2000, UMTS) before using the point analysis tool. Interferences are possible only if some channels have been allocated to TRXs. You can choose the item level at which the power(s) of each transmitter are defined (TRX type or Carrier). In GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, it is possible to select the HCS layer on which you want to study signal levels. For UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000 studies, that is the pilot power which is displayed in this window whereas it is the Ec/Io which is given in the AS analysis window. By right-clicking in the window and choosing Properties, you open the property dialog of this window. In this dialog, it is possible to consider or not indoor coverage by checking/unchecking the related box. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. Considering a reception pixel of a specific clutter class, this loss is added to the total path loss regarding to the defined value (in dB). Shadowing can be taken into account and a cell edge coverage probability can be set for any point analysis. The shadowing margin applied to the path loss (if shadowing is considered) is evaluated from the model standard deviation and the cell edge coverage probability. From the window shortcut menu, it is also possible to either print it or to copy it in order to paste it in an external application.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-99

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

5.7.2 Managing Point Analysis

I. Selecting a Transmitter in Point Analysis
When studying reception profile and interferences using the point analysis tool, it is possible to display results at an identical point for several transmitters. To do so, when using the point analysis icon over the map as a moving receiver,

click the map at the location you want to study different transmitters. Then, the receiver is fixed on the map. In the Point analysis window (Profile or Interference tab), select the transmitter to study then. Results are automatically displayed in the Point analysis window.

II. Selecting the Power Definition Item in Point Analysis

Depending on the considered technology, power can be defined with different values within the same transmitters. The point analysis window allows you to select the level at which several powers can be defined for the same transmitter. Hence, you can select: In GSM/GPRS/EDGE, the TRX type (BCCH, TCH or TCH_INNER) over which to study the profile. Choosing the (All) option takes the TRX type with the highest signal level. In UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000, the carrier, assuming that several cells can be assigned to a transmitter, each cell characterizing a carrier on a transmitter. Choosing the (All) option takes the carrier where the related cell has the highest signal level. This feature is available both when working in the Profile, Reception, Interference, Results and AS Analysis tabs in UMTS/CDMA. Nevertheless, concerning the last one, the (all) option (for cells) works regarding the carrier selection mode as defined in the site equipment (UMTS, CDMA/CDMA2000).

III. Taking into Account Shadowing in a Point Analysis

The U-Net allows the user to display the properties of a probe receiver used in a point analysis window. Depending on the tab in use (Reception profile, Predicted signal, Interference analysis, Results, and AS Analysis tabs in UMTS/CDMA, it is possible to display different pieces of information. Shadowing can be taken into account and the cell edge coverage probability can be set at the receiver level. If considered, the U-Net calculates shadowing margins (Using model standard deviation defined per clutter class or the default one) to be applied to computed path loss (made by the model). In any tab window of the point analysis window, to take into account shadowing, perform the following steps:
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-100

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)

Right-click in the current Point analysis window. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Select the Shadowing taken into account option. Set the value of the cell edge coverage probability. The related shadowing margin value is automatically displayed. Click OK.

Note: When the cell edge coverage probability is greater than 50%, shadowing margin values are different from zero. In the Profile and Reception tabs, the shadowing margin applied to the path loss (if shadowing is considered) is evaluated from the model standard deviation and the cell edge coverage probability. In GSM/GPRS/EGPRS projects, when calculating C/I, the U-Net applies shadowing margins (if considered) to the C values only. The shadowing margin depends on the entered cell edge coverage probability and the C/I standard deviation on the pixel. In UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000 projects, the cell edge coverage probability helps in the determination of the Eb/Nt UL and Ec/Io DL macro-diversity gains (taking into account the Eb/Nt and Ec/Io standard deviations defined per clutter class). The shadowing margin applied to Ec/Io (or Eb/Nt) (if shadowing is considered) is evaluated from the Ec/Io (or Eb/Nt) standard deviation and the cell edge coverage probability. Finally, if shadowing is considered, the U-Net takes into account the computed macro-diversity gains. Else, it considers in case of uplink the default value user-defined in the transmitters global parameters.

IV. Displaying Signal Levels or Losses in Point Analysis

The U-Net allows the user to display the properties of a probe receiver used in a point analysis window. Depending on the tab in use (reception profile, predicted signal, interference analysis, Results, and AS Analysis tabs in UMTS/CDMA, it is possible to display different pieces of information. Hence, you can choose to display results at a given point in term of path loss, total losses or signal level in the Profile tab of the point analysis window. This can also be made as a coverage condition. In the Profile tab window, to access the result type box, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Right-click in the current Point analysis window. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-101

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

3) 4) 5)

Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Choose to display the signal level, path loss or total losses in the Result type scrolling box. Click OK.

The available study criteria are detailed, as listed in Table 5-45. Table 5-45 Criteria Study criteria Signal level ( Prec ) Path loss ( L path ) Total losses (Total-Losses) Formulas
Prec = EIRP Lpath MShadowing + G ant Rx LRx Lpath = Lmodel + Lant Tx Total Losses = Lpath + M Shadowing + LTx + LRx Gant Tx + Gant Rx

)
) (

Note: In case of coverage studies, it is possible to calculate the signal level at the receiver in dBm, dBV or dBV/m.

V. Displaying Link Budget at a Receiver

The U-Net allows the user to display the link budget at a receiver along a path profile. The link budget is made of powers, gains and losses composing the resulting signal level. To display the link budget box at any point, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) From the menu bar, check the Point analysis command in the View menu. Click the Profile tab. Right-click in the current Point analysis window. Choose the Link budget... option from the shortcut menu.

VI. Using a Site as a Target for Point Analysis

The U-Net provides a feature in order to drop the receiver used for point analysis on the exact location of an existing site, using any tab (reception profile, predicted signal, interference analysis, Results, or AS Analysis tabs in UMTS/CDMA of the Point analysis window. To put the point analysis tool on an existing site, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Make active the point analysis. Right-click the receiver to open the associated shortcut menu.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-102

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

3) 4) 5)

Select the Target site command from the open menu. In the Target site dialog, choose one existing site from the scrolling list. Click OK.

VII. Displaying SPM Parameters over a Profile Analysis

When using standard propagation model, you may display a report containing information on transmitter-receiver profile. To get it, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Right-click the profile part of the current window in order to open the associated shortcut menu. Choose the Model details command from the displayed menu.

In this report, the U-Net gives the number of points taken into account along the transmitter-receiver path and details for every point: The distance between the point and the transmitter (Dist) in m. The ground height (Alt) in m. The ground height with earth curvature consideration (Gr H) in m. The total height (Tot H) in m: Tot H = Gr H + clutter height.

Note: At the transmitter (first point in the list) or at the receiver (last point in the list), we respectively have: Tot H = Gr H + Clutter height + HTx and Tot H = Gr H + Clutter height + HRx, where, HTx and HRx are respectively transmitter and receiver antenna heights above the ground (m).

The clutter class. The filtered total height (Flt H) in m. The U-Net determines this parameter only when the Enhanced slope at receiver method is selected. Then, it recapitulates the effective transmitter antenna height (Tx effective height), K1 and K2 parameters used in calculations (Far or Near, LOS or NLOS), the diffraction loss, the antenna loss, the clutter loss and the correction for low Tx effective height. In addition, the U-Net informs you that the free space loss is considered when the loss calculated by the model is lower.

VIII. Exporting a Point Analysis Study

Whatever the point analysis on which you are working (reception profile, predicted signal level, interference analysis, and AS Analysis - UMTS/CDMA - tabs) is, the U-Net allows the user to export a result as displayed in the Point analysis window as in image in any application.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-103

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

To do so, perform the following steps: 1) From the menu bar, check the Point analysis command in the View menu. The point analysis window opens in the lower right corner of your current environment. 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Choose the tab associated with your current study. Make your results displayed. Right-click in the Point analysis window. Choose the Copy option from the shortcut menu. Switch to another application supporting any format image. Paste the current content of your clipboard: Either by using the Ctrl+V shortcut. Or by choosing the Paste command from the Edit menu.

IX. Printing a Point Analysis Study

Whatever the point analysis on which you are working (Reception profile, Predicted signal level, Interference analysis, and AS Analysis - UMTS/CDMA - tabs) is, The U-Net allows the user to print a result as displayed in the Point analysis window: To do so, perform the following steps: 1) From the menu bar, check the Point analysis command in the View menu. The point analysis window opens in the lower right corner of your current environment. 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Choose the tab associated with your current study. Make your results displayed. Right-click the Point analysis window. Choose the Print... option from the shortcut menu. The Print dialog window opens. Choose the appropriate printing parameters. Click OK.

5.8 Calculation Tools in the U-Net

This section describes the following: U-Net Features for Computing Distributing Calculations on Several PCs Improving Calculation Performances Displaying Calculation Events in a Log Window Exporting Calculation Events in a Log File

5.8.1 U-Net Features for Computing

The U-Net provides a multi-thread feature allowing you to spread some computations on several processors. Hence, the U-Net can use two processors of the local machine
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-104

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

for propagation computations, neighbor allocations (internal and Inter-technology neighbors), UMTS and CDMA/CDMA2000 simulations and coverage studies (standard or specific GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000), automatic scrambling code allocation and automatic PN Offset allocation. This feature is automatic. That means that, on a dual-processor pc, each processor works out one path loss matrix, one prediction study or one simulation. Therefore, calculation times are divided in two.

Note: In the case of very large networks, multiplying the number of processors can drive to memory limitations since the needed memory is multiplied by the number of threads. To limit the number of threads to be used, put the following lines in the U-Net.ini file located in the U-Net installation directory.
[RemoteCalculation] NumberOfThreads=1, 2, 3 or 4 (according to the number of processors to be used)

It is also possible to distribute path loss calculation using several Pcs on the same time.

5.8.2 Distributing Calculations on Several PCs

The U-Net provides you the possibility to share computations using two processors of a multi-processors PC. Moreover, another feature enables you to distribute path loss calculations on several workstations. The U-Net package provides a computing server application; it can be installed either on workstations or servers and used by the U-Net sessions installed on other stations. Once the computing server application is installed on a workstation, this one is considered as a potential calculation server for other workstations with computing server application. Therefore, a user can distribute calculations of path loss matrices on another workstation if the computing server application is installed on his workstation and the other one. This application (working only on path loss matrix computations) supports dual-processor configurations. Once the computing server application is installed on some computation servers, the distributed computation feature is possible for other computers of the network. To activate the distributed calculation on a local workstation, perform the following steps:

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-105

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

1) 2) 3)

From the menu bar, select the Distributed calculation... command in the Tools menu. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window. Check the Activate the distributed calculation option. Either, Type the name of calculation servers, which you want to distribute computations on (use semicolon as separator). The U-Net automatically saves the list of calculation servers to be used in a U-Net.ini file located in the U-Net installation directory. The file has the following syntax: [RemoteCalculation] Servers=Workstation_1;Workstation_2 If the list is empty, the U-Net considers that the Distributed calculation option is inactive. Then, computations are run on the local workstation. Or, when clicking the Detect button, the U-Net searches and displays all the potential calculation servers you can use. Or When clicking the All button, the U-Net displays the symbol * in the Use servers dialog. In this case, it will scan all the potential calculation servers when starting calculations. The U-Net will use all the found calculation servers.

4)

Click OK.

Note: If calculation servers entered in the list are not available (workstation is off), computations are run on the local workstation. The distributed calculations do not work in case of embedded geographic data and ISTAR format maps (*.ist). Several users can distribute their computations on the same calculation server. Path loss matrices are not simultaneously calculated but one at a time (and so on. 1st matrix from user1, 1st matrix from user2 and so on) A U-Net.ini file can be prepared by an administrator in order to specify the computing servers, and marked as read only. This calculation server(s) uses one U-Net license per pair of processors. Of course, each pair of processors of each client uses also a license. Floating license is not mandatory using the U-Net calculation server feature.

5.8.3 Improving Calculation Performances

It is possible to specify a cut-off value on the received signal level; this one is used by the U-Net to limit contribution of some interferers. Using this feature, some calculation performances may be improved:
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-106

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

All the calculations based on the C/I criterion study in GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA documents: the coverage predictions (coverage by C/I level, interfered zones or GPRS/EDGE studies), the interference tab of the point analysis window, the traffic analysis and interference histograms. All the calculations based on the total noise in UMTS/WCDMA and CDMA/CDMA2000 documents: the UMTS (CDMA) specific coverage predictions, the AS analysis tab of the point analysis window, power control simulations and neighbor automatic allocation. Table 5-46 lists two ways of setting the cut-off value. Table 5-46 Setting the cut-off value Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 1) 2) 3) 4) Step Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Predictions folder to open the shortcut menu. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the Predictions tab from the open window. In the Calculation limitation part of the dialog, enter the cut-off value. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Double-click the Predictions folder. Click the Predictions tab from the open window. In the Calculation limitation part of the dialog, enter the cut-off value.

Method 1

Method 2

This value is used as a filter criterion on interferers. Therefore, the U-Net will discard all the interferers, which the signal level is lower than this value.

5.8.4 Displaying Calculation Events in a Log Window

An event viewer window is available in the U-Net. To make it open, use the View menu. This window consists of two tabs, the Events and Tasks tabs.

I. Events Tab
The U-Net lists some events and provides for each of them, the type, the hour the event occurred and a description. Events detailed in the Events tab concern PlaNET imports and calculations (path loss matrices and coverage studies). You may encounter three types of events, displayed with a specific symbol: Errors occurred during PlaNET import or calculations: The U-Net does not stop the import or calculation process. It automatically opens the Events tab to warn you. Warnings about minor problems happened during calculations. Be careful, the U-Net does not open the Events tab to inform you.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-107

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 5 Managing Computations in the U-Net

Information on time a calculation or PlaNET import process is started and ended. Some features in order to manage events are available. To access them, you can right-click the window in order to open the related shortcut menu. Then you will be able to: Delete the selected event(s) (Clear command). Delete all the events (Clear all command). Copy the event description in the clipboard (Copy command). Display the entire event description (Properties command).

II. Tasks Tab

The Tasks tab enables you to visualize progress of path loss matrix, prediction study, UMTS, CDMA/CDMA2000 simulation calculations and neighbor allocation. As calculation progress is managed in the Tasks tab, it is possible to work with the U-Net while calculations start. The Tasks tab is automatically open as soon as calculations are started. To interrupt calculations, click the button, available in the Tasks tab.

Note: Messages listed in the events tab can be saved in a log file. The Log window is automatically magnetized within the other set of the U-Net windows. To break this magnetism, and freely move this window, use the CTRL key when dragging it.

5.8.5 Exporting Calculation Events in a Log File

The Event viewer window contains two tabs: Events and Tasks. The events tab displays details about processes and potential errors, information and warnings. Messages listed in this tab can be saved in a .log file. To do that, add an option when starting the U-Net from a command line, with the syntax above: C:\Program Files\Huawei GENEX\U-Net 1.0\ U-Net.exe -log C:\....\events.log

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-108

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

6.1 Overview
Global System for Mobile communications (GSM) and Digital Communications System (DCS) are radio technologies using Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) principles, each on a different frequency band. In TDMA technologies, users are spread over frequency bands made of physical channels. Each of these physical channels is divided into a certain number of logical channels called timeslots. The norm in standard TDMA is 8 timeslots per channel. This means that a channel can carry simultaneously 8 speaking users. Even if users on the same physical channel do not interferer each other (spread on time), every data carried on a physical channel can be potentially interfered by other communications occurring on a co-channel or on an adjacent channel. The goal of planning such a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network is to provide a sufficient coverage to cover a maximum area, and to assign to transmitters enough channels to meet the traffic demand by limiting interferences in the network. Global Packet Radio Service (GPRS) and Enhanced Data-rates for GSM - or Global Evolution (EDGE) are 2.5th numeric telephony norms working around the 900 MHz1800 MHz band, using the also Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) technology as classical GSM norm. Contrary to GSM working in circuit switched mode, EDGE and GPRS use timeslot working on packet switched mode, but can be mixed with GSM timeslots on transmitters. GSM and GPRS/EDGE projects share the same template. A station is able to allow both GSM and GPRS services depending on its properties. This is set at the subcell level with timeslot either dedicated to circuit, packet, or composite services. Each transmitter dealing with GPRS/EDGE must have a piece of GPRS/EDGE equipment. The U-Net allows the user to either easily create or modify this equipment. The equipment is linked with so-called coding schemes functions of C or C/I thresholds. GPRS technology provides four coding schemes whereas EDGE can offer nine. With the U-Net, you can set these coding schemes and display their effects in graphs. Since GPRS/EDGE technology is based on GSM norm, it is possible to define transmitters as GPRS/EDGE stations in the same network. Compared to GSM norm, GPRS/EDGE supports larger amounts of data services. Moreover, this technology permits to carry more data per timeslot. Depending on the
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-1

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

radio data and the number of timeslots dedicated to packet service transmissions for the transmitters part of the current network, the U-Net can determine the average capacity per timeslot per transmitter. Geographic data is easily manageable as in other projects. You may either create or import any of these data. Sites, antennas, station templates, transmitters, measurements, and propagation models work in the same way for GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects as for other technology types. Nevertheless, the complexity of such a modeling leads to the introduction of several specific radio data for GSM/GPRS/EDGE to optimize the management of radio resources. As many objects in the U-Net, these data is easy to manage and for using generic dialogs. Multi-service traffic can be fully managed in the U-Net through the settings of GSM/GPRS/EDGE parameters (services, mobility types, terminals, user profiles, environments), multi-service cartography (maps per environment, per user profile, live traffic, user density). Mixing the network and all these multi-service data, traffic is spread using the traffic capture feature. Using the feature of multi-service traffic, and a dimensioning model, it is possible to determine the requested number of TRXs to absorb the traffic with regard to quality requirements. The resource allocation can be made either manually or by using Automatic Frequency Planning (AFP). Even if all common studies are available (coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level, overlapping) with some specific conditions due to GSM/GPRS/EDGE, The U-Net provides also some other specific coverage studies dealing with interferences: Interfered zones Coverage by C/I level Specific GPRS/EDGE coverage Coding schemes Throughput per timeslot The resulting network can be analyzed thanks to the availability of different tools dealing with frequency plan check, channel location search and KPI calculation. The What's this shortcut tool allows you to understand the specific

GSM/GPRS/EDGE fields and features available in the dialog boxes.

6.2 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Projects Protocol

Table 6-1 lists a classical GSM/GPRS/EDGE project protocol within the U-Net.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-2

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Table 6-1 Projects protocol Project Description Choice of a project template Definition Project initialization Definition of projection length, and display and coordinate systems reception transmission units Clutter classes Clutter heights Definition of geographic data through the import or the creation of maps DTM Vector data Population data Generic data Common coverage studies (by transmitter, by signal level, HCS layers, and so on) Determination of domains and groups (frequencies, BSICs, HSNs) Setup of cell types Network design: setting radio data Definition and tuning of transmitters and subcells Coding scheme definitions Setup of GPRS/EDGE equipment Services Mobility types Definitions of multi-service traffic parameters Terminals User profiles Environments Traffic maps per environment Definition of the traffic through the import or the creation of maps Traffic maps per user profile Live traffic maps User density traffic maps Capture of the traffic to analyze the demand None. None.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-3

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Project

Description Dimensioning model settings Required number of TRXs per transmitter

Dimensioning of the network

to absorb the input traffic Determination of the traffic load per transmitter

Definition of the neighbors manually or automatically

None. Manual allocation of frequencies Manual allocation of BCCH

Resource manual allocation

Manual allocation of BSICs GSM/GPRS/EDGE Automatic Frequency Planning Frequency plan checking

Checking of the network allocations

Channel search tool KPI calculation Interference areas

GSM/GPRS/EDGE oriented prediction studies

Coverage by C/I level Coverage by coding schemes Coverage by rates per timeslot

6.3 Defining GSM/GPRS/EDGE Resources

In the U-Net, radio network modeling needs the management of specific radio resource data in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects: Frequencies HSNs (Hopping Sequence Number) BSICs (NCC-BCC pairs) As many other objects in the U-Net, these parameters are integrated to the tool to make their management and their use easy. These parameters are used as inputs for cell types, subcells and TRXs in stations. The resources are organized in domains, each domain being potentially made of several groups. During the resource allocation, only items belonging to the defined domains are allowed to be chosen.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-4

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: For frequencies, the top layer is the frequency band. A frequency domain (made of several groups) is a part of a frequency band.

6.3.1 Frequencies
I. Overview
In the U-Net, for a complete exploitation of frequencies, it is possible to define frequency domains and groups based on standard frequency bands. The definitions of frequency domains and groups are listed below: A domain is a set of groups. A frequency domain belongs to a frequency band; it is a subset of the frequency band. A group is a set of channels. A frequency group belongs to one or several frequency domains; it is a subset of frequency domains. Both manual and automatic frequency planning are based on frequency domains assigned to the TRX types in cell types. The creation and the management of frequency domains and groups like for many other objects in the U-Net are always easy and clear.

II. Managing Frequency Bands

Frequency bands represent the reference frequency set that frequency groups and domains (which include specific rules, steps and exclusions) refer to. Frequency bands can be seen as a fixed item, whereas groups and domains are the frequency subsets that can be managed to check the available frequency lists. Frequency band properties can be accessed in two ways, either from a frequency band table, or from a frequency band dialog. To open the frequency band dialog, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Properties option from the open menu. Click the Frequencies tab. Use what's this help to get description about available fields in the open window. Select the frequency band you want to manage, then click the modify button to open the associated dialog. Or double-click the frequency band you want to manage. 7) 8) Click the General tab. Define the frequency band parameters.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-5

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

9)

Click OK to validate your choice.

10) Click OK to close the transmitters properties dialog box.

Note: The Frequency domains tab lists the domains related to the current frequency band. Addition, deletion of frequency bands are made using respectively the and The table (See below). buttons. button helps you to manage the content of the frequency band

To open the frequency band table, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Network settings: Frequency bands... command from the open menu. Define the parameters of each frequency band.

Note: The dialog of each frequency band (see above) is reachable by either double-clicking the related record in the table, or by click record is selected. The helps you to manage the content of the frequency band table. once a

An Other Properties tab is available when some user defined fields have been added to the Frequency band table.

III. Managing Frequency Domains and Groups

For an easier resource management, frequency domain and group tables are available. Frequency domains are linked to types of TRXs. When defining a cell type, you must assign a frequency domain to each TRX type. To define domains and groups of frequencies, perform the following steps: 1) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-6

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)

Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Network settings: Domains: Frequencies... command from the open menu. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. In the Domains dialog, enter a domain per line and specify the related frequency band. To validate a domain creation, select another line. Select a domain in the table and click the Properties... button, or select the line relating to a domain and double-click it. In the domain properties dialog, specify the name of group(s) that you want to associate to this domain and define for each of them: The lowest available frequency (minimum channel number). The highest available frequency (maximum channel number). The value interval between the frequencies (step between channels). Frequency (or frequencies) that you do not want to use (excluded channel numbers). You can paste a list of channels; separator must be a coma, a semi-colon, or a blank character. It is also possible to exclude a set of frequencies by using this syntax number 1number 2. The U-Net will exclude all the frequencies from number 1 to number 2. For example, 520525 corresponds to 520 521 522 523 524 525. Additional frequency (frequencies) you want to consider during allocation (Extra channel numbers). You can paste a list of channels. Separator must be a coma, a semi-colon, or a blank character. It is also possible to add a set of frequencies by using this syntax number 1number 2. The U-Net will add all the frequencies from number 1 to number 2. For example, 520525 corresponds to 520 521 522 523 524 525.

You can also define the domain-group pairs in the Group of frequencies window. To do so, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) After defining all the domains, close the Domains dialog. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Network settings: Groups: Frequencies... command from the open menu. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. In the Group of frequencies window, select a domain and associate one or several groups of frequencies to each of them. Define the groups as explained above. The defined domains can be now assigned to TRX types of each cell type to be used as constraints in the automatic allocation of frequencies.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-7

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

6.3.2 HSNs
I. Overview
In the U-Net, modeling of base frequency hopping and synthesized frequency hopping is supported. So, some parameters such as Mobile Allocation List (MAL), Hopping Sequence Number (HSN), and Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO) are managed. HSN parameter is used to describe frequency hopping sequence. This is one of four input parameters for GSM hopping sequence generator algorithm. HSN may take 64 different values that are numbered from 0 to 63. Frequency sequences are pseudo-random, except for the special case of HSN = 0, where frequencies are used one after the other (cyclic hopping). In the U-Net, for a complete exploitation of HSNs, it is possible to define HSN domains and groups. A domain is a set of groups. It consists of one or several groups. A group is a set of HSNs. A HSN group belongs to one or several HSN domains. It is a subset of HSN domains. Manual and automatic HSN planning is based on the HSN domains assigned to TRX types in cell types. Creation and management of HSN domains and groups like for many other objects in the U-Net always stay easy and clear.

II. Managing HSN Domains and Groups

For an easier resource management, HSN domain and group tables are available. HSN domains are linked to types of TRXs. When defining a cell type, you must assign a HSN domain to each TRX type. To define domains and groups of HSNs, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose Network settings > Domains > HSNs... from the open menu. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. In the Domains dialog, you can enter a domain per line. To validate a domain creation, select another line. Select a domain in the table and click the Properties... button, or select the line relating to a domain and double-click it. In the domain properties dialog, specify the name of group(s) included in this domain and define for each of them: The lowest available HSN (Min). The highest available HSN (Max). The value interval between the HSNs (Step).
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-8

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

HSN(s) you do not want to use (Excluded). You can paste a list of HSNs; separator must be either a coma, or a semi-colon, or a blank character. It is also possible to exclude a set of HSNs by using this syntax number1-number2; The U-Net will exclude all the HSNs from number1 to number2 (for example 5-10 corresponds to 5 6 7 8 9 10). Additional HSN(s) you want to consider during allocation (Extra). You can paste a list of HSNs. Separator must be a coma, or a semi-colon, or a blank character. It is also possible to add a set of HSNs by using this syntax number 1number 2. The U-Net adds all the HSNs from number 1 to number 2. For example, 510 corresponds to 5 6 7 8 9 10).

Note: A default domain called ALL HSNs exists. It contains 64 HSNs.

You can also define the domain-group pairs in the Group of HSNs window. To define the domain-group pairs, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) After defining all the domains, close the Domains dialog. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Network settings > Groups > HSNs... from the open menu. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. In the Group of HSNs window, select a domain and associate one or several groups of HSNs to each of them. Define the groups as explained above.

The defined domains can be now assigned to TRX types of each cell type in order then to be used as constraints in the automatic allocation of HSNs.

6.3.3 BSICs
In GSM/GPRS/EDGE, the BSIC (Base Station Identity Code) color code is associated with a BCCH in order for a mobile to distinguish the base station to which both are assigned from the other surrounding ones. The BSIC is composed of a NCC (Network Color Code) and BCC (BTS Color Code). NCC and BCC are integers between 0 and 7. Hence, the BSIC is a result of a (NCC-BCC) couple and can be noted using two types of notation: octal or decimal. The U-Net supports both syntaxes and will make its allocation depending on the chosen format.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-9

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

As available BSICs depend on the country and on the area; it is sometimes necessary to distinguish borders from other zones. To model this, domain and group tables have been created. A domain is a set of groups. A group is a set of BSICs. A BSIC group belongs to one or several BSIC domains. Therefore, a BSIC domain can contain more or less than 8 BSICs. Manual or automatic BSIC planning is based on the BSIC domain assigned to transmitter. Creation and management of BSIC domains and groups like for many other objects in the U-Net always stay easy and clear.

I. Defining BSIC Format

The BSIC color code is the result of two digits: NCC (Network Color Code) and BCC (BTS Color Code). NCC and BCC are integers between 0 and 7. 64 BSICs are available. They are distributed in 8 groups (one group per possible NCC) of 8 BSICs. For each pair, it is possible to define a BSIC number, following either the octal or the decimal notation, as listed in Table 6-2. Table 6-2 BSIC Format Format Description By considering NCC (Network Color Code [0...7]) and BCC Decimal format (Base station Color Code [0...7]), it is possible to build a BSIC number with the rule: NCCx8 + BCC. For example, the (3-2) pair leads to a BSIC value of 26. The octal rule is identical to the decimal rule, except the fact that Octal format 8 is replaced by 10 (NCCx10 + BCC). For the case above, the (3-2) pair drives to a value of 32 in octal format.

To choose the BSIC format globally for a project, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the BSIC format tab. Select either the Octal or Decimal option in the Display format scrolling box Click OK or Apply.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-10

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: When defined, the selected BSIC format will be taken into account in the BSIC manual allocation, the AFP and Audit tool. That is to say, only values consistent when the selected choice is available in the BSIC scrolling box TRX tab of transmitter property dialog. Make sure that the definition of the BSIC domain is consistent with the chosen BSIC notation. It is still possible to enter the BSIC in NCC-BCC format in the TRX tab of the transmitter dialog. Depending on the BSIC format, the U-Net translates the NCC-BCC pair in BSIC number. The BSIC format has to be defined correctly prior to the test mobile data imports.

II. Managing BSIC Domains and Groups

For an easier resource management, BSIC domain and group tables are available. You must assign a BSIC domain to each transmitter. To define domains and groups of BSICs, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose Network settings > Domains > BSICs... from the open menu. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. In the Domains dialog, you can enter a domain per line. To validate a domain creation, select another line. Select a domain in the table and click the Properties... button. Or select the row relating to a domain and double-click it. In the domain properties dialog, specify the name of group(s) that you want to associate to this domain and define for each of them: The lowest available BSIC (minimum). The highest available BSIC (maximum). The value interval between the BSICs (step). The BSIC(s) you do not want to use (excluded). You can paste a list of BSICs; separator must be either a coma, or a semi-colon, or a blank character. It is also possible to exclude a set of BSICs by using this syntax number 1number 2. The U-Net excludes all the BSICs from number 1 to number 2. For example, 05 corresponds to 0 1 2 3 4 5). Additional BSIC (s) you want to consider during allocation (extra). You can paste a list of BSICs. Separator must be a coma, or a semi-colon, or a blank character. It is also possible to add a set of BSICs by using this syntax number 1number 2.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-11

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

The U-Net adds all the BSICs from number 1 to number 2. For example, 05 corresponds to 0 1 2 3 4 5.

Note: A default domain called ALL BSICs exists. It contains the 64 BSICs in 8 groups (NCC = 0, ... , 7). Domains must be defined according to the selected BSIC format.

You can also define the domain-group pairs in the Group of BSICs window. To define the domain-group pairs in the Group of BSICs window, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) After defining all the domains, close the Domains dialog. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Network settings > Groups > BSICs... command from the open menu. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. In the Group of BSICs window, select a domain and associate one or several groups of BSICs to each of them. Define the groups as explained above.

The defined domains can be now assigned to each transmitter in order then to be used as constraints in the automatic allocation of BSICs.

6.4 Managing GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio Data

In the U-Net, radio network modeling and radio resource management has lead to the introduction of specific radio data for GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects: HCS layers Timeslot configurations TRX types and Cell types Subcells TRX equipment Codec equipment GPRS/EDGE Equipment As many other objects in the U-Net, these parameters have been integrated to the tool with a will to make their management and their use easy. By their use, it is possible to define subcells and TRXs of stations.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-12

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Using this advanced description level, concentric cells are supported. In addition, modeling of several hopping modes is supported: no hopping, Base Band Hopping and Synthesized Frequency Hopping. Some parameters such as Mobile Allocation List (MAL), Hopping Sequence Number (HSN), and Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO) are managed.

6.4.1 HCS Layers

In the U-Net, It is possible to model hierarchical networks. Indeed, you may define several types of layers, a given priority and a threshold speed on each of them, and then, assign one of them to transmitters. Hierarchical cells (including priority) are taken into account in any prediction study (for example coverage by transmitter, interfered zones and coverage by C/I levels) based on search for best server for coverage conditions. The threshold speed is used for the traffic distribution as a filter criterion on the mobility. Only mobiles with mobility lower than the maximum speed will be considered eligible to reside on the layer.

I. Managing HCS Layers

In the U-Net, HCS layers are listed in a table form. Hence, their management (creation, deletion or modification) is identical to standard management of data in tables. To manage HCS layers that will be available to assign to transmitters, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose Network settings > HCS Layers... from the open menu. Define and modify each HCS layer with its name, and its related priority, by editing cells. The priority of each HCS layer is taken into account in coverage predictions, when considering, on each pixel, the server which has the highest signal level on the highest priority layer. If power received on any pixel is less than the minimum reception threshold defined for the HCS layer of a transmitter, that pixel is considered not covered by that transmitter. Considering the HCS layer minimum reception threshold implies that coverage predictions consist of the following two transmitter types: Those with received signal level at a point higher than the layer threshold Other transmitters The first type of transmitters is ranked with respect to their respective HCS layer priorities. The rest of the transmitters are ranked subsequently but with respect to their received signal levels at the pixel.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-13

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

You can also assign a threshold speed to each HCS layer. This speed threshold is used to distribute traffic over different network layers using the mobility criterion. Mobiles with a mobility of less than the threshold speed for a layer can reside on that layer.

Note: Priority is organized in ascending order, that is, 1 has higher priority than 0 (lowest priority).

II. Assigning HCS Layers to Transmitters

Table 6-3 lists two ways of assigning an existing HCS layer to a transmitter. Table 6-3 Assigning a HCS layer among existing ones to a transmitter Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) 5) 6) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking on the front of it. Right-click the transmitter which you want to assign a HCS layer to. Method 1 Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the General tab. Choose the HCS layer to assign to the current transmitter in the associated menu. Click OK or Apply. Select on the map the transmitter which you want to assign a HCS layer to by clicking the appropriate Tx symbol (arrow). Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the General tab. Choose the HCS layer to assign to the current transmitter in the associated menu. Click OK or Apply. button in

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-14

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: Layer priority is automatically assigned to transmitter. This parameter maybe taken into account in GSM/GPRS/EDGE coverage conditions in prediction studies. The threshold speed is used for the traffic distribution as a filter criterion on the mobility. Only mobiles with mobility lower than the maximum speed will be considered eligible to reside on the layer. Assigning HCS layers to transmitters is optional.

6.4.2 Timeslot Configurations

It is possible to define timeslot configurations that can be used in allocating different timeslot types to TRXs. A timeslot configuration defines the distribution method for circuit, packet, and shared timeslots on a TRX. Timeslot configurations influence the network dimensioning results (evaluation of the number of TRXs required to fulfill the traffic demand) and calculation of Key Performance Indicators (KPIs).

Note: Shared timeslots are used for: Circuit-switched calls Packet-switched calls Circuit-switched timeslots for circuit-switched/GSM calls Packet-switched timeslots in case of packet-switched/EGPRS calls

I. Managing Timeslot Configurations

To create and describe a timeslot configuration, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Right-click the Transmitters folder. In the shortcut menu, choose Network settings and Timeslot configurations command. In the List of timeslot configurations dialog, type the name of a new configuration in the table. In the table, select the row including the configuration and then, either click Properties or double-click. In the Configuration property dialog, indicate the distribution of circuit, packet and shared timeslots for each TRX. A TRX per row is described in the table.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-15

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

6)

Enter the TRX number and specify the corresponding number of circuit, packet and shared timeslots. When there is not enough number of TRXs, the U-Net uses the timeslot distribution assigned to the last TRX.

7) 8)

Click OK to validate the timeslot configuration description. Click Close.

Note: Three default timeslot configurations (one per TRX type: BCCH, TCH and TCH_INNER) are available. The fields defined at the subcell level "Number of packet (circuit or shared) timeslots" are used when no timeslot configuration is defined.

6.4.3 Cell Types

In the U-Net, a cell type describes the types of TRXs that a cell can use and their parameters, which can be different. The following default cell types are available in the tool: The cell type GSM900_N_NORMAL (a non-concentric GSM900 normal cell) contains BCCH and TCH TRXs. The cell type DUALBAND_CC_MINI (a concentric dual band cell) contains BCCH, TCH, and TCH_INNER TRXs. Cell types are linked to station templates or transmitters. Indeed, when defining a station template or transmitter properties, you must specify the cell type which the station or transmitter refers to. Creation and management of cell types, like for many other objects in the U-Net always stays easy and clear.

I. TRX Types
By default, three types of TRXs are modeled in The U-Net: The BCCH TRX type: This TRX type is the BCCH carrier. The TCH TRX type: This is the default traffic carrier. The TCH_INNER TRX type: This TRX type is the inner traffic carrier. Note: You can define additional TRX types directly from the GSM_EGPRS.mdb document template.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-16

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

The cell type definition must include a TRX type, which is the BCCH carrier (BCCH TRX type), and a TRX type, which is the default traffic carrier (TCH TRX type). Only one TRX type carrying the broadcast and only one TRX type carrying the default TCH are supported. TRX types are the standard elements which compose cell types.

II. Managing Cell Types

Cell types are linked to station templates or transmitters. Indeed, when defining a station template or transmitter properties, you must specify the cell type which the station or transmitter refers to. Cell type properties can be accessed in two ways, either from a Cell type table, either from a Cell type dialog. Table 6-4 lists two ways of opening the cell type dialog. Table 6-4 Opening the cell type dialog Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) 5) 6) 1) 2) Method 2 3) 4) 5) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Network settings: Cell types... command from the open menu. Select the cell type you want to manage. Click the button to open the associated dialog.

Define the parameters of each cell type. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Network settings: Cell types... command from the open menu. Double-click the cell type you want to manage. Define the parameters of each cell type.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-17

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: The dialog of each cell type (see above) is reachable by either double-clicking the related record in the table, or by using the selected, The button helps you to manage the content of the cell type table. button once a record is

An Other Properties tab is available when some user defined fields have been added to the Cell type table.

III. Cell Type Parameters

In the cell type properties window, you can rename it, enter the types of TRXs (BCCH, TCH, and TCH_INNER) used by this cell type and specify for each of them: The assigned frequency domain Only channels belonging to this frequency domain will be allocated to TRXs during automatic or manual frequency planning. DL power offset This is a reduction of power relative to the transmitter power. It enables you to model power control of TCH TRXs and concentric cells (TCH_INNER TRXs that transmit a power lower than BCCH TRX and TCH TRXs). Reception threshold This is the reception condition for this TRX type. You can enter a specific reception condition for each TRX type. C/I Threshold This is a quality condition; you can enter specific quality requirements for each TRX type. It can be used as reference value in interference studies and in AFP. DTX support Here, you can specify if DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) technology is supported for this TRX type. Subcells supporting DTX may reduce their impact on interferences with a defined voice activity factor. Timeslot configuration name Name of the timeslot configuration describing the distribution of circuit, packet and shared timeslots on TRXs of a subcell Half-rate traffic ratio

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-18

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

It is the percentage of Half-Rate voice traffic in the subcell. This parameter is taken into account to calculate the required number of timeslots to satisfy the voice traffic demand. Target rate of traffic overflow This parameter is used during the traffic analysis to distribute the traffic between subcells and layers. For a given subcell, this parameter is the percentage of candidate traffic considered to overflow to another subcell with a lower priority. It impacts the traffic capture between inner and outer subcells, as well as between micro and macro layers. In other words, it is a kind of anticipation of the percentage of traffic rejected from higher priority subcells/layers to lower ones.

Note: If the traffic overflow target is set to a value lower than the Grade of Service, it implies that the traffic rejected (according to the dimensioning model, Erlang B or Erlang C) is considered lost and does not overflow to other subcells.

Hopping mode Here, you can specify if frequency hopping technology is supported for this TRX type. If frequency hopping is supported, choose either the Base Band Hopping mode (BBH), or the Synthesized Hopping mode (SFH). Else, select Non Hopping. Allocation strategy It refers to the allocation strategy used during manual or automatic frequency planning. Two allocation strategies are offered: - Free allocation: all the channels of the frequency domain can be assigned to TRXs. -Grouped allocation: Only channels belonging to a same group of the frequency domain can be chosen. Maximum MAL (Mobile Allocation List) length This is the maximum size of the MAL. In other words, it corresponds to the maximum number of channels allocated to TRXs of a subcell during automatic frequency planning in case SFH (Synthesized Frequency Hopping) or BBH (Base Band Hopping) is supported and allocation mode is free. HSN domain Only HSNs belonging to this HSN domain will be allocated to subcells during automatic or manual frequency planning. Allocation of HSN is performed in case of BBH or SFH. Freeze HSN

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-19

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Selecting this option enables you to keep the current HSN allocation of subcells related to this TRX type when starting a new AFP session. AFP weight This is a cost factor used to increase or decrease the importance of a TRX type during automatic frequency planning. The cost factor must be a positive real. The higher the AFP weight is, the higher the constraint on the TRX type is. % max interference This is the maximum percentage of interfered area or interfered traffic that The U-Net must not exceed during automatic frequency planning. Default TRX Equipment By selecting a TRX Equipment, the maximum number of coding schemes in GPRS (CS) and in EDGE (MCS) is imposed at the TRX type level. It is even possible to impose this at the TRX level. 8 PSK Power Backoff This is the average power reduction for E/GPRS transmitters due to 8PSK modulation in EDGE. This has an impact on the EDGE service zone (traffic analysis and EDGE predictions). When a cell type is assigned to a transmitter, its parameters are used to initialize the properties of the transmitter subcells. If you modify cell type parameters afterwards, the U-Net updates the subcell lists of existing transmitters based on this cell type by creating missing subcells and removing the subcells that are no longer defined in the cell type. For existing subcells and subcells whose parameters may have been individually set, the U-Net proposes either to keep the current existing parameters or to reset them from the cell type.

IV. Examples of Cell Types

Two examples of cell types provided by default in the U-Net are explained below: Normal Cell Type A normal cell type consists of two TRX types: BCCH TRX type TCH TRX type Table 6-5 lists parameters to be specified for any selected hopping mode.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-20

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Table 6-5 Hopping mode Characteristics Used in the U-Net Non hopping Frequency domain Automatic or manual frequency planning Maximum MAL (Mobile Allocation List) length Allocation mode Automatic frequency planning Automatic or manual frequency planning Min C/I Interference studies Automatic frequency planning % max interference Automatic frequency planning Default DL power offset Signal level studies = 0 for BCCH = 0 for TCH = 0 for BCCH = 0 for TCH Default hopping mode Interference studies Non Hopping Base Band Hopping Default reception threshold AFP weight Signal level studies Automatic frequency planning x x x x x x = 0 for BCCH = 0 for TCH Synthesize d Hopping x x x x x x x x x Not used x x x x x Hopping mode BBH SFH

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-21

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Characteristics

Used in the U-Net Non hopping

Hopping mode BBH SFH

HSN domain

Automatic frequency planning

Not used

Freeze HSN

Automatic frequency planning

DTX support (default)

Automatic frequency planning, Interference studies

Half-rate traffic ratio Target rate of traffic overflow Timeslot configuration

Traffic analysis Traffic analysis x x x

Dimensioning

Concentric Cell Type A concentric cell type consists of three TRX types: BCCH TRX type TCH TRX type TCH_INNER Table 6-6 lists parameters to be specified for any selected hopping mode. Table 6-6 Hopping mode Characteristics Used in the U-Net Non hopping Frequency domain Automatic or manual frequency planning x x x Hopping mode BBH SFH

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-22

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Characteristics

Used in the U-Net Non hopping

Hopping mode BBH SFH

Maximum MAL (Mobile Allocation List) length Allocation mode

Automatic frequency planning

Not used

Automatic or manual frequency planning

Min C/I

Interference studies, Automatic frequency planning

% max interference Default DL power offset

Automatic frequency planning Signal level studies

= 0 for BCCH => 0 for TCH <> 0 for TCH_IN NER

= 0 for BCCH => for TCH <> for TCH_I NNER 0 0

= 0 for BCCH => 0 for TCH <> 0 for TCH_IN NER

Default hopping mode

Interference studies

Non hopping

Base band hopping

Synthesized hopping

Default reception threshold AFP weight

Signal level studies

Automatic frequency planning

HSN domain

Automatic frequency planning

Not used

Freeze HSN

Automatic frequency planning

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-23

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Characteristics

Used in the U-Net Non hopping

Hopping mode BBH SFH

DTX support (default)

Automatic frequency planning Interference studies

Half-rate traffic ratio Target rate of traffic overflow Timeslot configuration

Traffic analysis

Traffic analysis

Dimensioning

V. Assigning Cell Types to Transmitters

A cell type consists in TRX types (BCCH, TCH or TCH inner). Assigning a cell type to a transmitter enables you to define its subcells (TRX type properties become subcell properties). A subcell corresponds to the transmitter-TRX type pair. Table 6-7 lists two ways of assigning a cell type to a transmitter. Table 6-7 Assigning a cell type to a transmitter Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking on the front of it. Right-click the transmitter you want to manage. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the TRXs tab of the current dialog. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window. Click the menu and choose a cell type in the list. Click OK to close the dialog. button in

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-24

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Method 1) 2) Method 2 3) 4) 5) 6)

Step Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by Clicking on the appropriate Tx symbol (arrow). Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the TRXs tab of the current dialog. Use what's this help to get description about the open dialog window. Click the menu and choose a cell type in the list. Click OK to close the dialog.

Note: If you modify the settings of a cell type already assigned to a transmitter: - The U-Net will update the subcell lists of the concerned transmitters according to the cell type assigned by creating missing subcells and removing the subcells that are no longer defined in the cell type. - For existing subcells and subcells whose parameters may have been individually set, the U-Net proposes either to keep the existing parameters or to reset them from the cell type. It is also possible to update the subcell lists for all or a group of transmitters through the Update from Cell Types command in the Subcells menu. Once selected, cell type property dialog can be open by clicking on the button. The U-Net indicates the main frequency band of the transmitter. This is the frequency band, which the frequency domain assigned to BCCH TRX type belongs to. The U-Net takes into account this frequency band in path loss matrix evaluation.

VI. Defining Extended Cells

An extended cell is one whose coverage is not restricted to the 35 km theoretical limit of normal GSM cells. This 35 km limit originates from the fact that any signal received beyond this limit has a shift of almost an entire timeslot T. Extended GSM cells enable the operator to counter this limit by defining cells that cover beyond 35 km by communicating over timeslot T 1. This implies that information sent on timeslot T 1 will reach beyond 35km at the start of timeslot T. Extended cells may cover from 70 km to 140 km. Table 6-8 lists two ways of defining an extended cell for a transmitter.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-25

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Table 6-8 Defining an extended cell for a transmitter Method 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 1 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) 5) 6) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking the button. Right-click the transmitter you want to manage. Choose the Properties option from the context menu. Click the TRXs tab of the current dialog. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog. Define minimum and maximum coverage range in the Extended cell section. Click OK. Select the transmitter you want to manage by clicking the relevant transmitter symbol (arrow) on the map. Choose the Properties option from the context menu. Click the TRXs tab of the current dialog. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog. Define minimum and maximum coverage range in the Extended cell section, Click OK.

6.4.4 Subcells
I. Managing Subcells in Transmitters
The subcells of transmitter and their settings are defined in this part. A subcell is a group of TRXs sharing the same radio characteristics, the same quality (C/I) requirements, and common settings. A subcell is defined by the transmitter-TRX type pair. Subcells of transmitter and their settings depend on the cell type selected for the transmitter. The cell type predefines the TRX type of each subcell since the properties of each TRX type initialize the ones of each subcell. The default values reported for subcells can be modified without changing reference for the cell type. On the other hand, The U-Net updates subcell characteristics when selecting another cell type. Except their TRX type (coming from the selected cell type), all subcell properties are editable and can be modified in the subcell part of any transmitter property.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-26

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Table 6-9 lists two ways of accessing the subcell table from the transmitter properties. Table 6-9 Accessing the subcell table from the transmitter properties Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) 2) Method 2 3) 4) 5) 6) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking on the front of it. Right-click the transmitter you want to manage. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the TRXs tab of the current dialog. Use what's this help to get description about the open dialog window. Define the subcell settings in the subcell part. Click OK. Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by Clicking on the appropriate Tx symbol (arrow). Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the TRXs tab of the current dialog. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window. Define the subcell settings in the subcell part. Click OK. button in

II. Displaying the Subcell List

Even if subcells are linked to transmitters, it is possible to display all existing subcells of a network in an editable form. To open the subcell general table, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) The Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Subcells: Open Table command from the open menu. Define the subcell settings. button helps you to manage the content of the subcell table.

III. Subcell Property Details

Whatever is the way to reach subcell properties (from transmitter properties or from the subcell table), for any of them, the U-Net details:
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-27

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Assigned frequency domain Only channels belonging to this frequency domain will be allocated to TRXs during automatic or manual frequency planning. Excluded Channels When defining frequency domains, you have to choose the range of channels, the step, exceptional and excluded channels. Excluded channels are channels that are in the defined range that you do not want to make allocatable. Excluded channels can be set first in the frequency domain definition. You can also define less constraining domains with less excluded channels, and define excluded channels at the subcell level. All subcells related to this domain must not have access to these excluded channels for the allocation.

Note: Channels must be separated by a coma, a semi-colon, or a blank character. It is possible to exclude a set of channels by using this syntax number 1number 2. The U-Net excludes all the channels from number 1 to number 2. For example, 520525 corresponds to 520 521 522 523 524 525. When defined, the excluded channels (per subcell) will be taken into account by the frequency manual allocation (that is only consistent values are available in the TRX channel scrolling box TRX tab of transmitter property dialog), the AFP and Audit tool. In non hopping mode or base band hopping, in free or group constrained strategy, excluded channels are not visible in their related domains. So, subcells are allocated with consistency within their defined domain. In synthesized frequency hopping, in free strategy, excluded channels are not visible any more in their related domains. In synthesized frequency hopping, in group constrained strategy, since the allocation is made per exact group, as soon as a group has a defined excluded channel, the complete group is excluded from the domain. The allocation (and what is visible in frequencies scrolling boxes) is then possible only over groups with initially no excluded channel. These 3 rules are checked by the audit tool.

Required TRXs This is the number of TRXs requested for a subcell. In case of BCCH TRX type, the number of requested TRXs is 1 by default. In case of TCH or TCH_INNER TRX type, this is a network dimensioning result, which depends on the traffic density in the subcell and on the blocked call percentage. Traffic load
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-28

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

It indicates the usage rate of TRXs; its value is between 0 and 1. This parameter may be, either user-defined, or automatically reported after calculating the number of requested TRXs. In this case, traffic load (
Ltraffic

) is a dimensioning result; this is a

global traffic load for all the subcells of each transmitter. We have:
Ltraffic = Traffic NTRX

Traffic is the traffic request

NTRX

(Erlang) on the transmitter coverage area,

is the total number of TRXs requested by a transmitter.

It is taken into account in interference calculation and automatic frequency planning. DL power offset This is a reduction of power relative to the transmitter power. Entering 3 dB means that the subcell power will be 3 dB lower than the transmitter power defined in the Transmitter tab. Reception threshold This is the reception condition for the subcell. This value can be used as reference value in signal level coverage predictions (lowest received signal level in order for receiver to be covered by the subcell). C/I Threshold This is a quality condition; you can enter specific quality requirements for each subcell. It can be used as reference value in interference studies. DTX support Here, you can specify if DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) technology is supported for this subcell. Subcells supporting DTX may reduce their impact on interferences with a defined voice activity factor. The name of the timeslot configuration to be used The timeslot configuration indicates the distribution of circuit, packet and shared timeslots on TRXs of the subcell. It is considered for the network dimensioning (evaluation of the number of TRXs requested to fulfill the traffic demand) and calculation of Key Performance Indicators (KPIs). Required number of shared timeslots This is the number of shared timeslots required for all the TRXs of a subcell. Required number of circuit timeslots This is the number of circuit switched timeslots required for all the TRXs of a subcell. Required number of packet timeslots This is the number of packet switched timeslots required for all the TRXs of a subcell.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-29

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Half-rate traffic ratio It is the percentage of Half-Rate voice traffic in the subcell. This parameter is taken into account in the traffic analysis and to calculate the required number of timeslots to match the voice traffic demand. Target rate of traffic overflow This parameter is used during the traffic analysis to distribute the traffic between subcells and layers. For a given subcell, this parameter is the percentage of its candidate traffic that is considered to overflow to another subcell with a lower priority. It impacts the traffic capture between Inner and Outer subcells, as well as between micro and macro layers. In other words, it is a kind of anticipation of the percentage of traffic which is rejected from higher priority subcells/layers to lower ones, as shown in Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-2.

TCH_INNER

Traffic overflow

TCH

Figure 6-1 Overflow between concentric cells

M ac ro lay er M ic ro lay e r

TCH TCH T raffic ov erflow

Figure 6-2 Overflow between HCS layers

Note: The target rate of traffic overflow and the Half-Rate traffic ratio must be the same for BCCH and TCH subcells. If you enter different values for BCCH and TCH subcells, The U-Net will take the BCCH subcell values.

Hopping mode If frequency hopping is supported, choose either the Base Band Hopping mode (BBH), or the Synthesized Hopping mode (SFH). Else, select Non Hopping.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-30

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Allocation strategy It refers to the allocation strategy used during manual or automatic frequency planning. Two allocation strategies are offered: - Free allocation: all the channels of the frequency domain can be assigned to TRXs. - Grouped allocation: Only channels belonging to a same group of the frequency domain can be chosen. - Maximum MAL (Mobile Allocation List) length This is the maximum size of the MAL. In other words, it corresponds to the maximum number of channels allocated to TRXs of a subcell during automatic frequency planning in case SFH (Synthesized Frequency Hopping) or BBH (Base Band Hopping) is supported and allocation mode is free. HSN domain Only HSNs belonging to this HSN domain can be allocated to subcells during manual frequency planning. Allocation of HSN must be performed in case of SFH or BBH. HSN This is the hopping sequence number of subcell. All the TRXs of the subcell have the same HSN. HSN can be manually entered or automatically allocated. Only HSN belonging to the HSN domain assigned to this TRX type (in the selected cell type property dialog) can be allocated. This parameter is taken into account in interference calculation in case of SFH or BBH. Freeze HSN Selecting this option enables you to keep the current HSN allocation of subcells related to this TRX type when running a new AFP. Synchronization Type the same string of character in order for the TRXs of several subcells are synchronized during frequency hopping. By default, synchronization is performed at the site level; TRXs of subcells on a same site are synchronized. You may also define synchronization at the subcell level (different values for each subcell) or group of transmitters level (unique value for subcells of this group).

Note: Any string of character can be entered. This field is case sensitive.

This parameter is taken into account in interference calculation in case of frequency hopping (BBH or SFH). AFP weight
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-31

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

This is a cost factor used to increase or decrease the importance of a subcell during automatic frequency planning. The cost factor must be a positive real. The higher the AFP weight the greater the constraint on the subcell. Maximum percentage of interference This is the maximum percentage of interfered area or traffic (defined during the interference histogram determination) that The U-Net must not exceed during automatic frequency planning. Effective rate of traffic overflow This is the percentage of traffic overflowing from a subcell. It contains results from the dimensioning process. Default TRX Equipment By selecting a TRX Equipment, the maximum number of coding schemes in GPRS (CS) and in EDGE (MCS) is imposed at the subcell level. It is even possible to impose this at the TRX level. 8 PSK Power Backoff This is the average power reduction for E/GPRS transmitters due to 8PSK modulation in EDGE. This has an impact on the EDGE service zone (traffic analysis and EDGE predictions). With this data model, all data contained in cell types become default ones, that is they are used to initialize subcell properties when creating a transmitter; they can be modified in the transmitter property dialog without modifying the default values defined for the cell type, which the transmitter refers to. If you modify one of these data in cell types, transmitters already dealing with these cell types will not have their default parameters modified.

6.4.5 TRX Equipment

I. Creating a TRX Equipment
A menu called TRX equipment is available in the Transmitter folder shortcut menu that enables you to manage the capabilities of hardware in term of coding schemes. For each TRX (which can be assigned from the cell type up to the TRX level), it is possible to impose a maximum of coding scheme in case of GPRS only (CS), or a in case of EDGE (MCS). The maximum CS and MCS are also defined at the terminal level (only the ones which are not exclusively GSM). To create new TRX equipment, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Equipment: TRX Equipment... command from the open menu,

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-32

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

4)

Fill the empty table row to create the new piece of equipment, or double-click it and choose Record Properties from the shortcut menu to open the related complete dialog.

5) 6) 7)

Use what's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Set the TRX equipment settings. Click OK or Apply.

Note: The Table Fields command from the shortcut menu lets you manage the content of the TRX Equipment table. An Other Properties tab is available when some user defined fields have been added to the TRX Equipment table. Codec Equipment can be assigned as default to cell types or subcells, or more specifically to TRXs.

II. Managing TRX Equipment Properties

It is possible to modify properties (name, Max CS and MCS) of any existing equipment. TRX Equipment can be optionally selected at the cell type, subcell or even TRX level. These ranges of coding schemes limit the number of algorithm and have to be considered from the station side but also from the terminal side. To manage codec equipment, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Equipment > TRX Equipment... command from the open menu. The associated Data table opens. Define the parameters for TRX equipment. Note: The dialog of each TRX Equipment is reachable either by double-clicking the related record in the table, or by right-clicking the related record and choosing Record Properties from the shortcut menu. The Table Fields command from the shortcut menu lets you manage to content of the TRX Equipment table. An Other Properties tab is available when some user defined fields have been added to the TRX Equipment table.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-33

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

III. Assigning TRX Equipment

A TRX equipment impose to the hardware that selects it its maximum number of coding schemes in GPRS (CS) or in EDGE (MCS) related to the selected GPRS/EDGE Equipment defined in each transmitter which can provide packet transmission. This type of equipment can be assigned at the cell type level. In that case, the value is used to initialize the subcells of the transmitters selecting the related cell type. It is even possible to select the type of TRX equipment for each single subcell. Finally, the deepest assignment - and the one with the highest priority - can be made at the TRX level. To assign TRX Equipment to a cell type, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Network settings: Cell types... command from the open menu. Select the cell type on which you want to manage TRX Equipment and click the button to open the associated dialog. Or double-click the cell type on which you want to manage TRX Equipment. 5) Define the TRX Equipment of each TRX type.

Table 6-10 lists two ways of assigning TRX Equipment to a subcell. Table 6-10 Assigning TRX Equipment to a subcell Method 1) 2) Method 1 3) 4) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Access the property dialog of the transmitter that you want to modify a subcell. Click the TRXs tab. In the Subcell part, select the appropriated TRX equipment. 1) 2) Method 2 3) 4) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Subcells: Open Table command from the open menu. Assign the appropriate TRX equipment to each single subcell.

Table 6-11 lists two ways of assigning TRX Equipment to a TRX.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-34

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Table 6-11 Assigning TRX Equipment to a TRX Method 1) 2) Method 1 3) 4) 1) 2) Method 2 3) 4) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Access the property dialog of the transmitter that you want to modify a TRX. Click the TRXs tab. In the TRXs part, select the appropriate TRX Equipment. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Subcells: TRXs command from the open menu. Assign the appropriate TRX Equipment to each TRX.

6.4.6 Codec Equipment

I. Creating a Codec Equipment
A menu called Codec equipment is available in the Transmitter folder shortcut menu that enables you to manage specific voice codec equipment for GSM/TDMA networks. Parameters associated with Ideal Mode Selection and different quality indicators, namely BER, BLER, FER and MOS, are defined in these equipment. Transmitters have to be assigned relevant codec equipment to perform prediction studies concerning voice or packet quality indicators. You can create different codec equipment for different Active Codec mode Sets (ACS). For example, in stead of being compatible with all possible codec modes, a codec equipment can have 12.2kbps, 7.4kbps, 5.9kbps and 4.75kbps Full-Rate and 7.4kbps, 5.9kbps and 4.75 kbps half-rate codec modes defined. In this way this equipment will be only compatible with the defined family of codec modes, also known as Active Codec mode Sets (ACS) in the 3GPP specifications. Table 6-12 lists two ways of creating new codec equipment.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-35

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Table 6-12 Creating new codec equipment Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Equipment > Codec Equipment... command from the open menu. Fill the empty table row to create the new piece of equipment. Fill the empty table row to create the new piece of equipment. Use what's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Set the codec equipment. Click OK or Apply. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Equipment: Codec Equipment... command from the open menu. Fill the empty table row to create the new piece of equipment, Double-click the table row. Or right-click it and choose record properties from the shortcut menu to open the related complete dialog. 6) 7) 8) Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Set the codec equipment. Click OK or Apply.

Note: The Table Fields command from the shortcut menu lets you manage the content of the Codec Equipment table. An Other Properties tab is available when some user defined fields have been added to the Codec Equipment table. Codec Equipment can be assigned to transmitters or terminals.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-36

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

II. Managing Codec Equipment Properties

In the U-Net, it is possible to modify properties (name, ideal mode selection, quality indicator and its associated graphs) of any existing equipment. This equipment has to be defined for each transmitter taking part in specific quality indicator coverage predictions (regarding BER, BLER, FER and MOS). To manage codec equipment, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Equipment: Codec Equipment... command from the open menu. The associated Data table opens. Define the parameters of each Codec Equipment.

Note: The dialog of each Codec Equipment is reachable either by double-clicking the related record in the table, or by right-clicking the related record and choosing Record Properties from the shortcut menu. The Table Fields command from the shortcut menu lets you manage to content of the Codec Equipment table. An Other Properties tab is available when some user defined fields have been added to the Codec Equipment table. Codec equipment can be assigned to transmitters or terminals.

III. Setting Codec Mode Adaptation Thresholds

In GSM, different codec modes are available in the network for managing voice calls to optimize the usage of resources (spectrum and so on.). These codec modes include Full Rate (FR), Half Rate (HR), Enhanced Full Rate (EFR), and many Adaptive Multi-Rate (AMR) modes. A GSM network, with different codec equipment installed at the transceivers, is intelligent enough to dynamically allocate and manage resources on the basis of interference levels. You can define quality thresholds for each codec mode compatible with the codec equipment in the Adaptation Thresholds tab in the equipment properties dialog. These thresholds are used in computations when the equipment does not implement automatic mode selection. To define the adaptation thresholds to be used for no automatic mode selection with codec equipment, perform the following steps: 1) Access the properties dialog of the equipment for which you want to define adaptation thresholds.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-37

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

2) 3)

Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the Adaptation Thresholds tab to define or modify, for each compatible codec mode: Mobility type Frequency hopping type Frequency band The quality threshold to be used in case of no automatic mode selection implemented

4)

Click OK or Apply.

IV. Setting Codec Quality Thresholds

The Quality Thresholds tab in the codec equipment properties contain graphs for different quality indicators, such as bit error rate (BER), block error rate (BLER), frame error rate (FER) and mean opinion score (MOS), against C/N and C/I values. Codec equipment can contain descriptions of these quality thresholds for numerous combinations of each quality indicator and codec mode pair with compatible mobility type, frequency hopping type and frequency band. You can define quality thresholds for each quality indicator Quality Thresholds tab in the equipment properties dialog. These thresholds are used in computations when the equipment implements automatic mode selection according to the quality indicator defined in the General tab. To define the quality thresholds to be used in automatic mode selection with codec equipment, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Access the properties dialog of the equipment for which you want to define quality thresholds. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the Quality Thresholds tab to define or modify, for each quality indicator and codec mode pair. Mobility type Frequency hopping type Frequency band Graphs of the quality indicator with respect to C/N and C/I to be used in automatic mode selection 4) The Click OK or Apply. and buttons display graphs associated with the

currently selected quality indicator and codec mode pair.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-38

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: Graph values can be edited directly in the quality thresholds tab as well as in the graph window.

V. Assigning Codec Equipment to Transmitters

In the U-Net, codec equipment may or may not be assigned to transmitters. If no codec equipment is defined for some transmitters, only the codec equipment assigned for the terminal types (defined in the prediction study properties) will be used in computations. If no codec equipment is defined either at the terminal types level or at the transmitters level, these transmitters will not be considered in the specific quality indicators prediction studies. Table 6-13 lists two ways of assigning codec equipment to any transmitter. Table 6-13 Assigning codec equipment to any transmitter Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) 5) 6) 7) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Step Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Double-click the Transmitters folder to open the associated table. Assign the associated codec equipment to transmitters through the related column. Click the Equipment tab. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the current window. Select the codec equipment from the related combo box. Click OK or Apply to validate. Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Access the properties dialog box of the transmitter for which you want to assign codec equipment. Method 2 Click the Equipment tab. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the current window. Select the codec equipment from the related combo box. Click OK or Apply.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-39

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: When choosing the equipment, all pieces of equipment previously defined in the codec equipment table are available in the Codec equipment menu. All these inputs are also available in the station template description.

VI. Assigning Codec Equipment to Terminal Types

Codec equipment may or may not be assigned to terminal types. If no codec equipment is defined for some terminal types, only the codec equipment defined for the corresponding transmitters will be used in the computations. If no codec equipment is defined either at the terminal types level or at the transmitters level, these transmitters will not be considered in the specific quality indicators prediction studies. Table 6-14 lists two ways of assigning codec equipment to any terminal type. Table 6-14 Assigning Codec equipment to any terminal type Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Step Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Parameters folder by clicking the Method 1 button. button. Expand the Terminals folder by clicking the

Double-click the terminal type to open its properties dialog. Assign the associated Codec equipment to the terminal type choosing from the related combo box. Click OK or Apply. Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Parameters folder by clicking the button. Double-click the Terminals folder to open the corresponding table. Assign the associated Codec equipment to the terminal type through the related column. Close the table.

Method 2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-40

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: When choosing the equipment, all pieces of equipment previously defined in the codec equipment table are available in the Codec equipment menu.

6.4.7 GPRS/EDGE Equipment

I. Creating a GPRS/EDGE Equipment
A menu called GPRS/EDGE equipment is available in the Transmitter folder shortcut menu that enables you to manage specific equipment for GPRS and EDGE networks. Thresholds associated with coding schemes are defined in this equipment. Any transmitter dealing with GPRS or EDGE technology has to be assigned an existing piece of equipment. Table 6-15 lists two ways of creating GPRS/EDGE equipment. Table 6-15 Creating GPRS/EDGE equipment Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) 5) 6) 7) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Equipment > GPRS/EDGE Equipment... command from the open menu. Fill the empty table line to create the new piece of equipment. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Set the GPRS/EDGE equipment. Click OK or Apply.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-41

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Method 1) 2) 3) 4)

Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Equipment: GPRS/EDGE Equipment... command from the open menu. Double-click the table row, or right-click it and click the button to open the related complete dialog. 5) 6) 7) Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Set the GPRS/EDGE equipment. Click OK or Apply.

Method 2

Note: The Table Fields command from the context menu lets you manage the content of the GPRS/EDGE Equipment table. An Other Properties tab is available if some user defined fields have been added to the GPRS/EDGE Equipment table.

II. Managing GPRS/EDGE Equipment Properties

In the U-Net, it is possible to modify properties (name, number of coding schemes, thresholds and associated graphs) of any existing equipment. This equipment has to be defined for each transmitter taking part in specific GPRS/EDGE coverage predictions (Coding schemes and Max rate per timeslot). The user can define the technology supported by this equipment (whether GPRS or EGPRS). To manage GPRS/EDGE equipment, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Equipment: GPRS/EDGE Equipment... command from the open menu. The associated Data table opens. 4) Define the parameters of GPRS/EDGE equipment.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-42

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: The dialog of each GPRS/EDGE Equipment is reachable either by double-clicking the related record in the table, or by right-clicking the related record and choosing Record Properties from the shortcut menu. The Table Fields command from the shortcut menu lets you to manage content of the GPRS/EDGE Equipment table. An Other Properties tab is available if some user defined fields have been added to the GPRS/EDGE Equipment table.

The GPRS/EDGE equipment has an associated reference thermal noise defined. This noise is used to convert C graphs to C/N graphs. The throughput per timeslot graphs are defined for given frequency hopping mode, mobility type and frequency band. These graphs are taken into account in a prediction study if these parameters correspond to the ones defined in that study. Otherwise, the U-Net will use the graphs for which none of these parameters has been defined. If no such graph exists, the U-Net considers that the corresponding coding scheme is not defined during the calculations.

III. Computing Coding Scheme Thresholds Automatically

It is possible to automatically compute the reception and C/I thresholds for any GPRS/EDGE equipment in The U-Net. You can enter the permissible level of Block Error Rate (BLER) in the equipment properties window and The U-Net will calculate the thresholds required to satisfy this criterion. To calculate the reception and C/I thresholds for given equipment, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Access properties dialog box of the concerned equipment. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Enter the permissible BLER in the Calculate the thresholds section. Click Calculate to generate new reception and C/I threshold values. Click OK or Apply.

IV. Setting Coding Schemes Parameters

In GPRS or EDGE technology, the coding scheme is a coding algorithm used to introduce more or less redundancy (rate multiplier) and improve packet transmission. Four and nine coding schemes are respectively available for GPRS and EDGE networks. The more important the coding scheme is, the less redundancy there is. Therefore, in GPRS networks, using a coding scheme 4 means that there will be no redundancy.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-43

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

To adjust the parameters associated with coding schemes from any equipment, proceed as follow: 1) 2) 3) Access the property dialog of the equipment you want to adjust the associated coding schemes. Use what's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the General tab to check or modify, for the current equipment: The name and/or the maximum number of coding schemes available for the current equipment. If the equipment supports only GPRS or both GPRS and EDGE. 4) Click the Thresholds tab to define, for each coding scheme: Power threshold and Signal noise ratio threshold: They are respectively the minimum power (C) and the minimum signal noise ratio (C/I) required at the receiver in order for the coding scheme to be used. Max rate (kbps): It is the maximum rate (kbps) obtained when there is no data transmission error. Throughput depending on C (kbps) and throughput depending on C/I (kbps): These columns contain values used to represent Throughput=f(C) and Throughput=f(C/I) graphs. 8PSK modulation used or not (EDGE only). Type of Frequency hopping (1 = No hopping; 2 = Ideal FH; empty = all hopping modes) Mobility type and Frequency band compatible with the coding scheme: These two parameters are used to filter out the traffic to which certain coding schemes can be allocated, that is users having compatible mobility and frequency bands. 5) The Click OK or Apply. and buttons allows to display graphs associated with

the currently selected coding scheme.

Note: In the case of GPRS/EDGE, two sets of charts (C and C/I) can be given: one is related to the GPRS mode and another one related to the EDGE mode. If the option Edge is not checked, The U-Net considers that the charts (C and C/I) are related to the GPRS mode, else it uses them as charts related to the EDGE mode.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-44

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

V. Displaying Rate Graphs

In GPRS/EDGE technology, coding schemes are linked with data transmission redundancy level. The least redundancy deals with riskier data transmissions with potentially higher transmission rates. The most redundancy deals with safer data transmissions but with lower rates. Coding schemes are hence defined to obtain the best compromise between enough transmission speed and safety of data packet transmission. That is why each coding scheme has an optimum working range depending on C or C/I values. This can be pointed out through graphs attached with the definition of each coding scheme linked to GPRS/EDGE equipment. Table 6-16 lists two ways of displaying the rate graph as function of C or C/I values for a given coding scheme. Table 6-16 Displaying the rate graph as function of C or C/I values Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) Step Access properties dialog box of the equipment you want to adjust the associated coding schemes. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the Thresholds tab. Click the C or C/I cell you want to display the associated rate graph. The Rate graph window opens. It consists of a table where you can define C (or C/I) and rate values (copying and pasting a set of values, adding and deleting values is possible) and a part where the graph is displayed. 5) Click OK or close the window.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-45

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Method 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) Click either the

Step Access properties dialog box of the equipment you want to adjust the associated coding schemes. Use what's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the Thresholds tab. Select the line of the coding scheme you want to display a rate graph. or button to open the

graph (as function respectively of C or C/I) dialog window. The Rate graph window opens. It consists of a table where you can define C (or C/I) and rate values (copying and pasting a set of values, adding and deleting values is possible) and a part where the graph is displayed. 6) Click OK or close the window.

Note: These graphs show the rate evolution depending on radio conditions (C and C/I) by considering block error rates. Therefore, from these graphs, you can choose a coding scheme suitable to radio conditions.

VI. Setting GPRS/EDGE Transmitters

In the U-Net, transmitters part of network dealing either with GPRS or EDGE can be or not considered as GPRS/EDGE sectors by default. If not, they are taken as classical GSM stations. Table 6-17 lists two ways of assigning GPRS/EDGE properties to any transmitter.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-46

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Table 6-17 Assigning GPRS/EDGE properties to any transmitter Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) 5) 6) Step Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Double-click the Transmitters folder to open the associated table. Check the boxes associated with such transmitters in the GPRS/EDGE column. Method 1 Assign the associated GPRS/EDGE to cells. Click the GPRS/EDGE tab. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the current window. Check the GPRS/EDGE Station box and complete the GPRS/EDGE equipment field. Click OK or Apply. Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Access the properties dialog box of the transmitter you want to define as a GPRS/EDGE station. Click the GPRS/EDGE tab. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the current window. Check the GPRS/EDGE Station box and complete the GPRS/EDGE equipment field. Click OK or Apply.

Note: When choosing the equipment, all pieces of equipment previously described in the GPRS/EDGE equipment folder are available in the GPRS/EDGE equipment menu. If none is chosen, the U-Net does not consider the associated transmitter in the GPRS/EDGE specific studies. All these inputs are also available in the station template description.

6.5 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Management

The U-Net GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic model is flexible, versatile and comprehensive. This traffic model introduces the notion of service in the GSM/GPRS/EDGE documents allowing the user to completely model the multi-service 2G/2.5G network
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-47

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

traffic. The salient parameters in this regard are the settings of a GSM/GPRS/EDGE parameters folder containing: Services Terminal types Mobility types User profiles Environment classes All of these items are classified into subfolders. In addition to these, the folder also contains a GPRS dimensioning model subfolder. Finally, the U-Net provides the possibility to create various types of traffic maps: per environment, per user profile (vector), per user density, or by using live traffic data. Furthermore, the traffic analysis feature allows the user to manipulate the created traffic maps to use them in prediction studies and in the dimensioning procedure. A user profile can be considered to be the principal data for the traffic maps. It describes the behavior of a certain type of users in terms of terminal type, service and mobility. This data can then be used to generate traffic environments that contain a certain type of users with a certain density. Traffic maps can then be based on environments, user profiles, throughput per sector (Live traffic) and densities.

6.5.1 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Multi-service Traffic Data

I. Creating GSM/GPRS/EDGE Services
The traffic model allows the user to define not only voice but also data services in GSM/GPRS/EDGE documents. Services are divided into two categories: circuit switched and packet switched. Currently, the circuit switched service includes only GSM voice services that use a single timeslot. To create a service, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking Click in the menu on New. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the available tabs to set the parameters of the created service. Validate by clicking OK. . Right-click the Services folder to open the associated shortcut menu,

II. Setting GSM/GPRS/EDGE Service Parameters

Similar to the other the U-Net object folders, GSM/GPRS/EDGE services are easily manageable. Creation steps and display management are standard. Table 6-18 lists two ways of managing the GSM/EGPRS services parameters.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-48

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Table 6-18 Managing the GSM/EGPRS services parameters Method 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 1 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6) 7) Step Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the button. Expand the Services folder by clicking the to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Use what's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the available tabs to adjust the parameters of the current service. Click OK. Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the button. Expand the Services folder by clicking the properties. Use what's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the available tabs to adjust the parameters of the current service. Click OK. button. button.

Right-click the service of which you want to manage the properties

Double-click the service of which you want to manage the

Note: For a circuit switched service the user can specify the maximum blocking rate (stated in term of Erlang B or C). For each packet switched service the user can enter, apart from a maximum permissible blocking rate, a maximum permissible delay, a minimum required throughput with a percentage of coverage that should at least be provided with this throughput, and minimum/maximum number of timeslots allowed to be multiplexed per user for that particular service.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-49

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

The maximum blocking rate defines the call blocking or call queuing rate for the GSM voice services and the probability of delayed packet arrivals for EGPRS data services. The field minimum throughput per user defines the lower threshold on the user throughput and is one of the inputs for the dimensioning process for EGPRS networks. The dimensioning takes into account the availability percentage of this minimum throughput as well. These two criteria tell the U-Net dimensioning engine that the defined minimum user throughput should be available for at least that percentage of cell coverage. Maximum allowable delay for a certain type of service is another input to the dimensioning process. This is the user level delay perceived accessing a given service, such as web, ftp, e-mail. The maximum number of timeslots can be specified to limit the allocation at the dimensioning within a practical/feasible range for the network operator. The throughput scaling factor and offset are used in determining the user or application level throughput in RLC/MAC throughput/timeslot prediction studies. These two parameters model the header information and other supplementary data that does not appear at the application level.

Note: When the properties dialog is open from the explorer, it is possible to scroll through the properties dialogs of different services within the subfolder without closing. To do this, use the The buttons. buttons enable you to switch back to the first/previous service

properties dialog within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the properties of the first item of a subfolder. The buttons enable you to move forward to the next/last service properties dialog within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the properties of the last item of a subfolder. Subfolders are organized following the grouping/sorting/filtering configuration.

III. Managing Globally GSM/GPRS/EDGE Services

The U-Net allows the user to display all topics of one type (services, mobility, terminal type, user profiles, and environment) in a table window at the same time. Table 6-19 lists two ways of opening the services table.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-50

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Table 6-19 Opening the services table Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 1) 2) Method 2 3) 4) Step Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the button. Method 1 Right-click the Services folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Open. The services table opens. Click .

Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking on the button. Double-click the Services folder. The services table opens. Click .

The services table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and copy/paste functions are available.

Note: The advanced grouping/filtering/sorting feature may be used on the services from the shortcut menu associated with the Services folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the contents of the services table. Use what's this help to get description about the fields available in the different windows. When the Services table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any service by simply double-clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

IV. Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility Type

With the knowledge of user mobility, that is speed, The U-Net can analyze multi-layer traffic. In a multi-layer GSM/GPRS/EDGE network, a user speed is one of the main criteria that are taken into account at the moment of connection establishment when there is more than 1 possible server available. A fast moving mobile is usually allocated a channel from the macro/umbrella layer rather than from the micro layer to minimize signaling and hence computational load on the system.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-51

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

To create a GSM/GPRS/EDGE mobility type, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the Click in the menu on New. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Set the parameters of the currently created mobility. Clicking OK. button. Right-click the Mobility type folder to open the associated shortcut menu.

Note: A maximum speed for each Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) layer is defined in the Network settings that allow each HCS layer to capture a certain type of traffic within defined mobility limitations.

V. Setting a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility Type

Like for the other the U-Net object folders, GSM/GPRS/EDGE mobility types are easily manageable. Creation steps and the display management are standard. Table 6-20 lists two ways of managing the mobility types parameters. Table 6-20 Managing the mobility types parameters Method 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 1 5) 6) 7) 8) Step Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the button. Expand the Mobility type folder by clicking the properties to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Set the parameters of the current mobility. Click OK. button.

Right-click the mobility of which you want to manage the

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-52

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Method 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) 5) 6) 7)

Step Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the button. Expand the Mobility type folder by clicking the properties. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Set the parameters of the current mobility. Clicking OK. button.

Double-click the mobility of which you want to manage the

Note: When the Mobility type table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any mobility by simply double-clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left. When the properties dialog is open from the explorer, it is possible to scroll through the properties dialogs of different mobilities within the subfolder without closing. To do this, use the The buttons. buttons enable you to switch back to the first/previous mobility

properties dialog within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the properties of the first item of a subfolder. The buttons enable you to move forward to the next/last mobility properties dialog within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the properties of the last item of a subfolder. Subfolders are organized following the grouping/sorting/filtering configuration.

VI. Managing Globally GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility Types

The U-Net allows the user to simultaneously display all topics of one type (services, mobility, terminal type, user profiles, and environment) in a table window. Table 6-21 lists two ways of opening the mobility types table.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-53

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Table 6-21 Opening the mobility types table Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 1) 2) Method 2 3) 4) Step Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the button. Method 1 Right-click the Mobility types folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Open. The mobility types table opens. Click .

Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the button. Double-click the Mobility types folder. The mobility types table opens. Click .

The mobility types table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and copy/paste functions are available.

Note: The advanced grouping/filtering/sorting feature may be used on the services from the shortcut menu associated with the mobility types folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the contents of the mobility types table. Use what's this help to get description about the fields available in the different windows. When the Mobility type table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any mobility by simply double-clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

VII. Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminal

A terminal defines the capabilities of a mobile terminal in terms of the number of timeslots it can multiplex in downlink (if it is defined as GPRS/EDGE compatible), the frequency bands, and the technology it is compatible with. During traffic analysis (capture), packet switched service can only work with GPRS or GPRS/EDGE technology compatible mobile terminals. On the other hand, circuit
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-54

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

switched service can be associated to GSM technology compatible mobile terminals as well as GPRS and GPRS/EDGE technology compatible mobile terminals. Therefore, The U-Net will distribute: Circuit switched service users in the service areas of GSM and GPRS/EDGE stations. Packet switched service users with GPRS technology compatible mobile terminals in the service areas of GPRS/EDGE stations with GPRS/EDGE equipments supporting either only GPRS, or both GPRS and EDGE technologies. Packet switched service users with GPRS/EDGE technology compatible mobile terminals in the service areas of GPRS/EDGE stations with GPRS/EDGE equipments supporting both GPRS and EDGE technologies. To create a GSM/GPRS/EDGE terminal, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the Click in the menu on New. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Set the parameters of the currently created terminal. Specify the compliant technology type(s) with the current terminal Since a GPRS or GPRS/EDGE technology compatible mobile terminal can consume/communicate over multiple timeslots simultaneously, in that case indicate the number of downlink timeslots. Specify the frequency band(s) the mobile terminal is compatible with. The definition of compatible frequency bands again allows the software to allocate the mobile to a certain network layer in the multilayer scenario with multiple bands (GSM900 and DCS1800 layers, for example). You may define compatible GPRS/EGPRS equipment for the terminal type. You may also assign compatible codec equipment by selecting from the relevant combo box. It is also possible to restrict the number of coding schemes by defining the highest CS and MCS coding schemes compatible with the terminal type. A noise figure for each terminal type can be defined. This value is added to the reference thermal noise during the relevant calculations for determining the C/N and C/ (I+N) graphs from C and C/I graphs respectively. 7) Clicking OK. Note: Highest CS and MCS are linked with the same limits available at the TRX level (coming from the selected TRX equipment). button. Right-click the Terminals folder to open the associated shortcut menu.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-55

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

VIII. Setting GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminal Parameters

Like for the other the U-Net object folders, GSM/GPRS/EDGE terminals are easily manageable. Creation steps and the display management are standard. Table 6-22 lists two ways of managing the terminal parameters. Table 6-22 Managing the terminal parameters Method 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 1 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) 5) 6) 7) Step Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the button. Expand the Terminals folder by clicking the button.

Right-click the terminal of which you want to manage the properties to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Set the parameters of the current terminal. Click OK. Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the button. Expand the Terminals folder by clicking the properties. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Set the parameters of the current terminal. Click OK. button.

Double-click the terminal of which you want to manage the

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-56

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: When the Terminal table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any terminal by simply double-clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left. When the properties dialog is open from the explorer, it is possible to scroll through the properties dialogs of different terminals within the subfolder without closing. To do this, use the The buttons. buttons enable you to switch back to the first/previous terminal

properties dialog within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the properties of the first item of a subfolder. The buttons enable you to move forward to the next/last terminal properties dialog within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the properties of the last item of a subfolder. Subfolders are organized following the grouping/sorting/filtering configuration.

IX. Managing Globally GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals

The U-Net allows the user to simultaneously display all topics of one type (services, mobility, terminal, user profiles, and environment) in a table window. Table 6-23 lists two ways of opening the terminals table. Table 6-23 Opening the terminals table Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Step Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the button. Method 1 Right-click the Terminals folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Open. The terminals table opens. Click .

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-57

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Method 1) 2) Method 2 3) 4)

Step Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the button. Double-click the Terminals folder. The terminals table opens. Click .

The terminals table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and copy/paste functions are available.

Note: The grouping/filtering/sorting advanced feature may be used on the services from the shortcut menu associated with the Terminals folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the contents of the terminals table. Use what's this help to get description about the fields available in the different windows. When the Terminal table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any terminal by simply double-clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

X. Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE User Profile

User profiles model the behavior of the different subscriber categories. Each user profile is constituted by a list of services and their associated usage parameters such as used terminal, call or session frequency (calls/hour) and duration or data volume to be transferred. Parameters for circuit switched services are: Average number of calls per hour Average duration of a call in seconds Used terminal (equipment used for the service (from the Terminals table)) Parameters for packet switched services are: Average number of sessions per hour Volume in Kbytes which is transferred on the downlink during a session Used terminal (equipment used for the service (from the Terminals table)) These parameters are used in traffic distribution to assign a certain traffic type to a certain layer and station that can manage the said traffic.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-58

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: For circuit switched services, entering a one-hour call during 1000s corresponds to define 2 calls per hour during 500s...the activity probability is the same in both cases. You can model temporal variations of user behavior by creating different profiles for different hours (busy hour, and so on).

To create a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the Click in the menu on New. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Set the parameters of the currently created user profile. Click OK. button. Right-click the User profiles folder to open the associated shortcut menu.

XI. Adjusting GSM/GPRS/EDGE User Profile Properties

Like the other the U-Net object folders, GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profiles are easily manageable. Creation steps and the display management are standard. Table 6-24 lists two ways of managing the user profile parameters. Table 6-24 Managing the user profile parameters Method 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 1 5) 6) 7) 8) Step Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the button. button. Expand the User profiles folder by clicking the properties to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Set the parameters of the current user profile. Clicking OK.

Right-click the user profile of which you want to manage the

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-59

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Method 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) 5) 6) 7)

Step Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the button. button. Expand the User profiles folder by clicking the properties. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Set the parameters of the current user profile. Clicking OK.

Double-click the user profile of which you want to manage the

Note: When the User profiles table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any user type by simply double-clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left. When the properties dialog is open from the explorer, it is possible to scroll through the properties dialogs of different user profiles within the subfolder without closing. To do this, use the The buttons. buttons enable you to switch back to the first/previous user profile

properties dialog within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the properties of the first item of a subfolder. The buttons enable you to move forward to the next/last user profile properties dialog within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the properties of the last item of a subfolder. Subfolders are organized following the grouping/sorting/filtering configuration.

XII. Managing Globally GSM/GPRS/EDGE User Profiles

The U-Net allows the user to display simultaneously all topics of one type (services, mobility, terminal, user profiles, and environment) in a table window. Table 6-25 lists two ways of opening the user profiles table.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-60

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Table 6-25 Opening the user profiles table Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 1) 2) Method 2 3) 4) Step Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the Method 1 button. Right-click the User profiles folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Open. The user profiles table opens. Click .

Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the button. Double-click the User profiles folder. The user profiles table opens. Click .

The user profiles table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and copy/paste functions are available.

Note: The grouping/filtering/sorting advanced feature may be used on the services from the shortcut menu associated with the User profiles folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the contents of the user profiles table. Use Whats this help to get description about the fields available in the different windows. When the User profiles table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any user type by simply double-clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

XIII. Creating a Type of GSM/GPRS/EDGE Environment

Environment classes may be used to describe subscriber spatial distribution on a map; they are the available classes for traffic cartography design. An environment class represents an economic and social concept, which defines the characteristics of user profiles. Each environment class contains a set of three data (user profile, mobility,

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-61

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

density) where density is a number of subscribers with the same profile per km. There is no restriction on the number of data sets constituting an environment. To get an appropriate user distribution, you may assign weights per clutter classes, for each environment class. To create a GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment type, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the Click in the menu on New. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the available tabs to set the parameters of the currently created environment. Click OK. button. Right-click the Environments folder to open the associated shortcut menu.

Particular case: When no multi-service geo-marketing data is available, you may supply the U-Net with usual traffic data like user densities per service (for example, values coming from adapted GSM Erlang maps).Traffic distribution will only depend on densities per service.

XIV. Setting GSM/GPRS/EDGE Environment Parameters

Like for the other the U-Net object folders, GSM/GPRS/EDGE environments are easily manageable. Creation steps and the display management are standard. Table 6-26 lists two ways of managing the environments parameters. Table 6-26 Managing the environments parameters Method 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 1 5) 6) 7) 8) Step Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the button. Expand the Environments folder by clicking the properties to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the available tabs to adjust the parameters of the current environment. Clicking OK. button.

Right-click the environment type of which you want to manage the

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-62

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Method 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6) 7)

Step Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the button. Expand the Environments folder by clicking the the properties. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the available tabs to adjust the parameters of the current environment. Clicking OK. button.

Double-click the environment type of which you want to manage

Note: To get an appropriate user distribution, you may assign weights per clutter classes, for each environment class in the Clutter weighting tab. When the Environments table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any environment type by simply double-clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left. When the properties dialog is open from the explorer, it is possible to scroll through the properties dialogs of different environments within the subfolder without closing. To do this, use the The buttons. buttons enable you to switch back to the first/previous environment

properties dialog within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the properties of the first item of a subfolder. The buttons enable you to move forward to the next/last environment properties dialog within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the properties of the last item of a subfolder. Subfolders are organized following the grouping/sorting/filtering configuration.

XV. Managing Globally GSM/GPRS/EDGE Environment Types

The U-Net allows the user to simultaneously display all topics of one type (services, mobility, terminal, user profile, and environment) in a table window. Table 6-27 lists two ways of opening the environment types table.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-63

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Table 6-27 Opening the environment types table Method 1) 2) Method 1 3) 4) Step Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the button. Right-click the Environments folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Open. The Environment type table opens. 1) 2) Method 2 3) Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder by clicking the button. Double-click the Environments folder. The Environment type table opens.

The environment types table works exactly like the other tables. Its cells are editable, sorting and filtering tools, and copy/paste functions are available.

Note: The grouping/filtering/sorting advanced feature may be used on the services from the shortcut menu associated with the Environments folder. From the properties dialog box, you may also manage the contents of the environment types table. Use what's this help to get description about the fields available in the different windows. When the Environments table is displayed and active, it is possible to open the property dialog window of any environment type by simply double-clicking on any cell in the associated line, or on the associated arrow at left.

XVI. Subscriber Clutter Weighting in GSM/GPRS/EDGE Environments

Enter a weight for each clutter class to get an appropriate user distribution The following formula is used for calculations:

Nk = Nclass

w k Sk w j Sj
j

Table 6-28 lists the implications of the symbols in the above formula.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-64

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Table 6-28 Formula parameters Symbol Implication Number of users in the k clutter

Nk
Nclass wk Sk

Number of users in an environment class

k clutter weight at fixed surface

k clutter surface (stated in km)

Examples: We consider a square of 10 km. The subscriber density is 100/km. So, in this square, 1000 subscribers have to be considered. The square is made of two clutter classes: Open and Building. The clutter weighting is 1 for Open and 4 for Building. The square is equally made of Open and Building pixels. In that case, for this square 1000 subscribers will be considered, 200 over the Open clutter class and 800 over the Building class. The area covered by the Open pixels represents 80% of the square. The remaining area is covered with Building pixels. In that case, for this square 1000 subscribers will be considered, 500 over the Open clutter class and 500 over the Building class.

6.5.2 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Multi-service Traffic Cartography

The U-Net provides 4 types of traffic maps for GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects: Traffic raster maps based on environments: each pixel of the map is assigned an environment class. Traffic vector maps based on user profiles: each polygon or line contains a density of subscribers with given user profile and mobility type. Traffic maps per transmitter and per service: live traffic is spread over a best server coverage plot. Traffic raster maps based on user densities: actual user density per pixel can be used to create a map of this type. Whatever the type of map is, this one can be created or modified manually, imported from an external file and exported to an external file.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-65

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

I. Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Environment Traffic Map

There are two solutions to define an environment traffic map, either by creating environment polygons or by directly importing a raster map in your project as an environment traffic map. To create a GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic map by drawing, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Traffic folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Select the New map command from the menu. Choose the Map based on environments (raster) option in the Create a traffic map open window. 5) 6) Press the button to validate.

Use the cartography editor (selecting one of the available environment classes as defined in the environment folder) to draw environment polygons.

7)

Click the

button to close the editor.

Note: Like other raster maps, it is easily possible to save the generated traffic map. You can only choose among existing environment classes in the cartography editor. To make available additional classes, do it in the GSM/GPRS/EDGE parameters.

II. Importing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Environment Traffic Map

There are two solutions to define an environment traffic map, either by creating environment polygons or by directly importing a raster map (with the appropriate format) in your project as an environment traffic map. To import a GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic map from an external file, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Traffic folder to open the associated shortcut menu, Select the New map command from the menu. Choose the Map based on environments (raster) option in the Create a traffic map open window. 5) Press the button to validate.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-66

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

6) 7) 8) 9)

Locate the file to be imported and click the

button to validate.

Choose the Traffic option from the menu in the open File import window. Press the button to validate.

Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window.

10) In the name column, click cells to replace class (codes or clutter) names by existing environment classes. 11) Press OK or Apply.

Note: Importing a file as a traffic map can be also made through the generic import (selection of the environment traffic type in the appropriate menu), Clutter files can be imported as traffic files. To manage traffic on the entire map, this operation must be carried out for all classes. The description table can be fully copied and pasted (using Ctrl+V and Ctrl+C) in a new the U-Net project after importing the raster file. To select globally the environment class table, just click the top left angle of the environment table. Like other raster maps, you can easily save the generated traffic map.

III. Managing GSM/GPRS/EDGE Environment Traffic Maps

On an existing environment traffic map, you can access properties and modify the class association and its display settings. Table 6-29 lists two ways of accessing the properties of an existing environment traffic map.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-67

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Table 6-29 Accessing the properties of an existing environment traffic map Method 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 1 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6) 7) Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Traffic folder by clicking the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the description tab to re-associate environment classes. Click the display tab to set the transparency level, the visibility scale and to add the map information to the legend. Press OK or Apply. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Traffic folder by clicking the button in front of it. button in front of it.

Right-click the related environment map folder to open the

Double-click the related environment map folder. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the description tab to re-associate environment classes. Click the display tab to set the transparency level, the visibility scale and to add the map information to the legend. Press OK or Apply.

It is also possible to access the properties of a single file composing the resulting map (properties command in the related shortcut menu) to embed it into the atl project or to check the map geocoding.

Note: Absolute and relative statistics can be provided for this type of map. The U-Net provides the possibility to display the cumulated traffic when working on several traffic map(s), whatever there types are.

IV. Exporting a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Environment Traffic Map

Like the other GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic map types (user profile, live traffic or user density), it is possible to export an environment traffic map in an 8 bits/pixel raster tiff,
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-68

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

bil or bmp format. It is possible to export a part or the complete environment traffic map. To export a part or the complete environment traffic map in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Traffic folder by clicking the button in front of it. Right-click the Environment map folder to get the related shortcut menu. Click the Save as... option from the open menu. Define the format, the directory path and the name to give to the file to be exported. Click the Save button when this is made. In the Export dialog box, select one of the options and define the resolution (in meters) of file: The Entire Project Area option allows you to save the whole traffic map in another file. As soon as the file is saved, the properties (name and so on) of the traffic maps listed in the Environment Traffic subfolder are updated. The Only Pending Changes option allows just saving in the file the created traffic polygonal area. As soon as the modifications are saved, an additional traffic item is created and listed in the Environment Traffic subfolder. The Computation Zone option allows you to save only traffic map region inside the computation zone in another file. As soon as the file is saved, an additional traffic object is created and listed in the Environment Traffic subfolder. To enable this option, you must have drawn a computation zone beforehand. A resolution value is suggested; it is defined for raster traffic from the following criteria: - If one traffic object is clipped, the displayed resolution will be the object resolution. - If several objects are modified, the suggested resolution will be the smallest resolution of the altered items. - If there is no initial traffic item, the resolution will equal the resolution of DTM object which the modifications are made on or the smallest resolution of the merged DTM objects if the modifications are performed on several DTM objects. - If you draw your own traffic data without initial DTM, clutter or traffic object, a 100 m default resolution will be suggested. - The resolution value must be an integer. - The minimum resolution is set to 1 meter. 8) Click OK.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-69

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: When you save files using BIL and TIF formats, .hdr and .tfw files are automatically created in the same folder. The .hdr and .tfw files are respectively associated with .bil and .tif files; they contain geocoding information and resolution.

V. Displaying Statistics on GSM/GPRS/EDGE Environment Traffic Maps

It is possible to display statistics on an existing GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic map. Statistics are given globally and relatively as functions of environment traffic classes. Traffic density statistics indicates the proportion of each traffic class. Traffic statistics refer to the focus zone which exists. To display traffic statistics of the map in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Traffic folder by clicking the button in front of it. Right-click the Environment Traffic folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Choose the Statistics option from the menu. The surface (Is in km) of imported or edited traffic class (I) included in the focus (if existing) zone and its percentage (% of i) are specified:

% of i =

Si 100 Sk
k

Note: If no focus zone is defined, statistics are given over the computation zone. Current statistics are printable by clicking the button.

VI. Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE User Profile Traffic Map

In the U-Net, user profile traffic maps can be defined in any type of project (GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000). The vector data (points, lines, polygonal shapes) are expected to directly link a dedicated user profile, mobility and traffic density. The way to get user profile traffic maps consists in either importing vector files (MapInfo (MIF, MID), Arcview (SHP), Autocad (DXF)) and using them as traffic maps or creating vectors with the vector editor and assign them some traffic information.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-70

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

To create a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic map by drawing, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Traffic folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Select the New map command from the menu. Choose the map based on user profiles (vector) option in the Create a traffic map open window. 5) 6) 7) Press the button to validate.

Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open dialogs. Potentially define traffic information (user profile, mobility type, density) in the Table tab, assign them to the U-Net internal traffic fields in the Traffic tab, and use the vector editor to draw environment polygons, lines or points.

8)

Click the

button to close the editor.

Note: Like other vector layers, it is easily possible to save the generated traffic map. Points can be seen as traffic hotspots.

VII. Importing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE User Profile Traffic Map

In the U-Net, user profile traffic maps can be defined in any type of project (GSM/GPRS/EDGE, UMTS or CDMA/CDMA2000). The vector data (points, lines, polygonal shapes) are expected to directly link a dedicated user profile, mobility and traffic density. The way to get user profile traffic maps consists in either importing vector files (MapInfo (MIF,MID), Arcview (SHP), Autocad (DXF)) and using them as traffic maps or creating vectors with the vector editor and assign them some traffic information. To import a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic map by drawing, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Traffic folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Select the New map command from the menu. Choose the map based on user profiles (vector) option in the Create a traffic map open window. 5) Press the button to validate.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-71

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

6) 7) 8)

Locate the file to be imported and click the

button.

Choose the Traffic option from the menu in the open File import window. Press the button.

A dialog box is displayed to configure traffic vector data. 9) Click the Traffic tab. vector map, their mobility types (km/h) and their densities (number of users/km2 for polygons and number of user/km for lines). You can decide the type of information that you want to use to define the traffic characteristics, either a field described in the file (by field option in the defined column) or a value directly user-definable in the U-Net (by value option in the defined column). The first method can be used only if the file you are importing contains attributes providing information about the user profile, mobility or density. In this case, select in the choice column a suitable field for each data (user profile, mobility and density). The U-Net lists all the attributes described in the file. The attributes of the source file cannot be modified. Using this method, each traffic polygon or linear is assigned specific characteristics (user profile, mobility or density). 10) In the Traffic fields part, specify the user profiles to be considered on the traffic

Note: Take care to define in The U-Net user profiles and mobility types described in traffic file with exact spelling.

The second way is useful when traffic files contain no attribute. Therefore, you may assign manually user profiles, mobility types and densities created in The U-Net. Select in the choice column user profile and mobility listed in GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder and specifies manually a global density for all the polygons. Beforehand, just make sure to define in GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters the internal data like user profile and mobility you want to allocate. Here, all the polygons are described by global characteristics (user profile, mobility or density). 11) In the clutter weighting part, assign a weight to each clutter class. Thus, the U-Net allows you to spread traffic inside the polygons according to the clutter weighting defined for the whole subfolder. The spreading operation (using a raster step) will be carried out during the simulation process. 12) Press OK.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-72

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: Importing a file as a traffic map can be also made through the generic import (selection of the Traffic type in the appropriate menu). During the import procedure, if the imported user profiles or mobility types are not currently part of the existing user profiles or mobility types, The U-Net warns you about the fact that these may not be correctly taken into account as traffic data. Path and description are stored in the external user configuration file.

VIII. Managing GSM/GPRS/EDGE User Profile Traffic Maps

Table 6-30 lists two ways of accessing the properties of an existing user profile traffic map. Table 6-30 Accessing the properties of an existing user profile traffic map Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Method 1 Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Traffic folder by clicking the the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the General tab to either embed the file into the atl project, to relocate the map by the definition of the appropriate coordinate system, by imposing sorts on the vector organization or filters on the vector display. 7) 8) Click the Table tab to manage the content of the vector. Click the Traffic tab to re-associate vector fields and The U-Net internal traffic fields, and to impose subscriber clutter weighting using this map for the traffic analysis. 9) Click the Display tab to open the The U-Net generic display dialog. 10) Press OK or Apply. button in front of it.

Right-click the related user profile traffic map folder to open

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-73

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Method 2 6) 7)

Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the it. Double-click the related user profile traffic map folder. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the General tab to either embed the file into the atl project, to relocate the map by the definition of the appropriate coordinate system, by imposing sorts on the vector organization or filters on the vector display. Click the Table tab to manage the content of the vector. Click the Traffic tab to re-associate vector fields and The U-Net internal traffic fields, and to impose subscriber clutter weighting using this map for the traffic analysis. 8) 9) Click the Display tab to open the The U-Net generic display dialog. Press OK or Apply. button in front of

Note: The U-Net provides the possibility to display the cumulated traffic when you work on several traffic map(s), whatever there types are.

IX. Examples of GSM/GPRS/EDGE User Profile Traffic Data

Structure of two vector traffic files is described hereafter. Niceregion.mif consists of eleven polygons representing the Nice region. Each polygon is characterized by a user profile, the services offered to subscribers, their mobility types and densities. Densities are stated in number of subscribers per km2. Highway.mif represents a highway (linear) where density corresponds to a number of subscribers per km, as listed in Table 6-31. Table 6-31 Niceregion.mif Name User profile Hinterland Rural user
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-74

Services used

MobilityA

DensityA

MobilityB

DensityB

Speech

90 km/h

Pedestrian

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Name

User profile

Services used

MobilityA

DensityA

MobilityB

DensityB

Village

Rural user

Speech

50 km/h

10

Pedestrian

Corniche

Rural user

Speech

50 km/h

10

Pedestrian

20

Rural

Rural user

Speech

90 km/h

Pedestrian

Villages

Rural user

Speech

50 km/h

10

Pedestrian

10

Nice

Urban user

Speech, Web, Simple messaging, Video conferencing

Pedestrian

700

50 km/h

100

Nice airport

Urban user

Speech, Web, Simple messaging, Video conferencing

Pedestrian

700

50 km/h

100

Nice surroundi ngs Rural

Rural user

Speech

50 km/h

100

90 km/h

100

Rural user

Speech

90 km/h

Pedestrian

Villages

Rural user

Speech

50 km/h

10

Pedestrian

Nice center

Urban user

Speech, Web, Simple messaging, Video conferencing

Pedestrian

4000

Pedestrian

With the user profile traffic import procedure, it is possible to associate (Traffic tab of the properties dialog): To user profile: either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the User profile field of the vector (by field), with a different definition for each polygon. To mobility: either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the MobilityA (resp. MobilityB) field of the vector (by field), with a different definition for each polygon.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-75

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

To density: either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the DensityA (resp. Density B) field of the vector (by field), with a different definition for each polygon, as listed in Table 6-32. Table 6-32 Highway.mif ID User_profile Service used Density Mobility Speech 400 120 km/h

highway Driver

With the user profile traffic import procedure, it is possible to associate (Traffic tab of the properties dialog): To user profile: either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the User_profile field of the vector (by field), with a different definition for each polygon. To mobility: either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the Mobility field of the vector (by field), with a different definition for each polygon. To density: either a global value (by value) for all the polygons or the Density field of the vector (by field), with a different definition for each polygon.

X. Exporting a GSM/GPRS/EDGE User Profile Traffic Map

Like the other GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic map types (environment, live traffic or user density), it is possible to export user profile traffic maps. To export a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic map, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Traffic folder by clicking the menu. Click the Save as... option from the open menu. Define the format, the directory path and the name to give to the file to be exported. Possible formats are Arcview (.shp), MapInfo (.mif) and the The U-Net internal format (.agd). 6) Click Save. button. Right-click the User profile traffic map folder to open the associated shortcut

XI. Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Live Traffic Map per Sector

This kind of traffic map requires coverage by transmitter prediction study. Then, the U-Net expects on each transmitter service area, a number of Erlangs in case of speech service and rate values (kbps) for packet-switched services. Note: It is possible to define either one map per service or one map with all services.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-76

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Then, the traffic cartography is built without connection with the initial coverage prediction. This map consists of polygons provided with the same features as the user profile traffic polygons. The definition of GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic maps can be made either from a direct creation on the basis of coverage by transmitter study previously calculated or by importing a file. To create a GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic map, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Traffic folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Select the New map command from the menu. Choose the map based on transmitters and services option in the Create a traffic map open window. 5) 6) Press the button to validate.

Select the prediction study to be considered for traffic distribution. Only coverage per transmitter studies can be used. A table where you can indicate the live traffic spread over the transmitter service areas is available. It consists of a column dedicated to transmitters and several columns for the different services previously defined in the GSM/EGPRS parameters folder. In the TX_ID column, select each line, click the arrow and choose a transmitter in the list. Enter Erlangs for speech service and rate values (kbit/s) for packet-switched services for each transmitter. You may also use the copy and paste commands (respectively Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V) from an Excel file already containing the expected columns. Finally, it is possible to import an ASCII text file (only .txt format is supported) containing the expected columns. To do this, click the Actions button and choose Import.

7) 8)

Press OK. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open dialogs. The U-Net displays the property dialog of the map.

9)

Click the Traffic tab of the opened property dialog and define terminal and mobility ratios by entering percentage values for each terminal and each mobility type (they will be used in the traffic scenario). You may also specify a weight per clutter class to spread traffic over each coverage area. The spreading operation will be performed during the traffic distribution.

10) Click OK. The U-Net creates an object called Traffic map per transmitter in the Traffic folder of the Geo tab.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-77

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: The map only contains the service areas of transmitters listed in the table. Then, the traffic map shape is fixed and cannot be modified; it is not possible to add new transmitters. On the other hand, it is possible to modify traffic values (Erlangs, throughputs) afterwards in the table related to the map.

XII. Importing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Live Traffic Map per Sector

The definition of GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic maps can be made either from a direct creation on the basis of a coverage by transmitter study previously calculated or by importing a file. You may import files with AGD format. This is the The U-Net geographic data internal format. This kind of file must be created from The U-Net (export of a coverage by transmitter study in the AGD format). To import a GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic map by drawing, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Traffic folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Select the New map command from the menu. Choose the map based on transmitters and services option in the Create a traffic map open window. 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) Press the button to validate. button to validate.

Locate the file to be imported and click the

Choose the Traffic option from the menu in the open File import window. Select the option Embed in the document to include the file in the .atl document. When this option is not selected, the U-Net just memorizes the file directory path. In the coordinate systems part, the U-Net summarizes the projection coordinate system you have defined in the .atl project. In the box just below, specify the coordinate system of the file you are importing (click Change... to choose another coordinate system).

10) Press the

button to validate.

The U-Net displays the property dialog of the map. 11) Click the Traffic tab of the opened property dialog and define terminal and mobility ratios by entering percentage values for each terminal and each mobility type (they will be used in the traffic scenario). You may also specify a weight per

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-78

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

clutter class to spread traffic over each coverage area. The spreading operation will be performed during the traffic distribution. 12) Click OK. 13) Then, open the table related to the map to define the traffic existing inside each polygon. Therefore, for each row of the table, enter Erlangs for speech service and rate values (kbit/s) for packet-switched services. 14) Close the table.

Note: It is also possible to import a traffic map per transmitter using the standard import procedure (Import command in the File menu). In this case, you must specify in the import dialog that you want to import the file in the Traffic folder.

XIII. Managing GSM/GPRS/EDGE Live Traffic Maps

Management features of vector maps are available for traffic maps per transmitter: standard graphical features are available in the Display tab of the map property dialog and each map has a corresponding table. This table contains the transmitters used to build the map and traffic information for each of them. Table 6-33 lists two ways of access the properties of an existing live traffic map.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-79

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Table 6-33 Accessing the properties of an existing live traffic map Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Method 1 Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Traffic folder by clicking the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the General tab to either embed the file into the atl project, to relocate the map by the definition of the appropriate coordinate system, by imposing sorts on the vector organization or filters on the vector display. 7) 8) Click the Table tab to manage the content of the vector. Click the Traffic tab to re-define terminal and mobility ratios and to impose subscriber clutter weighting using this map for the traffic analysis. 9) Click the Display tab to open the U-Net generic display dialog. button in front of it.

Right-click the related live traffic map folder to open the

10) Press OK or Apply. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Method 2 6) 7) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the button in front of it.

Double-click the related live traffic map folder. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the General tab to either embed the file into the atl project, to relocate the map by the definition of the appropriate coordinate system, by imposing sorts on the vector organization or filters on the vector display. Click the Table tab to manage the content of the vector. Click the Traffic tab to re-define terminal and mobility ratios and to impose subscriber clutter weighting using this map for the traffic analysis.

8) 9)

Click the Display tab to open the U-Net generic display dialog. Press OK or Apply.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-80

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

To open the table related to an existing live traffic map per sector, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Traffic folder by clicking on the menu. Click in the menu on Open. button in front of it. Right-click the related live traffic map folder to open the associated shortcut

The management of the table is generic and can be accessed from the Table tab of the properties dialog or from the Table shortcut menu (Fields command). Sorts and Filters features on the display are also available.

Note: The U-Net provides the possibility to display the cumulated traffic when working on several traffic map(s), whatever there types are.

XIV. Exporting a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Live Traffic Map per Sector

Like the other GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic map types (environment, user profile or user density), it is possible to export live traffic maps. To export a GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic map, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Traffic folder by clicking the button. Right-click the live traffic map folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click the Save as... option from the open menu. Define the format, the directory path and the name to give to the file to be exported. Possible format is the U-Net internal format (.agd). Click Save.

XV. Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Density Map

This type of traffic maps allows the user to express the traffic density directly in the form of a map using graphical vector layers. The user can add vector layers and draw the regions with different traffic densities. The user can also specify the distribution of Terminal types, Mobility types, and Services for the map based on traffic density. Note: It is possible to create multiple maps based on traffic density with different distribution of Terminal types, Mobility types and Services.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-81

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

The definition of GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic maps can be made either from a direct creation by drawing or by importing a raster (32-bit format) file. To create a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic map, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Traffic folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Select the New map command from the menu. Choose the Map based on densities option in the Create a traffic map open window. 5) Press the the Traffic folder. 6) Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open dialogs. The U-Net displays the property dialog of the map. 7) In the Traffic tab, you can describe the distribution of different types of traffic. Specify the percentages of the distribution of different Terminal types, Mobility types and Services in the map (they will be used in the traffic scenario). You can also manage the Display properties of the map from the Display tab. button to validate. The U-Net adds a subfolder in

Note: The map contains traffic density per pixel directly entered by the user. So, if the user has entered a traffic density of 100 users per km2, The U-Net will allocate x users per pixel (depending on the pixel size) and these x users will be distributed according to the percentages given in the Traffic tab of the maps properties window. It is possible to modify traffic distribution (Terminal types, Mobility types and Services) afterwards in the properties of the map.

8) 9)

The U-Net creates an object called Traffic density map in the Traffic folder of the Geo tab. A vector layer is automatically created in this subfolder. Edit this vector layer to define geographical areas with a certain traffic density. To change the traffic density, you have to open the vector layer table and enter values in the Traffic density (Density) column.

10) Close the table.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-82

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: You can turn the vector editor ON and OFF either through the Edit... menu in the Traffic density Maps shortcut menu or through the Edit menu in the vector layers shortcut menu. In this type of traffic maps, you are not asked to specify a clutter weighting as it is already the traffic density per pixel that is stored in the map.

XVI. Importing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE User Density Traffic Map

The definition of GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic maps can be made either from a direct creation by drawing or by importing a raster (32-bit format) file. The supported formats are BIL (only 32-bit), BMP, PlaNET, TIFF, ISTAR, Erdas Imagine formats To import a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic map, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Traffic folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Select the New map command from the menu. Choose the map based on densities option in the Create a traffic map open window. 5) 6) 7) Press the button to validate. button to validate,

Locate the file to be imported and click the

Choose the Traffic density option from the menu in the open File import window.

8) 9)

Press the

button to validate.

Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open dialogs. The U-Net displays the property dialog of the map.

10) In the Traffic tab, you can describe the distribution of different types of traffic. Specify the percentages of the distribution of different Terminal types, Mobility types and Services in the map (they will be used in the traffic scenario). You can also manage the Display properties of the map from the Display tab. 11) Click OK.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-83

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: Importing a file as a traffic map can be also made through the generic import (selection of the Traffic density type in the appropriate menu). The map contains traffic density per pixel directly entered by the user. So, if the user has entered a traffic density of 100 users per km2, The U-Net will allocate x users per pixel (depending on the pixel size) and these x users will be distributed according to the percentages given in the Traffic tab of the maps properties window. It is possible to modify traffic distribution (Terminal types, Mobility types and Services) afterwards in the properties of the map. In this type of traffic maps, you are not asked to specify a clutter weighting as it is already the traffic density per pixel that is stored in the map.

XVII. Managing GSM/GPRS/EDGE User Density Traffic Maps

Management features of vector maps are available for traffic density maps: limited set of graphical features are available in the Display tab of the map property dialog and each map has a corresponding table. This table contains the traffic density values used. Table 6-34 lists two ways of accessing the properties of an existing user density traffic map. Table 6-34 Accessing the properties of an existing user density traffic map Method 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 1 5) 6) 7) 8) Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Traffic folder by clicking the the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on Properties. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the Traffic tab to re-define Terminal, Mobility and Services ratios using this map for the traffic analysis. Click the Display tab to open the U-Net generic display dialog. Press OK or Apply. button in front of it.

Right-click the related User density traffic map folder to open

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-84

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Method 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5) 6) 7)

Step Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Traffic folder by clicking the button in front of it.

Double-click the related live traffic map folder. Use what's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Click the Traffic tab to re-define Terminal, Mobility and Services ratios using this map for the traffic analysis. Click the Display tab to open the U-Net generic display dialog. Press OK or Apply.

To open the table related to an existing user density traffic map, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Traffic folder by clicking the button in front of it. button in front of it. Expand the User density Traffic subfolder by clicking the Click in the menu on Open.

Right-click the vector layer to open the associated shortcut menu.

The management of the table is generic and can be accessed from the Table tab of the vector properties dialog or from the Table shortcut menu (Fields command). Sorts and filters features on the display are also available.

Note: The U-Net provides the possibility to export the cumulated traffic when working on several traffic map(s), whatever there types are.

XVIII. Exporting a GSM/GPRS/EDGE User Density Traffic Map

Like the other GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic map types (environment, user profile or live traffic), it is possible to export user density traffic maps. To export a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic map, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Expand the Traffic folder by clicking the menu. Click the Save as... option from the open menu. button. Right-click the User density traffic map folder to open the associated shortcut

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-85

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

5)

Define the format, the directory path and the name to give to the file to be exported. Possible format are BIL (only 32 bit) and BMP formats.

6)

Click Save.

XIX. Exporting the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Cumulated Traffic

The U-Net allows the user to export the cumulated traffic generated with all the traffic maps in the environment. The cumulated traffic can be exported in BIL (only 32 bit) and BMP formats. These exported files can later be imported and used as traffic density maps in the U-Net. To export a raster file containing the cumulated traffic density, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Traffic folder to open the associated shortcut menu. Click in the menu on the Export cumulated traffic command. Specify the directory where you want to save the exported file, the file name and the file type in the opened dialog box. Select the area to consider, the terminal, mobility and services to be filtered on the selected traffic map(s), and the raster resolution. Press OK.

The exported traffic map will be made of pixels of: Erlangs/km for circuit services Kbps/km2 for packet services

6.5.3 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Analysis

Traffic analysis allows the user to analyze the traffic from maps at the transmitter level. This feature, in general, distributes the traffic from the maps to all the transmitters in each layer according to the compatibility criteria defined in the transmitter, services, mobility, terminal items. More specifically, this feature allows The U-Net to allocate the traffic to each transmitter of each layer (micro/macro, multiband, and so on) taking into account the criteria defined in the user profiles and the transmitters. For example, an EGPRS enabled transmitter will be allocated the data user traffic while a transmitter not having the EGPRS functionality will only carry the GSM voice traffic. Similarly, a user using a GSM900 band mobile phone will not be allocated to a transmitter that only functions on the DCS1800 band, and so on and so forth. This feature allows the user to create multiple traffic distributions with different criteria and to later analyze the network according to any of them.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-86

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: The traffic analysis is a mandatory step before dimensioning. The outputs of a traffic analysis can be used for dimensioning and KPI calculation, and the determination of coverage study reports and neighbor allocation is based on a default capture.

I. Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Capture

To perform a traffic analysis, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. , refresh the clutter weighting values. If the symbol before the traffic folder is Right-click the Traffic analysis folder and choose New in the associated shortcut menu. The property dialog opens. 4) Click the available tabs to set the parameters of the currently created traffic distribution. The General tab: Here, you may type the name of the traffic analysis, add some comments and filter the transmitters which you want to spread the traffic over. The Source traffic tab: The U-Net lists in this tab all the traffic maps available in the .atl document. Select this (or these) to be considered in the traffic analysis. It is possible to globally scale the traffic maps with a certain multiplying factor. This factor enables you to increase the traffic request of the map without changing the traffic map description. The Condition tab: Parameters available in the Condition part is used to determine each transmitter service area which the U-Net will distribute traffic and then, the traffic demand. Service areas of subcells are determined using the option Best signal level per HCS layer, a 5dB margin and the subcell reception threshold as lower threshold. In case of data traffic, you may base analysis on C/I. In this case, the U-Net uses the charts rate=f(C) and rate=f(C/I) to evaluate the number of timeslots used for the traffic demand and the minimum rate reduction factor. Two options are possible: Worst case between C and C/I: For each C and C/I process, the coding scheme related to the computed threshold is extracted (from the related GPRS/EGPRS equipment). The minimal value is kept. Interpolation between C/N and C/(I+N): For each C and C/I process, the coding scheme related to the computed threshold is extracted (from the related GPRS/EGPRS equipment). The C thresholds are internally converted to C/N thresholds (where N is the receiver noise defined in the Predictions folder

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-87

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

property dialog), to be indexed with the C/(I+N) value. C/I thresholds are also indexed with the C/(I+N) value. The maximal value is kept. The demand in packet timeslots is then extracted from the computed coding scheme. 5) Confirm by clicking Calculate in the Condition tab. Or click OK to close the dialog and choose OK in the U-Net dialog to calculate the traffic capture. After completing calculations, the U-Net adds two new tabs named Results per transmitter and Results per subcell in the property dialog producing the outputs of the traffic analysis.

Note: C/I standard deviation values, defined per clutter class, are used when performing a traffic capture based on C/I or C/(I+N).

II. GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Capture Outputs

After completing calculations, the U-Net adds two new tabs named Results per transmitter and Results per subcell in the property dialog. In the Results per transmitter tab, the U-Net indicates the traffic distributed to each transmitter. It provides, for each transmitter: The circuit traffic demand (in Erlangs) and the average demand of circuit timeslots The number of timeslots to be used to match the circuit traffic demand depends whether the transmitter subcells support full or half rate. The packet traffic demand (in kbps) It is the total integrated traffic demand in kilobits per second that is generated by the packet switched users within the coverage area of that transmitter. Average demand of packet timeslots The number of timeslots to be used to match the packet traffic demand depends on the maximum throughput that a packet timeslot can support. The average packet timeslot capacity (in kbps) This parameter is calculated according to the RF conditions at each bin/pixel of the transmitter coverage area. The user can define whether to base this calculation on carrier power or on interferences (C or C/I). The timeslot capacity is computed for each bin and then averaged over the transmitter coverage area to provide an average timeslot capacity in kbps. In the Results per subcell tab, the U-Net details the distributed traffic per subcell, service, terminal and mobility. For each subcell of each transmitter (except BCCH subcell, which is supposed to capture the same traffic than TCH subcell), the U-Net
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-88

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

indicates the type(s) of traffic assigned to it (service, mobility, terminal). Then, for each set (subcell, service, and mobility, terminal), it displays: The packet switched traffic demand in kilobits per second assigned to that subcell. The circuit switched traffic demand in Erlangs assigned to that subcell. The average demand in number of timeslots that match the circuit switched and packet switched traffic demand. In case of circuit switched services, it depends whether the subcell supports half-rate traffic. If the percentage of half-rate traffic ratio of the subcell is set to 0, the average demand in circuit timeslots will be the same as the traffic demand in Erlangs and the number of used timeslots will equal the traffic demand. If there is a certain percentage of half-rate traffic, the number of used timeslots will depend on the percentage of traffic using half-rate connections. In case of packet switched services, the demand in packet timeslots depends on the maximum throughput that a timeslot can support. Hence, it depends on the average timeslot capacity within the transmitter coverage area, which in turn depends on the RF propagation conditions. Formulas and calculation details of results are available in the Technical Reference Guide.

III. Using a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Analysis

Different tools are available on an existing GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic analysis. From its shortcut menu (right-click), you may: Use standard management features (Delete, Rename). Open the property dialog of the traffic analysis to check analysis parameters and results (Properties). Recalculate the traffic analysis (Recalculate). Select the traffic analysis as the default traffic distribution to be taken into account in coverage study reports and neighbor allocation (Default). This particular captured traffic is assigned a little icon describing it as the default distribution ). for studies (distributions other than the default are assigned this icon: Perform dimensioning of network based on a traffic analysis (Dimensioning). Calculate KPIs of a real network based on the traffic analysis (KPI calculation, and so on).

6.6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network Dimensioning

This section describes the following: Setting GSM/GPRS/EDGE Dimensioning Models Key Performance Indicators: Definitions Dimensioning GSM/GPRS/EDGE Transmitters
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-89

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Dimensioning Outputs in GSM/GPRS/EDGE Steps of the Dimensioning Process in GSM/GPRS/EDGE

6.6.1 Setting GSM/GPRS/EDGE Dimensioning Models

Dimensioning models are provided at the GSM/GPRS/EDGE parameters level. This item is the basis of GSM/GPRS/EDGE dimensioning and quality analysis process. A user can define a dimensioning model by providing the simple parameters in the properties window. To set parameters of a dimensioning model, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE parameters folder by clicking the Expand the Dimensioning models subfolder by clicking the button.

button.

Right-click a dimensioning model and select Properties in the shortcut menu. These parameters define the system level conditions to be taken into account when dimensioning the system or when analyzing the quality of service (QoS) of the system.

4)

Open the General tab and indicate dimensioning directives: The default upper limit on the number of TRXs that can be placed in a transmitter.

Note: It is possible to impose a specific maximum number of TRXs per transmitter.

The queuing model for GSM voice calls (Erlang B or Erlang C). The lower limit on the number of dedicated packet switched timeslots that can be used by the transmitter. The upper limit on the number of TRXs that can be added in order for the subcell to fulfill the packet traffic demand. The Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) to be taken into account when performing the dimensioning process. 5) Open the Quality charts tab including the curves of throughput reduction factor, delay, and blocking probability used for the dimensioning process of packet switching traffic. All these three curves are against the system load, which is defined as the ratio of used packet timeslots to the number of timeslots available to perform data communication (packet calls). The U-Net provides a basic set of curves by default for these parameters. The user can always modify or replace the quality curves with curves generated through some other software tool using simulations or analytical approaches.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-90

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: The quality model curves should not be modified haphazardly, as it may cause the dimensioning and quality analysis feature to malfunction. The curve for delay against network load is left to be entered by the user for the moment. The curve of blocking probability against network load is for a user multiplexing factor of 8 (default value). The user multiplexing factor corresponds to the number of GPRS/EDGE users that can be multiplexed on a timeslot. This field has been added in the database structure of the document template GSM_EGPRS (EGPRSDimensioningModel table) but it is not used for the moment. This feature will be completely implemented in a later release.

6)

Click OK.

Note: When the properties dialog is open from the explorer, it is possible to scroll through the properties dialogs of different dimensioning models within the subfolder without closing. To do this, use the The buttons.

buttons enable you to switch back to the first/previous dimensioning

model properties dialog within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the properties of the first item of a subfolder. The buttons enable you to move forward to the next/last dimensioning model properties dialog within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the properties of the last item of a subfolder. Subfolders are organized following the grouping/sorting/filtering configuration.

6.6.2 Key Performance Indicators: Definitions

The KPIs for GPRS/EDGE packet switched traffic dimensioning are the minimum required throughput, blocking probability and delay. Table 6-35 lists the definitions of the key performance indicators.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-91

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Table 6-35 KPI definitions KPI Definition Throughput from a GPRS/EDGE users perspective is the average maximum throughput perceived at the mobile terminal during a data call. If there are more than one user multiplexed on the same timeslot, which occurs when the system accommodates many users, each multiplexed user will perceive a reduction in his throughput per timeslot due to this multiplexing. Minimum required throughput This reduction in throughput is depicted by the Reduction Factor. A Reduction Factor of 1, or almost 1, means that each user is communicating using the maximum throughput that a timeslot can offer in a given environment (the maximum throughput per timeslot depends, in its turn, on the carrier power or C/I ratio at a given location). As the system starts being loaded with users, the reduction factor starts decreasing depicting the decrease in throughput per user. Each user communicating over a packet switching protocol experiences a delay that is due to the buffering of packets, the resource allocation, and transmission delay. This delay can be restricted to a maximum allowable limit within the properties of a service. This delay and the blocking probability in the EGPRS system are closely related, meaning that a user starts to experience more delay in service when the system is near Blocking probability and delay saturation and the incoming packets are placed in a waiting queue as there are no resources available for immediate transfer. This buffering of packets is related to the load of the system. Hence the blocking probability is the probability that an incoming packet be placed in a waiting queue. And the delay is the average delay this packet will undergo due to the blocking as it waits its turn for being transmitted as soon as some resources are liberated.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-92

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: The term system load refers to the ratio of the number of used packet timeslots to the number of packet switching (shared + dedicated) timeslots available in the system. It has roughly the same concept as traffic load in the GSM.

6.6.3 Dimensioning GSM/GPRS/EDGE Transmitters

The U-Net allows the user to dimension a GSM/EGPRS network fully and thoroughly. The user can work with multiple traffic maps, whose traffic has been distributed over the transmitters and network layers, to dimension the transmitters according to GSM voice and EGPRS data traffic carried. Only one traffic capture can be used for dimensioning computations at a time. To run a dimensioning calculation, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the Traffic analysis folder by clicking the network, to open the shortcut menu. Select the Dimensioning command in the opened menu. In the Dimensioning dialog, choose the dimensioning model to be used for computations. You can select the columns you want to display in the table. To do this, click the Displayed columns button and select information you wish to display. 6) Click Calculate. button. Right-click a Traffic capture item, according to which you want to dimension the

The U-Net sums up dimensioning inputs and outputs in the table. The U-Net displays rows of the table in red when the number of required TRXs for a transmitter exceeds the maximum number of TRXs per transmitter. Note: Dimensioning is based on a traffic capture. Modifications of traffic map(s), traffic parameters and transmitter properties (for example calculation area, GPRS/EDGE equipment...) have an influence on the traffic capture. Therefore, if you modify some of these data, you must recalculate the traffic capture before performing dimensioning. The maximum number of TRXs per transmitter can be defined globally at the dimensioning model level, as well as individually for each transmitter. The number of required TRXs can be manually entered in the subcells (table or from each transmitter property) and taken into account by the AFP tool.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-93

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

6.6.4 Dimensioning Outputs in GSM/GPRS/EDGE

After a dimensioning procedure, for each subcell of each transmitter, The U-Net gives a list of results. All the columns of the result window are detailed below with their descriptions and significations: Transmitter and TRX type These two columns define the subcell for which the results are stated in the other columns. For each transmitter, the results are divided over the TRX types it carries (for example BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER). Required number of TRXs This is the principal result of the dimensioning process. This column states the total number of TRXs required accommodating the totality of the circuit switched and packet switched traffic assigned to that subcell considering the Quality of Service criteria defined for both. Required number of shared/circuit/packet timeslots This is the distribution of timeslots within each subcell according to the timeslot configurations defined for different TRX types. Shared timeslots are supposed to be available for both traffic types, while the other two types are dedicated and cannot be inter-assigned. Load (%) This is the system load calculated as a percentage ratio of the used packet switched timeslots to the total packet switched timeslots (shared + dedicated) available in the system. It is a very important parameter as it defines the overall ability of the system to accommodate more packet switched traffic and its response to rise in packet switched traffic demand. All the quality curves of the dimensioning model are plotted against this parameter and it is used to compute the resulting KPIs through these quality charts. Multiplexing factor This is the user multiplexing factor or the TBF multiplexing factor (Temporary Block Flow). This is one of the inputs to the dimensioning process and describes the number of packet switched service users that can be multiplexed over one timeslot. Maximum number of TRXs per transmitter This is also one of the inputs and a limiting parameter for the dimensioning process. This is the maximum number of TRXs that a transmitter can support. This is a limit provided by the equipment manufacturer. This value is indicated in the dimensioning model properties. Target rate of traffic overflow (%) Another input to the process. This parameter defines the percentage of traffic that is allowed to overflow from one subcell in case the traffic assigned to this subcell is more than maximum traffic that it can accommodate with the maximum number of TRXs it is allowed to carry. It is specified in the subcell properties.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-94

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Half-rate traffic ratio (%) Again another input to the dimensioning process. This is the percentage of traffic within a subcell that uses half-rate access. It is defined in the subcell properties.

Note: When the Target rate of traffic overflow and the Half-Rate traffic ratio values are different for BCCH and TCH subcells, The U-Net takes the BCCH subcell values.

Packet traffic demand (kbps) It is the total integrated traffic demand in kilobits per second that is generated by the packet switched users within the coverage area of that transmitter. Average demand in packet timeslots The number of timeslots to be used to match the packet traffic demand depends on the maximum throughput that a packet timeslot can support. Average number of timeslots per connection (packet) This is another input describing the average number of timeslots being used by the packet switched traffic users while accessing different services. Packet switched services allow up to a maximum of 8 timeslots per connection. The average number of timeslots per connection corresponds to the average number of downlink timeslots, which mobile terminals can simultaneously communicate over. Circuit traffic demand (Erlangs) It is the total circuit switched traffic demand for that transmitter in Erlangs. This is computed through integrating the circuit switched traffic Erlangs per bin within the transmitter coverage area.

Note: In case of concentric cells, the traffic demanded on TCH subcells is different from the one evaluated during the traffic capture. It is calculated from the traffic demand of the capture and the effective rate of traffic overflow (instead of the maximum rate used in traffic analysis).

Average demand in circuit timeslots This average considers the effect of Half-rate circuit switched traffic carried by the transmitter. The average demand in circuit timeslots takes into account the fact that 2 half-rate users are equivalent to 1 full-rate user in terms of Erlangs of traffic.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-95

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Average number of timeslots per connection (circuit) This is another input data for the dimensioning process according to the circuit switched services. For the moment the tool only models GSM or voice calls using 1 timeslot per connection. In the future, when the tool will be able to model the HSCSD data calls, this parameter will be used more effectively. The number of timeslots per connection is 1 in case of full rate traffic, otherwise it depends on the half rate traffic ratio. Served circuit traffic (Erlangs) This is an output of the process that gives the circuit switched traffic in Erlangs that the subcell will serve after the current dimensioning results are applied. The served circuit traffic is the difference of the circuit traffic demand and the effective overflowed circuit traffic. Served packet traffic (kbps) This is an output of the process that gives the packet switched traffic in kbps that the subcell will serve after the current dimensioning results are applied. The served packet traffic is the difference of the packet traffic demand and the effective overflowed packet traffic. Effective rate of traffic overflow (%) This is the resulting traffic overflow rate for each subcell. For a GSM network this would be the same as the resulting blocking probability. For a more varied network, this parameter includes overflow traffic of all the services. The effective rate of traffic overflow corresponds to the rejected packet traffic due to missing packet timeslots. In case of Erlang B, the effective rate of traffic overflow corresponds to the effective blocking rate. This value is deduced from the required number of circuit timeslots (shared + dedicated) and the circuit traffic demand in Erlang B tables. In case of Erlang C, the effective rate of traffic overflow is zero except if the maximum number of TRXs is exceeded. The effective blocking rate is inferred from the required number of circuit timeslots (shared + dedicated) and the circuit traffic demand in Erlang C tables. Circuit blocking rate (/delay) (%) This is the GoS output of the network considering only the circuit switched traffic. This can be either the rate with which calls are blocked or delayed according to the Erlang model (B or C) selected for the dimensioning. Minimum throughput reduction factor (%) This is one of the criteria for packet switched traffic dimensioning. It is computed through the data defined in the services properties, that is minimum service throughput, the maximum number of timeslots per connection, the required availability, and the timeslot capacity per pixel of the subcell coverage area. This parameter is in fact computed at the Traffic Analysis step but displayed in the dimensioning results, as it is more relevant here. The minimum throughput reduction factor is the least throughput reduction factor
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-96

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

that is allowable for a given service in a subcell. The minimum throughput reduction factor is stated in percentage. It corresponds to the highest reduction (lowest percentage) in throughput that can still guarantee the service availability with the minimum permissible rate (defined for the service). Throughput reduction Factor(%) This is the resulting throughput reduction factor calculated from the quality charts according to the load and available connections for each subcell. This reduction factor must be greater than the minimum reduction factor for the packet switched services to be satisfactorily available in the subcell. Maximum delay(s) This is the input parameter defined for each service that implies that the service will only be satisfactory if the actual delay remains less the maximum delay. Delay (s) This is the KPI computed through the quality charts according to the load and the number of connections available. It must not exceed the maximum delay defined for the service to be satisfactorily available in the subcell. Maximum Packet Blocking Rate (/delay) (%) This parameter, defined in the service properties, is the maximum blocking probability acceptable for the service. Packet blocking rate (/delay) (%) Result of the dimensioning process that should remain less than the input parameter above in order for the service to be satisfactory. It is also derived from the quality charts according the load and the number of available connections.

6.6.5 Steps of the Dimensioning Process in GSM/GPRS/EDGE

Let us assume we have a subcell with circuit switched and packet switched traffic. The U-Net evaluates a number of TRXs to have enough circuit timeslots (shared and dedicated) to match the circuit traffic demand with the effective blocking rate. Then, it calculates how many TRXs it must add to match the packet traffic demand. This value is determined for a given packet traffic load from quality charts defined in the dimensioning model. If the dimensioning model takes into account the three KPIs (minimum throughput reduction factor, maximum delay and maximum blocking rate), the number of TRXs to add for packet service is calculated such that it complies with the following conditions: The throughput reduction factor must be more than the minimum throughput reduction factor. The delay and the blocking rate must be respectively lower than the maximum delay and maximum blocking rate.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-97

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

After a computation, click Commit to assign the results to transmitters (required number of TRXs) and subcells (the required number of TRXs, load, required number of shared, circuit and packet timeslots and effective rate of traffic overflow). The U-Net displays rows of the table in red when the number of required TRXs for a transmitter exceeds the maximum number of TRXs per transmitter.

Note: Dimensioning is based on a traffic capture. Modifications of traffic map(s), traffic parameters and transmitter properties (for example, calculation area, GPRS/EGPRS equipment, and so on.) have an influence on the traffic capture. Therefore, if you modify some of these data, you must recalculate the traffic capture before performing dimensioning. Formulas and calculation details of parameters listed in the table are available in the technical reference guide. The maximum number of TRXs per transmitter can be defined globally at the dimensioning model level, as well as individually for each transmitter.

6.7 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Resources Allocation

At this step, GSM/GPRS/EDGE parameters, traffic maps have been defined. A traffic analysis has been performed with a view to dimension the network. The number of needed resources (TRXs) is known. The next step is to define transmitter's neighbors. This can be made manually, but The U-Net proposes an algorithm which allows you to perform it automatically. Allocating transmitter neighbors manually can also be made for external transmitters from a linked network in co-planning. In addition, The U-Net makes easy the visualization of neighborhoods on the active map. An audit tool of the current neighborhood plan is also available. Neighbor definition helps in the Automatic Frequency Planning (AFP) to impose frequency separation constraints on neighbors. Once the neighbors are known, the resource allocation can be made either manually or by using an automatic allocation tool. The constraints on it come from the data model itself, from the user which can impose separation constraints on: Neighbors Within transmitters On transmitters located on unique sites Defined exceptional pairs of subcells And from the different dialogs compose the procedure of the AFP.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-98

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Concerning the AFP features, The U-Net provides a generic AFP interface which is compliant for the use of a specific AFP model. General constraints are imposed in the generic parts and the strategy directives can be set in the specific model itself. This automatic tool will try to reach a best solution respecting also the number of requested resources. Furthermore, this tool can help you for the determination of HSNs, MAIOs, BSICs, SFHs. After the resource allocation, the network can be analyzed thanks to the use of the following tools: A tool to check the frequency plan consistency A tool to check the consistency between transmitters and subcells A channel search tool working on channels, BCCHs and BSICs, The possibility to compute Key Performance Indicators (KPI) on the basis of a traffic capture and a resource allocation. The network is the ready for the study of interfered zones, C/I predictions, and specific E/GPRS studies (coding schemes and throughputs).

6.7.1 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Neighbors

I. Allocating GSM/GPRS/EDGE Transmitter Neighbors Manually
When defined, cell neighbors are a way to optimize the search of possible cells aiming to perform handover from the current coverage area. Allocating neighbors in a network is optional. Defining neighbors helps in imposing constraints for frequency automatic allocation.

Note: Neighbors are not a filter for transmitters being part of interferers. All transmitters in a network take part in interferences on each transmitter. Neighbors of any linked project in co-planning can also be listed and chosen manually.

Manual allocation of GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbors must be performed for each transmitter, one at a time. Table 6-36 lists two ways of allocating the GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbors manually.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-99

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Table 6-36 Manually allocating the GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbors Method 1) 2) 3) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking the it. Right-click the transmitter from which you want to define the neighborhood. Choose the properties option from the shortcut menu. Or double-click the transmitter from which you want to define the neighborhood. 4) 5) Method 1 6) 7) Click the Intra-technology Neighbors tab from the current window. Use what's this help to get information about fields available in the current window. In the displayed window, use the top table. Select the row with symbol . Then in the Neighbors column, click the cell to choose from the scrolling box the desired neighbor. In the scrolling box, the U-Net lists all the transmitters located within a radius of 30 km around the reference transmitter. 8) Click either another cell of the table or the validate and add a new row to the table. 9) 1) 2) When you have completed your entry, click OK. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Choose the Neighbors: Intra-technology Neighbors command from the Transmitters folder shortcut menu. 3) Method 2 4) 5) 6) 7) In the displayed table, use the row with symbol transmitter. Click the cell of the Neighbors column to choose a neighbor. Click another cell of the table to validate and add a new row to the table. When you have completed your entry, click OK. . button to button in front of

Click the cell of the Transmitters column to select a reference

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-100

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: It is also possible to define an importance (between 0 and 1) related to the neighbor. This field presents a general importance of the neighbor. Importance takes into account several neighborhood criteria. It is used in The U-Net Frequency Planning. The importance value varies between 0 and 100%. Neighbors allocated manually have their Importance field forced to the default value of 100%. It is possible to add/remove symmetric neighborhood links at once. To do this, use the commands Symmetries and Delete link and symmetric available in a shortcut menu. This one can be open by right-clicking on the neighbor you have added or you want to delete. It is possible to apply the exceptional pairs (forbidden or forced) directly from this table by right-clicking in it and choosing the related command. Due to the organization of neighborhoods in tables, the copy-paste feature can be used to generate the neighbor table of a global network (or per transmitter). Standard features for managing table contents (Copy/Paste, Delete, and Display columns, Filter, Sort, and Table Fields) are available in a shortcut menu (when right-clicking on column(s)) or record(s) and in the Format, Edit and Records menus. This feature deals with GSM/GPRS/EDGE, CDMA/CDMA2000 and UMTS technologies.

An automatic allocation tool is also available.

II. Defining GSM/GPRS/EDGE Exceptional Pairs of Neighbors

The U-Net enables you to define neighborhood constraints that may be then considered by algorithm during the automatic allocation of neighbors. Table 6-37 lists two ways of defining GSM/GPRS/EDGE exceptional pairs of neighbors.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-101

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Table 6-37 Defining GSM/GPRS/EDGE exceptional pairs of neighbors Method 1) 2) 3) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking the of it. Right-click the transmitter for which you want to define the neighborhood constraints. Choose the properties option from the shortcut menu. Or double-click the transmitter for which you want to define the neighborhood constraints. 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) Click the Intra-technology Neighbors tab. Use Whats this help to get information about fields available in the current window. Method 1 In the displayed window, use the bottom table. Select the row with symbol . button in front

In the Neighbors column, click the cell of the Neighbors column to choose from the scrolling box a neighbor (The U-Net lists all the transmitters located within a radius of 30 km around the reference transmitter) .

9)

Click the cell of the Status column and choose from the menu if you want to forbid or force this neighborhood relationship.

10) Click either another cell of the table, or the to validate and add a new row to the table. 11) When you have completed your entry, click OK. 1) 2) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

button

Choose the Neighbors:Intra-technology exceptional pairs command from the Transmitters folder shortcut menu.

3) 4) Method 2 5) 6) 7) 8)

In the displayed table, use the row with symbol transmitter.

Click the cell of the Transmitters column to select a reference Click the cell of the Neighbors column to choose a neighbor. Click the cell of the Status column and specify if you want to forbid or force this neighborhood relationship. Click another cell of the table to validate and add a new row to the table. When you have completed your entry, click OK.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-102

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: Exceptional pairs are not taken into account during manual neighbor allocation. It is possible to display on the map forced and forbidden neighborhood relationships defined in the Intra-technology Exceptional Pairs table. You may directly define exceptional pairs on the map using CTRL and SHIFT shortcuts.

III. Displaying GSM/GPRS/EDGE Exceptional Pairs of Neighbors on the Map

It is possible to display on the map forced and forbidden neighborhood relationships defined in the Intra-technology Exceptional Pairs table. To display the forced/forbidden neighborhood links of any transmitter, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Click the right side of the Neighbor graphic management toolbar. Select either Forced Neighbors or Forbidden Neighbors in the scrolling list. Click the left side of the Neighbor graphic management Click the desired transmitter to select it on the map. The U-Net displays on the map: The symmetric forced/forbidden neighborhood links with the selected transmitter (reference transmitter). A single black line represents these links. The outwards forced/forbidden neighborhood links (which are not symmetric); they are colored as the reference transmitter. The inwards forced/forbidden neighborhood links (which are not symmetric). Each link has the color of the transmitter involved in the exceptional pair with the selected transmitter. icon. icon from the

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-103

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: The displayed links are based on the exceptional pairs defined in the Intra-technology Exceptional Pairs table. Therefore, you may display them even if you have no current allocation in your .atl document. It is possible to configure the exceptional pairs (symmetric, inwards, outwards) you wish to display on the map. To do this, right-click the transmitters folder and choose the Neighbors: Display... command from the open menu. Finally, when you select a transmitter on the map, the U-Net is able to show the coverage areas of transmitters involved in exceptional pairs with it. You must just display on the map Coverage by transmitter study (with a color display by transmitter) preliminary calculated. You may directly define exceptional pairs on the map using CTRL and SHIFT shortcuts. It is also possible to display inter-technology exceptional pairs on the map.

IV. Allocating GSM/GPRS/EDGE Transmitter Neighbors Automatically

Allocation algorithm permits to automatically allocate neighbors in the current network. To automatically allocate GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbors in a network, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Neighbors: Automatic allocation... command from the open menu. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Set the parameters for the current auto neighbors allocation study.

The automatic allocation of neighbors as follows. We assume a reference transmitter A and a candidate neighbor, transmitter B. When automatic allocation starts, the U-Net checks following conditions: 1) The distance between both transmitters must be less than the user-definable maximum inter-site distance. If the distance between the reference transmitter and the candidate neighbor is greater than this value, then the candidate neighbor is discarded. 2) The calculation options: Force co-site transmitters as neighbors: This option enables you to force transmitters located on the reference transmitter site in the candidate neighbor list. This constraint can be weighted among the others (see after).

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-104

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Force adjacent transmitters as neighbors: This option enables you to force transmitters geographically adjacent to the reference transmitter in the candidate neighbor list. This constraint can be weighted among the others (see after).

Note: Adjacency criterion: Geographically adjacent transmitters are determined on the basis of their Best Server coverage in 2G (GSM GPRS EGPRS) projects. More precisely, a transmitter TXi is considered adjacent to another transmitter TXj if there exists at least one pixel of TXi Best Server coverage area where TXj is the 2nd Best Server. The ranking of the adjacent neighbor transmitter increases with the number of these pixels. When this option is checked, adjacent cells are sorted and listed from the most adjacent to the least, depending on the above criterion. Adjacency is relative to the number of pixels satisfying the criterion. This criterion is only applicable to transmitters belonging to the same HCS layer. The geographic adjacency criterion is not the same in 3G (UMTS WCDMA, CDMA2000) projects.

Force neighbor symmetry: This option enables user to force the reciprocity of a neighborhood link. Therefore, if the reference transmitter is a candidate neighbor of another transmitter, the later will be considered as candidate neighbor of the reference transmitter. Force exceptional pairs: This option enables you to force/forbid some neighborhood relationships. Therefore, you may force/forbid a transmitter to be candidate neighbor of the reference transmitter. Reset neighbors: When selecting the Reset option, the U-Net deletes all the current neighbors and carries out a new neighbor allocation. If not selected, the existing neighbors are kept. 3) There must be an overlapping zone ( probability where: SA is the area where the received signal level from the transmitter A is greater than a minimum signal level. SA is the coverage area of reference transmitter A restricted between two boundaries; the first boundary represents the start of the handover area (best server area of A plus the handover margin named Handover start) and the second boundary shows the end of the handover area (best server area of A plus the margin called Handover end) SB is the coverage area where the candidate transmitter B is the best server. ) with a given cell edge coverage

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-105

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

The U-Net calculates either the percentage of covered area ( the overlapping area

) if the option

Take into account Covered Area is selected, or the percentage of traffic covered on for the option Take into account Covered Traffic. Then, it compares this value to the percentage minimum covered area (minimum percentage of covered area for the option Take into account Covered Area or minimum percentage of covered traffic for the option Take into account Covered Traffic). If this percentage is not exceeded, the candidate neighbor B is discarded.

Figure 6-3 Discarding a candidate neighbor

Note: The margin Handover end must exceed the margin Handover start. The higher the margin Handover end is, the bigger the list of candidate neighbors is.

The coverage condition can be weighted among the others. 4) The importance weighting button opens a dialog where you can define minimum and maximum importance limits for three allocation reasons (co-site, adjacent and coverage reasons). These values are used by the allocation algorithm to rank the neighbors according to the allocation reason and to quantify the neighbor importance. The U-Net lists all neighbors and sorts them by importance value to eliminate some of them from the neighbor list if the maximum number of neighbors to be allocated to each transmitter is exceeded. If we consider the case for which there are 15 candidate neighbors and the maximum number of neighbors to be allocated to the reference transmitter is 8. Among these 15 candidate neighbors, only 8 (having the highest importance values) will be allocated to the reference transmitter. The neighbor importance depends on the neighborhood cause; this value goes from
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-106

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

0 to 100%, as Table 6-38 lists. Table 6-38 Neighbor importance value Neighborhood cause When Only if the Reset option is not selected and in case of a new allocation Only if the Force exceptional pairs option is selected Only if the Force co-site transmitters as neighbors option is selected Only if the Force adjacent transmitters as neighbors option is selected Only if the percentage minimum covered area is exceeded Only if the Force neighbor symmetry option is selected Importance value Existing importance 100%

Existing neighbor

Exceptional pair

Co-site transmitter

(IF) function

Adjacent transmitter Neighborhood relationship that fulfils coverage conditions Symmetric neighborhood relationship

(IF) function

(IF) function

(IF) function

Except forced neighbor case (importance = 100%), priority assigned to each neighborhood cause is now linked to the Importance Function (IF) evaluation. The importance is evaluated through a function (IF), taking into account the following three factors: Co-site factor (C) which is a Boolean factor, Adjacency factor (A) which deals with the percentage of adjacency, Overlapping factor (O) meaning the percentage of overlapping The (IF) function is user-definable in the Min importance and Max importance fields. Details on the (IF) function are available in the Technical Reference Guide.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-107

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: If there is no overlapping between the ranges of each factor, the neighbors will be ranked by neighborhood cause. Using the defaults values for minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbors will be ranked in this order: first co-site neighbors, then adjacent neighbors, and finally neighbors found on overlapping criterion. If ranges of factors overlap each other, the neighbors may not be ranked by neighborhood cause. The ranking between neighbors from the same category will depend on (A) and (O) factors. The default value of Min(O)= 1%, ensures that neighbors selected for symmetry will have an importance greater than 1%. With a value of Min(O)= 0%, neighbors selected for symmetry, will have an importance field greater than 0% only if there is some overlapping. Click .

In the Results part, the U-Net provides the list of neighbors, the number of neighbors and the maximum number of neighbors allowed for each transmitter. In addition, it indicates the importance (in percentage) of each neighbor and the allocation reason. Therefore, a neighbor may be marked as exceptional pair, co-site, adjacent, coverage or symmetric. For neighbors accepted for co-site, adjacency and coverage reasons, the U-Net displays: Percentage of area checking the coverage conditions (or the percentage of covered traffic on this area) Corresponding surface area (km2) (or the traffic covered on the area in Erlangs) Percentage of area checking the adjacency conditions and the corresponding surface area (km2) If transmitters have previous allocations in the list, neighbors are marked as existing. 1) Once calculations are finished, select the neighbors you want to assign to transmitters. You may do this by checking/unchecking the related boxes in the Commit column; shortcuts (Ctrl+D and Ctrl+U) can be used for a faster management. In addition, sort and filtering options are available in the result table context menu. 2) button to assign neighbors to transmitters as displayed in Click the the current table. Neighbors are then listed in the Intra-technology Neighbors tab of each transmitter properties window. 3) Click Close.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-108

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: This feature deals with GSM/GPRS/EDGE, CDMA/CDMA2000 and UMTS technologies. The allocation algorithm needs path loss matrices. Therefore, when starting an automatic neighbor allocation, the U-Net automatically calculates the path loss matrices if not found. The allocation algorithm needs a traffic map when the option Covered traffic is selected. It considers traffic map(s) selected in the default traffic analysis to determine the percentage of traffic covered in the overlapping area. The percentage of area (or the percentage of covered traffic) is calculated with the resolution specified in the property dialog of the predictions folder (Default resolution parameter). When the option Force adjacent transmitters as neighbors is used, the margin handover start is not taken into account. The U-Net considers a fixed value of 0 dB. A forbidden neighbor must not be listed as neighbor except if the neighborhood relationship already exists and the Reset neighbors option is unchecked when you start the new allocation. In this case, the U-Net displays a warning in the Event viewer indicating that the constraint on the forbidden neighbor will be ignored by algorithm because the neighbor already exists. The notion of importance is used in the U-Net frequency planning.

The force neighbor symmetry option enables the users to consider the reciprocity of a neighborhood link. This reciprocity is allowed only if the neighbor list is not already full. Thus, if transmitter B is a neighbor of the transmitter A while transmitter A is not a neighbor of the transmitter B, two cases are possible: 1st case: There is space in the transmitter B neighbor list: the transmitter A will be added to the list. It will be the last one. 2nd case: The transmitter B neighbor list is full. transmitter A neighbor list. When the options Force exceptional pairs and Force symmetry are selected, the U-Net considers the constraints between exceptional pairs in both directions to respect symmetry condition. On the other hand, if neighborhood relationship is forced in one direction and forbidden in the other one, symmetry cannot be respected. In this case, the U-Net displays a warning in the Event viewer. In case of HCS layers, neighbors between macros and micros in HCS are not currently allocated even if the macro and micro are physically adjacent. The U-Net will not include transmitter A in the list and will cancel the link by deleting transmitter B from the

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-109

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

You can carry out neighbor allocation globally on all the transmitters or only on a group of transmitters. In this case, the U-Net will consider all the transmitters contained in the group of transmitters, the symmetric neighbors of these transmitters and all the other ones, which have an intersection area with the transmitters of the group. Neighbors are not a filter for transmitters being part of interferers. All transmitters in a network take part in interferences on each transmitter. If the Reset button is unchecked and no new neighbor is found after a new allocation, the Results part stays empty. The U-Net only displays the transmitters for which it finds new neighbors. Therefore, if a transmitter has already reached its maximum number of neighbors before starting the new allocation, it will not appear in the Results table. The input parameters for the neighbor automatic allocation can be exported to an to an external user configuration file (Automatic Neighbor Allocation Parameters).

V. Displaying Current GSM/GPRS/EDGE Neighbor List

The U-Net provides the possibility to open an editable table referencing all the GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbors of the current network. To access the GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbor table, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Intra-technology Neighbors command from the open menu. In the displayed table, the U-Net lists reference transmitters and their related neighbors. In addition, it indicates the number of neighbors assigned to each reference transmitter, and for each neighbor: The distance between the neighbor and the reference transmitter. If the neighborhood relationship is symmetric or not. The type of allocation. Three values are available, manual (copy/paste of a neighbor list, manual edition of neighbors), automatic (automatic allocation), or imported (Planet import, generic import, import using an add-in). This output will be able to be considered by AFP; it is currently unused. The neighbor rank in the list of neighbors of the reference transmitter. This information is given only in case of an automatic allocation. The allocation reason. This information is given only in case of an automatic allocation. The importance of each neighbor. This field is set to 100% for manually allocated neighbors by default. This table can be used to allocate neighbors manually. Standard features for managing table contents (Copy/Paste, Delete, and Display columns, Filter, Sort, and Table Fields) are available in a shortcut menu (when right-clicking column(s)) or record(s) and in the Format, Edit and Records menus.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-110

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: It is possible to access several allocation tools directly from this table. By right-clicking in it, you may: Apply the exceptional pairs (forbidden or forced) Delete the link and its symmetric of the selected row Symmetries a selected link

VI. Modifying the Allocated GSM/GPRS/EDGE Neighbors

You may add new neighbors or remove allocated neighbors. Table 6-39 lists two ways of deleting allocated neighbors. Table 6-39 Deleting the allocated neighbors Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) 5) 6) 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) 5) 6) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking the of it. Right-click the Transmitter from which you want to exclude some neighbors. Choose the properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the Intra-technology Neighbors tab from the current window. Click OK. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder. Choose the Neighbors > Intra-technology Neighbors option from the shortcut menu. In the displayed table, select the target neighbor row. Press Del (or Suppr.). Click OK. button in front

Note: It is possible to remove symmetric neighborhood links at once. To do this, you can use the command Delete link and symmetric available in a shortcut menu. This one can be open by right-clicking the neighbor you want to delete.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-111

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Table 6-40 lists two ways of adding new neighbors. Table 6-40 Adding new neighbors Method 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 1 5) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking the button in front of it. Right-click the transmitter from which you want to exclude some neighbors. Choose the properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the Intra-technology Neighbors tab from the current window. 6) 7) 8) 9) 1) 2) 3) In the displayed table, use the last row with symbol edit the neighbor name. Edit the neighbor name. Click OK. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder. Choose the Neighbors: Intra-technology Neighbors option from the shortcut menu. Method 2 4) 5) 6) 7) In the displayed table, use the last row with symbol transmitter. Click the cell of the Neighbors column to choose a neighbor or edit the neighbor name. Click OK. . .

Click the cell of the Neighbors column to choose a neighbor or

Click the cell of the Transmitters column to select a reference

Note: Adding/Removing neighbors can be also made thanks to the Neighbor graphic management icon.

It is possible to add symmetric neighborhood links at once. To do this, use the command Symmetries available in a shortcut menu. This one can be open by right-clicking on the neighbor you have added.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-112

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

VII. Displaying GSM/GPRS/EDGE Neighbors on the Map

Once the GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbors have been allocated, you can display a given neighborhood on the map. To display the neighbors of any transmitter, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Click the Neighbor graphic management icon from the toolbar.

Click the desired transmitter to select it on the map. The U-Net displays on the map , as shown in Figure 6-4. The symmetric neighborhood links with the selected transmitter (reference transmitter). A single black line represents these links. The outwards neighborhood links (which are not symmetric); they are colored as the reference transmitter. They show the neighbors of the selected transmitter (however, the selected transmitter is not one of their neighbors). The inwards neighborhood links (which are not symmetric). They show the transmitters, which have the selected transmitter as neighbor (however, these transmitters are not in the neighbor list of the selected transmitter). Each link has the transmitter color.

Figure 6-4 Transmitter Site0_2 located on Site 0

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-113

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: It is possible to configure the neighborhood links you wish to display on the map. To do this, right-click the Transmitters folder and choose the Neighbors: Display... command from the open menu. Finally, when you select a transmitter on the map, the U-Net is able to show the coverage areas of its neighbors. You must just display on the map Coverage by transmitter study (with a color display by transmitter) preliminary calculated. It is also possible to display inter-technology neighbors on the map.

VIII. Adding/Removing GSM/GPRS/EDGE Neighbors and Exceptional Pairs on the Map

You may directly add and remove neighborhood links as well as exceptional pairs on the map using CTRL and SHIFT shortcuts. To add a symmetric neighborhood link, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the right side (arrow) of the Neighbor graphic management icon ( from the toolbar and select Neighbors in the scrolling list. Click the left side of the Neighbor graphic management icon ( Click the reference transmitter on the map. The U-Net displays its neighborhood links. To define a new symmetric link between the reference transmitter and a transmitter A (transmitter A is neighbor of the reference transmitter and vice versa), hold down SHIFT on your keyboard and click the transmitter A. The U-Net displays a single black line between both transmitters. To remove a symmetric neighborhood link, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the right side (arrow) of the Neighbor graphic management icon ( from the toolbar and select Neighbors in the scrolling list. Click the left side of the Neighbor graphic management icon ( Click the reference transmitter on the map. The U-Net displays its neighborhood links. To remove an existing symmetric link between the reference transmitter and a transmitter A, hold down SHIFT on your keyboard and click the transmitter A. To add an outwards neighborhood link, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Click the right side (arrow) of the Neighbor graphic management icon ( from the toolbar and select Neighbors in the scrolling list. Click the left side of the Neighbor graphic management icon ( Click the reference transmitter on the map. The U-Net displays its neighborhood links. ). ) ). ) ). )

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-114

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

4)

To define a new outwards link between the reference transmitter and a transmitter A (transmitter A is neighbor of the reference transmitter but reference transmitter is not neighbor of transmitter A), hold down CTRL on your keyboard and click the transmitter A. The U-Net displays an arrow directed to transmitter A; it is colored as the reference transmitter.

To remove an outwards neighborhood link, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the right side (arrow) of the Neighbor graphic management icon ( from the toolbar and select Neighbors in the scrolling list. Click the left side of the Neighbor graphic management icon ( Click the reference transmitter on the map. The U-Net displays its neighborhood links. To remove an existing outwards link between the reference transmitter and a transmitter A, hold down CTRL on your keyboard and click the transmitter A. To add an inwards neighborhood link, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the right side (arrow) of the Neighbor graphic management icon ( from the toolbar and select Neighbors in the scrolling list. Click the left side of the Neighbor graphic management icon ( Click the reference transmitter on the map. The U-Net displays its neighborhood links. To define an outwards link between the reference transmitter and a transmitter A (the reference transmitter is neighbor of transmitter A but transmitter A is not neighbor of reference transmitter), perform the following steps: If there is an existing symmetric link between both transmitters: hold down CTRL on your keyboard and Click the transmitter A. If no neighborhood link exist between both transmitters: first, create a symmetric neighborhood link as explained above and then, hold down CTRL on your keyboard and click the transmitter A. The U-Net displays an arrow directed to the reference transmitter; it is colored as transmitter A. To remove an inwards neighborhood link, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the right side (arrow) of the Neighbor graphic management icon ( from the toolbar and select Neighbors in the scrolling list. Click the left side of the Neighbor graphic management icon ( Click the reference transmitter on the map. The U-Net displays its neighborhood links. To remove an existing outwards link between the reference transmitter and a transmitter A, hold down SHIFT on your keyboard and click the transmitter A. ). ) ). ) ). )

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-115

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: To graphically define exceptional pairs of neighbors, proceed as explained above. You just have to select either Forced Neighbors or Forbidden Neighbors instead of Neighbors in the scrolling list when you click the right side of the Neighbor graphic management icon ( neighbors table. Adding/removing neighborhood links on the map is easier when Coverage by transmitter study (with a color display by transmitter) preliminary calculated is displayed on the map. To add/remove a transmitter as neighbor, use the CTRL and SHIFT shortcuts as explained above and click its coverage area on the map. ). Neighborhood relationships are automatically updated in the intra-technology

IX. Performing an Audit of the Current GSM/GPRS/EDGE Neighborhood Plan

It is possible to perform an audit of the current neighborhood plan in the U-Net. The audit function can be used to check for the following information: The average number of neighbors per transmitter Transmitters with no neighbors (having empty neighbors list) Transmitters having the maximum number of neighbors allowed Transmitters having more than the maximum number of neighbors allowed Transmitters with missing co-site neighbors Transmitters with non-symmetric neighborhood Transmitters with missing forced neighbors Transmitters with existing forbidden neighbors The audit feature can be used for checking the above criteria in the same project (intra-technology) as well as in linked co-planning projects (inter-technology). The audit outputs are listed in a .txt file (IntraNeighborCheck.txt for intra-technology and InterNeighborCheck.txt for inter-technology neighbors). To perform a neighborhood plan audit, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Neighbors: Audit... command from the open menu. Use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window. Select the checks you want the U-Net to perform for the neighbors. Note: A related Inter-technology Neighbors tab will be available for inter-technology neighborhood plan audit in case of linked co-planning projects.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-116

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

6) 7)

Click OK. Once you have finished performing audits, click Close.

The Audit provides the following outputs Average number of neighbors: X; where, X is the average number of neighbors per transmitter for the plan audited. Empty lists: x/X; x number of transmitters out of a total of X having no neighbors (or empty neighbors list) Syntax: |TRANSMITTER|

Full Lists (default max number = Y): x/X; x number of transmitters out of a total of X having Y number of neighbors listed in their respective neighbors lists. Syntax: |TRANSMITTER| |NUMBER| |MAX NUMBER|

Lists > max number (default max number = Y): x/X; x number of transmitters out of a total of X having more than Y number of neighbors listed in their respective neighbors lists. Syntax: |TRANSMITTER| |NUMBER| |MAX NUMBER|

Note: If the field Maximum number of neighbors in the Transmitters table is empty, the above two checks take into account the Default Max Number value defined in the audit dialog.

Missing co-sites: X; total number of missing co-site neighbors in the audited neighborhood plan. Syntax: |TRANSMITTER| |NEIGHBOR|

Non symmetric links: X; total number of non-symmetric neighborhood links in the audited neighborhood plan. Syntax: |TRANSMITTER| |NEIGHBOR| |TYPE| |REASON|

Missing forced: X; total number of forced neighbors missing in the audited neighborhood plan. Syntax: |TRANSMITTER| |NEIGHBOR|

Existing forbidden: X; total number of forbidden neighbors existing in the audited neighborhood plan. Syntax: |TRANSMITTER| |NEIGHBOR| |TYPE| |REASON|

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-117

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

6.7.2 Allocating GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Resources Manually in the U-Net

I. Assigning BSIC Domains to Transmitters
Once defined, a BSIC domain has to be assigned to a transmitter. Only BSICs included in the assigned BSIC domain can be manually or automatically allocated to a transmitter. Table 6-41 lists two ways of assigning a BSIC domain to a transmitter. Table 6-41 Assigning a BSIC domain to a transmitter Method 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 1 5) 6) 7) 8) 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) 5) 6) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking the of it. Right-click the transmitter you want to manage. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the TRXs tab of the current dialog. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window. In the Identification part, click the menu and choose a BSIC domain in the list. Click OK. Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by Clicking on the appropriate Tx symbol (arrow). Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the TRXs tab of the current dialog. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window. In the Identification part, click the menu and choose a BSIC domain in the list. Click OK. button in front

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-118

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: The BSIC domain must be consistent with the defined BSIC format. When choosing a format, The U-Net adapts automatically the related domain in order not to consider inconsistent values. BSIC domain associated to the transmitter can be changed afterwards. Once selected, BSIC domain dialog can be open by clicking on the button.

The BSIC domain is an input required for manual or automatic BSIC allocation. When running the AFP, you can also select the BSIC allocation.

II. Assigning Manually BSICs to Transmitters

The color code BSIC (Base Station Identity Code) for a transmitter is made up of the NCC (Network Color Code) and the BCC (BTS Color Code). The NCC code is, for example, 0 or 4 for France. The BCC code (respectively NCC) is a digit between 0 and 7. The BCCH-BSIC pair permits, on a given territory, to identify precisely a cell. At a higher level, it may exist identical BCCH-BSIC pairs characterizing very distant zones. In the U-Net, you can either allocate it manually to each transmitter or automatically to all transmitters in the network. Once a BSIC domain has been allocated to a transmitter, it is possible either to manually or automatically choose a BSIC among available ones for any transmitter. Table 6-42 lists two ways of manually allocating a BSIC to a transmitter. Table 6-42 Allocating a BSIC to a transmitter manually Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking on the front of it. Right-click the transmitter you want to manage. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the TRXs tab of the current dialog. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window. Click the menu and choose a BSIC in the list. Click OK. button in

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-119

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Method 1) 2) Method 2 3) 4) 5) 6)

Step Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by Clicking on the appropriate Tx symbol (arrow). Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the TRXs tab of the current dialog, Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window. Click the menu and choose a BSIC in the list. Click OK.

Note: The BSIC value must be consistent with the defined BSIC format. Only consistent values are available in the BSIC menu. BSIC associated to the transmitter can be changed afterwards. The selected BSIC must be part of the chosen BSIC domain. Once chosen in single digit format, the related NCC-BCC format is automatically displayed above the scrolling box. It is possible to edit the BSIC scrolling box. Furthermore, you can enter the BSIC value with a NCC-BCC format in the scrolling box, and click the Apply button. The U-Net will convert it in the single digit format consistent with the related BSIC domain.

III. Allocating Manually a BCCH to Transmitters Manually

BCCH (Broadcast Control Channel) permits the diffusion of the cell characteristic data, including the steady diffusion of several types data systems. This channel must be part both of the main frequency band (coming from the selected cell type) and allocated channels in TRXs. The BCCH is defined on the timeslot 0 of a selected frequency. Table 6-43 lists two ways of allocating a BCCH to a transmitter manually.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-120

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Table 6-43 Allocating manually a BCCH to a transmitter Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Method 1 6) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking the of it. Right-click the transmitter you want to manage. Choose the Properties option from the context menu. Click the TRXs tab of the current dialog. Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialog: In Non Hopping or Base Band Hopping, create a new TRX of type BCCH and enter the related channel. In Synthesized Frequency Hopping, create a new TRX of type BCCH, fill the related MAL in the TRX part, and enter the channel on which will be located the timeslot 0 dedicated to the steady diffusion of BCCH information. 7) 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 Click OK. Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by Clicking on the appropriate Tx symbol (arrow). Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the TRXs tab of the current dialog. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window: In Non Hopping or Base Band Hopping, create a new TRX of type BCCH and enter the related channel. In Synthesized Frequency Hopping, create a new TRX of type BCCH, fill the related MAL in the TRX part, and enter the channel on which will be located the timeslot 0 dedicated to the steady diffusion of BCCH information. 5) Click OK. button in front

Note: You can also automatically a TRX of type BCCH by entering the related frequency in the BCCH columns from the transmitter global table.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-121

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

IV. Creating TRXs in Transmitters

In the U-Net, for GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, channels are defined at the TRX level. The manual allocation of frequencies is made by the management of TRXs in transmitters. The allocation can be also made by filling the Channels column from the transmitter table. When entering channel values in the table, TRXs of type TCH are automatically created in the related transmitters. BCCH can be assigned identically. Automatic frequency allocation can also be made using the optional AFP module. By using the advanced filter feature on transmitters, it is possible, for example, to display only transmitters linked to a frequency and their adjacent ones. Using the filter feature in the study display tab, it is also possible to display all cells with a specific frequency (f), and also all cells with frequencies (f+1) and (f-1) in different colors.

V. Managing TRXs in Transmitters

From transmitter properties, it is possible to list TRXs of transmitter and channels allocated to TRXs. This TRX table can be automatically filled after an automatic frequency planning. You may also fill it manually. It contains a TRX per line. TRX is the transmitter level at which channels are defined. Table 6-44 lists two ways of accessing the TRX table from the transmitter properties. Table 6-44 Accessing the TRX table from the transmitter properties Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking the it. Right-click the transmitter you want to manage. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the TRXs tab of the current dialog. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window. Define the TRX settings in the TRXs part. Click OK. button in front of

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-122

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Method 1) 2) Method 2 3) 4) 5) 6)

Step Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by Clicking on the appropriate Tx symbol (arrow). Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the TRXs tab of the current dialog. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window. Define the TRX settings in the TRXs part. Click OK.

Note: When a transmitter is a donor for a repeater, modifying its TRXs has an impact on its repeater.

VI. Displaying the TRX List

Even if TRXs are linked to transmitters, it is possible to display all existing TRXs of a network in an editable form. To open the TRX general table, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related shortcut menu. Choose the Subcells: TRXs command from the open menu. Define the TRX settings.

Note: The button helps you to manage the content of the TRX table.

When a transmitter is a donor for a repeater, modifying its TRXs has an impact on its repeater.

VII. TRX Property Details

Whatever is the way to reach TRX properties (from transmitter properties or from the TRX table), for any of them, the U-Net details: Index
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-123

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

This is the identification number of TRX. This number (integer) may be user-defined or automatically given by The U-Net (after closing the dialog). TRX type Channels Specify channel(s) allocated to TRX: 1 channel per TRX if the hopping mode for the TRX type is Non Hopping or Base Band Hopping, several channels per TRX if the hopping mode for the TRX type is Synthesized Hopping. Channel(s) can be either copied, or manually selected one by one in the menu (selects the box and click the arrow to open the menu). The menu offers you channels of the frequency domain assigned to this TRX type (Cell type property dialog).

Note: When you paste a list of channels, separator must be a blank character.

Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO) The MAIO is selectable for each TRX separately. It is used in case of frequency hopping (BBH or SFH) to avoid intra-site collisions due to co or adjacent channel consumption. This is an integer; its range of value is between 0 and N-1 (N is the number of channels used in the hopping sequence). MAIO can be manually entered or automatically allocated. Freeze channels Select this option to keep the current channel allocation at the TRX level when starting a new AFP.

Note: The Freeze channels option can be also imposed at the transmitter level only.

The TRX Equipment defines the maximum number of CS (GPRS) and MCS (EDGE) at the TRX level. To be fully used, this ranges must be compliant with the ranges defined at the terminal level. The average 8PSK Power Backoff is the average power reduction for E/GPRS transmitters due to 8PSK modulation in EDGE. This has an impact on the EDGE service zone (traffic analysis and EDGE predictions).

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-124

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

6.7.3 Interference Matrices

The U-Net provides the possibility to calculate, import, export and manage interference matrices outside the AFP or during an AFP session. You have the option of working with interference matrices for all or a group of transmitters. You can import already calculated interference matrices to the U-Net in various formats or export them into files with various formats. Interference matrices - or histograms - may be used as inputs for an automatic frequency planning tool. They can also be generated from test mobile data measurements. Interference matrices, in the U-Net, work as follows. For each pair (interfered subcell, interferer subcell), the U-Net calculates a C/I value on each bin of the interfered subcell service area (determined by the min reception threshold defined at the subcell level for a fixed cell edge coverage probability); all the subcells are supposed to share the same channel. Then, the U-Net integrates C/I values calculated over the service area of the interfered subcell and determines an interference histogram. Histogram shows the different interference probabilities. Interference probability is the probability that users of the interfered subcell receive a C/I higher than a C/I value; interference probability is stated either in percentage of interfered area or in percentage of interfered traffic, as shown in Figure 6-5.

Note: Let (Tx1, BCCH) and (Tx2, BCCH) be the victim and interferer subcells. The service areas have been defined using best server with 0 dB margin. The interference probability is stated in percentage of interfered area.

Figure 6-5 Probability of having at least C/I levels for a couple of subcells

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-125

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

In that case, we observe that the probability for C/I (BCCH of Tx2 on the BCCH of Tx1) to be greater than 0 is 100% (which is normal because Tx1 is best server). The probability to have a C/I value at least equal to 31 is 31.1%. If we introduce the fact that the required C/I level on the BCCH of Tx1 is 12, we consider in that case that, since the probability that C/I is at least equal to 12 is 93.5%, the percentage of interfered areas in the service area of the BCCH of Tx1 caused by the BCCH of TX2 is 6.5%.

I. Calculating Interference Matrices

The AFP calculates interference matrices if they are not already available (previously calculated or imported) during the AFP launch process. But you can also compute them outside the AFP process. Table 6-45 lists two ways of calculating interference matrices for all or a group of transmitters. Table 6-45 Calculating interference matrices for all or a group of transmitters Method 1) 2) 3) Method 1 4) 5) 6) 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) 5) 6) 7) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to open its context menu. Choose the Calculate command from the Interference Matrices menu. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog. Set the necessary parameters to required values. Click OK. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking the button. Right-click the subfolder for which you want to calculate interference matrices to open its context menu, Choose the Calculate command from the Interference Matrices menu. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog. Set the necessary parameters to required values. Click OK.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-126

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Subcell traffic load is read from the outputs of the default traffic capture. Calculating interference matrices requires that a traffic capture be available beforehand. If a traffic analysis for the concerned transmitters has not already been performed, the U-Net fixes their respective traffic loads at 1. Interference matrices can be computed either based on the maps used in the default traffic capture or based on a uniform distribution of traffic. In the first case the interference probabilities are expressed in terms of the interfered traffic, whereas in the second case, these probabilities are expressed in terms of the interfered area.

Note: C/I standard deviation values, defined per clutter class, are used when calculating interference matrices.

Table 6-46 lists two ways of deleting already existing interference matrices to recalculate them. Table 6-46 Deleting interference matrices Method 1) 2) Method 1 3) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to open its context menu. Choose the Delete Matrices command from the Interference Matrices menu. 1) 2) Method 2 3) 4) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking the button. Right-click the subfolder whose interference matrices you want to delete to open its context menu. Choose the Delete Matrices command from the Interference Matrices menu.

II. Importing and Exporting Interference Matrices

The U-Net is capable of importing and exporting interference matrices in different formats, including: .im0 (with one histogram per line) .im1 (with one value per line, transmitter name repeated)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-127

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

.im2 (with only co-channel and adjacent interference values) .clc + .dct (with one value per line and a dictionary file) Please refer to the Technical Reference Guide for detailed descriptions of these file formats. Table 6-47 lists two ways of importing (or exporting) interference matrices for all or a group of transmitters. Table 6-47 Importing (or exporting) interference matrices for all or a group of transmitters Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) 5) 6) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to open its context menu. Method 1 Choose the Import (Or Export) command from the Interference Matrices menu. Select the import (or export) format and choose a filename. Click Open (or Save). Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking the button. Right-click the subfolder for which you want to import (or export) interference matrices to open its context menu. Choose the Import (Or Export) command from the Interference Matrices menu. Select the import (or export) format and choose a filename. Click Open (or Save).

Note: Import and export of interference matrices can be made during the AFP session.

III. Generating a Report on Interference Matrices

The U-Net can generate a small report on the interference matrices for all or a group of transmitters. The interference matrices report gives:
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-128

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

The number of entries in the interference matrices The number of transmitters in the AFP scope The average number of interferers per victim transmitter in the AFP scope The number of transmitters in the AFP scope having less than 7 interferers Table 6-48 lists two ways of generating a report on interference matrices for all or a group of transmitters. Table 6-48 Generating a report on interference matrices for all or a group of transmitters Method 1) 2) Method 1 3) 4) 1) 2) 3) Method 2 4) 5) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to open its context menu. Choose the Generate Report command from the Interference Matrices menu. Click OK. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking the button. Right-click the subfolder for which you want to import (or export) interference matrices to open its context menu. Choose the Generate Report command from the Interference Matrices menu. Click OK.

This report is then available in the Event Viewer and can be viewed again by double-clicking the corresponding line

6.7.4 Managing Exceptional Separations for Frequency Allocation

I. Defining Exceptional Separations for Frequency Allocation
In GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, the Exceptional pairs table allows you to impose/relax some channel separations between items which are neither co-cell, nor co-site, nor part of neighbor transmitters during an automatic allocation of frequencies. Standard separations are defined in the generic AFP dialog. For example, if we take Tx1 and Tx2, which are neither neighbors nor co-site, we can impose in the separation table a value of 3. This will mean that if we assign f1 to Tx1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-129

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

and f2 to Tx2, the AFP has to respect: audit tool.

. This constraint is also checked by the

The separations are defined per couple of (Transmitter, TRX type) pairs and they deal with imposing or relaxing constraints. Relaxing constraints means that the defined separation in the Separation table has priority on the imposed separation between co-site, co-cell or neighbor items. It is even possible to define intra-cell separations, for example, between BCCH and TCH subcells of a same transmitter. Examples: Tx1 and Tx2 are neither neighbors nor co-site. We impose in the separation table the following rules: - Separation of 3 channels between (Tx1, BCCH) and (Tx2, BCCH) - Separation of 2 channels between (Tx1, TCH) and (Tx2, TCH) If we assign respectively f11 and f12 to the BCCH and the TCH of Tx1, and respectively f21 and f22 to the BCCH and the TCH of Tx2, we must have: , . Nevertheless, we could have and .

We impose a co-cell minimum separation of 3. We defined also in the transmitter table a separation of 2 for the (Tx1, BCCH) and (Tx1, TCH) pairs. So, if we assign f11 to the BCCH and f12 to the TCH, it may be possible to have co-cell configuration. , even if there is a

Table 6-49 lists two ways of defining channel separations with any other transmitter. Table 6-49 Defining channel separations with any other transmitter Method 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Method 1 7) Step Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Expand the Transmitters folder by clicking the button in front of it. Right-click the transmitter you want to manage. Choose the Properties option from the shortcut menu. Click the AFP tab of the current dialog. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog, In the displayed table window, for each (or All) TRX type of the considered transmitter, enter the (Transmitter, TRX type) couple and their related imposed separation. 8) 9) Click either another table cell, or the to validate and add a new row to the table. When you have completed your entry, click OK. button

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-130

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Method 1) 2) 3) 4) Method 2 5)

Step Select on the map the transmitter you want to manage by clicking on the appropriate Tx symbol (arrow), Choose the Properties option from the context menu. Click the AFP tab of the current dialog. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog. In the displayed table window, for each (or All) TRX type of the considered transmitter, enter the (Transmitter, TRX type) couple and their related imposed separation. 6) 7) Click either another table cell, or the to validate and add a new row to the table. When you have completed your entry, click OK. button

To access the exceptional pair table, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related context menu. Choose the Frequency plan: Exceptional pairs... command from the open menu. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog. In the displayed table, enter the (Transmitter, TRX type) couples and their related imposed separation. Click another table cell to validate and add a new row to the table. When you have completed your entry, click OK: The button helps you to manage the content of the Exceptional separation table. Other constraints are imposed in transmitter properties. The separation table can also be completed from the AFP generic dialog. The audit tool takes into account the defined separation table with priority compared to co-cell, co-site or neighbor separation constraints. It is possible to copy and paste (Ctrl+C Ctrl+V) the separation list in the tables. In the TRX type column, it is possible to select the All value to force the separation for all the subcells of the considered transmitter. It is possible to display on the map separation constraints of transmitters. You may graphically define separation constraints between transmitters using CTRL shortcut.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-131

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

II. Displaying AFP Exceptional Separations on the Map

It is possible to display on the map separation constraints between transmitters defined in the Exceptional pairs table. To display the separation constraints of any transmitter, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related context menu. Choose the Frequency Plan:Display Options... command from the open menu. Choose between which type of TRX you want to display separation constraints: Click the right side (arrow) of the Neighbor graphic management icon ( from the toolbar and select Exceptional Pairs (AFP) in the scrolling list. Click the left side of the Neighbor graphic management icon ( Click the desired transmitter to select it on the map. ). )

The U-Net displays on the map links between the selected transmitter and the ones with which it has separation constraints. Each link has the color of the transmitter involved in the separation constraint with the selected transmitter, the separation value is displayed next to the link.

Note: You may directly define exceptional pairs on the map using CTRL shortcut.

III. Adding or Removing AFP Exceptional Separations on the Map

You may graphically add and remove separation constraints between transmitters using the CTRL shortcut. To add/remove an AFP separation constraint, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Transmitters folder to get the related context menu. Choose the Frequency Plan: Display Options... command from the open menu. Specify between which type of TRX you want to define separation constraints, Click the right side (arrow) of the Neighbor graphic management icon ( from the toolbar and select Exceptional Pairs (AFP) in the scrolling list. Click the left side of the Neighbor graphic management icon ( constraints with this transmitter. To define a new separation constraint between the reference transmitter and a transmitter A, hold down CTRL on your keyboard and click the transmitter A. The U-Net opens a dialog where you have to define the separation value between ). Click the reference transmitter on the map. U-Net displays the existing separation )

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-132

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

both transmitters. The link is colored as the transmitter A, the separation value is indicated next to the link.

Note: The graphically defined exceptional pairs are automatically listed in the Exceptional pairs table. Finally, when you select a transmitter on the map, the U-Net is able to show the coverage areas of transmitters involved in exceptional pairs with it. You must just display on the map Coverage by transmitter study (with a color display by transmitter) preliminary calculated.

6.7.5 Using an AFP to Allocate Resources in the U-Net

I. Adjusting AFP Parameters from the Data Model
In the U-Net, it is possible to adjust AFP parameters per transmitter and not only as global constraints. In the TRXs tab of the transmitter property dialog, it is possible to force: Subcell part: The main frequency band used by propagation model when assigning cell types to transmitters. The frequency domains (including the excluded channels) for each subcell in which the automatic tool chooses frequencies as defined. The allocation mode (Free or Group constrained) for the AFP to allocate frequencies to TRX. The allowed C/I and max percentage of interference per subcell. The minimum reception threshold for each subcell. The max MAL length allowed per subcell. The hopping mode, for each subcell of each transmitter. The site synchronization at the subcell level. The support of DTX per subcell (or not). The timeslot configurations. Furthermore, the U-Net is able to compute automatically the requested number of TRXs (at the subcell level) for all transmitters of the network. When computed, values are automatically reported in the subcell part of the transmitter property dialog boxes.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-133

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: The number of requested TRXs can be entered manually. This information will be used by the AFP tool.

TRX part: In the transmitter property dialog (TRXs tab), you can choose manually the frequencies related to each TRX. The MAIO can also be manually specified. Concerning the AFP itself, it is possible to freeze channels of each TRX at this level. In this way, existing channels are not overwritten by any new automatic allocation. In the AFP tab of the transmitter property dialog, it is possible to impose: A weight on cost function used for convergence on this specific transmitter. For example, entering a value of 2 for a specific transmitter whereas the value for other transmitters is 1 means that we will consider convergence when the reached cost function on this transmitter will be half the one of the other transmitters. To avoid recalculation by AFP of parameters as frequencies, HSNs and BSICs at the transmitter level, it is possible to freeze them. Frequencies can be also frozen at the subcell level. Exceptional channel separations with other (transmitter, subcell) pairs that are neither co-site nor neighbors of the currently considered (transmitter, subcell) pair.

Note: Freezing existing channels can be made globally with regard to type (control or non-control).

II. Using the Generic AFP Interface

The role of an Automatic Frequency Planning tool (AFP) is the assignment of frequencies within a GSM network, to match the traffic demand (number of requested TRXs) with respect to the quality (for example limitation of interferences). A certain number of inputs are defined in the data model (transmitter properties and exceptional pairs of subcells) of from the generic AFP Graphic User Interface. In addition, depending on the selected AFP model, specific parameters may be set. The Automatic Frequency Planning (AFP) module of the U-Net is an option that allows users to automatically generate frequency plans for GSM and TDMA networks. The following parameters may be allocated:
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-134

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Frequencies Frequency hopping groups (MAL) HSN, MAIO BSIC The AFP aims to generate optimal allocations, which are allocations that minimize interference over the network and comply with a set of constraints defined by the user. The two main types of constraints are the separation constraints and the spectrum limitations. The AFP uses a cost function to evaluate frequency plans, and the aim of the algorithm is to find frequency plans with minimal costs. In the U-Net, the GSM/GPRS/EDGE data model has been adapted to be consistent with any AFP model. The U-Net provides generic options and parameters, which can be taken into account during the automatic frequency plan. The U-Net provides a set of generic dialogs available for any AFP model implemented by various vendors. The different AFP models are activated in the same way. For any AFP model, the convergence criterion is based on a cost function taking into account all the requirements given by the network inputs. The goal of the model is to try to minimize the value of the cost function involved in the process. The cost function mainly consists of two components. The first component is related to interferences, the second one considers separation constraint violations. the separation cost component. Before starting an AFP session, you have to insure that the number of required TRXs per transmitter has been already defined. The related traffic loads have an effect on the cost function used in the AFP. As separation constraints may be set on neighbors, this allocation should also be performed before starting an AFP session. Both components are normally added to get global cost. Nevertheless, the user will be able to consider only

III. Starting AFP

You may perform an automatic frequency planning on all the transmitters or only on a group of transmitters. To start an AFP session, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the transmitters folder or on a group of transmitters. Choose the Frequency plan: Automatic allocation... option from the shortcut menu. Use What's this help to get description about the open dialog window.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-135

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: It is possible to launch an AFP on a transmitter or on a group of transmitters from the related context menu (Right-click). All the involved transmitters (potential interferers or transmitters involved in separation constraints) are taken into account but the allocation is made only on the non-frozen items (Subcells or TRXs) of the reference transmitter(s).

The AFP process consists of the following steps: Step 1 is made of a set of dialogs organized in wizard mode in which are set general AFP inputs. The first dialog includes: The AFP model selection and the possibility to set it The resources to allocate The choice of the subcells to be considered The second dialog permits to define the separation requirements, Finally, the third dialog defines: A global freezing strategy on TRXs or subcells according to their TRX type The location of the traffic load information Whether to take DTX into account Step 2: The U-Net loads and checks the network. Step 3: It consists in optionally computing the theoretical level of interference that the AFP model will have to minimize. If you choose not to make this calculation, the mathematical model will work with respect to separation constraints only. Then, the user is asked to choose a duration corresponding to the minimum time which is let to method to find the best convergence method. Step 4: The U-Net provides AFP results in a summary table.

Note: An audit on the computed frequency plan is available. A channel search tool working on channels, BCCHs and BSICs allows you, for example, to display the transmitters cells with a specific frequency (f) the ones with frequencies (f+1) and (f-1) in different colors.

IV. AFP Step 1: Generic Inputs

After having started an AFP session, the 1st step consists in the AFP generic inputs.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-136

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

In this first dialog, you can: 1) In the first window, check the boxes related to the resources you wish to allocate during this AFP session. If the AFP model you are using supports this, it is possible to allocate several resource types: channels (for NH or BBH subcells), MAL and MAIO (for SFH subcells), HSN (for BBH and SFH subcells) and BSIC.

Note: The U-Net avoids creating TRXs without channels. Therefore, if the user does not ask for MAL-MAIO assignment, all the SFH subcells are considered as frozen, and no TRXs will be created for them. The same happens in case only a MAL-MAIO assignment is selected. In this case, all NH and BBH subcells will be seen as frozen and no TRXs will be created.

2)

Indicate if you want all the potential interferers to be taken into account by the AFP model. Check/uncheck the Load all the potential interferers box. If this box is unchecked, the cost function will only consist of the separation violation cost.

3)

In the second window, click the Exceptional pairs... button to check/add separations within exceptional pairs of transmitters and subcells. These separation constraints have priority over other separations (co-cell and co-site separations as well as separations between neighbors) you may specify.

4)

In the same dialog, define the channel separations within subcells of a same cell, within subcells of co-site transmitters and between subcells of neighbors. You may specify separations between BCCH subcells, traffic subcells and between BCCH and traffic subcells.

5)

In the third window, you may choose: To freeze all the subcells of a same function (Control or Other traffic -) To freeze all the existing TRXs (channels already allocated) a same function (Control or Other traffic-) To choose whether the needed traffic loads (in the cost function) have to be extracted from the default traffic capture of from the subcell table (possibly user-defined values). To choose whether or not to consider a discontinuous transmission mode (on the interference estimation) on the subcells which support DTX. If yes, enter the circuit activity factor.

6)

Click Validate.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-137

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: The input parameters for the neighbor automatic allocation can be exported to an external user configuration file (AFP configuration). Freezing stands for no frequency assignment on the items which are selected. Nevertheless, frozen items will be taken into consideration in the cost function of any AFP model.

V. AFP Step 2: Loading and Checking the Network

After the AFP generic inputs, the U-Net loads and checks the involved items in the 2nd step. The U-Net loads: The transmitters to be allocated (we call them TBA transmitters) Among all the active and filtered transmitters, they are the ones that belong to the transmitters folder for which the AFP is launched and to the focus zone as well. The potential interferers with TBA transmitters if the option Load all the potential interferers is selected. They are all the transmitters whose calculation radii intersect the calculation radius of any TBA transmitter. The transmitters involved in the specified separation conditions with the TBA transmitters: The neighbors, co-site transmitters, transmitters or subcells of exceptional pairs and neighbors of neighbors in case of BSIC allocation.

Note: In case of the BSIC allocation, neighbors of neighbors are systematically loaded. If no focus zone exists in the .atl document, The U-Net takes into account the computation zone.

The calculated cost takes into account all the loaded transmitters. On the other hand, resources are not assigned to all the TBC transmitters. Therefore, it is important to know the transmitters to be allocated (we will call them "TBA transmitters"): they are the active and filtered transmitters located inside the computation zone, which belong to the folder from which the AFP has been started. Only TBA transmitters may be assigned the resources selected in the previous dialog. Other loaded transmitters are considered as "frozen" for all the types of assignments: BSIC, HSN, MAL, MAIO and channels.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-138

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Once loaded, the U-Net checks the network consistency. It reports mainly non-blocking warnings in an additional event viewer. These warnings deal with, for example, values out of their range or inconsistencies of the existing allocation. For example, the U-Net can report the fact that a list of frequencies is assigned to a TRX supporting a non-hopping or base band hopping mode. In this case, AFP will fix it if frequencies are not frozen. In case of inconsistent values (for example a value of 100 for the traffic load), these will be replaced by The U-Net to avoid blocking the AFP process. Nevertheless, in some cases, like an empty HSN (resp. BSIC) domain when the HSN allocation is requested, the AFP process is stopped and an error message is reported to the user to fill the domains.

Caution: Information given by the event viewer has to be read carefully before going further.

After having checked the messages in the event viewer, click Close. The U-Net, then, opens a new dialog dealing with other AFP settings.

VI. AFP Step 3: Generic AFP Settings

After having loaded and checked the involved network, The U-Net opens a dialog made of three parts. The first part reports the validated network conditions: Resources to be allocated Separation constraints Type of the loading Full: both potential interferers (interferences taken into account) and transmitters/subcells considered in separation requirements have been loaded and checked. Partial: only transmitters/subcells involved in separation requirements have been loaded and checked. State of the network loading: number of loaded subcells, number of subcells selected for the AFP process, warnings during the consistency checking, and so on... At this step, the status box in the part Step 3 indicates that the allocation will be based on separation constraints only.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-139

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

The second part of the dialog enables user to calculate/import interference histograms interferences are taken into account in AFP (not only separation requirements). Interference histograms can be computed only if the user has previously selected the option Take into account interferences (leading to the loading of all the potential interferers) in the previous dialog. Otherwise, buttons are grayed. It is also possible to manage interference matrices outside from the AFP since an entry is available from the transmitters context menu (calculate, import/export, report). To calculate interference histograms, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Click Calculate... to compute interference histogram for each pair of subcells. In the Interference calculation dialog, specify the servers to study (All, best signal level per HCS layer, best signal level of the highest priority HCS layer), a margin in case of a best signal level study, the cell edge coverage probability and select the Calculation option on how to define the interference probability: Traffic spreading based on default capture maps: the probability is expressed in percentage of interfered traffic and takes into account both traffic maps and the traffic load coming from dimensioning (or user-defined). Uniform traffic spreading: the probability is expressed in percentage of interfered area and integrates the traffic load coming from dimensioning (or user-defined). This method cannot consider precisely traffic hotspots but is much faster than the previous one. 3) Click OK.

Caution: Changing some transmitter or subcell properties such as power offset, reception threshold and transmitter power or EIRP makes invalid interference histograms. In this case, you must recalculate them.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-140

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: The U-Net only takes into account the subcells of loaded transmitters to calculate interference histograms. The DTX defined in step 1 has an effect only if the AFP cost is based on interferences (calculation of interference histograms). The resolution used to calculate interference histograms is the default resolution defined in the Predictions property dialog. When calculating C/I, the U-Net applies shadowing margins (depending on the entered cell edge coverage probability and the model standard deviation on the pixel) to the C values only. The U-Net is capable of importing and exporting interference matrices in different formats, including: - .im0 (with one histogram per line) - .im1 (with one value per line, transmitter name repeated) - .im2 (with only co-channel and adjacent interference values) - .clc + .dct (with one value per line and a dictionary file) For further information about the storage format, refer to the Technical Reference Guide.

To import an existing interference histogram, you can click Import... and specify the .clc file to be imported. The U-Net looks for the associated .dct file in the same directory and uses it to decode transmitter identifiers. When this file is unavailable, The U-Net assumes that the transmitter identifiers are the transmitter names.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-141

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: When you successively import several .clc files containing the same relationship, The U-Net considers the first imported relation only (relation found in the first imported file). The ones found in the other files are ignored. File multi-selection is supported. Therefore, it is possible to import several .clc files at a time. The U-Net supports a simplified import format as well (format of a line: interfered subcell, interfering subcell, co-channel interference probability, adjacent channel probability). For further information, please refer to the Technical Reference Guide. No validity control is performed when importing an interference histogram file. Be sure that imported histograms are consistent with the current configuration. The U-Net only imports interference histograms related to loaded transmitters. The histogram interference computation needs path loss results. If matrices are invalid, they will be updated during the computation process.

After computing or importing interference histograms, the status box in the part Step 3 indicates that the allocation will be based on separation constraints and interferences.

Caution: If the interferences were supposed to be taken into account, but no histogram has been determined, the AFP process will be based on separation constraints only.

Finally, the third part of the dialog enables you to: 1) 2) Choose the AFP model. Adjust its parameters by clicking the properties button.

Note: All the AFP models listed in the Modules tab will be available in the scrolling list.

3)

Indicate a target time (in minutes) on which the AFP will base its method to lower its cost function and converge to a solution.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-142

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: This target time is used only by the model to select the best suited method. This means that you will not be able to consider the result reliable as far as the target time is not reached. The model will be able to stop by itself before this target time, but if after this elapsed time the model considers that the result is not satisfying enough, it will go on improving the frequency plan.

4)

Once these parameters are set, click Run.

VII. AFP Step 4: Generic Outputs

After starting AFP, the U-Net displays a new dialog providing information about the AFP progress. It indicates: The cost of the best solution (best cost). The elapsed time since the session has been started. The value of the cost component related to separations only. In addition, in the general AFP display space, some general information about the current solution is given in real time (depending on the selected AFP model). As said in step 3, the target computation time provides to the model an indication about the method to take to find a suitable solution. Nevertheless, computations can be stopped any time by clicking the Stop button and confirming it. Best results (related to the best solution lower cost value) will be then displayed as they are. When calculations are completed or stopped, the U-Net displays the frequency plan proposed by the AFP tool. All the results/violations are listed in a dialog, as shown in Figure 6-6. The first tab (Frequency plan) shows a table listing the assigned resources. Resources can be colored in different ways in the table for different reasons such as: Artic blue: frozen resource. Red: resource modified since the previous allocation but with separation constraint violation. Green: resource modified since the previous allocation with respect to separation constraints. Black: resource not modified. Blue: resource assigned with separation constraints respected. Purple: resource assigned but with separation violation. Brown: resource not modified with separation violation. Grey: transmitters and subcells involved in computations, as shown in Figure 6-6 .

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-143

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Figure 6-6 Frequency tab showing the assigned resources In the table, placing the cursor over a resource displays a tip balloon giving the meaning of the color. Under the separation violation column, the U-Net displays the separation requirements violated per category along with the number of violations of each category in the form of a button, as shown in the figure above. Click the button to open a message box detailing the reason for separation violations, as shown in Figure 6-7.

Figure 6-7 Separation violations The Channel Allocation column enables you to modify the current AFP plan by keeping the generated AFP plan values, re-assigning the initial values from the initial AFP plan or deleting the TRX. So, from this column, you can choose: New Value: The value calculated by the AFP process. By default, only the new values are displayed in the results window.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-144

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Initial Value: The value assigned before running the AFP. The U-Net will update the colors and violations of all the other TRXs affected by changing the value of any one to initial value. Delete the TRX: The TRX will be deleted. (It will be displayed with a strikethrough line.) Channel allocation can only be modified for the TRXs modified by the AFP process. Values for frozen TRXs and TRXs loaded for calculations only cannot be modified. TRXs that have been created by the AFP and TRXs that have remained unchanged can have new values or can be deleted only. You may choose the results you want to display. It is possible to list the results only related to: Cells (BSICs) Subcells (HSNs) TRXs (Channels/MAL, MAIO and related separation violations) All of them can be displayed at the same time. It is possible to display in the Results window. The current AFP plan The generated AFP plan The initial plan The current AFP plan is the one that is displayed by default. As you continue to work on the plan in the Results window, the U-Net memorizes each modification in the current plan. You may, at any moment, revert to the plan that is generated by the AFP by choosing the AFP plan. Or even display the initial AFP plan, if there was any, from where the AFP took off. This feature is extremely helpful when applying the final touches to your AFP plan as it enables you to revert to the initial and reverted AFP plans at any time and to fine-tune the resource allocations. The Separation violations column displays the separation violations relevant to the displayed AFP plan, current, generated or initial. The modifications in the current AFP plan can be cancelled by clicking Actions and choosing Reset channel allocations command. Note: Channel Allocation column is only modifiable in the current plan. The Commit button is enabled only when the current plan is displayed. If TRXs have been created during the AFP process, they will be displayed with Delete the TRX as option in the Channel Allocation column when displaying the initial plan.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-145

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

You may also choose to display the resources assigned during the current AFP session to the TBA transmitters (option Studied transmitters only) and in addition, the existing frequency plan of potential interferers and transmitters involved in separation requirements (option Transmitters involved in computations). As this results window is non-blocking, you can continue to work with The U-Net while it is displayed. This is to provide you with the possibility of double-checking and verifying your network data before committing the AFP results. It is also possible to resolve constraint violations automatically through the Constraint Violation Resolution dialog. This dialog is accessible through the Actions button by choosing the Constraint Violation Resolution... command, as shown in Figure 6-8.

Figure 6-8 Constraint violation resolution In this dialog, you can choose which TRXs to be taken into account while resolving the constraint violations of different types and then apply the resolved results to the selected TRX types. If you select co-cells in the violation types, all the TRXs with atl east one co-cell type constraint violation will be set to Delete the TRX after the computations. You can choose whether to apply the results to TRXs of type BCCH, to TRXs of type TCH and TCH_INNER, or both. The constraint violations are recalculated, as you click OK, for the current AFP plan leaves the TRXs set to Delete the TRX untouched. (The channel allocation only concerns the TRXs, and the BSICs and HSNs remain allocated.)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-146

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: It is possible to export the AFP results to an external tabulated file (previous and current results) with the generic tool to export table from the Actions button. The export command will export the displayed AFP plan (current, generated, or initial).

Finally, you may export the table content to tabulated ASCII text files. Click Export. Then, in the Export dialog, proceed as explained. When there are separation violations, it is interesting to open the Separation constraint violations tab. Click the Compute and Display button in order for The U-Net to summarize all the separation violations of the current AFP session.

Note: The bottom part of the Frequency plan tab displays the messages related to the last solution (maybe not the best one) and potential related allocation problems.

Before closing this dialog, use the Commit button to assign the allocated resources.

Note: It is possible to resume the AFP from the last proposed solution to try to improve it. An audit on the computed frequency plan is available.

6.7.6 Frequency Plan Analysis

I. Checking the Frequency Plan Consistency
Once frequencies are assigned to TRXs (manually, or automatically), the U-Net provides a tool to check the consistency of the current frequency plan. This tool enables you to check the consistency and the validity of several parameters involved in a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network. The U-Net performs the consistency checking on: The transmitters to be allocated (we will call them TBA transmitters): Among all the active and filtered transmitters, they are the ones that belong to the Transmitters folder for which the AFP was launched and to the focus zone as well.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-147

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

The potential interferers with TBA transmitters if the option Load all the potential interferers is selected. They are all the transmitters whose calculation radii intersect the calculation radius of any TBA transmitter. The transmitters involved in the specified separation conditions with the TBA transmitters: the neighbors, co-site transmitters, transmitters or subcells of exceptional pairs and neighbors of neighbors in case of BSIC allocation. Some audits are automatic, while the other ones are user-defined. First, this tool automatically checks the following points: Definition of a unique BCCH TRX per transmitter Consistency between TRXs and related cell types No empty domain Frequency domains included in reference frequency bands (if Frequencies box is ticked) In case of Non Hopping or Base Band Hopping: definition of one unique frequency per TRX In case of Synthesized Frequency Hopping: definition of a frequency list per TRX In case of Synthesized Frequency Hopping: respect of max MAL lengths In case of Synthesized Frequency Hopping: MAIO less than the number of MAL frequencies Optionally, it was also checking the consistency of the current frequency plan, HSN and BSIC allocation (compliance with assigned domains, the allocation strategy and separation constraints) The number of timeslots per subcell must be lower than or equal to the multiplexing factor (-1 for the BCCH subcell) The number of timeslots per subcell cannot be null Furthermore, you can set some additional checking on frequencies, HSN and/or BSIC elements: Check of the compliance of the current frequency plan with the allocation strategy (Free or Group constrained) at the TRX type level (subcells in transmitters) Check of the respect of domains for allocated resources of type frequency, HSN or BSIC. These domains are tested to check that they are not empty. Concerning frequencies, the tool is able to check compliance of frequency domains within related frequency bands - Consistency between the defined BSIC format and the assigned BSICs (BSIC domain option checked) - Consistency between the excluded channels (at the subcell level) and the assigned ones (Frequency domain option checked) - In case of synthesized frequency hopping and group constrained strategy, respect of exactly a group of a domain for the allocated TRXs (frequencies and allocation strategy options checked)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-148

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Respect of the exceptional separation constraints (between subcells) prior to co-cell, co-site or neighbor separations (relaxation) A transmitter and its neighbors must not have the same (BSIC-BCCH) pair ((BSIC, BCCH) pair option checked) Two neighbors must not have the same (BSIC-BCCH) pair ((BSIC, BCCH) pair option checked) To run the checking algorithm, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Right-click the Transmitters folder or on a group of transmitters. Choose the Frequency plan: Audit... command from the shortcut menu. In the General tab of the dialog, select the parameters you want to check. In the Separations tab, click the Exceptional pairs... button to check/add separations within exceptional pairs of transmitters and subcells. Define the channel separations within subcells of a same cell, within subcells of co-site transmitters and between subcells of neighbors. You may specify separations between BCCH subcells, traffic subcells and between BCCH and traffic subcells. 6) In the Detailed results tab, specify the detail level you wish to display in the Event viewer. When no option is selected, The U-Net displays global warnings or/and error messages according to the problems. It will display an error message per transmitter/subcell/TRX/pair of transmitters if you choose Error messages. When selecting Warning related to separations, it displays a warning for each separation constraint violation. If Additional warnings are checked, it will give a detailed list of all the warnings. 7) Click OK.

Note: To provide a faster display of the results, it is possible to postpone the global summary over all the subcells and to run it in the audit output dialog.

Audit results are then displayed in a specific dialog made of two parts: The top part summarizes all the allocated resources in a structured grid. It is possible to choose at which level (Cells, Subcells, or TRXs) to display these results by clicking . - In some detailed results have been requested, these are given in the Description column. - In case violation separations have been requested, the With the TRX column indicates the TRX with which the considered TRX is in conflict. If you click the related cell, you can switch from violated TRXs to violated TRXs within the grid.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-149

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

The bottom part displays the global summary (number of analyzed items, errors, warning) of the audit. This information can be also stored in an external log file.

Note: You can run the postponed global summary using the button.

II. Checking Consistency between Transmitters and Subcells

An additional tool is available to check consistency of some subcell and TRX characteristics which can be duplicated at the transmitter level which may occur after incorrect use of the archive function in database connection. The U-Net checks for each transmitter that: The number of TRXs indicated in the Transmitters table corresponds to the number of TRXs listed for this transmitter in the TRXs table. The list of channels used by the transmitter consists of all the channels assigned to TRXs of the transmitter. The BCCH of the transmitter is the same than the channel assigned to BCCH TRX of the transmitter. The number of required TRXs indicated in the Transmitters table is equal to the sum of required TRXs of the transmitter subcells. The hopping mode of the transmitter corresponds to the one of its TCH subcell. To start the Audit tool, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Right-click the Transmitters folder and select the Subcells: Audit... command. In the Subcell consistency dialog, two options are available: you may display a report in the events viewer (the U-Net provides a list of problems grouped by transmitters) and solve the detected problems (the U-Net updates characteristics of transmitters inconsistent with their subcells and TRXS). 3) Click OK.

III. Using the Channel Search Tool in GSM/GPRS/EDGE

The U-Net provides a tool which allows you to search for BCCH and/or non BCCH channels and BSIC. This is an additional tool to analyze a frequency plan. You may use it to quickly visualize channel and BSIC reuse on the map. To display the Search window, select the Channel search window in the View general menu. The U-Net opens a floating window that you can keep at any location on your screen, or dock at the bottom of the map, like the Point analysis window. The user defines a channel or a BSIC. The U-Net finds and highlights (by allocating significant colors) the transmitters which are assigned that channel or BSIC.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-150

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Three tabs are available to help the user find transmitters which are assigned a given channel, BSIC or BCCH-BSIC. The U-Net changes the colors of the transmitter arrows on the map. To obtain a 2D graphic display, it is necessary to have preliminary defined and calculated a study "Coverage by transmitter" (with a color display by transmitter). The colors of the coverage cells will then follow the colors of the transmitters. Search for channels The user defines a channel, which can be searched within the control channels ("BCCH"), within the other channels ("non BCCH"), or indifferently within all the channels ("All") of the network, without differentiating subcells. The U-Net runs through the channel list of each transmitter and gives the color RED to co-channel transmitters, ORANGE to multi-adjacent channel transmitters (+1 and -1), BLUE (+1) and GREEN (-1) to adjacent channel transmitters and GREY to the others. If it happens that a transmitter meets several criteria, the co-channel criterion has priority meaning that RED color always overrides the others. Search for BSIC The user defines a BSIC value. The U-Net runs through all the BSIC within the network and gives the color RED to transmitters with that BSIC and GREY to the others. Search for BCCH-BSIC The user defines a pair of BCCH-BSIC values. The U-Net runs through all the BCCH-BSIC pairs within the network and gives the color RED to transmitters with that BCCH-BSIC and GREY to the others.

Note: To restore the initial transmitter colors, click the of the map. A useful feature is to display as label on the map the BCCH, BSIC and channel list of each transmitter, using the Display tab of the Transmitters folder properties. button in the bottom

IV. Displaying the Frequency Distribution

After an allocation (manual or automatic), it is possible to display the frequency reuse in a single window. This dialog shows both the frequency load (number of utilization of each frequency weighted by the fractional load) and the number of times each frequency is globally used. Results are given in a table form that can be either copied and pasted to any external analysis tool or exported to an external file. To display the frequency usage statistics window, perform the following steps:
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-151

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

1) 2) 3)

Click the Data tab of the Explorer window, Right-click the transmitters folder or on a group of transmitters, Choose the Frequency plan: Frequency Distribution... command from the shortcut menu.

The

button creates a tabulated file in txt or csv format using the generic

tool to export table. It is also possible to analyze the allocated frequencies in a network through the use of histograms. An histogram will represent the (load = f (frequency)) function. To open the frequencies histogram, click the window seen above. button in the frequency usage statistics

Each bar represents a frequency, its height depending on its load value. By moving the mouse along the histogram area, the (frequency, load value) pair is displayed at the place of the cursor. In the right part of the window, a table summarised the load of each single frequency. button keeps the histogram representation in memory, Clicking the allowing you to paste it into another application. You can also print it by clicking the button.

V. Computing KPIs in GSM/GPRS/EDGE

The U-Net allows the user to calculate and analyze the Key Performance Indicators, such as the reduction factor, the blocking probability, and delay that are currently set in the network. This can be thought of as an analysis tool that enables the user to observe how much the network satisfies basic criteria of performance. To run a KPI calculation, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Click the Data tab from the Explorer window. Expand the Traffic analysis folder by clicking the network, to open the shortcut menu. Select KPI calculation.... In the KPI calculation dialog, choose the dimensioning model to be used for computations. You can select the columns you want to display in the table. To do this, click the Displayed columns button and select information you wish to display. 6) Click Calculate. button. Right-click a Traffic capture item, according to which you want to dimension the

For each subcell of each transmitter, the U-Net gives: Network settings such as the number of TRXs, the number of packet, shared and circuit timeslots and the traffic load, the maximum number of TRXs that can be placed in the transmitter (this value is indicated in the dimensioning model

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-152

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

properties), the maximum rate of traffic overflow (%) (Specified in the subcell properties) and the half rate traffic ratio (%) (Defined in the subcell properties).

Note: When the maximum rate of traffic overflow and the Half-Rate traffic ratio values are different for BCCH and TCH subcells, the U-Net takes the BCCH subcell values.

Traffic capture results such as the packet traffic demand (kbps), the average demand in packet timeslots, the average number of timeslots per connection (packet) and the circuit traffic demand (Erlangs), the average demand in circuit timeslots and the average number of timeslots per connection (circuit).

Note: In case of concentric cells, the traffic demanded on TCH subcells is different from the one evaluated during the traffic capture. It is calculated from the traffic demand of the capture and the effective rate of traffic overflow (instead of the maximum rate used in traffic analysis).

For packet services, the average number of timeslots per connection corresponds to the average number of downlink timeslots, which mobile terminals can simultaneously communicate over. For circuit switched services, the number of timeslots per connection is 1 in case of full rate; else it depends on the half rate ratio. For a circuit switched service, you will find the served circuit traffic (Erlangs), the effective rate of traffic overflow and the effective blocking rate. The served circuit traffic corresponds to the circuit traffic demand less the effective overflowed circuit traffic. In case of Erlang B, the effective rate of traffic overflow corresponds to the effective blocking rate; this value is deduced from the required number of circuit timeslots (shared + dedicated) and the circuit traffic demand in Erlang B tables. In case of Erlang C, the effective rate of traffic overflow is zero except if the maximum number of TRXs is exceeded; the effective blocking rate is inferred from the number of circuit timeslots (shared + dedicated) and the circuit traffic demand in Erlang C tables. For a packet switched service, results are the served packet traffic (kbps), the effective rate of traffic overflow, the minimum throughput reduction factor and KPIs such as the throughput reduction factor, the delay and the blocking rate.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-153

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

The served packet traffic corresponds to the packet traffic demand less the effective overflowed packet traffic. The effective rate of traffic overflow corresponds to the rejected packet traffic due to missing packet timeslots. The minimum throughput reduction factor is stated in percentage; it corresponds to the highest reduction (lowest percentage) that can be applied to the maximum rate to supply service with the minimum permissible rate (defined for the service). KPIs are deduced from the packet load and the number of available connections by using quality charts defined in the dimensioning model properties. 7) After a computation, click Commit.

Note: KPI calculation is based on a traffic capture. Modifications of traffic map(s), traffic parameters and transmitter properties (for example, calculation area, E/GPRS equipment...) have an influence on the traffic capture. Therefore, if you modify some of these data, you must recalculate the traffic capture before calculating KPIs.

6.8 Specific GSM/GPRS/EDGE Prediction Studies

This section describes the following: Setting Specific Coverage Conditions in GSM/GPRS/EDGE Studies Studying Interfered Zone Predictions Computing a Coverage Study by C/I Level Studying Interferences with the Point Analysis

6.8.1 Setting Specific Coverage Conditions in GSM/GPRS/EDGE Studies

Whatever the project type is, the way to create, manage and run coverage studies is identical. Only study parameters are different. Hence, in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, even if coverage study dialogs are composed of the three classical tabs: The General tab where you may rename the study, define the coverage resolution, add some comments, define group, sort and filter criteria, on the coverage display only (not on the results). The Condition tab where you can specify the study parameters. The Display tab to define coverage display settings. Coverage conditions are managed with some specifics related to GSM/GPRS/EDGE technology.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-154

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

GSM/GPRS/EDGE specific settings in predictions are described below: Indeed, coverage conditions include the possibility to choose between two options for the definition of reception thresholds. You can either manually enter a lower threshold for the transmitters to be part of a coverage, or you can choose the lower threshold defined in subcells (taking into account the power offset) for this. To do this, select the button next to the threshold boxes. In each pixel,

the U-Net will then take into account all subcells respecting its minimum signal level at that point for the coverage. The best server notion (+ margin) and the cell edge coverage probability options are then considered. Concerning the best (or second best) server option, the U-Net provides the possibility to consider or not HCS layers and associated priorities. Let us assume that: Each transmitter, Txi, belongs to a Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) layer, k, with a defined priority. The maximum range option (available in the System tab of the Predictions property dialog) is inactive. In case of all the servers are considered (All), for each HCS layer, k, the service area of Txi corresponds to the bins where:
Minimum threshold PTxi (tt ) (or LTxi or Total LossesTxi ) < Maximum threshold rec tot

In case of the best signal level per HCS layer and a margin, for each HCS layer, k, the service area of Txi corresponds to the bins where:
Minimum threshold PTxi (tt ) (or LTxi or Total LossesTxi ) < Maximum threshold rec tot

And
Txj Txi Prec (BCCH ) Best Prec (BCCH ) M j i

Where M is the specified margin (dB). Best function: considers the highest value.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-155

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: If the margin equals 0 dB, the U-Net will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is the highest one. If the margin is set to 2 dB, the U-Net will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is either the highest one or 2dB lower than the highest one. If the margin is set to -2 dB, the U-Net will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is 2dB higher than the signal levels from transmitters, which are 2nd best servers.

In case of the best signal level on the highest priority layer and a margin, the service area of Txi corresponds to the bins where:
Minimum threshold PTxi (tt ) (or LTxi or Total LossesTxi ) < Maximum threshold rec tot

And
Txj Txi Prec (BCCH ) Best Prec (BCCH ) M j i

And Txi belongs to the HCS layer with the highest priority Where: M is the specified margin (dB). Best function: considers the highest value.

Note: If the margin equals 0 dB, the U-Net will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is the highest one. If the margin is set to 2 dB, the U-Net will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is either the highest one or 2dB lower than the highest one. If the margin is set to -2 dB, the U-Net will consider bins where the signal level received from Txi is 2dB higher than the signal levels from transmitters, which are 2nd best servers.

In case of the second best signal level per HCS layer and a margin, for each HCS layer, k, the service area of Txi corresponds to the bins where:
Minimum threshold PTxi (tt ) (or LTxi or Total LossesTxi ) < Maximum threshold rec tot

And

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-156

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Txj Txi Prec (BCCH ) 2 nd Best Prec (BCCH ) M j i

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Where: M is the specified margin (dB). 2nd Best function: considers the second highest value.

Note: If the margin equals 0 dB, the U-Net will consider bins where the signal level received from Taxi is the second highest one. If the margin is set to 2 dB, the U-Net will consider bins where the signal level received from Taxi is either the second highest one or 2dB lower than the second highest one. If the margin is set to -2 dB, the U-Net will consider bins where the signal level received from Taxi is 2dB higher than the signal levels from transmitters, which are 3rd best servers.

Note: Choosing the Best signal level per HCS layer makes the U-Net consider the best server of each HCS layer on the considered pixel. Overlapping best server zones are enabling.

1)

It is possible to take into account or not the indoor coverage by checking/unchecking the related box. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. Considering a reception pixel of a specific clutter class, this loss is added to the total path loss regarding to the defined value (in dB).

2)

Furthermore, it is possible to restrict the reception on certain TRX types using the appropriate scrolling box. It is possible to select the All option in interference studies.

3)

In interference studies, it is possible also to use the

button to consider the min

C/I threshold defined per subcell as lower or upper ratio signal to noise for interference definition. 4) It is possible to choose the signal to noise ratio to be taken into actually. Actually, the thermal noise is taken into account when choosing the (C/I+N) option (default) or not (C/I option).

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-157

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

5)

As for the TRX type filter at reception on a pixel (See above 3 - ), you can also restrict the study to potentially interfered TRX type using the appropriate scrolling box. Selecting the (All) option makes the U-Net study C/I over each TRX type.

6)

Other specific options are relative to interference studies or GPRS/EDGE studies and are described in the corresponding shortcut sensitive help.

Note: Since each pixel can be seen as a receiver, its related properties have to be set (for example: adjacent channel protection level or thermal noise).

6.8.2 Studying Interfered Zone Predictions

The determination of interference zones is possible as soon as channels have been allocated to the transmitters composing the current network, exactly like for interferences study using the point analysis tool. This study is closely based on the principle of common prediction studies from which it takes the definition mode and to which it adds an interference condition. Nevertheless, specific coverage GSM/GPRS/EDGE conditions are available. Prediction parameters are also standard. The interfered zones study enables the user to predict areas where transmitters are interfered (taken into account depending on signal level) by other transmitters sharing either an identical channel or an adjacent channel as function of signal to noise ratio. The U-Net computes C/I level on each calculation bin where conditions on signal reception are satisfied. Then, it considers in coverage the bins where the calculated C/I is lower than an upper threshold and colors the bin depending on an interfered transmitter attribute. The interference definition is proper to each study. To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the interfered zone option from the Study types window. The open window is made of three tab windows: General, Condition, and Display. For all of these, use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows. The interfered zone study is a template for which the field Transmitter is selected by default in the display tab. In that case, interfered zones will be displayed with the same colors than the ones defined for each transmitter. The study depends on the hopping mode, and will be made on: A channel of TRXs belonging to the related TRX type (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) in case of a non hopping mode A MAL of the related subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER), in case of base band hopping

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-158

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

A MAL-MAIO of the related subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) in case of synthesized frequency hopping When the Detailed Results option is checked, all the results for all the TRXs satisfying the conditions are displayed. Check the Detailed Results option if you want to display details on interference: per TRX (one channel) in non-hopping mode per MAL (indicating the related TRX type) in base band hopping mode per MAL-MAIO (indicating the related TRX type) in synthesized frequency hopping mode per transmitter in the current prediction folder When the detailed results option is unchecked, it is possible to display the study either for the condition satisfied by At least one TRX or by The worst TRX. There can be many possibilities as the final results also depend on the type of interfered TRX (BCCH, TCH, or All). For example, for an interference study with condition 0 <= C/I = 10 performed for a transmitter having 1 BCCH TRX with C/I = 2, 1 TCH TRX with C/I = -1, and 1 TCH TRX with C/I = 1: For All types of interfered TRXs: At least one TRX (default option) The U-Net keeps the worst result satisfying the conditions, that is the worst among the BCCH TRX and the 2nd TCH TRX is C/I = 1, which satisfies the conditions so the bin will be colored. The worst TRX The U-Net keeps the worst of all the results and then verifies the conditions, that is the worst among the BCCH TRX and the 2 TCH TRXs is C/I = -1, which does not satisfy the conditions so the bin will not be colored. For interfered TRXs of type TCH: At least one TRX (default option) The U-Net keeps the worst result satisfying the conditions, that is only the 2nd TCH TRX satisfies the conditions and has C/I = 1, so the bin will be colored. The worst TRX The U-Net keeps the worst of all the results and then verifies the conditions, that is the worst among the 2 TCH TRXs is C/I = -1, which does not satisfy the conditions so the bin will not be colored. For interfered TRXs of type BCCH: At least one TRX (default option) The U-Net keeps the worst result satisfying the conditions, that is only the BCCH TRX satisfies the conditions and has C/I = 2, so the bin will be colored. The worst TRX

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-159

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

The U-Net keeps the worst of all the results and then verifies the conditions, that is only the BCCH TRX satisfies the conditions and has C/I = 2, so the bin will be colored.

Note: Shadowing margins (depending on the entered cell edge coverage probability and the model standard deviation at the receiver) are applied only on the C values. These are not taken into account in I determinations. The U-Net offers default calculation and display parameters when creating interference area prediction studies but it is possible to color by any other consistent attribute just by adjusting display. Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, it is necessary to recalculate prediction study to update coverage. Since each pixel can be seen as a receiver, its related properties have to be set (for example, adjacent channel protection level or thermal noise). The noise figure is taken into account for calculations based on C/(I+N). This noise figure is added to the thermal noise value defined in the Predictions folders properties to calculate the value of N.

6.8.3 Computing a Coverage Study by C/I Level

The determination of zones by C/I level is possible as soon as channels have been allocated to the transmitters composing the current network, exactly like for interferences study using the point analysis tool. This study is closely based on the principle of common prediction studies from which it takes the definition mode and to which it adds an interference condition. Nevertheless, specific coverage GSM/GPRS/EDGE conditions are available. Prediction parameters are also standard. The coverage by C/I level study enables the user to predict C/I levels involving transmitters (taken into account depending on signal level) sharing either an identical channel or an adjacent channel with other transmitters as function of signal to noise ratio. The interference definition is proper to each study. To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Coverage by C/I level option from the Study types window. The open window is made of three tab windows: General, Condition, and Display. For all of these, use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows. The coverage by C/I level study is a template for which the field C/I level is selected by default in the display tab. In that case, each layer corresponds to an area where the

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-160

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

C/I level exceeds a defined minimum threshold. Numerous options related to signal level coverage are available in the Display tab. The study depends on the hopping mode, and will be made on: A channel of TRXs belonging to the related TRX type (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) in case of a non hopping mode A MAL of the related subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER), in case of base band hopping A MAL-MAIO of the related subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) in case of synthesized frequency hopping When the Detailed Results option is checked, all the results for all the TRXs satisfying the conditions are displayed. Check the Detailed Results option if you want to display details on interference: per TRX (one channel) in Non Hopping mode per MAL (indicating the related TRX type) in Base Band Hopping mode per MAL-MAIO (indicating the related TRX type) in Synthesized Frequency Hopping mode Per transmitter in the current prediction folder When the Detailed Results option is unchecked, it is possible to display the study either for the condition satisfied by At least one TRX or by The worst TRX. There can be many possibilities as the final results also depend on the type of interfered TRX (BCCH, TCH, or All). For example, for an interference study with condition 0 <= C/I = 10 performed for a transmitter having 1 BCCH TRX with C/I = 2, 1 TCH TRX with C/I = -1, and 1 TCH TRX with C/I = 1: For All types of interfered TRXs: At least one TRX (default option) The U-Net keeps the worst result satisfying the conditions, that is the worst among the BCCH TRX and the 2nd TCH TRX is C/I = 1, which satisfies the conditions so the bin will be colored. The worst TRX The U-Net keeps the worst of all the results and then verifies the conditions, that is the worst among the BCCH TRX and the 2 TCH TRXs is C/I = -1, which does not satisfy the conditions so the bin will not be colored. For interfered TRXs of type TCH: At least one TRX (default option) The U-Net keeps the worst result satisfying the conditions, that is only the 2nd TCH TRX satisfies the conditions and has C/I = 1, so the bin will be colored. The worst TRX The U-Net keeps the worst of all the results and then verifies the conditions, that is the worst among the 2 TCH TRXs is C/I = -1, which does not satisfy the conditions so the bin will not be colored.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-161

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

For interfered TRXs of type BCCH: At least one TRX (default option) The U-Net keeps the worst result satisfying the conditions, that is only the BCCH TRX satisfies the conditions and has C/I = 2, so the bin will be colored. The worst TRX The U-Net keeps the worst of all the results and then verifies the conditions, that is only the BCCH TRX satisfies the conditions and has C/I = 2, so the bin will be colored.

Note: Shadowing margins (depending on the entered cell edge coverage probability and the C/I standard deviation per clutter class) are applied only to the C values. These are not taken into account in I determinations. The U-Net offers default calculation and display parameters when creating coverage by interference level but it is possible to color by any other consistent attribute just by adjusting display. Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, it is necessary to recalculate prediction study to update coverage. When selecting a highest signal level option with a margin or the All option, you may have areas where several transmitters are interfered. On these bins, several C/I values are calculated. Therefore, you may choose to display either the lowest one of these values (Min C/I option) or the highest one (Max C/I option) in the Field scrolling box of the display tab. Since each pixel can be seen as a receiver, its related properties have to be set (for example, adjacent channel protection level or thermal noise). The noise figure is taken into account for calculations based on C/(I+N). This noise figure is added to the thermal noise value defined in the Predictions folders properties to calculate the value of N.

6.8.4 Studying Interferences with the Point Analysis

With the point analysis tool, the U-Net is able to display interferers for a given transmitter, at the receiver location on the map using the propagation model as defined before (with priority order respect). To analyze interferences, user must assign frequencies to transmitters beforehand. Furthermore, since each pixel can be seen as a receiver, its related properties have to be set. To make active the Interference analysis window (GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects only):

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-162

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

1)

From the menu bar, check the Point analysis command in the View menu. The point analysis window opens in the lower right corner of your current environment.

2) 3)

Click the Interference tab. Select the transmitter you want the receiver to be currently connected from the associated scrolling list.

4) 5)

Click the

button from the toolbar.

Move over the map to display the transmitter interferers at any point. The data appearing in the Point analysis window on receiver interference at the point clicked will be as follows:

It is possible to choose the signal to noise ratio to be taken into account. Actually, the thermal noise is taken into account when choosing the (C/I+N) option (default) or not (C/I option). You can study a TRX type or all the TRX types. The U-Net displays the signal level and interference received on: The most interfered channel of the selected transmitter subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) or the most interfered of all the transmitter subcells (All), in case of a non hopping mode. The MAL of the selected transmitter subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) or the most interfered MAL of all the transmitter subcells (All), in case of base band hopping. The most interfered MAL-MAIO of the selected transmitter subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_INNER) or the most interfered MAL-MAIO of all the transmitter subcells (All), in case of synthesized frequency hopping. Finally, you may take into account either contribution of all the interferers, or co-channel interferers only or adjacent channel interferers only, in the interference level evaluation.

I. Results
In this tab, the U-Net provides for a given receiver: The signal level received from the interfered subcell. Either the overall interference received from all the interferer transmitters (both co-channel and adjacent channel interferers are considered), or the co-channel interference received from all the co-channel interferers, or the adjacent channel interference received from all the adjacent channel interferers. The interference level received from each interferer. Interferers are sorted in a descending signal level order. The U-Net informs you when reduction factors of signal level and interference level are applied; reception bars consist of two parts, a full part, which shows the received
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-163

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

signal or interference level, and an empty part corresponding to signal or interference level reduction. In case of the interfered subcell reception bar, signal level reduction can be due to the subcell power offset. For each interferer transmitter reception bar, interference level reduction can be due to power offsets of subcells, adjacent channel protection and fractional load. In addition, the U-Net indicates the most interfered channel in case of non hopping (the most interfered MAL in case of base band hopping and the most interfered MAL-MAIO in case of base band hopping) and the signal to noise ratio at the receiver.

II. Scenario
The studied transmitter is Site14_2. We analyze potential interferences from all the interferers (both co-channel and adjacent channel interferers) received on all its TRXs ( that is we study the worst case). The requested cell edge coverage probability is 75 %. Like for the interfered zones and coverage by C/I levels studies, the U-Net analyzes the most interfered channel of the studied transmitter in case of non hopping mode, as shown in Figure 6-9.

Figure 6-9 Point analysis tool Interference tab Site 14_2 consists of two subcells, one is TRX type BCCH (no power offset); the other is TRX type TCH (no power offset). The channel 4 is assigned to one TRX TCH. Site 9_2 consists of two subcells, one is TRX type BCCH (no power offset); the other is TRX type TCH (no power offset). The channel 4 is assigned to TRX BCCH. Site 2_2 is a transmitter made of two subcells, one is TRX type BCCH (no power offset); the other is TRX type TCH (power offset 3dB). The channel 4 is assigned to one TRX TCH. Site 12_3 is a transmitter made of two subcells, one is TRX type BCCH (no power offset); the other is TRX type TCH (no power offset). The channel 3 is assigned to one TRX TCH. The non-hopping mode is assigned to TRX types of these transmitters. Point analysis leads to the following results:

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-164

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

The 1st bar in brown shows the signal level from the transmitter Site14_2 at the receiver (-77.5 dBm). Initially, this value would have been -71.4 dBm, but signal level value is decreased by 6.1 dB due to the shadowing margin. The 2nd bar indicates the overall interference for interfering stations (-87.7 dBm). The following bars show, respectively, in descending order, signal levels of each interferer subcell on the studied station (Site9_2: -89.2 dBm, Site2_2: -93.5 dBm and Site12_3: - 106.94 dBm). You can see that the most interfered channel of Site14_2 is the channel 4 and the C/I received is 10.2 dB. Analysis of interferers leads to the following comments: The reception bar of Site9_2 is full. The channel 4 is assigned to TRX BCCH of this transmitter; it is a co-channel interferer. On the other hand, no power offset is defined. The reception bar of Site2_2 is partly filled. The channel 4 is assigned to one TRX TCH of this transmitter; it is a co-channel interferer. The empty part of the reception bar is due to power offset (3 dB) specified for the TCH subcell. Finally, the reception bar of Site 12_3 is partly filled. The channel 3 is assigned to one TRX TCH of this transmitter; this is an adjacent channel interferer. Here, the empty part of the reception bar is due to the adjacent channel protection level is set to 18 dB. No power offset is defined for TCH subcell. Nevertheless, if a supplementary power offset had been defined for this subcell, the related bar would have been cleared from 3dB more. If the bar representing interference of the station is full, this means that this station interference on the interfered station is not attenuated by one of the factors described above.

Note: Only signal level (C) is downgraded by the shadowing margin (depending on the entered cell edge coverage probability and the standard deviation per clutter class). The interference level (I) is not altered by the shadowing margin. Neither DTX, nor traffic load of TRXs are taken into account to evaluate the interference levels (The U-Net calculates interference level by considering 100% as voice activity factor and traffic load). If a MAL is defined on the most interfered subcell, you can obtain, for example, the following result: Interference on: TCH M.A.L. 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-165

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

6.8.5 Studying Interferences within a Transmitter Pair

The transmitter pair interference analysis tool lets you analyze the effects of an interfering signal from any transmitter on the carrier signal of any other transmitter within the computation zone. Table 6-50 lists two ways of activating the transmitter pair interference analysis tool (GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects only). Table 6-50 Activating the transmitter pair interference analysis tool (GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects only) Method 1) 2) Method 1 3) Step From the View menu, choose the Analysis between two transmitters command. Select relevant victim or interfered and interferer transmitters on the map or through the respective combo boxes in the tool window. Click Calculate to calculate the effect of interfering signal from the interferer on the carrier signal from the victim. 1) 2) 3) Right-click a transmitter in the Explorer window or on the map to open the associated context menu. Select the Transmitter Interferences command from the context menu. Method 2 Select relevant victim or interfered and interferer transmitters on the map or through the respective combo boxes in the tool window, 4) Click Calculate to calculate the effect of interfering signal from the interferer on the carrier signal from the victim.

The U-Net changes the symbols of the transmitters concerned for the duration of the analysis to improve visibility on the map. The victim is represented by a while the interferers icon is : icon

It is possible to select the victim and interferer transmitters either from the combo boxes available in the tool, which list all the transmitters in the document, or by clicking the and buttons to select the victim and the interferer transmitters respectively on the map.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-166

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

The

button lets you swap the victim and interferer transmitters.

The Visible option lets you display or hide this coverage by checking or unchecking it respectively. It is possible to either restrict the coverage condition for this analysis to a defined reception threshold or to base this analysis on an already computed coverage study. In this way, you can compare the result of this interference analysis with the result from a coverage prediction study. You can also view the relevant statistical details (histogram, cumulative distribution functions, mean and standard deviation) of this coverage by clicking the button.

Note: It is imperative to have a computation zone defined for this tool to function.

6.8.6 Creating a Coverage by GPRS/EDGE Coding Schemes

This study displays areas according to the used coding schemes. The coverage color depends on the assigned coding scheme. The coding scheme choice is determined from radio conditions (C or/and C/I). Therefore, the strongest C and C/I values are, the higher the coding scheme will be. As this study can be based on C/I, some parameters are similar to the ones found in interference predictions. To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the GPRS/EDGE option from the Study Types window. The open window is made of three tab windows: General, Condition, and Display. For all of these, use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows. In the condition tab, specific coverage GSM/GPRS/EDGE conditions are available. You can define whether the coverage study is based on GPRS or/and EDGE. You can also further specify this coverage study by defining a terminal type. Thus, the C and C/I graphs related to this terminal type will be used in the calculations. This will also allow using the noise figure of this terminal type in the calculations based on interpolation between C/I and C/(I+N). Furthermore, this implies that the highest coding scheme allowed for this terminal type will restrict the calculations to that number of coding scheme. If no terminal type is defined for the study, The U-Net will use the graphs defined for the transmitters GPRS/EDGE equipment. And the default value for the noise figure

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-167

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

will be taken into account for this case if the calculations are based on interpolation between C/I and C/(I+N). Mobility can also be defined for this type of study. This will enable the U-Net to choose between the graphs associated with the defined terminal type and the graphs associated with the transmitter. In case calculations are based on C/I, the Ideal link adaptation option changes the algorithm used to choose the coding schemes. No Ideal Link Adaptation and Worst case between C and C/I option For each C and C/I process, the coding scheme related to the computed threshold is extracted (from the related GPRS/EGPRS equipment). The lowest value is kept. No Ideal Link Adaptation and Interpolation between C/N and C/(I+N) option For each C and C/I process, the coding scheme related to the computed threshold is extracted (from the related GPRS/EGPRS equipment). The C thresholds are internally converted to C/N thresholds (where N is the thermal noise defined in the Predictions folder property dialog), to be indexed with the C/(I+N) value. C/I thresholds are also indexed with the C/(I+N) value. The highest value is kept. Ideal Link Adaptation and Worst case between C and C/I option For each C and C/I process, the best coding scheme is taken. The best coding scheme means the coding scheme for which the throughput is maximal (from the related GPRS/EGPRS equipment). The lowest value is kept. Ideal Link Adaptation and Interpolation between C/N and C/(I+N) option For each C and C/I process, the best coding scheme is taken. The best coding scheme means the coding scheme for which the throughput is maximal (from the related GPRS/EGPRS equipment). The Throughput = f(C) graph is internally converted to Throughput = f(C/N) graph, to be indexed with the C/(I+N) value. The Throughput = f(C/I) graph is also indexed with the C/(I+N) value. The highest value is kept. The coverage by coding scheme is a template for which the field 'Coding Schemes' is selected by default in the display tab. In that case, each layer shows the coding schemes to be used in the transmitter coverage area. You can also choose to display your coverage in term of Best coding schemes. The resulting coverage shows the best coding scheme that can be used on each pixel. Other options related to GPRS/EDGE coverage are available in the Display tab.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-168

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

Note: The U-Net offers default calculation and display parameters when creating GPRS/EDGE prediction studies. Choosing another display type can make the coverage study invalid. In this case, it is necessary to recalculate prediction study to update coverage. Since each pixel can be seen as a receiver, its related properties have to be set (for example, adjacent channel protection level or thermal noise).

6.8.7 Computing a Coverage by GPRS/EDGE Rate per Timeslot

This study displays the areas where the rate carried by transmitter on one packet timeslot exceeds the user-defined thresholds. The rate is determined from rate=f(C) or/and rate=f(C/I) graphs defined for each coding scheme. As this study can be based on C/I, some parameters are similar to the ones found in interference predictions. To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the GPRS/EDGE option from the Study Types window. The open window is made of three tab windows: General, Condition, and Display. For all of these, use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows. In the condition tab, specific coverage GSM/GPRS/EDGE conditions are available. You can define whether the coverage study is based on GPRS or/and EDGE. You can also further specify this coverage study by defining a terminal type. Thus, the C and C/I graphs related to this terminal type will be used in the calculations. This will also allow using the noise figure of this terminal type in the calculations based on interpolation between C/I and C/(I+N). Furthermore, this implies that the highest coding scheme allowed for this terminal type will restrict the calculations to that number of coding scheme. If no terminal type is defined for the study, The U-Net will use the graphs defined for the transmitters GPRS/EDGE equipment. And the default value for the noise figure will be taken into account for this case if the calculations are based on interpolation between C/I and C/(I+N). Mobility can also be defined for this type of study. This will enable The U-Net to choose between the graphs associated with the defined terminal type and the graphs associated with the transmitter. It is possible to choose between gross (RLC/MAC) throughput per transmitter and application throughput per transmitter based on a selected service type. The application level throughput considers the data redundancy due to the network layers present between the physical and the application layer. Relative information is defined
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-169

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

in the service properties. Selecting this option leads to a coverage study that shows the application level throughputs per transmitter. This type of study can directly be created by selecting Application Throughput/Timeslot from the study types window. The application level throughput is computed using the following formula: TPapp = (TP TPO) * SF / 100 Where: TPapp = Application level throughput per timeslot TP = Computed throughput per timeslot TPO = Throughput offset (defined in the service properties): accounts for additional information accompanying packets, such as, headers. SF = Scaling factor (defined in the service properties). In case calculations are based on C/I, the Ideal link adaptation option has an effect on the coding schemes determination only. Once the coding scheme is extracted, the related throughput is determined using the Worst case between C and C/I or Interpolation between C/N and C/(I+N) options. Worst case between C and C/I option For each C and C/I process, knowing the coding scheme, the related throughput is extracted (from the related GPRS/EGPRS equipment). The minimal value is kept. Interpolation between C/N and C/(I+N) option For each C and C/I process, knowing the coding scheme, the related throughput is extracted (from the related GPRS/EGPRS equipment). The throughput interpolation method consists in interpolating the throughput provided by the Throughput = f(C) graph (indexed by the C/(I+N) value) and the throughput provided by the Throughput = f(C/I) graph (also indexed by the C/(I+N) value), according to the respective weights of I and N values. The Interpolation formula is given by: TP = (N/(I+N))*(TPC)+(1-(N/(I+N)))*TPCI Where: TPC: Throughput get by C/N throughput graph. TPCI: Throughput get by C/(I+N) throughput graph. To calculate the throughput/timeslot coverage, two coverage display options are available. You can choose among: Throughput/timeslot: Each layer shows the throughput that a transmitter can carry on one timeslot. Best throughput/timeslot: The resulting coverage gives the best throughput/timeslot per pixel from the previous display. Average throughput/timeslot: Gives the average throughput that the transmitter can carry on one timeslot per pixel. If there are different coverage areas for
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-170

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

different TRXs, this study will calculate the union of this coverage and display the average values over these coverage areas. While the other coverage for throughput/timeslot performs an intersection over these coverage zones keeping the minimum value of throughput per pixel. BLER: The coverage is colored according to the block error rate measured per transmitter. The block error rate in this case is computed as follows: BLER = 1 TP/TPmax Where: TP = Computed throughput per timeslot per pixel TPmax = Maximum throughput per timeslot per pixel for the given coding scheme determined from the terminal or transmitter GPRS/EDGE equipment. If the throughput per timeslot is greater than the maximum throughput per timeslot, the BLER is 0%. Max BLER: Gives the coverage according to the maximum block error rate per pixel for each transmitter. Other options related to GPRS/EDGE coverage are available in the Display tab.

Note: The U-Net offers default calculation and display parameters when creating GPRS/EDGE prediction studies. Choosing another display type can make invalid coverage study. In this case, it is necessary to recalculate prediction study to update coverage. Since each pixel can be seen as a receiver, its related properties have to be set (For example, adjacent channel protection level or thermal noise).

6.8.8 Calculating GSM Circuit Quality Indicators

This study displays the areas where the selected circuit quality indicator (BER, maximum BER, FER, maximum FER, MOS, maximum MOS) for the transmitter satisfies the user-defined criteria. The quality indicator is computed from radio conditions (C, C and C/I, or C/N and C/(I+N)) and the adaptation or quality thresholds (depending on whether the equipment implements ideal mode selection) defined for the codec equipment at each transmitter. Transmitters that have no codec equipment defined are not considered in this study. As this study can be based on C/I, some parameters are similar to the ones found in interference predictions. To prepare this prediction study, in the prediction creation steps, select the Circuit Quality Indicators option from the Study Types window. The next window comprises
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-171

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 6 GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA Project Management

three tabs: General, Condition, and Display. For all of these, use What's this help to get description about the fields available in the windows. You can further specify this coverage study by defining a terminal type. Thus, the C and C/I graphs related to this terminal type will be used in the calculations. This will also allow using the noise figure of this terminal type in the calculations based on interpolation between C/I and C/ (I+N). Furthermore, the ideal link adaptation is determined by the codec equipment assigned to the transmitters. If no terminal type is defined for the study, the U-Net will use the graphs defined for the transmitters GPRS/EDGE equipment. And the default value for the noise figure will be taken into account for this case if the calculations are based on interpolation between C/I and C/ (I+N). Mobility can also be defined for this type of study. This will enable The U-Net to choose between the graphs associated with the defined terminal type and the graphs associated with the transmitter. The circuit quality indicators prediction study is performed by, firstly, determining the codec mode that satisfies the C, C/N, C/I, or C/ (I+N) conditions according to the selected calculation options. The following scenarios can emerge: If a terminal type is not defined or does not have codec equipment assigned, The U-Net will consider the codec equipment assigned to the transmitter only. If, on the contrary, codec equipment is not defined for a transmitter, the codec equipment assigned to the terminal will be considered for these calculations. If no codec equipment is defined either for the terminal type or for the transmitter, the transmitter will not be considered during the calculations. If 2 different codec equipments are defined for the terminal type and the transmitter, the codec mode will be determined for both equipment, but the codec mode with the higher priority will be considered. Once a codec mode is determined, the U-Net uses the Adaptation or Quality thresholds, defined in the codec equipment properties, to calculate the value of the quality indicator using the name of the calculated quality indicator and the priorities of the codec modes. If the codec equipment implements ideal link adaptation, the Quality thresholds and Quality Indicator graphs will be used. Otherwise, the Adaptation thresholds will be used.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-172

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

7.1 Overview
The U-Net AFP model supports Base Band Hopping (BBH) and Synthesized Frequency Hopping (SFH) modes. It enables you to automatically plan: Channels and HSN (Hopping sequence numbers) in case of BBH MAL (Mobile Allocation List), MAIO (Mobile Allocation Index Offset) and HSN in case of SFH Only channels in case of non-hopping BSICs The U-Net AFP model is implemented using simulated annealing, taboo search, graph heuristics and machine learning. It manages its time resources to match the user time directives. If being given a lot of time, the model will use a major part of this time to learn the network. During the learning phase, the model adjusts its internal parameters. At the end of the user-defined time period, the AFP switches to a randomised combinatorial search phase. If the user-defined time period is extremely short, the AFP may carry on only deterministic heuristics that converge quickly. In all the cases where randomness is used, the random seed is initialized by the machine time. The network learning is performed by executing many fast and deterministic instances of the AFP. The one, which gains the best performance, is memorized in the document and is therefore the most adapted to the specific network. The next time when an AFP will be executed, the U-Net will start where the learning process ended the U-Net will use the parameter profile of the best solution stored in the .atl document. The convergence criterion studied by the U-Net AFP model is based on a cost function taking into account all the requirements given by the network inputs. The goal of the model is to try to minimize the value of the cost function.

7.2 Managing the U-Net AFP Module

The cost function is stated in interfered Erlangs (that is in number of interfered timeslots). The cost function corresponds to the cost of the entire loaded network. It is based on the following four components: Cost component due to interferences Cost component due to separation violations Cost component due to missing requested TRXs

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-1

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

Cost component due to allocation changes and cost component due to assigned frequencies out of the domain Parameters considered in the cost function components can be fully controlled by the user. Some of these parameters are part of the general data model (quality requirements, allowed percentage of interference per subcell) while others, such as separation costs and diversity gains, can be managed through the property dialog of the U-Net AFP model. For detailed information about the cost function calculation and cost function components, refer to the AFP Reference Guide.

Note: At the end of an allocation, the final result in terms of reached total cost does not depend on the network initial state (initial cost) on condition that state is correct from a consistency checking point of view. From this, we can say that the AFP starts from scratch every time the user starts the allocation. The AFP cost always starts from the previously reached cost. If we start a new AFP with the same settings after committing the AFP results, the initial cost will have the value of the final cost of the previous AFP session.

7.2.1 Accessing the U-Net AFP Properties

In the property dialog of the U-Net AFP model, you may manage some parameters to be considered in the cost function and in addition, give some directives to the AFP model. Table 7-1 lists two ways of opening the U-Net AFP model property dialog. Table 7-1 Accessing the U-Net AFP model property dialog Method Method 1 1) 2) 3) 1) 2) Method 2 3) 4) Step In the Modules tab, open the Frequency allocation modules list. Right-click the U-Net AFP Module subfolder. Select the Properties command in the shortcut menu. Right-click the Transmitters folder. Select the Frequency plan: Automatic allocation command from the opened menu. In the second dialog (after the loading of the network), select the model in the scrolling box. Click Properties.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-2

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

Note: Similar to the propagation models, it is possible to make several duplicates of any AFP module with different sets of parameters. These different copies will be available in AFP sessions. That is, you will be able to choose from the list of all AFP modules, duplicates or originals, available in the AFP module combo box of the AFP session wizard.

The AFP property dialog consists of the following seven tabs: General Cost HSN MAL MAIO BSIC Advanced The Cost, Separation Weights and Advanced tabs include parameters involved in the cost function estimation. The other tabs refer to the allocation strategies of HSN, MAL, MAIO and BSICs assigned to the AFP.

7.2.2 Defining the AFP Parameters

I. Defining Interference Cost in the AFP
The interference cost component is evaluated for each TRX. Estimation is based on interference histograms calculated for pairs of subcells and takes into account frequency and interferer diversity gains modeling frequency hopping and gain due to DTX. For each single TRX, the U-Net estimates the probability for the TRX to be interfered. A TRX v is interfered by a TRX i when the C/I level on TRX v is lower than an evaluated threshold. This one is calculated by adding the different gains listed above to the minimum C/I threshold specified in the subcell properties. U-Net reads the interference probability (probability to have a C/I lower than the evaluated threshold) in the corresponding interference histogram. Then, for each TRX v, it adds the interference probabilities from all the TRX i; the sum is limited to 100% of the TRX traffic. On this basis, a safety margin on the required C/I threshold may be entered. The aim of this value is to take into account the real distribution of the interferences around the threshold from which we assume that there are no interferences. Actually, one can think that a frequency plan for which most the C/I levels are just better than the C/I threshold will have to be improved more "strongly" than another one for which the C/I levels are evenly distributed.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-3

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

For example, consider a subcell for which the C/I threshold is 12. The interference histograms have been computed. Without safety margin, the U-Net extracts the probability for which C/I is lower than 12 (for example 50%) and compares it with the maximum allowed percentage of interference. By introducing a "grey level" of 3 dB, the U-Net considers: The probability for which C/I is lower than 12-3 = 9 dB (for example, 35%) The probabilities of having C/I is from 9 to 12+3 = 15 dB, linearly weighted from 100% (for 8dB) to 0% (16dB) So, in addition to 35%, we will add: 85.7% of the probabilities of having 9 <C/I 10 71.4% of the probabilities of having 10 <C/I 11 57.1% of the probabilities of having 11 <C/I 12 42.8% of the probabilities of having 12 <C/I 13 28.5% of the probabilities of having 13 <C/I 14 14.2% of the probabilities of having 14 <C/I 15 0% of the probabilities of having 15 < C/I If this probabilities decrease when C/I increases, we consider a global value of less than the initial one (50%). On the other hand, if we have a high probability of 12<C/I <=15 (not considered with no grey level), this aspect will increase the global percentage (>50%). The close-to-threshold plan will be studied more precisely. The interference component can be weighted in the global cost value. For further details, refer to the Technical Reference Guide.

II. Defining Separation Violation Cost in the AFP

The separation violation cost component is evaluated for each TRX. Estimation is based on costs specified for the required separations. Let S12 denote the required separation between two transmitters Tx1 and Tx2 in the network. If we assign f1 at Tx1 and f2 at Tx2, and if f1 f2 < S12 , then we can consider that the separation requirement is not respected. A separation can be strongly or weakly violated. For example, the pair of frequencies 1 and 2 breaks a separation requirement of 3. The pair of frequencies 1 and 3 breaks this requirement as well, but is closer to answer it, since the reached separation is 2. Therefore, this second pair should provide a lower cost than the first one. In addition, frequencies that are part of a MAL with a low fractional load and that break a separation should not be weighted the same as in a non-hopping separation breaking case. Therefore, the cost is weighted by the burst collision probability (which is the

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-4

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

multiplication of the victim and interferer fractional loads) and the interferer diversity gain. For each single TRX, separation violations are summed up. This sum is limited to 100% of the TRX traffic. The same limitation stands for the interference cost component. It can complete the amount of ruined traffic to 100% but not more. This means that a TRX with many separation violations is considered as 100% ruined and has a cost component due to interference equal to 0.

Note: The TRX traffic depends on the number of circuit and composite timeslots available and the TRX traffic load. These parameters are given in the subcell properties. For further details, refer to the Technical Reference Guide.

To set the cost of separation violations, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Access the U-Net AFP property dialog. Click the Cost tab. In the Separations part, scroll in the list until displaying the requested separation s. Click the reached separation k and enter the required cost value.

Note: The higher the violation is, the greater the cost value should be. If the same TRX is involved several times in separation violations, its cost value will be limited to 100% (100% of its traffic is interfered). The separation component can be weighted in the global cost value.

III. Other Costs Involved in AFP Cost Function

In addition to the standard interference and separation violation cost, the U-Net provides two other components in the global cost value. These cannot be set. The following two other components are available in the U-Net: 1) Missing TRX cost component

By default, the U-Net considers for each missing TRX that 100% of the TRX traffic is ruined. The tax per missing TRX can be modified in the AFP model property dialog (Cost tab).

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-5

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

Let us imagine a transmitter involved in an AFP session for which the number of requested TRXs is 5; this transmitter is not a TBA transmitter. It has currently 3 assigned TRXs. In that case, the two missing and undefined TRXs have to be considered for this allocation because they would have an effect on the current frequency plan, if allocated. In the Taxes section of the Cost tab in the AFP properties dialog, you may indicate the cost value to be considered when a TRX is missing. The default multiplicative tax factor for a missing TRX is 1. In order not to take into account this component in the global cost, uncheck the Active box. 2) Corrupted TRX cost component

The U-Net considers a TRX as corrupted when: An allocated frequency does not respect the frequency domain constraints. More than one frequency is assigned to a NH TRX. No channel is assigned to a TRX. The MAL assigned to a group constrained SFH TRX is not strictly a group of its domain. By default, the U-Net considers 1000% of the TRX traffic as cost. The value of this parameter can be modified in the AFP model property dialog. In the Taxes section of the Cost tab in the AFP properties dialog, you may indicate the cost value to be considered when a TRX is corrupted. The default cost for a corrupted TRX is 10. In order not to take into account this component in the global cost, uncheck the Active box. 3) Modified TRX cost component

By increasing this cost value, the AFP will minimize the number of TRXs for which a change is performed. The aim is to maintain an existing plan when this one is correct "enough" and to play on the TRXs for which the problems are more linked with corruption, interferences or separation constraints. Consider the following example of a network made of 90 transmitters. 15 are frozen. The sum of the required TRXs is 257. Only 193 TRXs are already allocated assuming that their quality is "correct". So, 64 TRXs must be created or newly allocated with as little as possible influence on the remaining 193 TRXs as possible. Table 7-2 lists the effect of the modified TRX cost. Table 7-2 Effect of the modified TRX cost Cost of changing a TRX 1 0.3 0.1 98 129 139
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-6

Number of changed TRXs

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

Cost of changing a TRX 0

Number of changed TRXs 162

IV. Weighting Cost Components

The cost components of the global cost of the U-Net AFP cost function can be weighted. To introduce a weight on the different components (such as separation, interference) in the global cost, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) Access the U-Net AFP property dialog. Click the Cost tab. Define multiplicative tax factors for the costs related to missing or corrupted TRXs in the Taxes section. In the Components part, you can enter a value between 0 and 1 as multiplicative factors for Separation, Interference and Modified TRX cost components.

V. Setting Interferer Diversity Gain in the AFP

When a frequency hopping mode is used, a mobile is linked to a list a frequencies (MAL) and the frequency collision probability is spread over the several frequencies. The use of frequency hopping drives to two types of gains, the interferer diversity gain and the frequency diversity gain. The latter is described in the Interferences tab. The interferer diversity gain (in dB) models the geographic diversity of interferers and is applied both to both the interference and separation cost components of the cost function. This gain depends on the MAL length of the victim TRX. A long MAL leads to average the negative effects over users with different geographic locations. In the interference cost component, the gain is applied to lowering the defined minimum C/I threshold per subcell that is to shift the entrance point in the interference histograms. In the separation violation cost component, the gain is translated in a linear value and applied directly to the separation cost by division. To set the values of the interferer diversity gains, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Access the U-Net AFP property dialog. Click the Advanced tab. In the top table, select the MAL length and specify a gain value.

Example: Consider the following simple case of a network consisted of two TRXs. The first one TRXi carries the (MAL)i and is interfered by TRXj carrying the (MAL)j. TRXi and TRXj have a separation requirement of 2. Their lengths are respectively 5 and 4. Unfortunately, they share a same frequency (separation = 0). In this case, the cost of

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-7

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

the separation violation is 90 for each TRX. The interferer diversity gain is 1.4 for a MAL of 5 and 1.2 for a MAL of 4. In the interference histograms of the interfered TRXi (or TRXj), the entrance point is shifted by 1.4 dB (or 1.2 dB). For TRXi, with a gain of 1.4 dB, the effect on the separation cost is given by the linear value 10
(1.4 10 )

1 .38 . The contribution of the MAL length of 5 divides the separation cost

for this interfered MAL by 1.38. Considering the initial separation cost and the interferer diversity gain, we reach a separation cost of (90 1 .38 ) = 65 .21 . If we now consider the fractional load (considering the fact that only one channel of each TRX causes interferences, with (MAL length)I=4 and (MAL length)j=4), the collision probability is
1 20 . The separation violation cost to consider for TRXi is therefore 3.25%.

In the same way, the separation violation cost to consider for TRXj is:
1 90 = 3.41% 20 1.2 10 10 .

Now, in order to compute the separation violation cost on each TRX, the current values have to be multiplied by the number of timeslots dedicated to traffic (by default, 7 for BCCH and 8 for TCH) and by its related traffic load (given in units of Erlang/timeslot).

VI. Setting the Frequency Diversity Gain in the AFP

The frequency diversity gain is taken into account in case of frequency hopping. When a frequency hopping mode is used, a mobile is linked to a list a frequency (MAL) and the frequency collision probability is spread over the several frequencies. The use of frequency hopping drives to two types of gains, the interferer diversity gain and the frequency diversity gain. This first one is described in the Cost tab. The frequency diversity gain (dB) models the gain due to diversity of multi-path effects and is applied to the interference cost component only. Depending on the victim MAL length, the gain is applied to lowering the defined minimum C/I threshold per subcell. To set the values of the frequency diversity gains, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Access the U-Net AFP property dialog. Click the Advanced tab. In the middle table, select the MAL length and specify a gain value.

VII. Setting the Gain due to Low Time Slot Use Ratio
The gain due to low timeslot use ratio is taken into account in case of interferers supporting DTX. When considering an interferer, the use of DTX reduces its amount of

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-8

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

interference. This is modelled by a gain (in dB) associated to the voice activity factor ; it is applied to the minimum C/I threshold of the interfered subcell. To consider the gains due to low timeslot use ratio, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Access the U-Net AFP property dialog. Click the Advanced tab. In the Gain due to low timeslot use ratio section, choose Reduce the effect of interferers in the case of active DTX and/or low traffic load.

Note: DTX is only applied over subcells for which the DTX supported box has been flagged (Subcell property). Do not mix up voice activity factor in DTX and traffic load. Traffic load represents the average occupancy of TRXs and is always applied to the value of cost function (as defined per subcell during dimensioning).

7.2.3 Defining the AFP Allocation Strategies

The U-Net AFP model is currently capable of doing free MAL assignment or pre-defined MAL assignment. The instruction indicating the assignment mode to be used is given at the subcell level. When using a free assignment mode, the AFP model may assign any MAL that satisfies the needs of TRXs. Then, the size of MAL, the HSNs and the MAIOs can be assigned either according to user directives, or completely freely. In the last case, the AFP model takes all the decisions during allocation; the HSN and MAIO assignments and the MAL size determination are carried out to obtain a user defined frequency reuse and fractional load. When using a group constrained assignment model, the AFP model may only assign a pre-defined group in the domain. The success of the assignment depends on the definition of groups. Each MAL length represented in the domain should fulfil the following conditions. There must be many MALs having the same length and all together should cover the domain. Examples: An example of a badly planned domain is a domain containing many 3-length groups, a single 5-length group and many 8-length groups. If being restricted to such a domain, the AFP will not produce an optimal plan. On the other hand, by adding only a few more 5-length groups, the quality can be improved.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-9

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

An example of a good group definition is a domain of 40 frequencies where at least 60 groups are defined, 15 3-length groups, 12 4-length groups, 10 5-length groups

Note: The AFP model will always assign the same MAL to all the TRXs within a same subcell. The assignment mode Group constrained is considered for SFH only. In NH and BBH the assignment mode is always free. The quality is almost as good as with free assignment when many groups are defined.

In order to get correct results, the user must keep in mind some of the possible trade-offs, for example: When assigning the same HSN and MAL to synchronized subcells, the lowest bound of the MAL length is increased, since it must be at least equal to the total number of TRXs sharing the same HSN. When assigning the same HSN and MAL to synchronized subcells, we limit the choice of the MAL frequencies. When assigning the same HSN and MAL to synchronized subcells, we may gain more on interference and frequency diversity. In order to understand how to work the AFP model, some notions are detailed below. An atom is a set of synchronized subcells sharing the same HSN, the same frequency domain, and the same MAL. The MAIO assignment of an atom manages the frequency collisions between the MALs in it. If an atom contains more than one subcell, the AFP may assign partially different MALs to it. Working at the atom level, and with the definition of a user-defined synchronization reference (subcell table), the AFP model is able to fully support the benefits of synchronization in a GSM network.

I. Setting the Channel Spectrum Usage (AFP)

In case of free MAL assignment, and for any hopping or non-hopping mode, it is possible to impose a strategy to the U-Net on the channel spacing within these MALs. To access the channel spacing options, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Access the U-Net AFP property dialog. Click the Spectrum tab.

Three options are proposed:

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-10

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

Automatic: The AFP will try to minimize the cost without paying particular attention to the channel distribution. This is the default option Maximum: The AFP will create frequency plans close to uniform spectrum use distribution. This option is the best possible when information is lacking. Minimum: The user can impose to the AFP to put aside spare spectrum either for future use, or to estimate the need in terms of spectrum.

II. Setting HSN Strategy in Frequency Hopping (AFP)

In the U-Net, the HSN (Hopping Sequence Number) is defined at the subcell level. So, for interfering and non-synchronized subcells, the AFP model tries to allocate different HSNs. When the subcells are synchronized (usually within a same site), it tries to assign the same HSN and different MAIOs. To access the HSN strategy parameters, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Access the U-Net AFP property dialog. Click the HSN tab.

In this tab of the U-Net AFP dialog, the user can manage the HSN allocation in order to respect one of the following options: Assignment of the same HSN to all the subcells of a site. Assignment of the same HSN to all the subcells of a transmitter. Assignment of different HSNs to a pair of subcells which mutually interfere. Optimized assignment (free HSN) to obtain the best frequency assignment.

Note: The following constraints do not allow the AFP model to comply with some directives: If two synchronized subcells on the same site have different "Max MAL lengths" they cannot be assigned with the same HSN. If two synchronized subcells on the same site have different frequency domains (maybe due to forbidden channels), they cannot be assigned with the same HSN. If two synchronized subcells on the same site have different assignment mode (free, grouped), they cannot be assigned with the same HSN.

III. Defining MAL Targets in SFH (AFP)

Settings available in the MAL tab are taken into account for SFH only. The AFP model uses these directives in order to determine the MAL and MAL length to be assigned to each subcell.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-11

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

You may choose either to assign the same MAL to all the TRXs of an atom or to allow allocation of different ones. Then, in order to determine the MAL length to be assigned, the AFP proceeds in this order: When using a group constrained assignment model, the AFP model may only assign a pre-defined group in the domain. Only the length of groups available in the domain may be selected. For any assignment model (group constrained or free), the AFP model may either assign the MAL with the maximum length allowed (user-defined in subcell properties) or freely choose the MAL length according to the directives: To access the MAL targets parameters, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Access the U-Net AFP property dialog. Click the MAL tab.

IV. Target Frequency Reuse

Both the MAL size determination and the HSN assignment are carried out to obtain a user defined frequency reuse. This value can be edited. The frequency reuse ratio represents the ratio between the MAL length and the total number of frequencies in the domain. The reuse ratio is not directly linked to the reuse pattern. Nevertheless, we can assume that a 1x1 reuse pattern has a frequency reuse ratio of 1. A 4x12 reuse pattern can have a reuse ratio between 1/4 and 1/12, depending on whether all TRXs sharing the same sites have the same MAL (and HSN) or not (considering synchronisation at the site level).

Note: This directive makes sense in SFH only. This directive is used only if the option Adjust MAL length is checked. Otherwise, the specified value is not taken into account.

V. MAL Size Strategy

It is possible to choose a MAL size strategy when allocating different MALs to the TRXs of an atom. You may decide to use either a short MAL strategy or a long MAL strategy. A long MAL strategy enables the AFP model to profit from the hopping gains. On the other hand, it may be harder to find frequencies for these MALs.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-12

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

Note: This directive makes sense in SFH only. This directive is considered only if the option Adjust MAL length is checked.

VI. Target Fractional Load

Both the MAL size determination and the HSN assignment are performed to obtain a user defined fractional load. The value of the target fractional load parameter can be edited. A fractional load is obtained if the number of TRXs using a certain MAL is only times the size of this MAL (Our notion of fractional load does not require taking into account the traffic load. It is always smaller or equal to 1.). It equals 1 in NH or BBH modes. The target fractional load cannot be always obtained; we will consider this parameter as a guideline rather than a constraint. When it can be reached, the AFP model will choose a MAL length 1/ times higher than the number of TRXs in the biggest subcell of the atom.

Note: This directive has a meaning only in case of SFH. The target frequency reuse directive has a higher priority than the target fractional load directive. This directive is used only if the option Adjust MAL length is checked. Otherwise, the specified value is not taken into account. The value of this parameter can be auto calibrated by the AFP model if you select the check box Automatic adjustment.

VII. Managing MAIO Preferences in SFH (AFP)

When working in Synthesized Frequency Hopping, it is possible to fix some targets to the AFP. To access the MAIO preferences parameters, perform the following steps: 1) 2) Access the U-Net AFP property dialog. Click the MAIO tab.

Two allocation options are available: Staggered: The MAIOs assigned to TRXs of a subcell are evenly spaced. Free: The AFP model freely assigns MAIOs (without constraint on the MAIO spacing).
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-13

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

The AFP assigns MAIOs to TRXs to reuse the same MAL within a subcell, within a transmitter, or even within a site. The MAL-MAIO allocation is carried out at the same time in order to respect the separation requirements between frequencies on air.

VIII. Setting BSIC Usage Diversity

The U-Net AFP provides the possibility to define a strategy on the BSIC usage. To access the BSIC usage strategy parameters, perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) Access the U-Net AFP property dialog. Click the BSIC tab. Choose the BSIC allocation strategy: Minimal: The AFP model uses a minimum number of BSICs; it will reuse the same BSICs. Maximal and homogeneous: This strategy consists in using as many BSICs as possible. In addition, the AFP model will choose BSICs evenly distributed in the whole domain. BSIC allocation is based on neighborhood links between cells defined in the Neighbors table. Example: we assume that we have three transmitters, A, B and C, as Figure 7-1 shows. 1st case: A has two neighbors, B and C. The AFP model assigns different BSICs to A, B and C if they have the same BCCH. 2nd case: A is neighbor of B and C. The AFP model assigns different BSICs to A, B and C if they have the same BCCH.
A N B N C B N A N C

Figure 7-1 1st case: B and C neighbors of A

2nd case: A neighbor of B and C

It is possible to consider an additional constraint on interferences. If you select the option Load all the potential interferers when starting AFP (and then, import/calculate interference histograms), the AFP model assigns different BSICs to potential interferers, which have the same BCCH. Finally, the BSIC allocation is compliant with the strategy selected in the BSIC tab of the AFP model property dialog.

7.3 U-Net AFP Module GUI

This section describes the following: U-Net AFP Cost Tab U-Net AFP HSN Tab
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-14

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

U-Net AFP MAL Tab U-Net AFP MAIO Tab U-Net AFP BSIC Tab U-Net AFP Advanced Tab

7.3.1 U-Net AFP Cost Tab

Figure 7-2 AFP module properties dialog cost tab This tab, as shown in Figure 7-2, allows you to set the different components composing the global cost value. Each component might be or not considered (weight or tax =0). Through the Taxes section, you can assign multiplicative tax factors to missing and corrupted TRXs, and TRXs with out of domain frequencies assigned. TRXs having out of domain frequencies can be interfered and can interfere as well. A TRX with out of domain channels assigned, but having correct ARFCNs, will have a double influence on the cost. Below lists normal cost of interference/separation/modification.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-15

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

A cost of being out of domain, multiplied by the number of frequencies that are out of domain and divided by length of the MAL. The effects of missing, corrupted and out of domain TRXs on the total AFP cost can be scaled by manipulating these values. The Components section deals with the TRXs that are neither missing nor corrupted. Here you can set the values for weights and cost for Separation, Interference and Modified TRX cost components. A quality target, the percentage max of interference, is specified for each subcell (Subcell properties), which enables the AFP to differentiate small and large amounts of interference. It is more useful to handle small and large amounts of interference in different manners. For example, it is better to have 10 transmitters with up to 2% of interfered traffic rather than having two transmitters with up to 10% of interfered traffic. Selecting the option Do not include the cost of TRXs having reached their quality target will tell the AFP to only take into account only the cost of TRXs exceeding this quality target. The AFP dismisses any TRX whose cost is less than the quality target. On the other hand, this quality target is not considered when the other option, Take into account the cost of all the TRXs, is selected. In this case, the AFP includes the cost of all the TRXs in the global cost. The interference definition according to the required quality threshold section enables you to set a C/I weighting margin around the required quality threshold in order for the AFP to consider the traffic having close-to-threshold C/I conditions as neither 100% satisfactory nor 100% corrupted.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-16

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

7.3.2 U-Net AFP Separation Weights Tab

Figure 7-3 AFP module properties dialog - separation weights tab This tab enables you to define Separation Constraints Violation weights for different types for Separation Constraints and partial Separation Constraints Violation costs. Here, you can assign Separation Constraints Violation weights between 0 and 1 to the following types of Separation Constraints: Co-cell Separation Violations Co-site Separation Violations Neighborhood Separation Violations Exceptional pair Separation Violations The Partial Separation Constraints Violations section enables you to define the costs for separations of 'k', when 's' is required. You can define the percentage of TRX traffic to be considered in the case of a partial separation constraint violation. You can also add and remove different separations using the corresponding buttons.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-17

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

7.3.3 U-Net AFP Spectrum Tab

Figure 7-4 AFP module properties dialog - spectrum tab This tab enables you to give an allocation strategy in case of free MAL assignment. It is possible to choose from the three available channel spacing directives (any hopping or non-hopping mode). Automatic: Directs the AFP to optimize the channel spacing to minimize the cost. Max: Directs the AFP to use the entire spectrum available. Min: Directs the AFP to use a limited spectrum.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-18

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

7.3.4 U-Net AFP HSN Tab

Figure 7-5 AFP module properties dialog spectrum tab This tab enables you to give an allocation strategy in case of frequency hopping. In case of SFH or BBH, you may specify HSN allocation directives, such as: By subcell By transmitter By site Free

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-19

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

7.3.5 U-Net AFP MAL Tab

Figure 7-6 AFP module properties dialog - MAL tab This tab enables you to inform the AFP about the Mobile Allocation List patterns and length priorities in the case of frequency hopping. In the case of synchronized set, you may choose from the following MAL Pattern directives: Allocation of the same MAL for all the subcells of a synchronised set Allocation of different MALs within a synchronised set In the case of SFH, you may define the MAL Length Priority directives: Group constrained mode limits the choice of MAL lengths Maximum MAL lengths or adjusted MAL lengths MAL length per domain size should be less than a defined value Long or short MAL Strategy (with the option of keeping MAL long enough to allow a certain pattern)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-20

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

Assign a Target Fractional Load and choose whether the AFP has the possibility of modifying this value in order to adjust it automatically for optimization

7.3.6 U-Net AFP MAIO Tab

Figure 7-7 AFP module properties dialog - MAIO tab This tab enables you to choose a MAIO allocation strategy in case of frequency hopping. In case of SFH, you may choose between the following MAIO allocation preferences: Staggered Free

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-21

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

7.3.7 U-Net AFP BSIC Tab

Figure 7-8 AFP module properties dialog - BSIC tab This tab enables you to choose the BSIC usage diversity strategy in case of frequency hopping. You may set the BSIC usage diversity to either of the following: Minimum usage diversity Maximum and homogeneous usage diversity

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-22

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Chapter 7 U-Net AFP Module

7.3.8 U-Net AFP Advanced Tab

Figure 7-9 AFP module properties dialog - advanced tab This tab enables you to define the interference and frequency diversity gains in case of frequency hopping. You may set: The interferer diversity gain The frequency diversity gain The gain depending on the timeslot use ratio The interferer diversity and the frequency diversity gains are defined for different MAL lengths. All of these parameters available in the dialog are used to evaluate the interference cost component. Only the interferer diversity gain has an influence on the separation cost component.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-23

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Index

Index
A
Accessing coverage prediction properties, 5-69 Accessing data table, 2-22 Accessing Standard Propagation Model properties, 5-36 Accessing the U-Net AFP properties, 7-2 Adding a point in the computation/focus zone, 5-10 Adding or Removing exceptional separations on the map, 6-132 Adding/Removing GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbors on the map, 6-114 Adjusting AFP parameters from the data model, 6-133 Adjusting cell edge coverage probability in a point analysis, 5-100 Adjusting GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile properties, 6-59 Adjusting Standard Propagation Model parameters, 5-37 Adjusting transmitter azimuths, 4-32 Administration files, 2-62, 3-13, 3-17, 3-19, 3-22, 3-23, 3-29, 3-30, 3-32, 3-34, 3-37, 3-40, 3-44, 3-69, 3-73, 3-74 Administration files,.cfg, 3-22, 3-23, 3-29, 3-30, 3-32, 3-34, 3-37, 3-40, 3-44, 3-69, 3-73, 3-74 Administration files,.geo, 3-22, 3-23, 3-29, 3-30, 3-32, 3-34, 3-37, 3-40, 3-44, 3-69, 3-73, 3-74 Administration files:U-Net.ini, 2-62, 3-13, 3-17, 3-19 Advanced filtering Counter example 1, 2-41 Advanced filtering Counter example 2, 2-42 Advanced filtering Example, 2-40 Advanced filtering Counter example 1, 2-41 Advanced filtering Counter example 2, 2-42 Advanced filtering Example, 2-40 AFP Step 1 generic inputs, 6-136 AFP Step 2 loading and checking the network, 6-138 AFP Step 3 generic AFP settings, 6-139 AFP Step 4 generic outputs, 6-143 Allocating GSM/GPRS/EDGE transmitter neighbors automatically, 6-104 Allocating GSM/GPRS/EDGE transmitter neighbors manually, 6-99 Allocating manually a BCCH to transmitters, 6-120 Arrange items in groups, 2-43 Assigning BSIC domains to transmitters, 6-118 Assigning cell types to transmitters, 6-24 Assigning codec equipment to terminal types, 6-40 Assigning codec equipment to transmitters, 6-39 Assigning environment formulas to clutter types (Cost-Hata), 5-29 Assigning environment formulas to clutter types (ITU 529-3), 5-34 Assigning environment formulas to clutter types (Okumura-Hata), 5-25 Assigning HCS layers to transmitters, 6-14 Assigning manually BSICs to transmitters, 6-119 Assigning radio equipment to transmitter, 4-55 Assigning TRX Equipment, 6-34 Assigning TRX Equipment to cell types/subcells, 6-34

B
BIL data format, 3-16 BIL file, 3-13 BIL format, 3-16 BSICs Overview, 6-9 BTS equipment, 4-57 Building a project step by step, 1-15

C
Calculating a coverage by signal level, 5-79 Huawei Technologies Proprietary i-1

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software Calculating a coverage by transmitter, 5-78 Calculating GSM Circuit Quality Indicators, 6-171 Calculating Interference Matrices, 6-126 Calculating overlapping areas, 5-80 Cell type parameters, 6-18 Cell types Overview, 6-16 Centring displayed objects in the map window, 2-7 Centring the map, 2-7 Changing a site position, 4-5 Checking consistency between transmitters and subcells, 6-150 Checking path loss results validity, 5-85 Checking the frequency plan consistency, 6-147 Checking the map geocoding, 3-54 Choosing a scale, 2-7 Choosing the appropriate propagation model, 5-16 Citrix metaframe, 1-4 Clutter, 3-23, 3-30 Clutter,Clutter classes, 3-23 Clutter,Clutter heights, 3-30 Commiting dimensioning outputs in GSM/GPRS/EDGE, 6-94 Common prediction studies, 5-97 Reception analysis, 5-97 Computation and focus zones effects, 5-3 Computation and focus zones Overview, 5-2 Computations in U-Net Overview, 5-1 Computing a coverage by GPRS/EDGE rate per timeslot, 6-169 Computing a coverage study by C/I level, 6-160 Computing automatically coding scheme thresholds, 6-43 Computing KPIs in GSM/GPRS/EDGE, 6-152 Computing shadowing margins, 5-59 Configuration files, 3-22, 3-29, 3-32, 3-34, 3-37, 3-40, 3-44 Considering losses due to diffraction (Cost-Hata), 5-28 Considering losses due to diffraction (Okumura-Hata), 5-23 Coordinate system, 3-8, 3-9

Index Coordinate system,Cartographic coordinate system, 3-8, 3-9 Coordinate system,Display system, 3-9 Coordinate system,Geographic coordinate system, 3-9 Coordinate system:Projection system, 3-8 Coordinate systems basic concepts, 3-6 Coordinate systems basic concepts, 3-6 Copying and pasting in tables, 2-29 Copying antenna patterns to the clipboard, 4-23 Coverage prediction available exports, 5-90 Coverage studies Overview, 5-62 CPU usage, 1-4 Create an advanced geo data folder, 3-44 Creating a clutter or traffic raster polygon, 3-58 Creating a Codec Equipment, 6-35 Creating a computation/focus zone from polygons, 5-7 Creating a coverage by GPRS/EDGE coding schemes, 6-167 Creating a coverage study template, 5-81 Creating a GPRS/EDGE equipment, 6-41 Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic map, 6-66 Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic map, 6-76 Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE mobility type, 6-51 Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE terminal, 6-54 Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic capture, 6-87 Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic map, 6-81 Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile, 6-58 Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic map, 6-70 Creating a repeater, 4-45 Creating a site, 4-2 Creating a site list, 4-12 Creating a station template, 4-36 Creating a transmitter, 4-25 Creating a TRX Equipment, 6-32 Creating a type of GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment, 6-61 Creating a vector layer, 3-62

Huawei Technologies Proprietary i-2

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software Creating an antenna, 4-17 Creating coverage calculations, 5-67 Creating coverage studies per group of transmitter, 5-68 Creating GSM/GPRS/EDGE services, 6-48 Creating subfolders, 2-47 Creating TRXs in transmitters, 6-122 Creating your own coordinate system, 3-10 Creating your own template, 1-13 Creating/Modifying environment formulas, 5-26 Creating/Modifying environment formulas (Cost-Hata), 5-30 Creating/Modifying environment formulas (ITU 529-3), 5-33

Index Defining the projection coordinate system, 3-8 Defining visibility ranges on objects, 2-8 Deleting a coverage study template, 5-81 Deleting a station template, 4-40 Deleting a transmitter, 4-35 Deleting built sites, 4-12 Deleting the computation/focus zone, 5-9 Description of MNU files, 3-23 Digital Elevation Model, 3-2 Digital Terrain Model, 3-2, 3-32, 3-74 Dimensioning GSM/GPRS/EDGE transmitters, 6-93 Disk space requirements, 1-3 Display system, 3-9 Display the line of sight area, 4-10 Displayed cursors, 2-10

D
Data table access, 2-22 Defining an environment default formula (Cost-Hata), 5-28 Defining an environment default formula (ITU 529-3), 5-32 Defining an environment default formula (Okumura-Hata), 5-24 Defining BSIC format, 6-10 Defining exceptional separations for frequency allocation, 6-129 Defining extended cells, 6-25 Defining general settings (ITU 529-3), 5-32

Displaying calculation events in a log window, 5-107 Displaying current GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbor list, 6-110 Displaying exceptional separations on the map, 6-132 Displaying general information on propagation model, 5-16 Displaying GSM/GPRS/EDGE exceptional pairs of neighbors on the map, 6-103 Displaying GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbors on the map, 6-113 Displaying information about raster polygons, 3-61 Displaying link budget at a receiver, 5-102 Displaying object labels on the map, 2-54 Displaying predicted signal levels at a point, 5-97 Displaying rate graphs, 6-45 Displaying rulers around the map, 2-8 Displaying signal levels or losses in point analysis, 5-101 Displaying site lists, 4-15 Displaying SPM parameters over a profile analysis, 5-103 Displaying statistics on clutter classes, 3-28 Displaying statistics on generic data, 3-47 Displaying statistics on GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic maps, 6-70 Displaying statistics on population, 3-42 Huawei Technologies Proprietary i-3

Defining GSM/GPRS/EDGE exceptional pairs of neighbors, 6-101 Defining GSM/GPRS/EDGE resources Overview, 6-4 Defining interference cost in the AFP, 7-3 Defining MAL targets in SFH (AFP), 7-11 Defining separation violation cost in the AFP, 7-4 Defining station template properties, 4-37 Defining the AFP allocation strategies Overview, 7-9 Defining the coverage conditions, 5-71 Defining the display coordinate system, 3-9 Defining the display properties of any item folder, 2-51

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software Displaying terrain section around sites, 4-9 Displaying the computation/focus zone coordinates, 5-11 Displaying the computation/focus zone size, 5-10 Displaying the frequency usage statistics, 6-151 Displaying the object properties, 2-20 Displaying the subcell list, 6-27 Displaying the TRX list, 6-123 Displaying vector layers over predictions, 3-37 Distance unit, 3-6 Distributing calculations on several Pcs, 5-105 Drawing a computation/focus zone, 5-5 Dropping a station from a template, 4-41 Dropping a station on an existing site, 4-42 DTM, 3-32 DXF data format, 3-18 Exporting a vector object, 3-76

Index

Exporting calculation events in a log file, 5-108 Exporting main path loss matrices, 5-87 Exporting maps to external files, 2-15 Exporting maps to other applications, 2-16 Exporting tables in external files, 2-31 Exporting the computation/focus zone to a file, 5-8 Exporting the GSM/GPRS/EDGE cumulated traffic, 6-86

F
Feeder, 4-57 Filtering data in a polygon, 2-48 Filtering radio data, 2-39 Filtering site lists, 4-16 Formats, 3-2, 3-13 Formats,File, 3-2

E
ECW data format, 3-20 Editing a vector object, 3-62 Editing clutter or traffic raster polygons, 3-59 Editing contents in tables, 2-24 Ellipsoid, 3-8, 3-9 Embedding - linking comparison, 3-48 Embedding geographic data, 3-49 Erdas Imagine data format, 3-19 Examples of cell types, 6-20 Examples of grouping by, 2-44 Examples of GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic data, 6-74 Exporting a clutter class map, 3-69 Exporting a clutter height map, 3-73 Exporting a DTM map, 3-74 Exporting a GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic map, 6-68 Exporting a GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic map, 6-81 Exporting a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic map, 6-85 Exporting a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic map, 6-76 Exporting a point analysis study, 5-103 Exporting a site list, 4-14

Formats,Geographic, 3-2, 3-13 Frequencies Overview, 6-5

G
General presentation, 1-1 Generating a report on Interference Matrices, 6-128 Generic data, 3-43 Generic maps Overview, 3-43 Generic maps Overview, 3-43 Geo data type supported, 3-2 Geographic coordinate system, 3-6, 3-9 Getting distances around sites, 4-8 Getting distances on the map, 2-10 Grouping geo data files in display folder, 3-53 GSM/GPRS/EDGE multi-service traffic cartography Overview, 6-65 GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects Overview, 6-1 GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects protocol, 6-2 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Resources allocation Overview, 6-98 GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic analysis Overview, 6-86 GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic capture outputs, 6-88 GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic management Overview, 6-47

Huawei Technologies Proprietary i-4

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Index Locating any point on the map, 2-57 Locating any vector on the map, 2-61 Locking coverage studies, 5-77 Locking path loss results, 5-83

H
HDR file, 3-13 Height unit, 3-6 Hierarchical cells Overview, 6-13 HSNs Overview, 6-8

M
Managing a multi-sectored station, 4-43 Managing a site list, 4-13 Managing and displaying legends, 2-52 Managing BSIC domains and groups, 6-11 Managing BTS equipment, 4-54 Managing cell types, 6-17 Managing clutter height maps, 3-30 Managing Codec equipment properties, 6-37 Managing DTM maps, 3-33 Managing exceptional separations for frequency allocation, 6-129 Managing feeder equipment, 4-54 Managing frequency bands, 6-5 Managing frequency domains and groups, 6-6 Managing generic maps, 3-46 Managing geographic data Overview, 3-1 Managing geographic data Overview, 3-1 Managing globally GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment types, 6-63 Managing globally GSM/GPRS/EDGE mobility types, 6-53 Managing globally GSM/GPRS/EDGE services, 6-50 Managing globally GSM/GPRS/EDGE terminals, 6-57 Managing globally GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profiles, 6-60 Managing GPRS/EDGE equipment properties, 6-42

I
Importing a clutter class file, 3-22 Importing a clutter height file, 3-29 Importing a DTM map, 3-32 Importing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic map, 6-66 Importing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic map, 6-78 Importing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic map, 6-83 Importing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic map, 6-71 Importing a population map, 3-40 Importing a site list, 4-15 Importing a vector file, 3-34 Importing scanned images, 3-37 Importing tables from external files, 2-33 Importing the computation/focus zone from a file, 5-7 Importing/Exporting Interference Matrices, 6-127 Improving calculation performances, 5-106 Installation, 1-4, 1-6, 1-7 Installation:U-Net application, 1-4, 1-6 Installation:U-NetSvr, 1-6, 1-7 Installing a remote antenna, 4-52 Installing distributed computing server, 1-6 Installing several antennas on a transmitter, 4-33 Installing U-Net, 1-4 Interference Matrices Overview, 6-125

K
Key Performance Indicators Definitions, 6-91 Key Performance Indicators Definitions, 6-91

Managing GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment traffic maps, 6-67 Managing GSM/GPRS/EDGE live traffic maps, 6-79 Managing GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio data Overview, 6-12 Managing GSM/GPRS/EDGE user density traffic maps, 6-84

L
Land use, 3-2 Listing all signal and C/I levels at a point, 5-98

Huawei Technologies Proprietary i-5

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software Managing GSM/GPRS/EDGE user profile traffic maps, 6-73 Managing HCS layers, 6-13 Managing HSN domains and groups, 6-8 Managing MAIO preferences in SFH (AFP), 7-13 Managing object visibility, 2-21 Managing population maps, 3-41 Managing prediction display, 5-74 Managing propagation model folders, 5-18 Managing radio network data Overview, 4-1 Managing Repeater equipment, 4-44 Managing repeater properties, 4-46 Managing Repeater/Remote Antenna equipment, 4-44 Managing scanned images, 3-38 Managing site altitudes, 4-6 Managing site properties, 4-3 Managing subcells in transmitters, 6-26 Managing table display, 2-25 Managing the antenna properties, 4-20 Managing the clutter classes, 3-23 Managing timeslot configurations, 6-15 Managing TMA equipment, 4-53 Managing transmitter properties, 4-27 Managing transmitter symbol display, 4-30 Managing TRX Equipment properties, 6-33 Managing TRXs in transmitters, 6-122 Managing vector object properties, 3-67 Managing vector object shapes, 3-64 Managing vector objects, 3-35 Memory requirements, 1-3 Merging hexagonal groups of base stations, 4-43 MIF data format, 3-19 Miscellaneous costs involved in AFP cost function, 7-5 MNU format, 3-19, 3-22, 3-23 Modifying clutter or traffic raster polygons, 3-59 Modifying the allocated GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbors, 6-111 Moving a point of the computation/focus zone, 5-9 Moving a transmitter on the map, 4-31 Multi-layer management, 2-21, 3-56 Offset unit, 3-6 Opening dialogs from tables, 2-25

Index

N
Naming automatically sites, 4-2 Naming automatically transmitters, 4-25

Optimising the loading of clutter class files, 3-22 Organising result outputs of a coverage study, 5-71 Other supported formats, 3-21

P
Parallel port, 1-3 Path loss, 5-97 Path loss calculation, 3-56 Path loss calculation:Multi-layer management, 3-56 Performing an Audit of the current GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighborhood plan, 6-116 PlaNET format, 3-2 Point analysis, 5-97, 5-98 Interference, 5-98 Reception, 5-97, 5-98 Point analysis predictions Overview, 5-94 Point-to-point analysis, 2-9 Population, 3-40 Predictions, 5-97, 5-98 Reception analysis, 5-97, 5-98 Printing a map, 2-13 Printing a point analysis study, 5-104 Printing antenna patterns, 4-24 Printing data tables, 2-35 Printing prediction reports, 5-88 Printing the active window, 2-4 Projected coordinate system, 3-8 Projection, 3-8 Projection systems, 3-8 Propagation models Overview, 5-11

R
Radio equipment, 4-57 Radio equipment Overview, 4-52

Huawei Technologies Proprietary i-6

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software Radio equipment Overview, 4-52 Radio equipment,Feeder, 4-57 Radio equipment:BTS, 4-57 Radio equipment:TMA, 4-57 Recommended configuration, 1-3 Refreshing maps and folders, 2-56 Removing a point in the computation/focus zone, 5-10 Removing distributed computing server, 1-7 Removing the polygon filter, 2-50 Removing U-Net, 1-6 Reorganize data after modifications, 2-47 Repairing a broken link, 3-51 Repeaters and Remote Antennas Overview, 4-43 Repeaters/Remote Antennas Overview, 4-43 Repeaters/Remote Antennas Overview, 4-43 Resizing the computation/focus zone, 5-9 Resolution, 3-23, 3-30, 3-38, 3-41 Resolution,Geo data, 3-23, 3-30, 3-38, 3-41 Running coverage calculations, 5-76

Index Setting GSM/GPRS/EDGE dimensioning models, 6-90 Setting GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment parameters, 6-62 Setting GSM/GPRS/EDGE service parameters, 6-48 Setting GSM/GPRS/EDGE terminal parameters, 6-56 Setting HSN strategy in frequency hopping (AFP), 7-11 Setting interferer diversity gain in the AFP, 7-7 Setting propagation model priority, 5-15 Setting specific coverage conditions in GSM/GPRS/EDGE studies, 6-154 Setting the channel spectrum 7-10 Setting the display properties of a site, 4-11 Setting the frequency diversity gain in the AFP, 7-8 Setting the receiver properties, 5-57 Setting transmitter activity, 4-35 Setting up a document to be printed, 2-57 SHP data format, 3-19 usage (AFP),

S
Saving the edited raster polygons, 3-70 Scanned image, 3-37 Scrolling between property dialogs, 2-68 Selecting a transmitter in point analysis, 5-100 Selecting degrees display format, 3-10 Selecting propagation models, 5-13 Selecting the power definition item in point analysis, 5-100 Setting a GSM/GPRS/EDGE mobility type, 6-52 Setting BSIC usage diversity in the AFP, 7-14 Setting calculation areas, 5-63 Setting calculation resolutions, 5-65 Setting Codec Adaptation Thresholds, 6-37 Setting Codec Quality thresholds, 6-38 Setting coding schemes parameters, 6-43 Setting coverage resolutions, 5-70 Setting default length/height/offset units, 3-6 Setting default radio units, 4-1 Setting geo data priority, 3-56 Setting GPRS/EDGE transmitters, 6-46

Sorting a folder, 2-42 Sorting and filtering in tables, 2-35 SPM General tab window, 5-39 SPM Parameters tab window, 5-40 Starting a new project, 1-11 Steps of the dimensioning process in GSM/GPRS/EDGE, 6-97 Storage of path loss matrices, 5-82 Studying interfered zone predictions, 6-158 Studying interferences with the point analysis, 6-162 Studying Interferences within a transmitter pair, 6-166 Studying the profile from a transmitter, 5-95 Subcell property details, 6-27 Subscriber clutter weighting in GSM/GPRS/EDGE environments, 6-64 Supported geo data formats Overview, 3-13 Supported geo data formats Overview, 3-13 Synchronizing vector selection and data table, 2-62 System requirements, 1-3

Huawei Technologies Proprietary i-7

User Manual Volume I GENEX U-Net Wireless Network Planning Software

Index Using equipment to compute transmitter losses, 4-57 Using generic map data in prediction reports, 3-47 Using icons from the tool bar, 2-63 Using population data in prediction reports, 3-43 Using repeaters in calculations, 4-50 Using shortcuts in U-Net, 2-66 Using the channel search tool in GSM/GPRS/EDGE, 6-150 Using the generic AFP interface, 6-134 Using the panoramic window, 2-6 Using the receiver, 5-95 Using the status bar to get information, 2-62 Using the tips tool to get information, 2-55 Using the Undo/Redo command, 2-56

T
Taking into account shadowing in a point analysis, 5-100 TFW file, 3-2, 3-17, 3-69, 3-73, 3-74 Thresholds, colours and legends, 2-53 TIFF data format, 3-17 TIFF format, 3-17 Timeslot configurations Overview, 6-15 TMA, 4-57 Transmitters Overview, 4-24 Troubleshootings after installation, 1-8 TRX property details, 6-123 TRX types definition, 6-16 Tuning the gain due to low time slot use ratio in the AFP, 7-8

V
Vector data, 3-34, 3-40, 3-43, 3-62, 3-76

U
U-Net AFP Advanced tab, 7-23 U-Net AFP BSIC tab, 7-22 U-Net AFP Cost function Overview, 7-1 U-Net AFP Cost tab, 7-15 U-Net AFP HSN tab, 7-19 U-Net AFP MAIO tab, 7-21 U-Net AFP MAL tab, 7-20 U-Net AFP module Overview, 7-1 U-Net application, 1-4, 1-6 U-Net features for computing, 5-104 U-Net.ini, 2-62, 3-13, 3-17, 3-19 U-NetSvr, 1-6, 1-7 Updating repeater parameters, 4-50 USB port, 1-3 User interface basics Overview, 2-1 User interface basics Overview, 2-1 Using a group by/sort/filter configuration, 2-46 Using a GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic analysis, 6-89 Using a site as a target for point analysis, 5-102 Using cell edge coverage probability in predictions, 5-61

W
Ways to get assistance, 1-9 Weighting cost components in the AFP, 7-7 What's installed with U-Net, 1-4 Working with Cost-Hata model Overview, 5-27 Working with ITU 370-7 model (Vienna 93), 5-20 Working with ITU 526-5 model, 5-19 Working with ITU 529-3 model Overview, 5-31 Working with Longley-Rice model, 5-18 Working with Okumura-Hata model Overview, 5-23 Working with Standard Propagation model Overview, 5-35 Working with Standard Propagation model Recommendations, 5-38 Working with WLL (Wireless Local Loop) model, 5-21

Z
Zooming and panning, 2-4

i.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary i-8